Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 306

476399_Submittal 14C Comments

SUBMITTAL REVIEW COMMENTS








DATE:
9/18/14
PROJECT: Thomas E. Taylor HSPS and Stone
Hill PS Improvements Project
SUBMITTAL
NO.:
14C
PROJECT NUMBER: 476399
SPECIFICATION
SECTION:
44 42 56.03
PAGE: Page 1 of 1

SUBMITTAL TYPE: SHOP DRAWINGS SAMPLE

1. APPROVED

3. PARTIAL APPROVAL, RESUBMIT AS NOTED

2. APPROVED AS NOTED

4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT

5. INFORMATIONAL


Item: Taylor HSPS VTP Full Submittal

NO.

COMMENT
RELATED
SPEC PARA./
DRAWING

REVIEWERS
INITIALS
1. The supplemental attachment submitted (and attached to these comments)
addresses our comments. There are no further comments.
TN




SMITH
PUMP
COMPANY, INC.




301 M&B Industrial
(800) 299-8909 (254) 776-0377




Waco, Texas 76712
FAX (254) 776-0023


TORSIONAL FREQUENCY ANALYSIS

PROJECT 169737-01

For

Dake Construction

On the

Upper Trinity Regional Water District
RTWS Thomas E. Taylor
Service Pump Station


VERTICAL TURBINE
PUMP P-06-02-09


May 07, 2014

Revision A - June 18, 2014
Revision B Aug. 25, 2014
Revision C Sept. 5, 2014





Page | 1


TORSIONAL FREQUENCY ANALYSIS
METHOD OF CALCULATION
The torsional natural frequencies and the mode shapes of this rotating train were calculated
using a computer program based on the Holzer Tabulation method.
The system is modeled using mass moments of inertia for the impeller, the line shaft and
the motor. The motor is modeled with one mass moment of inertia.

INPUT DATA
The mass-elastic data in Figures 1 & Table 1 represents the rotor system arrangement
for the calculation. The polar mass moments of inertia (J-values) and the torsional spring
constant (K-values) are the used for the torsional natural frequency calculations.
The motor referenced in Table 1 is a 6 pole 1200 RPM motor operated at a variable
speed with rotor inertia of 705 lb-ft
2
.
The pump referenced in Table 1 is a FLOWSERVE FS-27ENM--2 STAGE. It has five vanes and
total pump inertia of 155.68 lb-ft
2
.
Table 1: Torsional Analysis Input Data
Span No. Polar Moment of
Inertia (lb-ft
2
)
Torsional Stiffness
(in-lb/rad)
Component
1 705 19090268 Motor/Motor Shaft
2 3.386117 539874 Motor Coupling/Top Shaft
3 1.061864 1051448 Top Shaft/Line Shaft
4 0.545222 1051448 Line Shaft/Line Shaft
5 0.545222 1051448 Line Shaft/Line Shaft
6 0.545222 1051448 Line Shaft/Line Shaft
7 0.545222 1051448 Line Shaft/Line Shaft
8 0.545222 2878340 Line Shaft/Pump Shaft
9 155.68

Pump


Page | 2


Figure 1: Campbell Diagram

J=705 lb-ft
2
k=19100000 in-lb/rad

k=1050000 in-lb/rad

k=540000 in-lb/rad

k=1050000 in-lb/rad

J= 3.39 lb-ft
2
J=1.06 lb-ft
2
J=156 lb-ft
2
J=0.545 lb-ft
2
k=1050000 in-lb/rad

J=0.545 lb-ft
2
J=0.545 lb-ft
2
J=0.545 lb-ft
2
J=0.545 lb-ft
2
k=1050000 in-lb/rad

k=1050000 in-lb/rad

k=2880000 in-lb/rad


Page | 3


TORSIONAL EXCITATION FREQUENCY
The first frequency can be approximated using the equation below. This equation
simplifies the entire system down to two masses at the ends of a shaft that is acting as
spring. This number should be similar to the first frequency found using the Holzer
Tabulation method and acts as a check for the system.
In the following equation G is the modulus of rigidity and R is radius of the shaft. The
modulus of rigidity used for the 416SS shafting is 11.2E+06 PSI.
=

=
=


= 8.6 or 516 CPM
TORSIONAL ANALYSIS RESULTS
Natural frequencies and mode shapes:
The calculated torsional natural frequencies (CPM) for this rotor train are listed below:
Table 2: Results
Mode No. Natural Frequency (CPM and Hz) Separation Margin
1 516/8.6 No Interference
2 8728/914 No Interference
3 16750/1754 No Interference
4 25898/2712 No Interference

The calculated separation margin was established by using the shaft excitation that has the
smallest separation margin with respect to a given natural frequency.
The interference diagram in Figure 2 shows the first three calculated natural frequencies and
potential excitation modes. The system is considered satisfactory if the torsional natural

Page | 4

frequencies are 20% away from potential excitation modes. There are no interference points
within the specified margin, but a fatigue analysis is still performed.
The expanded interference diagram on the next page shows all excitation modes interfere with
Mode 1 below minimum run speed. This is expected and occurs in almost every vertical turbine
pump. Pump operation in this range is transient as pump comes up to run speed or slows to a
stop. Minimum continuous stable flow (MCSF) based on pump curve EC-1698, combined with
system operating curve indicates operation below 880 rpm does not result in sufficient flow to
meet pump MCSF and should be avoided.




Page | 5

Figure 2: Torsional Resonance Interference Diagram


Page | 6



TORSIONAL ENDURANCE EQUATIONS LINESHAFTS & PUMP SHAFT
Shear Endurance Strength

= 10,800 =

= 0.797 =

= 0.779 =

= 0.577 =

= 1.00 =

= 0.67 =

= 0.75 = 99.9%

= 60,000 =

= 75,000 = 0.75

= 218 =

= 10,876 =
=


Lineshafts and pump shaft are both 416 stainless steel. Top of the pump shaft is reduced to
lineshaft diameter of 2.688, hence the same fatigue analysis applies to both.
Original Goodman fatigue calculations conservatively used 100% of the motors 900 hp.
However, at 100% rpm and design head the pump only consumes 780 hp. Examination of
Flowserves bowl power curve shows that design head and flow are identical to maximum
horsepower consumed by the pump. A small amount of additional power is consumed by shaft
friction losses. Adjusting the Goodman equations for 782 hp increases design factor.
Examination of the 27ENM two stage pump torque curve shows that maximum torque occurs
at full speed and that lower speeds result in greatly reduced torque loads. Operation at less
than full RPM results in lower torque and alternating stress on shafting which results in higher
Goodman design factors.


Page | 7

For a low speed example, at the first resonance mode of 516 rpm steady state torque is only
650 ft-lb or 19% of that at full speed. During startup torque is 50% greater than steady state
torque or 975 ft-lb. To obtain the same 218 psi alternating stress requires an amplitude ratio of
7% which exceeds typical amplitude ratios used at resonance. Even with the same alternating
stress the mean stress is reduced resulting in the higher Goodman design factor of 5.7 at 516
rpm, the first resonance mode.
Miscellaneous factor previously covered reliability and other factors. Reliability is now broken
out as its own factor. For 99.9% reliability the factor is 0.75. Because reliability is now broken
out as its own factor, the miscellaneous factor changes to 0.67.
Stress concentration factor as used in calculations is 3.0. This accounts for the stress increase
found at keyways cut into shafts. In this case however, lineshafts are threaded and do not have
keyways. Hence Goodman design factor for lineshafts is 4.0 using stress concentration factor of
1.5 for threads. The top shaft does have a keyway at the three piece motor coupling and
requires the 3.0 stress concentration factor.
The stress analysis and fatigue evaluations were performed using a modified Goodman
equation and Gerber equation. Shaft stress is 32630 psi with stress concentration; alternating
stress is 218 psi using an amplitude ratio of 2%. Goodman design factor is 2.02 after stress
concentration; Goodman design factor is 6.0 without stress concentration. These values are
acceptable. A chart of this data is shown in Figure 3A.
Figure 3A: Fatigue Life Chart Lineshafts & Pump Shaft


Page | 8


TORSIONAL ENDURANCE EQUATIONS MOTOR SHAFT
Shear Endurance Strength

= 6,426 =

= 0.886 =

= 0.736 =

= 0.577 =

= 1.00 =

= 0.67 =

= 0.75 = 99.9%

= 34,000 =

= 50,250 = 0.75

= 73 =

= 3,628 =
=


Minimum motor shaft diameter is 3.875 at the coupling, that diameter is used in fatigue
calculations.
Examination of Flowserves bowl power curve shows that design head and flow are identical to
maximum horsepower consumed by the pump. A small amount of additional power is
consumed by shaft friction losses. Goodman design factor is 4.0 at 782 hp.
Stress concentration factor as used in calculations is 3.0.
The stress analysis and fatigue evaluations were performed using a modified Goodman
equation and Gerber equation. Motor shaft stress is 10885 psi with stress concentration;
alternating stress is 218 psi using an amplitude ratio of 2%. Goodman design factor is 4.0 after
stress concentration. These values are acceptable. A chart of this data is shown in Figure 3B.


Page | 9

Figure 3B: Fatigue Life Chart Motor Shaft



Page | 10


ANGULAR VELOCITY vs. TORQUE
The Holzer method for finding the natural frequencies of a rotating assembly requires setting
up spring equations and making iterative changes to an assumed angular input velocity to find
values where residual motion at the other end of the assembly is zero. In other words, there is
no torque available to rotate anything that may be attached to the end of the last shaft. When
residual torque is zero the assembly is vibrating in resonance with the input frequency.
Figure 4 is a graph of these iterations. Each location where the plotted line crosses zero is a
natural frequency of the system.
Figure 4: Angular Velocity vs Torque

Figures 5 through 8 represent twisting of the shaft along its length at one natural frequency.
These plots show relative angular displacement, not lateral motion. The point where rotary
vibration is minimum is located where the angular displacement line crosses zero. Maximum
stress occurs where line slope is maximum.


-8E+11
-7E+11
-6E+11
-5E+11
-4E+11
-3E+11
-2E+11
-1E+11
0
1E+11
2E+11
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
R
e
s
i
d
u
a
l

T
o
r
q
u
e
,

U
n
i
t
l
e
s
s
Angular Velocity, Radians/Sec

Page | 11

Figure 5: 1
st
Mode Shape: 516 CPM (53.97 rad/sec)

Figure 6: 2
nd
Mode Shape: 8728 CPM (914.01 rad/sec)

-4
-3.5
-3
-2.5
-2
-1.5
-1
-0.5
0
0.5
1
1.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

A
n
g
u
l
a
r

D
i
s
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
Shaft Sections, Motor to Bowl
8.59 Hz
-500
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

A
n
g
u
l
a
r

D
i
s
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
Shaft Sections, Motor to Bowl
145.47 Hz

Page | 12

Figure 7: 3
rd
Mode Shape: 16750 CPM (1754.01 rad/sec)

Figure 8: 4
rd
Mode Shape: 25898 CPM (2712.01 rad/sec)

CONCULSION
There are no torsional excitation modes within 20% of this units run speed. Shafting was
subjected to fatigue analysis and passed.
-1500
-1000
-500
0
500
1000
1500
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

A
n
g
u
l
a
r

D
i
s
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
Shaft Sections, Motor to Bowl
279.16 Hz
-4000
-3000
-2000
-1000
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

A
n
g
u
l
a
r

D
i
s
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
Shaft Sections, Motor to Bowl
431.63 Hz

Page | 13

References
(1) Nestorides, E.J., A Handbook on Torsional Vibration,Cambridge Press (1958).
(2) Shigley, J.E., Mischke, C.R., Budynas, R.G., Mechanical Engineering Design, McGraw-Hill,
Seventh Edition (2004).
1
Jason Popko

From: Granger Smith


Sent: Thursday, September 18, 2014 5:38 PM
To: J ason Popko; Larry Wingo
Cc: Neal McCaig
Subject: FW: Smith Pump responses to engineer's comments for Thomas Taylor UTRWD Vertical Pump Submittal Rev. 2

Jason,Larry,
IspokewithTonyNaimeytoday,andreviewedLarrysrevisedtorsionalanalysis.

HewassatisfiedwiththechangestoFigure2(i.e.extendinterferencelinesto0).

OnceheunderstoodthatthetorsionalanalysisincludedthemotorintheCampbelldiagrammodel,hedroppedthe
requirementforperformingthetorsionalanalysisonthemotorshaft.

Bottomlineiswehavelittleriskifwereleasethefabricationstotheshopnow.

ThingsToDo
Sendaformalsubmittalforapprovalrespondingtotheengineerrequests,andincludingtherevisedanalysis.

Releasethefabricationstotheshop.

Regards,

Granger

L.GrangerSmith,P.E.
SMITH PUMP COMPANY, INC.
301M&BIndustrial|Woodway,TX76712
o254.776.0377|c254.744.3143|f254.776.0023
www.smithpump.com

From: Granger Smith


Sent: Thursday, September 18, 2014 12:15 PM
To: Tony Naimey (anaimey@ch2m.com)
Cc: Larry Wingo; Beatriz Dongell (Beatriz.Dongell@ch2m.com)
Subject: FW: Smith Pump responses to engineer's comments for Thomas Taylor UTRWD Vertical Pump
Submittal Rev. 2

Tony,
WearerunningoutofprojecttimeonthisprojectbecauseIhaventstartedmakingthecolumnandhead
fabrications.So,toexpediteresolvingandsatisfyingyourequestsIamreachingouttoyou.Iamaskingforan
informalforumwherebySmithPumpcanfinishrespondingtheCH2MHillcomments.

Assuch,pleaseseetheentireemailthreadbelow.Ourmodeler,LarryWingohascompliedwithyourrequireto
extendtheinterferencelinesintheFigure2diagram(seeattachedrevisedtorsionalanalysis).Tobeclear,I
havealsoincludedthatreviseddiagrambelow.

Wethinktheabovefigurealongwiththeaddeddialogueintherevisedreportsatisfiesyourfirstneed(restated
belowfromBrigit).

Weareworkingonissuingaresponsetoyoursubmittalrevision.Upondiscussingthesubmittal
commentswithourVTPtechnologist,wewouldliketoseeasupplementalFigure2Aasanadditional
drawingthatexpandstheFigure2TorsionalResonanceInterferenceDiagramforanexpanded
interferencediagramofanoperationalspeedrangeof01600rpm.Thefigurecurrentlyshowsonly800
1600rpm.Pleaseletmeknowifyouhaveanyquestionsaboutthisrequest.

OurquestionscomefromthesecondrequestwhichcamefromBrigitorBeatriz(Imnotsure)byphonetoour
Jason(restated2
nd
handbelow)

Larry,theengineerjustcalledmeandsaidhewantsyoutoalsodothesamethingforthemotor
shaft.Hesaidwecansubmitthisassupplementaldatatothelastresubmittal.

Thefigurethatwethinkappliestothisrequestisincludedintheattachedrevisedtorsionalanalysis,andalso
below

Canyoudescribeexactlywhatyouneedforthemotorshaftreview?

Regards,

Granger

L.GrangerSmith,P.E.
SMITH PUMP COMPANY, INC.
301M&BIndustrial|Woodway,TX76712
o254.776.0377|c254.744.3143|f254.776.0023
www.smithpump.com



SMITH
PUMP
COMPANY, INC.




301 M&B Industrial
(800) 299-8909 (254) 776-0377




Waco, Texas 76712
FAX (254) 776-0023

SPCO responses to submittal review comments
Submittal No. 14B
Project Number: 476399
Specification: 44 42 56.03

1. Comment Response #10 (Flowserve will not have a vortex suppressor attached
during any of the testing): Noted, since the suction vortex suppressor may not be
compatible with the test tank. However, ensure pump suction hydraulics in the pump
manufacturer's test bay meets the HIS requirements relative to suction hydraulics. No
resubmission required.

Comment confirmed. No action required.

2. Page 97: Reed Frequency Results: Pump Manufacturer shall perform an impact test
to verify modal frequency locations upon installation of pump and motor at the project
site. Pump manufacturer shall operate pump at steady state conditions at modal 5/6
frequencies. The pump manufacturer shall measure and record vibration levels at the
discharge head. Once peak amplitudes have been established, the pump manufacturer
shall maintain steady state conditions for a period of not less than five minutes.
Measured vibration limits shall validate that reed frequencies of the pump/motor
structure do not exceed the maximum specified values. If it is determined during field
measurements that the pump/motor exceeds the maximum permissible vibration limits,
the pump manufacturer shall be responsible for modifying the pumping unit structure as
necessary for compliance with the project specification requirements.

Smith Pump will do field testing at modes 5 and 6 and make any required modifications.

3. Page 102: The lateral critical speed calculation report is not legible. Please revise
and resubmit.

This might have been caused by something in the Adobe program. I have removed the
original and replaced it with a new file and I have also attached a separate copy of the
file for your review. Please contact me via e-mail at jasonp@smithpump.com if this file
is not coming through and we will make other arrangements to get a legible document.







4. Page 108 (Response Comment #16): Torsional Endurance: Analysis shall be
conducted for both the pump and motor shaft, respectively. Modified Goodman analysis
shall include the Goodman line, Factor of Safety =2 (UTS/2 on the x-axis and
Endurance limit/2 on the y-axis.

Pump shaft critical cross section and material match the line shaft. Goodman analysis
for pump shaft is included in line shaft analysis. Goodman line Factor of Safety =2 is
added to the chart.

Separate fatigue analysis for motor shaft has been conducted and added after line shaft
fatigue analysis.

5. Page 108 (Response Comment #17): Indicate pump performance conditions
associated with the calculated value for the mean stress and calculated value for the
alternating stress. The modified Goodman diagram shall then demonstrate that
alternating stress combined to mean stress is below the Modified Goodman Line, Factor
of Safety =2 for both the pump and motor shafts, respectively.

Fatigue analysis is conducted at maximum pump horsepower which occurs at full
speed. This information is added to the report.

Goodman design factor is 2.02 with stress concentration; Goodman design factor is 6.0
without stress concentration.

6. Vibration Switch: The submitted part number 376A-A3-C4-E does not meet the
specification in regards to the alarm contact. The contact shall be 10A SPDT
Mechanical Relay Contacts which is met on the start delay only model but not on the
monitor and start model which is required for this project. Revise and resubmit.

We will drop the Robert Shaw vibration switch in favor of the Metrix 440DR. See
attached document for your review.
476399_Submittal 14B Comments_final

SUBMITTAL REVIEW COMMENTS






DATE:
8/20/14
PROJECT: Thomas E. Taylor HSPS and Stone
Hill PS Improvements Project
SUBMITTAL
NO.:
14B
PROJECT NUMBER: 476399
SPECIFICATION
SECTION:
4 42 56.03
PAGE: Page 1 of 1

SUBMITTAL TYPE: SHOP DRAWINGS SAMPLE

1. APPROVED

3. PARTIAL APPROVAL, RESUBMIT AS NOTED

2. APPROVED AS NOTED

4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT

5. INFORMATIONAL


Item: Taylor HSPS VTP Full Submittal

NO.

COMMENT
RELATED
SPEC PARA./
DRAWING

REVIEWERS
INITIALS
1. Comment Response #10 (Flowserve will not have a vortex suppressor
attached during any of the testing): Noted, since the suction vortex suppressor
may not be compatible with the test tank. However, ensure pump suction
hydraulics in the pump manufacturer's test bay meets the HIS requirements
relative to suction hydraulics. No resubmission required.
TN
2. Page 97: Reed Frequency Results: Pump Manufacturer shall perform an
impact test to verify modal frequency locations upon installation of pump and
motor at the project site. Pump manufacturer shall operate pump at steady-
state conditions at modal 5/6 frequencies. The pump manufacturer shall
measure and record vibration levels at the discharge head. Once peak
amplitudes have been established, the pump manufacturer shall maintain
steady state conditions for a period of not less than five minutes. Measured
vibration limitits shall validate that reed frequency of the pump/motor
structure do not exceed the maximum spedified values. If it is determined
during field measurements that the pump/motor exceed the maximum
permissible vibration limits, the pump manufacturer shall be responsible for
modifying the pumping unit structure as necessary for compliance with the
project specifiation requirements.
TN
3. Page 102: The lateral critical speed calculation report is not legible. Please
revise and resubmit.
TN
4. Page 108 (Response Comment #16): Torsional Endurance: Analysis shall be
conducted for both the pump and motor shaft, respectively. Modified
Goodman analysis shall include the Goodman line, Factor of Safety = 2
(UTS/2 on the x-axis and Endurance limit/2 on the y-axis.
TN
476399_Submittal 14B Comments_final
5.
Page 108 (Response Comment #17): Indicate pump performance conditions
associated with the calculated value for the mean stress and calculated value
for the alternating stress. The modified Goodman diagram shall then
demonstrate that alternating stress combined to mean stress is below the
Modified Goodman Line, Factor of Safety = 2 for both the pump and motor
shafts, respectively.
TN
6.
Vibration Switch: The submitted part number 376A-A3-C4-E does not meet
the specification in regards to the alarm contact. The contact shall be 10A
SPDT Mechanical Relay Contacts which is met on the start delay only model
but not on the monitor and start model which is required for this project.
Revise and resubmit.
2.04 TH
7.



\\FILESVR\Shares\Apps\2001PROJ ECTS\VERTICAL TURBINE\[FLSVTP-UTRWD Thomas Taylor - 27ENM#####
Shaft Critical Speed Calculations

The following is the equation used for calculating shaft critical speeds
( Fn above for Hinged/Hinged spans (H/H))
Fn =1.40 x (H/H) ( for Fixed/Hinged spans (F/H)) Fn =1.9 x (H/H) ( for Fixed/Fixed spans (F/F))
where:
I =moment of inertia of cross-section (0.05xD4) (in4)
E =modulus of Elasticity of material (lbs/in2) 25%This is the fire pump critical info. - do not change
g =acceleration due to gravity 386 inches/sec2 20%Input special specified % here
L =Length of shaft between two consecutive bearings (in) =column length +length to bearing 20%Input special specified % Under here
n =order of natural frequency or critical speed (1st or 2nd)
T =Axial thrust or force (lbs)
Fn =Natural frequency ( cycles/unit time ) also critical speed ( rev/unit time )
Fn
n
L
g
w
E I
n
L
T =



|
\

|
.
| +
|
\

|
.
|
30
2
t
Pump operating speed 1193
Modulus of Elasticity 29000000
Pump thrust 17038
Shaft Dia (D) 2 17/25
weight of shaft in lb/in 1.5795
Specified % OVER, from operating speed requirement 20% --use 20% if nothing is specified in specifications
Specified % UNDER, from operating speed requiremen 20% --use 20% if nothing is specified in specifications
Type Column Order of fn
20% over operating speed = 1432 rpm of Length Critical (RPM)
20% under operating speed = 954 rpm Span (in) Speed
Head flange to SB bearing F/H 34.25 1 15412
(hard bearing to rubber bearing) 2 61037
Max. Column Length (Input B64) H/H 54.75 1 4396
(rubber bearing to rubber bearing) 2 17150
Input 0 if Bearing Span type is not used.
N/A = bearing span type not used in this pumping unit
Lengths for above table are nominal column lengths as used on the installation plan for submittal
For Fire Pumps, the specified % from operating speed requirements must be 25% above or below operating
speed.
Potential critical speed problem - indicates that the critcal speed for the selected bearing span is
within specified critical speed range.

SMITH
PUMP
COMPANY, INC.

301M&BIndustrial
(800)2998909(254)7760377

Waco,Texas76712
FAX(254)7760023


TORSIONAL FREQUENCY ANALYSIS

PROJECT 169737-01

For

Dake Construction

On the

Upper Trinity Regional Water District
RTWS Thomas E. Taylor
Service Pump Station


VERTICAL TURBINE
PUMP P-06-02-09


May 07, 2014

Revision A - J une 18, 2014
Revision B Aug. 25, 2014

Page|1

TORSIONALFREQUENCYANALYSIS
METHODOFCALCULATION
Thetorsionalnaturalfrequenciesandthemodeshapesofthisrotatingtrainwerecalculated
usingacomputerprogrambasedontheHolzerTabulationmethod.
Thesystemismodeledusingmassmomentsofinertiafortheimpeller,thelineshaftand
themotor.Themotorismodeledwithonemassmomentofinertia.

INPUTDATA
ThemasselasticdatainFigures1&Table1representstherotorsystemarrangement
forthecalculation.Thepolarmassmomentsofinertia(Jvalues)andthetorsionalspring
constant(Kvalues)aretheusedforthetorsionalnaturalfrequencycalculations.
ThemotorreferencedinTable1isa6pole1200RPMmotoroperatedatavariable
speedwithrotorinertiaof705lbft
2
.
ThepumpreferencedinTable1isaFLOWSERVEFS36ENM2STAGE.Ithasfivevanesand
totalpumpinertiaof155.68lbft
2
.
Table1:TorsionalAnalysisInputData
SpanNo. PolarMomentof
Inertia(lbft
2
)
TorsionalStiffness
(inlb/rad)
Component
1 705 19090268 Motor/MotorShaft
2 3.386117 539874 MotorCoupling/TopShaft
3 1.061864 1051448 TopShaft/LineShaft
4 0.545222 1051448 LineShaft/LineShaft
5 0.545222 1051448 LineShaft/LineShaft
6 0.545222 1051448 LineShaft/LineShaft
7 0.545222 1051448 LineShaft/LineShaft
8 0.545222 2878340 LineShaft/PumpShaft
9 155.68 Pump

Page|2

Figure1:CampbellDiagram

J=705lbft
2
k=19100000 inlb/rad
k=1050000 inlb/rad
k=540000 inlb/rad
k=1050000 inlb/rad
J=3.39lbft
2
J=1.06 lbft
2
J=156lbft
2
J=0.545lbft
2
k=1050000 inlb/rad
J=0.545lbft
2
J=0.545lbft
2
J=0.545lbft
2
J=0.545lbft
2
k=1050000 inlb/rad
k=1050000 inlb/rad
k=2880000inlb/rad

Page|3


TORSIONALEXCITATIONFREQUENCY
Thefirstfrequencycanbeapproximatedusingtheequationbelow.Thisequation
simplifiestheentiresystemdowntotwomassesattheendsofashaftthatisactingas
spring.ThisnumbershouldbesimilartothefirstfrequencyfoundusingtheHolzer
Tabulationmethodandactsasacheckforthesystem.
InthefollowingequationGisthemodulusofrigidityandRisradiusoftheshaft.The
modulusofrigidityusedforthe416SSshaftingis11.2E+06PSI.
C =
nR
4
2
k =
uC
L
= Sbot Stincss
[
Moto
= Polor momcnt o incrtio o motor
[
Pump
= Polor momcnt o incrtio o pump impcllcrs
=
1
2n
_
k(]
Mctcr
+]
Pump
)
]
Mctcr
]
Pump

= 8.6 Ezor516CPM
TORSIONALANALYSISRESULTS
Naturalfrequenciesandmodeshapes:
Thecalculatedtorsionalnaturalfrequencies(CPM)forthisrotortrainarelistedbelow:
Table2:Results
ModeNo. NaturalFrequency(CPMandHz) SeparationMargin
1 516/8.6 NoInterference
2 8728/914 NoInterference
3 16750/1754 NoInterference
4 25898/2712 NoInterference

Thecalculatedseparationmarginwasestablishedbyusingtheshaftexcitationthathasthe
smallestseparationmarginwithrespecttoagivennaturalfrequency.
TheinterferencediagraminFigure2showsthefirstthreecalculatednaturalfrequenciesand
potentialexcitationmodes.Thesystemisconsideredsatisfactoryifthetorsionalnatural

Page|4

frequenciesare20%awayfrompotentialexcitationmodes.Therearenointerferencepoints
withinthespecifiedmargin,butafatigueanalysiswillstillbeperformed.

Figure2:TorsionalResonanceInterferenceDiagram

Page|5

TORSIONALENDURANCEEQUATIONSLINESHAFTS&PUMPSHAFT
ShearEnduranceStrength
S
c
= 1u,8uu psi = k
u
k
b
k
c
k
d
k
c
k
]
S
c

k
u
= u.797 = surocc conJition moJiicotion octor
k
b
= u.779 = sizc moJiicotion octor
k
c
= u.S77 = looJ moJiicotion octor
k
d
= 1.uu = tcmpcroturc moJiicotion octor
k
c
= u.67 = miscclloncous -cccts moJiicotion octor
k
]
= u.7S = rcliobility octor or 99.9% rcliobility
S
c
= 6u,uuu psi = rotory -bcom tcst spccimcn cnJuroncc limit
S
0t
= 7S,uuu psi = ultimotc Hotcriol Strcngtb u.7S
o
u
= 218 psi = Altcrnoting Strcss o
M
= 1u,876 psi = Hcon Strcss
=
Hosc Powc63000
RPM
o =
16:
n
4

moJ -0ooJmon = [
c
c
S
c
+
c
M
S
Ut

-1
0crbcr = S
c
[1 -
c
M
S
Ut
2

Lineshaftsandpumpshaftareboth416stainlesssteel.Topofthepumpshaftisreducedto
lineshaftdiameter,hencethesamefatigueanalysisappliestoboth.
OriginalGoodmanfatiguecalculationsconservativelyused100%ofthemotors900hp.
However,at100%rpmanddesignheadthepumponlyconsumes780hp.Examinationof
Flowservesbowlpowercurveshowsthatdesignheadandflowareidenticaltomaximum
horsepowerconsumedbythepump.Asmallamountofadditionalpowerisconsumedbyshaft
frictionlosses.AdjustingtheGoodmanequationsfor782hpincreasesdesignfactor.
Miscellaneousfactorpreviouslycoveredreliabilityandotherfactors.Reliabilityisnowbroken
outasitsownfactor.For99.9%reliabilitythefactoris0.75.Becausereliabilityisnowbroken
outasitsownfactor,themiscellaneousfactorchangesto0.67.
Stressconcentrationfactorasusedincalculationsis3.0.Thisaccountsforthestressincrease
foundatkeywayscutintoshafts.Inthiscasehowever,lineshaftsarethreadedanddonothave
keyways.HenceGoodmandesignfactorforlineshaftsis4.0usingstressconcentrationfactorof
1.5forthreads.Thetopshaftdoeshaveakeywayatthethreepiecemotorcouplingand
requiresthe3.0stressconcentrationfactor.

Page|6

ThestressanalysisandfatigueevaluationswereperformedusingamodifiedGoodman
equationandGerberequation.Shaftstressis32630psiwithstressconcentration;alternating
stressis218psiusinganamplituderatioof2%.Goodmandesignfactoris2.02afterstress
concentration;Goodmandesignfactoris6.0withoutstressconcentration.Thesevaluesare
acceptable.AchartofthisdataisshowninFigure3A.
Figure3A:FatigueLifeChartLineshafts&PumpShaft

TORSIONALENDURANCEEQUATIONSMOTORSHAFT
ShearEnduranceStrength
S
c
= 6,426 psi = k
u
k
b
k
c
k
d
k
c
k
]
S
c

k
u
= u.886 = surocc conJition moJiicotion octor
k
b
= u.7S6 = sizc moJiicotion octor
k
c
= u.S77 = looJ moJiicotion octor
k
d
= 1.uu = tcmpcroturc moJiicotion octor
k
c
= u.67 = miscclloncous - cccts moJiicotion octor
k
]
= u.7S = rcliobility octor or 99.9% rcliobility
S
c
= S4,uuu psi = rotory - bcom tcst spccimcn cnJuroncc limit
S
0t
= Su,2Su psi = ultimotc Hotcriol Strcngtb u.7S
o
u
= 7S psi = Altcrnoting Strcsso
M
= S,628 psi = Hcon Strcss

Page|7

=
Hosc Powc63000
RPM
o =
16:
n
4

moJ -0ooJmon = [
c
c
S
c
+
c
M
S
Ut

-1
0crbcr = S
c
[1 -
c
M
S
Ut
2

Minimummotorshaftdiameteris3.875atthecoupling,thatdiameterisusedinfatigue
calculations.
ExaminationofFlowservesbowlpowercurveshowsthatdesignheadandflowareidenticalto
maximumhorsepowerconsumedbythepump.Asmallamountofadditionalpoweris
consumedbyshaftfrictionlosses.Goodmandesignfactoris4.0at782hp.
Stressconcentrationfactorasusedincalculationsis3.0.
ThestressanalysisandfatigueevaluationswereperformedusingamodifiedGoodman
equationandGerberequation.Motorshaftstressis10885psiwithstressconcentration;
alternatingstressis218psiusinganamplituderatioof2%.Goodmandesignfactoris4.0after
stressconcentration.Thesevaluesareacceptable.AchartofthisdataisshowninFigure3B.
Figure3B:FatigueLifeChartMotorShaft

Page|8

ANGULARVELOCITYvs.TORQUE
TheHolzermethodforfindingthenaturalfrequenciesofarotatingassemblyrequiressetting
upspringequationsandmakingiterativechangestoanassumedangularinputvelocitytofind
valueswhereresidualmotionattheotherendoftheassemblyiszero.Inotherwords,thereis
notorqueavailabletorotateanythingthatmaybeattachedtotheendofthelastshaft.When
residualtorqueiszerotheassemblyisvibratinginresonancewiththeinputfrequency.
Figure4isagraphoftheseiterations.Eachlocationwheretheplottedlinecrosseszeroisa
naturalfrequencyofthesystem.

Page|9

Figure4:AngularVelocityvsTorque

Figures5through8representtwistingoftheshaftalongitslengthatonenaturalfrequency.
Theseplotsshowrelativeangulardisplacement,notlateralmotion.Thepointwhererotary
vibrationisminimumislocatedwheretheangulardisplacementlinecrosseszero.Maximum
stressoccurswherelineslopeismaximum.


8E+11
7E+11
6E+11
5E+11
4E+11
3E+11
2E+11
1E+11
0
1E+11
2E+11
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
R
e
s
i
d
u
a
l

T
o
r
q
u
e
,

U
n
i
t
l
e
s
s
AngularVelocity,Radians/Sec

Page|10

Figure5:1
st
ModeShape:516CPM(53.97rad/sec)

Figure6:2
nd
ModeShape:8728CPM(914.01rad/sec)

4
3.5
3
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
0.5
1
1.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

A
n
g
u
l
a
r

D
i
s
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
ShaftSections,MotortoBowl
8.59Hz
500
400
300
200
100
0
100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

A
n
g
u
l
a
r

D
i
s
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
ShaftSections,MotortoBowl
145.47Hz

Page|11

Figure7:3
rd
ModeShape:16750CPM(1754.01rad/sec)

Figure8:4
rd
ModeShape:25898CPM(2712.01rad/sec)

CONCULSION
Therearenotorsionalexcitationmodeswithin20%ofthisunitsrunspeed.Shaftingwas
subjectedtofatigueanalysisandpassed.
1500
1000
500
0
500
1000
1500
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

A
n
g
u
l
a
r

D
i
s
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
ShaftSections,MotortoBowl
279.16Hz
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

A
n
g
u
l
a
r

D
i
s
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
ShaftSections,MotortoBowl
431.63Hz

Page|12

References
(1) Nestorides,E.J.,AHandbookonTorsionalVibration,CambridgePress(1958).
(2) Shigley,J.E.,Mischke,C.R.,Budynas,R.G.,MechanicalEngineeringDesign,McGrawHill,
SeventhEdition(2004).
Da

440/4

Document10
Rev.E(Dec2
Overvi

Metrix440
provideec
vibrationp
useinnon
hazardous
internalele
explosion
Div1hazar
Optionsar
electromec
tobeused
machineu
provideas
discreteou
independe
discreteou
(preshutd
separate4
providedo
toPLCs,DC
controlsys
trended.
Vibrationo
velocityun
aninterna
housing,p
functionali
useanexte

*NOTE:Haza
externalsens
orSM6100in
withavariety
7295andexp

tashe
450Electr
004730
013)
iew
0and450elect
onomical,self
protection.The
hazardousas
areas.The45
ectronicsasth
proofenclosur
rdousareas.
reavailablefor
chanicalrelay
inanautoshu
nderhighvibra
singlealarmse
utput.DRvers
entalarmsetpo
utputs,allowin
own)andDAN
420mApropo
onallswitchm
CSs,stripchart
stemswherevi
onbothswitch
nits.Thestand
lacceleromete
rovidingcomp
ity.Theswitch
ernalaccelerom
ardousareaappro
sorisusedwiththe
nstead,whicharea
yofexternalsenso
plosionproofwirin
eet
ronicVib
tronicvibration
contained,sin
e440switchis
wellasClassI
50switchutilize
e440,butfeat
restylessuitab
relectronic(tri
outputs,allow
utdowncircuit
ationcondition
etpointandcor
sionsprovidetw
ointsandcorre
ngimplementat
NGER(shutdow
rtionaloutput
odels,allowing
trecorders,or
ibrationlevels
esismonitore
dardconfigurat
ermountedins
letelyselfcon
hmayalsobec
meterifdesire
ovalsarenotavaila
emodel440.Con
approvedforusei
ortypeswhenMet
ngpracticesareus
brationSw
nswitches
nglechannel
ssuitablefor
Div2
esthesame
tures
bleforClassI
acorFET)or
wingtheswitch
thattripsthe
ns.SRversions
rresponding
wo
esponding
tionofALERT
wn)levels.A
isalso
gconnection
otherprocess
canbe
edinRMS
tionconsistsof
sidetheswitch
tained
configuredto
ed.
*

ablewhenan
nsidermodels450
inhazardousareas
trixsensorhousin
sed.

witches
s
f
h
s
g

Ap
Vibr
ofth

440Switch
The440switc
approvedfor
Div2hazardo
enclosurecarr
ratinganduse
mountingpatt

450Switch
The450switc
internalelectr
butusesanex
enclosurethat
approveduse
areas.Thesta
(4holemount
onlyavailable
cover.Thealt
(2holemount
onlyavailable
cover.Bothen
carryNEMA4

pplication
ationswitches
hefollowingcr
Onlyoneortw
requiredona
Afullyselfcon
required(sens
alarming,and
Sufficientroom
switchonthe
andinthecor
vibrationleve
hisCSA
useinClassI
usareas.Its
riesaNEMA4X
esa3hole
tern.
hhasthesame
ronicsasthe44
xplosionproof
tpermitsCSA
inClassIDiv1
ndardenclosu
tingpattern)is
withasolid
ternateenclos
tingpattern)is
withawindow
nclosurestyles
Xratings.
ns
sareanattract
riteriaapply:
womeasureme
machine.
ntainedapproa
singelement,s
outputs).
mexiststomo
machineinth
rrectorientatio
lsindicativeof
X
e
40,
f

ure
s
ure
s
w
s
tivesolutionw
entpointsare
achisdesiredo
signalconditio
ountavibration
ecorrectlocat
onsuchthatth
fmachinery
450
EXPLO
ENCLOSUR
450(ALTERNA
PROOFEN
WINDOW
440(NEMA4X

whenall
or
ning,
n
tion
he
(STANDARD
OSIONPROOF
RE,SOLIDCOVE
ATEEXPLOSION
NCLOSURE,
WCOVER)
ENCLOSURE)
R)
81

Document10
Rev.E(Dec2
malfun
switch
Thefe
system
financ
A420
impra
oroth
monit
Insituation
cannotbe
maybemo
transmitte
externalse
monitoring
SeismicM
440/450e
forgenera
onawide
machinery
and6,000
particularly
rollingelem
suchmach
thebearing
substantia
transducer
doesnoto
relatedwe
problems,
machine,e
ofseismic
protecting
theshaftv
tothemea
giventoth
beforerely
measurem
WhyMeas
Whenade
vibrationo
velocityis
Acceleratio
influenced
004730
013)
nctionswillact
hmountingloc
eaturesofamu
marenotnece
ciallyjustified.
0mAvibrationt
cticalbecause
erinstrumenta
oringthetrans
nswhereoneo
met,Metrixof
oreappropriat
rs,singlechan
ensor,andmul
gsystems.
easurements
lectronicvibra
lpurposeseism
rangeofrotati
ywithrotative
rpm.Seismic
ywellsuitedfo
mentbearings
hinesisusually
gtothebearin
ldampingora
rsarealsoable
originateatthe
earanddefects
pipingresonan
etc.Metrixdoe
measurement
machinerywit
vibrationmany
asurementloca
heefficacyofsu
yingsubstantia
ments.
sureVelocity?
ecisionhasbee
onthemachine
oftenthebest
onanddisplace
bythefreque
Da
tuallybemeas
ation.
ultichannelmo
ssaryandcann

transmitteris
aPLC,DCS,SC
ationisnotava
smittersignal.
ormoreofthe
ffersothersolu
e,suchasvibr
nnelmonitorst
ltichannelAPI
tionswitchesa
micvibrationm
ingandrecipro
speedsbetwee
measurements
ormachinesth
becauseshaft
transmittedd
nghousing,wit
ttenuation.Se
etomeasurev
eshaft,suchas
s,footing/foun
ncesthatarec
esnotrecomm
sasthesolem
thfluidfilmbe
notbefaithfu
ation.Thought
uchamonitori
allyorsolelyup
enmadetomo
ecasingorsup
parameterto
ementlevelsa
ncy(ies)atwh
tasheet440&4
surableatthe
onitoring
notbe
undesirableor
CADAsystem,
ailablefor
secriteria
utionsthat
ation
thatacceptan
670compliant
areintended
measurements
ocating
en120rpm
sare
hatincorporate
tvibrationin
irectlythrough
thout
eismic
ibrationthat
sbearing
ndation
coupledtothe
mendtheuse
meansof
earingswhere
ullytransmitted
tshouldbe
ingstrategy
ponseismic
onitorseismic
pportstructure
use.
reheavily
ichthe
450ElectronicVibr
r
t
s
e
h
d
,
vibra
less
and
math
tobe
freq
Cons
ove
appr
relia
then
bear
shaf
Casi
tom
seism
deci
usua
casin
willo
amo
ener
med

trans
thea
boun
prox
mon
Form
spee
vibra
meas
recom
sales
assis
assoc

rationSwitches
ationisoccurri
influenced.Th
displacement
hematically,se
emoreconsist
uenciesthane
sequently,bro
erallorunfilt
ropriateformo
ableindicatoro
notableexcept
rings,whichar
ftobservingpr
ngdisplaceme
makedirectly,a
micvelocitym
sionwhensele
allybewhethe
ngacceleration
oftenbemore
orereliableind
rgyoverabroa
diumspeedma
NOTE:
Formachine
observingpr
effectivevib
sducersduetot
attenuationofvi
ndary.Accordin
imityprobesan
itoringsystems
machineswithro
edsabove6,000
ationoccurs,acc
surementthanv
mmendedthaty
sprofessionalwh
twithselection
ciatedtransmitt
ing,whilevelo
hus,althougha
measurement
eismicvelocity
tentoverawid
eitherdisplace
oadband(some
tered)velocity
onitoringmany
ofdamagingvi
tionofmachin
reusuallybette
roximityprobe
entisnotapra
andistypically
easurement.A
ectingaseismi
rtomeasurec
n.Asnotedab
eappropriateb
dicatorofdam
adfrequencys
achinery.
eswithfluidfilm
roximityprobes
brationmeasure
therotordynam
ibratoryenergy
gly,Metrixreco
dassociated42
forsuchapplica
ollingelementb
rpm,and/orwh
celerationmayb
velocity.Insuch
youconsultwith
hocanreviewyo
ofthepropertr
terormonitoring
Page
ocitylevelsare
acceleration,ve
tsareallinterr
ymeasurement
derangeof
mentoraccele
etimescalled
ymeasuremen
ymachinesas
bratoryenergy
nesthatuseflu
eraddressedb
s.
cticalmeasure
justanintegra
Assuch,thepr
cmeasuremen
casingvelocity
bove,casingve
becauseittend
agingvibratory
spectrumforlo
mbearings,shaft
willprovidemo
mentsthanseis
icsofthemachi
throughafluid
mmendsandpr
20mAtransmitt
ations.
bearingsandrun
hereimpulsiveca
beabetter
hsituations,itis
hyournearestM
ourapplication
ransducertypea
gsystem.
e2of16

much
elocity,
related
tstend
eration.
ntsare
a
y,with
uidfilm
by
ement
ated
rimary
ntwill
or
elocity
dstobe
y
owto

re
mic
neand
film
rovides
ersor
ning
asing
Metrix
and
and
82

Document10
Rev.E(Dec2
Featur
Oneo
Theus
onefo
applic
annun
and/o
appro
machi
witho
presh
outpu
device
limits

*The44
over/un

LOCKO
Anopt
suppre
startu
elevat
condit
specif
switch
allowi
rough
speed
ortrip
ordela
speed
affecte
allowi
andtr

*NOTE
cannot
availabl

Accep
When
thesw
rather
extern
applic
004730
013)
resandBe
ortwoindepen
seoftwosetpo
orSHUTDOWN
ationswherei
nciateanALERT
rmaintenance
priateinterven
nereachesSH
onlyasinglese
hutdownwarni
tisconnected
e,andappropr
areprogramm
40/450switchprov
nder)alarms.
OUT(PowerU
tionalLOCKOU
essingalarmac
pconditionsw
tedcomparedt
tions.Whenth
ied,applying(o
hsuppressesal
ngthemachin
runningzone
/loadwithout
ps,andwithout
aysthataresu
ofthemachin
edwhilethesw
ngactualvibra
endedatalltim
:Thisdelayisseta
beadjustedinthe
euponrequestas
ptsInternalor
orderedwith
witchacceptsa
rthanusingan
nalsensoroptio
ationsasitallo
Da
enefits
ndentlyadjusta
oints*(onefor
)isrecommen
tisdesirablet
Tconditionto
epersonnel.T
ntiontooccur
UTDOWNleve
tpointarenot
ingsunlessthe
toaPLCoroth
iatepreshutd
medinthePLC.
videsonlyoverty
pAlarmInhibi
UTcapabilityis
ctivationdurin
whenvibration
tonormalrunn
heLOCKOUTo
orcycling)pow
larmsfor20se
etoaccelerate
andreachope
generatingspu
ttheneedtoa
uitablefornorm
ne.The420mA
witchisinLOC
ationlevelsto
mes.
atthefactoryfor2
efield.Otherdela
sEngineeringSpec
ExternalSenso
theexternalse
nexternalacc
internalaccel
onisrecomme
owsthesensor
tasheet440&4
ablesetpoints
rALERTand
ndedfor
oremotely
operators
hisallows
beforethe
els.Switches
capableof
e420mA
hertrending
ownalarm
pe(not
it)capabilities
availablefor
ngmachine
levelsmaybe
ning
ptionis
wertothe
econds*,
ethroughits
erating
uriousalarms
altersetpoints
malrunning
Aoutputisnot
KOUTmode,
bedisplayed
20secondsand
ytimesmaybe
cials.
or
ensoroption,
elerometer
erometer.The
endedformost
rtobe
450ElectronicVibr

t
e
t

rationSwitches
mountedatth
orientationon
thelargermo
switchcompa
vibrationswit
convenientloc
Also,although
surviveharsh
andcorrosion
elevatedtemp
location.Use
temperatures
sensorlocatio
vibrationswit

Whenanexte
internalaccele
completelyse
theswitchto
measurement
integratedacc
configuration
roomatthem
switch,when
allowstheswi
servicedbypl
switchsinerti
qualityofthe

RMSamplitud
TrueRMSdete
amplitudeoft
choiceforma
overallvibrati
waveformwit
shortduration
thewaveform
tripsonsome

Easytowire
VDEapproved
accept#12AW
Terminalsuse
adjustablecla
providesecure
proofconnect
heidealmeasu
nthemachine,
untingfootprin
redtoasenso
chtobemoun
cationforview
hthe440/450
environments
,somemachin
peraturesatth
ofanexternal
ashighas121
onand88C(1
chlocation.
ernalsensoris
erometercanb
elfcontainedo
bemountedd
tlocationandm
celeration(velo
issuitablewhe
measurementlo
themeasurem
itchtobeconv
antpersonnel,
ialmasswillno
vibrationmea
dedetection
ectionisused
thevibrations
nymachinesa
onenergycon
thoutbeingove
nspikesthat
mandcanlead
machines.
dterminalstrip
WGwire.
escrew
mpingyoketo
e,vibration
tions.
Page
urementlocatio
,withoutconce
ntofthevibrat
or.Italsoallow
ntedinamore
wingandservic
ispackagedto
ofdust,moist
nesmayexhibi
hepreferredse
lsensorcanall
1C(250F)at
90F)atthe
notpractical,a
bespecifiedfo
peration.This
irectlyatthe
monitorvibrat
ocity)units.Th
enthereissuff
ocationtomou
mentlocations
venientlyviewe
,andwhenthe
otcompromise
surement.
tomeasureth
ignal.RMSisa
sitissensitive
ntainedinthe
erlysensitivet
tmaybeconta
tospuriousala
ps
o
e3of16

onand
ernfor
tion
wsthe
cing.
o
ture,
t
ensor
low
tthe
an
or
sallows
tionin
his
ficient
untthe
till
edand
e
ethe
e
agood
etothe
to
ainedin
armsor
83

Document10
Rev.E(Dec2

Simple
o
o
o

o
o
Flexib
Discre
annun
switch
004730
013)
e,intuitiveope
Setpointad
colorcoded
betweenSH
ALARM(yel
scaleisgrad
percent)to
scalerange

LEDsadjace
lightimmed
aboveitsse

Independen
screwsare
eachsetpoi
3seconds;
215second
spuriousvib
infalsealar
persistabov
timedelayt

TESTpositio
allowables
activateLED
persistlong
ALARMand
activateals
tobetested
leDiscreteOu
eteoutputsare
nciatealarmco
haspartofan
Da
eration
djustmentkno
dtoeasilydisti
HUTDOWN(red
llow)settings.
duatedinin/se
quicklyconvey
.
enttoeachadj
diatelywhena
etpoint
1
.
nttimedelaya
providedimme
intknob.Prese
adjustableint
ds.Timedelays
brationsignals
rmsmeasure
vesetpointfor
toactivateala
onforcesmini
etpoint;anyvi
Dimmediately
gerthantimed
dSHUTDOWNo
o,allowingdis
d.
utputTypes
eusedtoexter
onditionsandt
autoshutdow
tasheet440&4
bsare
inguish
d)and
Adjustment
ec(ratherthan
yswitchfull
ustmentknob
readingis
adjustment
ediatelybelow
etatfactoryto
hefieldfrom
sensurethat
donotresult
mentmust
rdurationof
rmcircuitry.
mum
ibrationwill
;ifallowedto
delay,the
outputswill
screteoutputs
nally
ousethe
n(i.e.,trip)
450ElectronicVibr
n

w
o

rationSwitches
circuit.Switch
discreteoutpu
providetwod
andoneforSH
individuallyfie
timedelaysan
alarmorclose
availablediscr
specifiedattim
o Mechanic
Mechanic
mostapp
holdingcu
state,hav
usedtosw
Relaysare
o Triacs
Triacsare
heavyAC
wheremo
veryhigh
recomme
andaresp
outputwi
PLCorDC
o SolidStat
Solidstat
applicatio
willbeco
PLCorDC
requireno
smallerle
offstate.
notused,
platedco
withmec
avoided.
Analog420m
Allswitchesco
proportionalt
4mA=0%offu
20mA=100%
easyconnectio
otherinstrum
displayofvibr
featureallows
heswithonese
ut.Switchesw
discreteoutput
HUTDOWN.Th
eldconfigured
ndseparatesh
eonalarm).An
reteoutputfor
meofordering
calRelays
calrelaysarea
plicationsasthe
urrenttorema
venoleakagec
witchalargev
eSPDTandrat
especificallyin
loadssuchas
omentaryinrus
duringstartup
endedformost
pecificallydisc
illconnecttol
CS.
te(FET)Relays
terelaysarede
onswherethe
onnectedtoali
CS.Unliketriac
oholdingcurre
eakagecurrent
Becausemech
arcing,oxidat
ntacts,andoth
hanicalrelays
mAoutputstan
omewithana
tovibrationve
ullscale(novib
offullscale.T
ontoPLCs,SCA
entationfortr
rationvalues.
suserstoeasil
Page
etpointprovid
withtwosetpoi
tsoneforALA
heoutputscan
tohavesepar
elfstates(ope
nyoneofthree
rmatscanbe
g:
agoodchoicef
eydonotrequ
aininaparticu
current,andca
varietyofloads
tedfor10A.
tendedforsw
electricmotor
shcurrentcan
p.Theyareno
totherapplica
couragedwhen
ightloadssuch
s
esignedprimar
discreteoutpu
ightload,such
cs,solidstater
entandhavem
ts(10A)when
hanicalcontact
tion,useofgol
herissuesasso
andlightloads
ndard
nalog420mA
locitywhere
bration)and
Thisoutputfac
ADAsystems,
rendingandre
Thelivezero
ydistinguish
e4of16

eone
ints
ARM
nbe
rate
enon
e
for
uireany
lar
anbe
s.

itching
rs
be
ot
tions,
nthe
hasa
rilyfor
ut(s)
hasa
relays
much
ninthe
tsare
d
ociated
sare
output
cilitates
and
mote

84

Document1004730 Datasheet440&450ElectronicVibrationSwitches Page5of16


Rev.E(Dec2013)
betweennovibration(4mA)andnopoweror
loopdiscontinuity(0mA).Theoutputalso
providesitsownpower,eliminatingtheneedfor
external24Vdcloopsuppliesandallowinguseof
sinkingtypeI/OmodulesatthePLC,DCS,strip
chartrecorder,orotherinstrumentation.

RemoteReset
Terminalsareprovidedforremotereset,
allowingoperatorstoresettheswitchand
acknowledgealarmswithoutleavingtheir
station.

Nomovingparts,highaccuracy/repeatability
Unlikemechanicalvibrationswitches,electronic
switcheshavenomovingpartsanddonotrely
oninternalmechanicaltolerancesfor
establishingsetpointsormeasuringvibration.
Setpointscanbeestablishedwithfarbetter
accuracyandrepeatability,andmuchsmaller
changesinvibrationcanbedetected.

VelocityMonitoring
Unlikemechanicalswitcheswhichareinherently
accelerationsensingdevicesandrequirelarge
changesingforcestotrip,Metrixelectronic
vibrationswitchessensevibrationvelocitya
moresuitablemeasurementformostmachines,
betterabletodetectbothgrossandsubtle
changesinmachinerycondition.Velocityis
monitoredoverawidefrequencybandfrom2Hz
to1000Hz.
Specifications
Allspecificationsareat+25C(+77F)unless
otherwisenoted.
Freq.Range 21000Hz(12060000rpm)
Amplitude
Range
SeeorderingoptionC(fullscale
range)
Amplitude
DetectorType
RMS
AlarmTime
Delay
Fieldadjustablefrom215seconds
(factorydefaultsetting=3sec)

AnalogOutput Type
420mA(4mA=0%fullscale,
20mA=100%fullscale)

Accuracy
10%

MaxAllowableLoadResistance
450ohms

Setpoints AdjustmentLocation
InternallyAccessible

Accuracy
10%ofsetting

Repeatability
2%ofsetting

Range/EngineeringUnits
1.5in/smodels:0.1to1.5in/s
3.0in/smodels:0.2to3.0in/s
40mm/smodels:3to40mm/s
80mm/smodels:6to80mm/s
Number
DRmodels:2(alarm&shutdown)
SRmodels:one(shutdownonly)
Powerup
TimedInhibit
(i.e.,Lockout)
Optional(seeorderingoptionH);
factorysetat20seconds(non
adjustable);invokedatinitial
poweruporbyinterruptingpower
totheswitch
AutoReset Configurable;switchcanbe
configuredwithlatchingalarms
requiringmanualresetornon
latchingalarmsthatautomatically
resetwhenvibrationfallsback
belowsetpoint(s)
RemoteReset Availableviawiringterminals;
shortterminalsto
reset/acknowledgealarms.

LocalReset Model440:Optionalvialocal
pushbuttononswitchhousing(see
orderingoptionF);remotereset
notavailablewhenlocalreset
specified.Localresetnot
compatiblewithhazardousarea
approvals.

Model450:Localresetpushbutton
notavailable.
85

Document1004730 Datasheet440&450ElectronicVibrationSwitches Page6of16


Rev.E(Dec2013)
Contact
Ratings
Triacs
Continuous
Current
5A
Surge&
Overload(Duty
cycle<1%)
25Afor1sec
50Afor16ms
100Afor10ms
125Afor1ms
Max.Voltage 140VAC(115V
model)
280VAC(230V
model)
Max.offstate
leakagecurrent
1mA
Isolation 2500VAC
Min.Required
holdingcurrent
50mA(typical)
SolidStateAnalogSwitches(FETs)
Continuous
Current
170mA
Max.Voltage 250V
Max.offstate
leakagecurrent
10A
Isolation 2500V
Required
holdingcurrent
None
ElectromechanicalRelays
Rating 10A@125VAC
6A@277VAC
5A@30VDC
1/8HP@125VAC
1/8HP@277VAC
Maximum
Switching
Current
10A(AC)
5A(DC)
Minimum
Switching
Capacity
100mA,5VDC
Type FormC(SPDT)
Contact
Material
Silver
(AgSnO
2
type)
InputPower Optionsfor:
100130VAC,50/60Hz
200260VAC,50/60Hz
24VDC10%
RefertoorderingoptionG

LightEmitting
Diodes(LEDs)
Oneforeachsetpoint,illuminates
immediatelyuponsetpoint
violation(i.e.,notaffectedby
alarmdelay)

Buffered
transducer
output
Model440:Standardoption for
BNCconnector(seeordering
optionF);externalBNCconnector
notcompatiblewithhazardous
areaapprovals;bufferedoutputis
unfiltered100mV/gacceleration
signal(notvelocitysignal).

Model450:Notavailableas
standard;aspecialmodificationis
availablethatprovidesaBNC
connectorinside*thehousing;
consultthefactory.

*NOTE:Requiresremovalofenclosurelid
foraccess.

Vibration
SensitiveAxis
Perpendiculartomountingbase;
unitcanbemountedinany
orientationwithoutchangein
sensitivityofthisaxis.
SelfTest Oneforeachsetpoint;allows
functionaltestingofsetpoint
circuitry,timedelay,anddiscrete
outputoperation;permitsonline
verification

WiringEntries Model440:One(3/4NPT)

Model450:Two(3/4NPT)
Wiring
Terminals
Acceptupto12AWGwire; use
yoketypeclamps;allwiring
terminalblocksarecaptive(non
removable)

Enclosure
Rating
NEMA4X
Enclosure
Material
Model440:Copperfreealuminum;
lightzincchromatecoatingfor
corrosionresistance;epoxypowder
finishinsideandout;
color:metallicgreen

Model450:Copperfreealuminum;
electrostaticallyappliedpowder
epoxy/polyesterfinish(exterior
only);color:gray
Humidity 1%to100%(noncondensing)
Temperature
Limits
Unitswithinternalaccelerometer
30 Cto+60C(20Fto+140 F)
Unitswithexternalsensor
55 Cto+88C(65Fto+190 F)

86

Document1004730 Datasheet440&450ElectronicVibrationSwitches Page7of16


Rev.E(Dec2013)
ElevationLimit 2,000m(6562ft)abovesealevel
Max.operatingtemperaturemust
bederated2%forevery305m
above2000m

NOTE:Atmosphericpressureatelevations
2000mreducesheatdissipationandmust
beaccountedforwhendeterminingmax.
operatingtemperature.
Mounting Model440:
3holetriangularpatternvia
mountingbosses;uses
hardware;seeFigure1

Model450w/solidcover(F9):
4holesquarepattern;uses
hardware;seeFigure2.

Model450w/lenscover(F=9):
4holesquarepattern;uses
hardware;seeFigure2.

Agency
Certifications
Model440:
CSA
ClIDiv2GrpsBD

Model450:
CSA
ClassIDiv1GrpsB,C,D
ClassIIDiv1GrpsE,F,G
ClassIII
Weight Model440:1.6kg(3.5lbs)
Model450:2.7kg(6.0lbs)


87

Document10
Rev.E(Dec2
Orderi

440ABCD
440Electro

A

SR
DR

B

2

C

0
1
2
3

D

0
2
4

E

0
1
2
4
004730
013)
ngInform
DEFGHI
1
onicVibrationS

Numberof

R Onealarm
R Twoalarm

AnalogPro

2 420mA(ab

ScaleRang

0 0.11.5in
1 0.23.0in
2 340mm/
3 680mm/

Shutdown

0 Triac(5A,S
2 Solidstate
4 Electromec

AlarmCirc

0 None
1 Triac(5A,S
2 Solidstate
4 Electromec
Da
mation
Switch
fAlarmSetpoint
setpoint

setpoints
oportionalOutp
bsolute)
4

ge
4
n/sec(RMS)
n/sec(RMS)
/sec(RMS)
/sec(RMS)

CircuitOutput
5
SPST)
6
switch(170mA
chanicalrelay(1
uitOutput
2,5
SPST)
6
switch(170mA
chanicalrelay(1
tasheet440&4
ts
2,3
ut

,6
A,250Vpk)
7
0A,SPDT)
A,250Vpk)
7
0A,SPDT)
450ElectronicVibr

SEEN

rationSwitches
NOTESONFOLLOW
Appro
0
CSAAp
Noexte
NoBNC
2
NoApp
Externa
NoBNC
7
NoApp
Noexte
Externa
8
NoApp
Externa
Externa
Input
0 115Va
1 230Va
2 24Vdc
Power
0 None
2 20sec
Transd
0 Interna
5 Externa
WINGPAGE
ovals/ExternalR
pprovals(ClassI,
ernalresetpush
Cconnector
provals
alresetpushbut
Cconnector

provals
ernalresetpush
alBNCwith100
provals
alresetpushbut
alBNCwith100
Power
ac,50/60Hz
ac,50/60Hz
c
upTimedInhib
delay
12
ducerOption

alAcceleromete
alAcceleromete
Page
Reset/BNCcon
,Div2,GpsBD)
hbutton
tton
9

hbutton
mV/gaccelsign
tton
9

mV/gaccelsign
bit(i.e.,LOCKOU
r
er
13
e8of16

nnector
8

nal
10
nal
10

UT)
11
88

Document1004730 Datasheet440&450ElectronicVibrationSwitches Page9of16


Rev.E(Dec2013)
MODEL440ORDERINGINFORMATIONNOTES:
1. Variousotherconfigurableoptionswereavailableon
olderMetrixorPMC/BETA440switchesandmayuse
otherdigitsand/orlongerpartnumbersthanthose
shownhere.Consultthefactorywhenorderingspares
for(orreplacing)suchswitches.
2. Whenasinglealarmsetpointisordered(A=SR),onlya
shutdowncircuitisprovidedandoptionEmustbe0.
3. SomeolderswitchesmaysimplybelabeledSinstead
ofSRandDinsteadofDR.
4. Theanalogproportionaloutput(optionB)isrelatedto
scalerange(optionC)andwillbe4mAwhenvibration
levelsareatorbelowthebottomscalerange.4mA=
bottomscalerangeand20mA=topscalerange.
5. Fordualsetpointswitches,thetypeofoutputfor
shutdownandalarmcircuitsmustbethesame.For
example,a440DRswitchwithaTriacshutdowncircuit
(D=0)mustalsouseaTriacalarmcircuit(E=1).
6. Triacoutputtypesarerecommendedwhenswitching
mediumpowerratedACdevicessuchasmotorstarters,
contactors,andrelays.However,triacsrequirea50mA
holdingcurrentandexhibitaleakagecurrentof1mA.
7. Solidstateswitchoutputtypesarerecommendedfor
connectiontolightloadssuchasdiscreteinputson
PLCsorDCSs.Thisoutputtypeiseasiertointerfaceas
ithasvirtuallynoleakagecurrent(10Aorless),and
doesnotrequireanyholdingcurrent.Italsoswitches
ACorDCsignalsequallywell.
8. Approvalsarenotavailablewhenanexternalreset
pushbuttonand/orBNCconnectorand/orexternal
accelerometerisspecified.
9. Whenanexternalresetpushbuttonissupplied,the
remoteresetterminalsarenotavailableforwiring.
10. AlthoughtheswitchmonitorsinRMSvelocityunits,the
signalattheoptionalBNCconnectorisunfiltered
100mV/gaccelerationdirectlyfromthesensing
element.
11. TheoptionalPowerupTimedInhibit(LOCKOUT)
featureisinvokedbyinitialapplicationof(orcycling)
primarypowertotheswitch.Thisfeatureinhibits
alarmsfromactivatingfor20seconds.Thisfeatureis
usedprimarilyasastartupdelaycapabilityfor
machinesthatexhibitelevatedvibrationlevelsduring
startuprelativetonormalrunninglevels.Toinvoke
thefeatureinthismanner,powertotheswitchshould
beapplied(orcycled)concurrentwithmachinestartup.
12. 20secdelayisfactorysetandnotadjustable.Power
upInhibitstateisnotannunciatedexternallyandthe
switchwillautomaticallyresumenormalalarming
functionsafter20secondshaveelapsed.
13. Theexternalsensoroptionisnotcompatiblewith
hazardousareaapprovals.Consideruseofmodel450
orSM6100insteadandmountexternalsensorinMetrix
explosionproofhousing7295002.


89

Document10
Rev.E(Dec2
Outline

004730
013)
eDiagram
Da
ms
Figure
(to
tasheet440&4
1Model44
opcoverrem
450ElectronicVibr

40ElectronicV
oveddepicts
rationSwitches
VibrationSw
sDRmodel).
witch
Page112of16

90

Document10
Rev.E(Dec2
Produc

Figure4
Figure6
p
004730
013)
ctPhotos
Model440D
Model440w
ushbutton(o
Da
s
DRwithcove
withoptional
optionF=2or
tasheet440&4
rremoved.
localreset
8)
450ElectronicVibr

F
rationSwitches
Figure5Mo
Figure7M
outputBN
odel450SRw
(F9)re
odel440wit
NCconnector
Page1
withstandard
emoved.
hoptionalbu
(optionF=7o
15of16

ddomecover
uffered
or8)
r
91

Document10
Rev.E(Dec2

MetrixIn
8824Fall
Houston,
(281)940
www.me
info@me

Trademarks
respectiveow
Dataandspe
notice.
2013Metr
004730
013)
nstrumentCo
brookDrive
TX77064US
01802
trixvibration.
etrixvibration.
usedhereinareth
wners.
ecificationssubjec
rixInstrumentCom
Da

mpany
SA
com
.com
hepropertyofthe
ttochangewitho
mpany,L.P.
tasheet440&4
ir
ut
450ElectronicVibr

rationSwitches Page116of16

92



SMITH
PUMP
COMPANY, INC.




301 M&B Industrial
(800) 299-8909 (254) 776-0377




Waco, Texas 76712
FAX (254) 776-0023

SPCO responses to submittal review comments
Submittal No. 14A
Project Number: 476399
Specification: 44 42 56.03

1 Vibration Switch: Indicate which options are to be furnished. Ordering information part
number on page 3 does not meet the Specification requirements. Revise and resubmit.
44 42 56.03 Paragraph 2.04. TH

The cut sheet provided in the submittal is a general catalog sheet and not specific to
this or any project. The part number to be used on this specific project is as follows:
376A-A3-C4-E. If there is another configuration that would be preferred please specify
exactly which options would be preferred on this project.

2 Footer correction: On pages 2 through 20 and any other page in the submittal that
includes this error, the project title should be Upper Trinity Regional Water District
Thomas E. Taylor High Service Pump Station.
BB

Noted: Correction has been made

3 Page 4 (Table of Contents): Please clarify may not be identical to the engineers
specifications Please disclose exactly what specification(s) will not match and why, at
the beginning of this submittal.
BB

This is a general note in our submittal and does not reference any specific item, but
should apply to the whole submittal in general. All specific instances are clarified on the
comments and clarifications page.

4 CLARIFICATION: Page 12: Revision 1 Submittal Comment #3. In section 2.01.F.6.b
says Hermetically sealed switch, if noted. Confirmation was requested that hermetically
sealed is not required for this application. Hermetically sealed switch is not required for
this application.
TH

Noted




5 Based on last submittal response, all pump speed references should be consistent
across all instances and be 1193 rpm. Pages 29 and 33 of the submittal say 1185 rpm.
BB

Noted, corrections have been made.

6 Test Procedure: Based on the flat pump curve between 8,000 and 11,000 rpm, during
pump testing, test at least at 1,000 gpm increments from 6,000 gpm to 16,000 gpm.
BB

Noted

7 On the pump curve, the minimum continuous stable flow is identified; the maximum
continuous stable flow should also be identified.
BB

The run out flow (~16,000 GPM) would qualify as the maximum continuous stable flow.

8 On pump curve, bowl power is presumed to apply to the 20.61 in. rated diameter
impeller. Please confirm.
BB

Confirmed

9 Confirm if FlowServe will be performing an NSPHr test.
BB

Flowserve will not be preforming NSPHr testing.

10 Confirm if FlowServe will be testing with their suction strainer/vortex device.
BB

The vortex suppressor will not be attached during any of the testing.

11 Testing Procedures: Procedure stated will be reading suction head with a ring on the
suction piping, which is not applicable for a VTP; should be measuring sump elevation.
BB

Noted

12 Test Lab Layout: Alternate/optional location for control valve shown just upstream of
the meter. This will not be allowed on test.
BB

Noted
13 Page 83: Correct contractor name spelling on Discharge Head Engineering Analysis
and Below Ground Dynamic Engineering Analysis; correct plant name spelling on
Torsional Frequency Analysis and Discharge Head Reaction Loads pages
BB

Noted. Corrections made.

14 Motor is approved as submitted
SH

Noted. Motor was released 6-19-14 for production.

15 Page 89 Reed Frequency Results: Pump manufacturer shall propose
manufacturing modifications to change Modes 5 and 6 to be safely above the maximum
1 X Mechanical running speed. VFD lockout of this frequency shall not be permitted.
Reed frequencies of Modes 5 and 6 are too close to the maximum running speed of
pumps.
BB

Noted. See attached revised analysis and additional information at end of analysis.

16 Page 97 Figure 2: Include 2 X Mechanical excitation frequency and verify no
intersection within the defined Low (-20%) and High (+20%) operating speed range.
Provide transient torsional stress calculation where 1 X Mechanical critical speed with
Mode 1 and demonstrate resultant alternating stress is within the Modified Goodman
Line with
2:1 FS.TN

Noted. See attached revised analysis.

17 Page 98 Figure 3: Indicate full calculation regarding the mean and alternating shaft
stresses. Also, include transient shaft stress for the 1 X Mechanical and first natural
frequency of the shaft demonstrating that shaft stress is below the Modified Goodman
Line with 2 SF. Further, provide UTS of shaft material used to determine the shaft
endurance (y-axis) and ultimate shear (x axis) for the Goodman Diagram. Lastly,
provide separate plot for the motor shaft.
TN

Noted. See attached revised analysis.






18 Page 104 Base Reactions: Confirm axial load calculation incorporates additional
thrust from discharge piping associated with pipe stiffness and changes in diameter
downstream of the pump nozzle. Also, based on the structural Reed Frequency
Analysis and operating vibration limits verify nozzle loadings are within the maximum
limits stipulated above.
TN

Confirmed. See attached revised analysis.

Submittal 14A - VTP Full Comments

SUBMITTAL REVIEW COMMENTS






DATE:
6/2/14
PROJECT: Thomas E. Taylor HSPS and Stone
Hill PS Improvements Project
SUBMITTAL
NO.:
14A
PROJECT NUMBER: 476399
SPECIFICATION
SECTION:
44 42 56.03
PAGE: Page 1 of 2

SUBMITTAL TYPE: SHOP DRAWINGS SAMPLE

1. REVIEWED

3. PARTIAL APPROVAL, RESUBMIT AS NOTED

2. REVIEWED AS NOTED

4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT

5. INFORMATIONAL


Item: Taylor HSPS VTP Full Submittal

NO.

COMMENT
RELATED
SPEC PARA./
DRAWING

REVIEWERS
INITIALS
1 Vibration Switch: Indicate which options are to be furnished.
Ordering information part number on page 3 does not meet the
Specification requirements. Revise and resubmit.
44 42 56.03
Paragraph
2.04.
TH
2
Footer correction: On pages 2 through 20 and any other page in the
submittal that includes this error, the project title should be Upper
Trinity Regional Water District Thomas E. Taylor High Service Pump
Station.
BB
3
Page 4 (Table of Contents): Please clarify may not be identical to the
engineers specifications Please disclose exactly what specification(s)
will not match and why, at the beginning of this submittal.
BB
4
CLARIFICATION: Page 12: Revision 1 Submittal Comment #3. In
section 2.01.F.6.b says Hermetically sealed switch, if noted.
Confirmation was requested that hermetically sealed is not required for
this application. Hermetically sealed switch is not required for this
application.
TH
5 Based on last submittal response, all pump speed references should be
consistent across all instances and be 1193 rpm. Pages 29 and 33 of the
submittal say 1185 rpm.
BB
6
Test Procedure: Based on the flat pump curve between 8,000 and
11,000 rpm, during pump testing, test at least at 1,000 gpm increments
from 6,000 gpm to 16,000 gpm.

BB
7
On the pump curve, the minimum continuous stable flow is identified;
the maximum continuous stable flow should also be identified.

BB
Submittal 14A - VTP Full Comments
8
On pump curve, bowl power is presumed to apply to the 20.61 in.
rated diameter impeller. Please confirm.

BB
9
Confirm if FlowServe will be performing an NSPHr test.

BB
10
Confirm if FlowServe will be testing with their suction strainer/vortex
device.

BB
11
Testing Procedures: Procedure stated will be reading suction head with
a ring on the suction piping, which is not applicable for a VTP; should
be measuring sump elevation.

BB
12
Test Lab Layout: Alternate/optional location for control valve shown
just upstream of the meter. This will not be allowed on test.

BB
13
Page 83: Correct contractor name spelling on Discharge Head
Engineering Analysis and Below Ground Dynamic Engineering
Analysis; correct plant name spelling on Torsional Frequency Analysis
and Discharge Head Reaction Loads pages

BB
14
Motor is approved as submitted

SH
15
Page 89 Reed Frequency Results: Pump manufacturer shall propose
manufacturing modifications to change Modes 5 and 6 to be safely
above the maximum 1 X Mechanical running speed. VFD lockout of
this frequency shall not be permitted. Reed frequencies of Modes 5
and 6 are too close to the maximum running speed of pumps.

BB
16
Page 97 Figure 2: Include 2 X Mechanical excitation frequency and
verify no intersection within the defined Low (-20%) and High (+20%)
operating speed range. Provide transient torsional stress calculation
where 1 X Mechanical critical speed with Mode 1 and demonstrate
resultant alternating stress is within the Modified Goodman Line with
2:1 FS.

TN
17
Page 98 Figure 3: Indicate full calculation regarding the mean and
alternating shaft stresses. Also, include transient shaft stress for the 1
X Mechanical and first natural frequency of the shaft demonstrating
that shaft stress is below the Modified Goodman Line with 2 SF.
Further, provide UTS of shaft material used to determine the shaft
endurance (y-axis) and ultimate shear (x axis) for the Goodman
Diagram. Lastly, provide separate plot for the motor shaft.

TN
18
Page 104 Base Reactions: Confirm axial load calculation
incorporates additional thrust from discharge piping associated with
pipe stiffness and changes in diameter downstream of the pump nozzle.
Also, based on the structural Reed Frequency Analysis and operating
vibration limits verify nozzle loadings are within the maximum limits
stipulated above.

TN

Date: 5/13/2014 201312
DESCRIPTION:
14.A
Date:
FAX (888) 250-8351
SUBMITTAL FOR:
Upper Trinity Regional Water District
Submittal No:
44 42 56.03
REVIEWED AND SUMMITTED BY
2200 SMITH BARRY ROAD, SUITE 207
PANTEGO, TX 76013
OFFICE (817) 303-7111
5/13/2014
Dake Construction Project No:
Thomas E. Taylor High & Stone Hill Pump Station
Engineers-Stamp and Comments
SECTION
THIS SHOP DRAWING HAS BEEN REVIEWED AND DETERMINED TO BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS INCLUDING
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AS MODIFIED BY ADDENDA, CHANGE ORDERS AND FIELD ORDERS. BY THIS SUBMITTAL, I HEREBY REPRESENT
THAT I HAVE DETERMINED AND VERIFIED ALL FIELD MEASUREMENTS, FIELD CONSTRUCTION CRITERIA, MATERIALS, DIMENSIONS, CATALOG
NUMBERS AND SIMILAR DATA AND I HAVE CHECKED AND COORDINATED EACH ITEM WITH OTHER APPLICABLE APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS
AND ALL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
By:
Verticle Turbine Pumps
SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS &
PRELIMINARY O&M MANUAL

For

Upper Tr i ni t y Regi onal Wat er Di st r i c t

On the

Regional Treated Water System
Thomas E. Taylor Service Pump Station


CONTRACTOR:
Dake Construction

ENGINEER:
CH2MHILL

SPECIFICATIONS:
Section 44 42 56.03 Vertical Turbine Pumps
Thomas E. Taylor RWTP HSPS Pump # 9
P-06-02-09

Smith Pump Company
Project Number: 169737

For questions, please contact

SMITH PUMP COMPANY, INC.
301 M&B Industrial
Waco, Texas 76712

Attention: J ason Popko

Phone: 254.776.0377
Facsimile: 254.399.8274
E-mail: jasonp@smithpump.com
This project is on "Hold" and will not be
released until this document is approved.
At this time the castings for the pump and
the motor have been released for
manufacturing.
All other items requiring manufacturing are
on "hold".
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal
WHATS NEW AND CHANGED IN THIS SUBMITTAL

Upper Trinity Regional Water District
Contractor: Dake Construction
Project: RTWS Thomas E. Taylor Service Pump Station
SPCO Project Number: 169737

Section 44 42 56.03 Vertical Turbine Pumps
Thomas E. Taylor RWTP HSPS Pump # 9

NEW -

Engineer's comments from complete pump submittal (Revision 1 complete
submittal) have been added along with Smith Pump Company's responses

Revised documents as required by engineer's comments

Revision 1 complete submittal changes -

Engineer's comments from partial pump submittal have been added along with
Smith Pump Company's responses

Calculations by Smith Pump Company using data from pump submittal and
motor submittal:
Wire to Water Efficiency Calculation

Vendor Submittals:
Motor submittal added
Pressure switch submittal added
Pressure gauge submittal added
Mechanical seal submittal added
Vibration switch submittal added

Smith Pump Company Analysis:
Finite Element Analysis Head / Motor (Lateral Analysis)
Finite Element Analysis Column Pipe / Bowl Assembly (Lateral Analysis)
Critical Speed Analysis
Torsional Analysis
Forces and Moments Analysis

Vendor O&M:
Flowserve Pump O&M
WEG Motor O&M
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal
Table of Contents

Upper Trinity Regional Water District
Contractor: Dake Construction
Project: RTWS Thomas E. Taylor Service Pump Station
SPCO Project Number: 169737

Section 44 42 56.03 Vertical Turbine Pumps
Thomas E. Taylor RWTP HSPS Pump # 9

ITEM ----------------- DESCRIPTION --------------------
1 Cover Page

2 Table of Contents

3 TAB: General Information
Scope of Supply, General
Warranty Statement
Submittal Data Sheet
Comments and Clarifications

4 TAB: Pump, Motor, VFD, and Controls P-06-02-09
Scope of Supply Specific
Wire to Water Calculations
Pump Submittal 27 ENM 2 Stage Flowserve
Flowserve Submittal
Bowl assembly test report (when available)
Hydrostatic test report (when available)
Motor Submittal
VFD Submittal (Submitted as separate submittal)
Prime Controls Submittal (Submitted as separate submittal)
Pressure Switch
Pressure Gauge
Mechanical Seal
Vibration Switch

6 TAB: Other items
Finite Element Analysis Head / Motor (Lateral Analysis)
Finite Element Analysis Column Pipe / Bowl Assembly
(Lateral Analysis)
Critical Speed Analysis
Torsional Analysis
Forces and Moments Analysis
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal


7 TAB: Tnemec Paint
Tnemec paint data Sheet Series N140

8 TAB: Drawings
Soleplate Drawing
Soleplate Level Drawing
Bleed Off Piping Drawing
Discharge Head Drawing
General Arrangement Drawing for Pump
Vortex Suppressor Drawing for Pump

9 TAB: Start-up Reports
Thomas E. Taylor RWTP HSPS Pump #9
P-06-02-09 (Later)


10 TAB: Manufacturers O&M Manuals
Flowserve VTP O, I &M Manual
Motor O&M Manual
VFD O&M Manual (Later)
Controls O&M Manual (Later)



Note to Contractor:
The proposed equipment will not be available or purchased from our vendors until written approval
of the Submittal is provided. Smith Pump Company will provide the equipment, as approved, and
may not be identical to the Engineers specifications. Please review carefully. It is the Contractors
responsibility to verify field conditions including voltage, elevations, etc. Changes after approval
may result in additional charges for modifications, field service, restocking, or other services.











SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal











General Information



















SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal
General Scope of Supply
Non-material requirements:
Submittals:
General Submittal Data
Finite Element Analysis (Lateral Analysis) (enclosed)
Critical Speed Analysis (enclosed)
Torsional Analysis (enclosed)
Forces and Moments Analysis (enclosed)
Certifications of Compliance (enclosed)
Test Procedures
Hydrostatic
Performance
IEEE motor efficiency test (enclosed)
Shop Test Reports & Inspections
Hydrostatic test, bowl (later)
Pump performance test w/ factory motor (later)
Motor inspections and general tests (later)
Motor efficiency test (later)
Manufacturers I, O, & M Manual (preliminary enclosed)(final later)

Equipment Delivery and Storage
Ship equipment to jobsite.
Installing contractor to unload.
Storage will be by Contractor
Store motors inside with space heaters energized
Store pumps with discharge flange and basket covered
Installation
Installation will be by Installing Contractor.
Smith Pump must be present during entire installation.
Smith Pump must be present during start-up

Item of field service as further described below:
Millwright to check soleplate level or barrel top flange level
Supervision of installation.
Startup supervision after installation by contractor
Field data collection after power and water are available
o Voltage (check prior to start and during operation)
via Owner's meter or by Smith Pump
o Current (via Smith Pumps meter)
o Flow (via Smith Pumps meter)
o Pressure (via Smith Pump's gauge)
o Vibration (via Smith Pumps gauge) at discharge elbow.
Field startup report (Later)
Owner training in I, O, & M.(later)

SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal
WARRANTY

Upper Trinity Regional Water District
Contractor: Dake Construction
Project: RTWS Thomas E. Taylor Service Pump Station
SPCO Project Number: 169737

The Smith Pump Company warrants that the equipment will be free of defects in
material and workmanship for a period of twenty four (24) months from start-up, thirty
(30) months from shipment, whichever occurs first. The Contractor or Owner shall
promptly report any failure to conform to this warranty, in writing to Smith Pump
Company within said period, whereupon Smith Pump Company shall, at its option,
repair the equipment or furnish a replacement part F.O.B. plant, provided the Contractor
and/or Owner has stored, installed, maintained, and operated the equipment in
accordance with good industry practices. Smith Pump Company shall not be liable for
any repairs, replacements, or adjustments to the equipment or any costs of labor
performed by the Contractor, Owner, or others.

The effects of corrosion, erosion, and normal wear and tear are specifically excluded.

Smith Pump Company makes no other warranty or representation whatsoever,
expressed or implied, except that of title, and all implied warranties or merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose, are hereby disclaimed.

To maintain this warranty, the Owner and Smith Pump Company shall together conduct
an equipment evaluation once per year beginning at the end of the first year from the
warranty start date. Perform a complete electrical, mechanical, and hydraulic
evaluation of each pump.

FOR ASSISTANCE ON WARRANTY ISSUES OR OTHER CONTACT:

SMITH PUMP COMPANY, INC.
301 M&B INDUSTRIAL
WACO, TEXAS 76712
Phone: 800.299.8909
Fax: 254.399.8274
Website: www.smithpump.com

Pump Tag Pump S/N Motor S/N

P-06-02-09



SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal
CONTRACTORS CHECK LIST TO OBTAIN A WARRANTY

Upper Trinity Regional Water District
Contractor: Dake Construction
Project: RTWS Thomas E. Taylor Service Pump Station
SPCO Project Number: 169737

Section 44 42 56.03 Vertical Turbine Pumps
Thomas E. Taylor RWTP HSPS Pump # 9
There are numerous inspection points once equipment begins to arrive at the jobsite.
This document provides documentation that each point of inspection has occurred, and
was acceptable.

At the end of the project, the Contractor will need Smith Pump signatures at each
inspection point for all pumping units.

Pump Inspection Points
1. Delivery inspection.
2. Preparation for storage.
3. Pre-grout soleplate level.
4. Post grout soleplate level.
5. Pre-pipe discharge head level.
6. Pre-start megger check through leads from panel.
7. Pre-start PLC settings are complete and correct.
8. Impeller setting
9. Successful start-up.
10. Field test completion.
11. Post start-up alignment check.

Inspection Pump P-06-02-09
Point Date Signature
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal
Submittal Datasheet
Upper Trinity Regional Water District
Contractor: Dake Construction
Project: RTWS Thomas E. Taylor Service Pump Station
SPCO Project Number: 169737

Section 44 42 56.03 Vertical Turbine Pumps
Thomas E. Taylor RWTP HSPS Pump # 9
ITEM DESCRIPTION DATA
UNIT TAG NUMBERS P-06-02-09
1 Make And Type Design Flowserve 27 ENM
2 Rated Speed 1193 rpm
3 Casing Material ASTM A48 CL30 Cast Iron
4 Impeller Material 316 SS CF3M
5 Maximum Impeller Diameter For Casing
21.36 inch
6 Diameter Of Suction Bell
32 inch
7 Diameter Of Discharge
24 inch
8 Shutoff Head 360 feet H
2
O
9 Diameter Of Pump Shaft
2.94 inch
10 Maximum Brake Horsepower 770 bhp
11 NPSH
R
At Rated Head 26 feet
12 NPSH
R
At Minimum Head 36 feet @ 15,900 gpm
13 Suction Specific Speed (Nss) @ full dia 11407
14 Specific Speed (Ns) @ trim dia 3790

UNIT TAG NUMBERS P-06-02-09
1 Make And Type Design WEG HGF
2 Rated Brake Horsepower 900 hp
3 Rated Full Load Speed 1193 rpm
4 Nominal Efficiency 95.45%
5 Load Efficiency 95.4%
6 Full Load Power Factor 84%
7 Load Power Factor 80%
8 Maximum Momentary Down Thrust Rating 26,500 lbs.
9 Locked Rotor KVA (lockcJ rotor omps :oltogc S) 5700 kVA @ 100% Voltage
10 Frame Size 6809
11 Enclosure Type TEFC
12 Locked Rotor Amperes (LRA) @ Rated V 823 amps
13 NEMA Starting Code Letter H
14 Full Load Current 121 Amps
15 Service Factor 1.0
16 Ambient Temp/Temp Rise @ 1.00sf 40C / 80 C
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal
Comments and Clarifications

Upper Trinity Regional Water District
Contractor: Dake Construction
Project: RTWS Thomas E. Taylor Service Pump Station
SPCO Project Number: 169737

Revision 1 Submittal Comments
(Revision 1 complete submittal)

1. This motor requires "MOBIL SHC629 VG150", this is a synthetic oil and is
required by WEG for this motor. Do not use standard turbine VG150 oil.

2. I have included a motor reference sheet based on CH2M Hill's 26 19 00
specification that responds to all the requirements of 1.04 Submittals.

3. Please carefully review submittal for pressure switch. Some of the requirements
in the specification are not available in conjunction with other requirements of the
specifications. 44 42 56.03 / 2.01 / F / 6 / b hermitically sealed switch: If noted. I
could not find anywhere that this was noted, but would like confirmation that it is
not required for this application.

4. Please carefully review submittal for pressure gauge. Pressure gauge scale
range is 0-160. A scale range of 0-150 is not available.


Submittal Review Comments from CH2MHILL

1. NOTE: Partial approval to release bowl and impeller casting ONLY in order to
maintain schedule. Partial comments that should be addressed on subsequent
submittal are listed. All items other than castings are subject to further review before
acceptance. B. Buff
Acknowledged, castings have been release as of 4-29-14. J MP 4-29-14

2. Contractor to verify/accept comments 1, 2, and 12 of Comments and Clarifications
page. Contractor to verify drawing dimensions match field measurements. B. Buff
Acknowledged, see new note 12 in original submittal comments J MP 4-29-14

3. Data sheet states speed of 1193 rpm, but all other references state max speed of
1185 rpm. Confirm that speed provided will be 1185 rpm. B. Buff
Acknowledged, revised pump curves and data sheets have been included in this
submittal to reflect 1193 rpm. J MP 4-29-14

SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal

4. Confirm performance test duration is minimum 2 hours. 2.08.D.3 B. Buff
Confirmed see revised test procedure document. J MP 4-29-14

5. Several pump drawing sheets state the incorrect Contractor name. B. Buff
Acknowledged, drawings have been revised. J MP 4-29-14

6. Discharge head drawing states dimensions subject to change. Resubmit with
actual dimensions for next submittal. B. Buff
Acknowledged, drawing has been revised. J MP 4-29-14

7. Submit how castings are going to be inspected prior to coating. B. Buff
Per Flowserve, castings are visually inspected to MSS-SP-55. J MP 4-29-14

8. The coating information on Coating Info sheet and Paint Schedule sheet does not
appear to match and the information on the Paint Schedule page does not match in
thickness on individual items. Resubmit to be clear on the thickness that each coat is
going to be. B. Buff
I spoke to Briget Buff about this comment and she said we just needed to clarify our
intent. The top section on our "Paint Schedule" has a blast and coat section that
specifies the three coat system with the manufacturer recommendations of individual
coating thicknesses. The individual sections below that specify the total paint
thickness of the coats combined. In the event that we come with up less than the
total dry film thickness we specified after three coats we will apply an additional forth
top coat to achieve the desired total dry film thicknesses. J MP 4-29-14

9. Vortex suppressor drawing needs to address all materials of the suppressor
including buts, bolts, frame, clamp, etc. B. Buff
Acknowledged, drawing has been revised to include all material types to be used.
J MP 4-29-14

10. Submit required analysis (other items) done prior to fabrication. B. Buff
Acknowledged, analysis have been included in this spec. J MP 4-29-14

11. Confirm motor to be rated for inverter duty. S. Ho
Confirmed, motor is inverter duty, motor data has been included in this submittal.
J MP 4-29-14

12. Indicate Class B temperature Rise. S. Ho
Confirmed, motor is Class B temperature rise, motor data has been included in this
submittal. J MP 4-29-14



SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal
Original Submittal Comments
(Partial Pump Only Submittal)

1. We are not including check valves, airline, plumbing, gauges, valves, controls,
instrumentation, conduit, concrete, grout, PFCC, MCC, lifting slings or clevises,
special tools, or tool chest unless specifically identified in the specific scope of
supply. Unloading and installation is by others.

2. Contractor to verify the elevations shown on drawings

3. Surface preparation, coating system, number of coats, and dry mil thickness
information is included in this submittal.

4. Warranty: Warranty will be for 24 months after start up, but not to exceed 30
months after delivery.

5. Paint to be Tnemec N140 for materials in contact with potable water and Tnemec
N69 for exterior of discharge head.

6. The nearest stocking distributer for spare parts will be our Ft. Worth location.

SMITH PUMP COMPANY, INC.
4624 Martin Luther King Frwy
FT. WORTH, TEXAS 76119
Phone: 888.381.3873
Fax: 817.595.4900
Website: www.smithpump.com

7. Flowserve is supplying the bowl assemblies and a Non-Witnessed factory
performance test of each bowl assembly. The bowl shafts will be machined to
accept the Smith Pump Co line shaft connection. Submittals related to the bowl
assemblies only will be furnished.

8. Item 1.04.B.5 [Clarification]: Spare parts list can be supplied if required after bill of
material is complete. This will occur after Flowserve receives release to
manufacture. No special tools are required.

9. Item 1.04.B.6 [Clarification]: No special tools required.

10. Item 2.08.D.1 [Clarification]: Pump will be tested to Hydraulic Institute 2011
tolerance level 1U.

11. Page 2 - Bowl Wear Rings [Clarification]: Bowl wear ring material will be
upgraded to ASTM A743 Gr CA40 Stainless Steel with a Brinnell Hardness of
400-450 BHN.
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal

12. Field measurements have confirmed the following dimensions:
Wet well depth of 34' 11-3/4"
Wet well opening diameter of 52-1/2"
Existing soleplates are 58" square
Anchor bolt size of 1-1/2"
Length of exposed anchor bolt 6-1/2"
Anchor bolt locations of 53-3/4" C to C (soleplate anchor holes will be
oversized to accommodate some minor out of square issues with the
existing anchor bolts)
Slab to centerline of discharge of 49"
Housekeeping pad height 10-1/2"
Housekeeping pad 77" square




























End of Comments and Clarifications.
Submittal 14 - VTP Partial Comments

SUBMITTAL REVIEW COMMENTS






DATE:
4/24/14
PROJECT: Thomas E. Taylor HSPS and Stone
Hill PS Improvements Project
SUBMITTAL
NO.:
14
PROJECT NUMBER: 476399
SPECIFICATION
SECTION:
44 42 56.03 Vertical Turbine Pumps
PAGE: Page 1 of 1

SUBMITTAL TYPE: SHOP DRAWINGS SAMPLE

1. REVIEWED

3. PARTIAL APPROVAL, RESUBMIT AS NOTED

2. REVIEWED AS NOTED

4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT

5. INFORMATIONAL


Item: Taylor HSPS Vertical Turbine Pump - Partial

NO.

COMMENT
RELATED
SPEC PARA./
DRAWING

REVIEWERS
INITIALS
1. NOTE: Partial approval to release bowl and impeller casting ONLY in
order to maintain schedule. Partial comments that should be addressed
on subsequent submittal are listed. All items other than castings are
subject to further review before acceptance.
B. Buff
2. Contractor to verify/accept comments 1, 2, and 12 of Comments and
Clarifications page. Contractor to verify drawing dimensions match
field measurements.
B. Buff
3. Data sheet states speed of 1193 rpm, but all other references state max.
speed of 1185 rpm. Confirm that speed provided will be 1185 rpm.
B. Buff
4.
Confirm performance test duration is minimum 2 hours.
2.08.D.3 B. Buff
5.
Several pump drawing sheets state the incorrect Contractor name.
B. Buff
6. Discharge head drawing states dimensions subject to change.
Resubmit with actual dimensions for next submittal.

B. Buff
7. Submit how castings are going to be inspected prior to coating.
B. Buff
8. The coating information on Coating Info sheet and Paint Schedule
sheet does not appear to match and the information on the Paint
Schedule page does not match in thickness on individual items.
Resubmit to be clear on the thickness that each coat is going to be.

B. Buff
9. Vortex suppressor drawing needs to address all materials of the
B. Buff
Submittal 14 - VTP Partial Comments
suppressor including buts, bolts, frame, clamp, etc.
10. Submit required analysis (other items) done prior to fabrication.
B. Buff
11. Confirm motor to be rated for inverter duty
S. Ho
12. Indicate Class B temperature Rise
S. Ho

SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal













Pump & Motor
P-06-02-09























SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal
Scope of Supply Specific Pump and Motor
P-06-02-09

Upper Trinity Regional Water District
Contractor: Dake Construction
Project: RTWS Thomas E. Taylor Service Pump Station
SPCO Project Number: 169737

Section 44 42 56.03 Vertical Turbine Pumps
Thomas E. Taylor RWTP HSPS Pump # 9

Conditions of Service:
Q= 11,800 GPM S= 1193 RPM E= 3 ph / 4160 Volts
H= 220 Ft THD P= 900 HP Eff. = 84%

Base to bell dimension is 31'-11"

Material Requirements:

Flowserve 27ENM-2 stage bowl assembly with cast iron bowls, SS bowl shaft, dynamically
and statically balanced 316 SS impellers, ASTM A743 Gr CA40 Stainless Steel bowl wear
rings, non-witnessed pump performance test, non-witnessed hydrostatic test.

One Soleplate

One 900 HP, 1193 RPM, 4,160 Volts 60 Hz, TEFC, Vertical

Two vibration sensors per spec

One pressure switch per spec

One pressure gauge per spec

24" x 30.5" BD fabricated steel discharge head with bleed off stuffing box with Chesterton
442 mechanical seal, 24" flanged steel column pipe and 416SS threaded line shaft and
couplings with Bronze backed Viton line shaft bearings.

Stainless steel vortex suppressor

Item of touch up paint
Item of delivery to jobsite
Item of checking level of barrel / soleplate
Item of start-up and testing after installation by contractor


SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal

NOTES:

1) Items NOT Furnished: Installation, site preparation, all discharge valve, pipe and
fittings, any electrical controls not specifically mentioned, conduit and wiring, motor
control center, concrete, grout, anchor bolts, unloading at jobsite and installation.




H:\2001PROJ ECTS\VERTICAL TURBINE\[FLSVTP-UTRWD Thomas Taylor - 27ENM.xls]INPUT & CALC. 4/10/2014
CALCULATION OF WIRE TO WATER EFFICIENCY
BASED ON PUMP & MOTOR DATA AND
BASED ON PUMP OPERATION WITH PROJECT
SYSTEM CURVE AT RATED HEAD.
MANUFACTURER
PUMP MODEL
Flow, gpm 11800
Head, ft 220
Bowl Eff - % 84.0%
Bowl HP 780.42
FRICTION CALCULATIONS:
Column; 0.45
Head; 0.67
Total Friction Loss, ft 1.12
TOTAL LAB HEAD, ft 220.00
Total Friction Head, ft 1.12
TOTAL FIELD HEAD, ft 221.12
Shaft BHP 0.81
Bowl BHP 780.42
TOTAL PUMP HORSEPOWER 781.23
PUMP FIELD EFFICIENCY - % 83.5%
Motor Efficiency w/o Thrust, 95.5%
Downthrust, lbs 17088
Input Motor Horsepower = BHPp/EFFmtr 818.47
Thrust BHP = thrust x rpm x 7.5x10
-8
1.53
Total Input BHP 820.00
MOTOR EFFICIENCY w/ thrust load, % 95.3%
WIRE TO WATER EFFICIENCY, % 79.5%
Flowserve
27ENM - 2 Stage
WIRE TO WATER EFFICIENCY CALCULATION
SOLID SHAFT VERTICAL TURBINE WORKSHEET
Thomas Taylor
P06-02-09
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal











Pump Submittal
































Pump Division
Flowserve Pumps
IDP Pumps


SUBMITTAL
DOCUMENTATION


Customer: Smith Pump Company
Project: Tom Taylor PS

Flowserve J ob #: S006101
Customer Order #: PU29769
Flowserve Corporate #: 047-88061
Pump Model: QTY (1) 27ENM-2


Revision A

J anuary 3, 2014



Flowserve Corporation
5310 Taneytown Pike
Taneytown, MD 21787
TABLE OF CONTENTS



PUMP MODEL - FLOWSERVE 27ENM-2

GENERAL COMMENTS ....................................................................................... 1 PG
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE CURVE ..................................................................... 1 PG
SPEED TORQUE CURVE .................................................................................... 1 PG
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING (GS006101) ......................................... 1 PG
SECTIONAL DRAWING W/ MATERIAL LIST ................................................... 3 PGS
NAMEPLATE INFORMATION .............................................................................. 1 PG
SPARE PARTS FURNISHED LIST ....................................................................... 1 PG
SHOP PERFORMANCE TEST PROCEDURE ................................................... 4 PGS
SHOP COATING INFO ....................................................................................... 3 PGS
PUMP INSTALLATION, OPERATION, & MAINTENANCE MANUAL ............... 76 PGS









PUMP DIVISION

Smith Pump
Thomas E Taylor Pump Station
FLOWSERVE ORDER #: S006101

COMMENTS AND CLARIFICATIONS

General Comments

1) Flowserve is supplying the bowl assemblies and a Non-Witnessed factory
performance test of each bowl assembly. The bowl shafts will be machined to
accept the SPCo line shaft connection. Submittals related to the bowl
assemblies only will be furnished.

2) Smith Pump Company will handle the costs for in & out freight.


Section 44 42 56.03 Vertical Turbine Pumps

1) Item 1.04.A.4 [Exception]: Specified Calculations are not part of Flowserve
Scope of Supply. These will be supplied by others. Inventor/ProE models of
Flowserve pump parts will NOT be provided for analysis of below ground
pump parts. These models are proprietary information. However, the center of
gravity and weight of the bowl assembly will be provided for analysis
purposes.

2) Item 1.04.A.6 [Clarification]: Only drawings of the supplied materials shall be
provided. To be supplied by others.

3) Item 1.04.A.7 [Clarification]: Complete general arrangement drawing of
pumping system not part of Flowserve scope of supply. This is to be supplied
by others. A general arrangement of the bowl assembly shall be provided.

4) Item 1.04.A.8 [Clarification]: Baseplate not part of Flowserve scope of
supply. To be supplied by others.

5) Item 1.04.A.9 [Clarification]: Power and control wiring diagrams are not part
of Flowserves scope of supply. To be supplied by others.

6) Item 1.04.A.10 [Clarification]: Motor is not part of Flowserves scope of
supply. To be supplied by others.

5310 TANEYTOWN PIKE
TANEYTOWN, MD 21787

PHONE: 410-756-2602
FAX: 410-756-2275
See Smith Pump Company comments and clarifications page
: Smith Pump
: P06-02-09
:
: 155649 Version 1
: April 28, 2014
: EC-1698
: 27ENM
: 11800.0 USgpm
: 220.00 ft
: 1.000
: 1193 rpm
: 2
Bowl head of 220.92 ft corresponds with 220.0 ft head at low liquid level adjusted for elevation and friction losses.
CURVES ARE APPROXIMATE, PUMP IS GUARANTEED FOR ONE SET OF CONDITIONS; CAPACITY, HEAD, AND EFFICIENCY.
Bowl performance shown below is corrected for materials, viscosity and construction.
Customer
Item number
Service
Flowserve reference
Date Capacity
Head Pump speed
Specific gravity
Number of stages
Based on curve no.
Pump size & type
Test tolerance : Hydraulic Institute Level A
Copyright 2009 Flowserve. All rights reserved. FlowSelex v2.2
Customer
Item Number
Service
Flowserve Reference
Date
: Smith Pump
: P06-02-09
:
: 155649 Version 1
: April 28, 2014 : 11800.0 USgpm
: 220.00 ft
: 1.000
: 1193 rpm
Capacity
Head
Specific gravity
: 2
: EC-1698
: 27ENM Pump size & type
Based on curve no.
Number of stages
Pump speed
Copyright 2009 Flowserve. All rights reserved. FlowSelex v2.2
Customer
Item Number
Service
Flowserve Reference
Date
: Smith Pump
: P06-02-09
:
: 155649 Version 1
: April 28, 2014 : 11800.0 USgpm
: 220.00 ft
: 1.000
: 1193 rpm
Capacity
Head
Specific gravity
: 2
: EC-1698
: 27ENM Pump size & type
Based on curve no.
Number of stages
CURVES ARE APPROXIMATE, PUMP IS GUARANTEED FOR ONE SET OF CONDITIONS; CAPACITY, HEAD, AND EFFICIENCY.
Pump speed
Copyright 2009 Flowserve. All rights reserved. FlowSelex v2.2
Material List
Customer: Smith Pump
Order Number: S006101
Size & Type: 27ENM-2
Quantity: 1
Date:
1/3/2014
2 Impeller 316L STAINLESS STEEL / ASTM A351 GRADE CF3M
6 Pump Shaft STAINLESS STEEL / ASTM A582 TYPE 416
8 Impeller Wear Ring ASTM A487 GR CA15 STAINLESS STEEL BHN 250-300
26 Cap Screw 316 STAINLESS STEEL
32 Key STAINLESS STEEL
55 Suction Bell ASTM A48 CL 30 CAST IRON
64 Protective Collar BRONZE / ASTM B505 ALLOY C84400
70 Shaft Coupling NOT INCLUDED - BY OTHERS
125 Grease Plug IRON / ASTM A197
309 Discharge Case ASTM A48 CL 30 CAST IRON
310 Bowl ASTM A48 CL 30 CAST IRON
312 Split Thrust Ring (Impeller) 316L STAINLESS STEEL
319 Bowl Wear Ring ASTM A743 GR CA40 STAINLESS STEEL BHN 400-450
322 Bowl Bearing BRONZE / ASTM B505 ALLOY C84400
323 Suction Bearing BRONZE / ASTM B505 ALLOY C84400
328 Set Screw STAINLESS STEEL
356 Cap Screw 316 STAINLESS STEEL
358 Cap Screw 316 STAINLESS STEEL
360 Cap Screw 316 STAINLESS STEEL
361 Nut 316 STAINLESS STEEL
430 O-Ring RUBBER / BUNA-N
Bowl Assembly Assembly Cross Section: 901.45
Material Ref. No. Name of Part






PUMP DIVISION

Smith Pump
Thomas E Taylor Pump Station
FLOWSERVE ORDER #: S006101

NAMEPLATE INFO


FLOWSERVE STANDARD VTP SERIAL PLATE (P/N: 88415201)


5310 TANEYTOWN PIKE
TANEYTOWN, MD 21787

PHONE: 410-756-2602
FAX: 410-756-2275
P-06-02-09
11800 GPM
220 FT
1185
XXXXMS006101-1
27ENM-2
2750#(BA)
0.25-0.27
Nameplate to be revised with total pump
weight at re-submittal
1193






PUMP DIVISION

Smith Pump
Thomas E Taylor Pump Station
FLOWSERVE ORDER #: S006101


SPARE PARTS FURNISHED



The following spare parts will be provided for the pumps specified above; Quantities
listed are the totals for (1) pump. No further spares are recommended, no special tools
are required.

QTY PART DESCRIPTION MATERIAL
1 Impeller Wear Ring ASTM A743 CA40





5310 TANEYTOWN PIKE
TANEYTOWN, MD 21787

PHONE: 410-756-2602
FAX: 410-756-2275
5310 TANEYTOWN PIKE
TANEYTOWN, MD 21787
PHONE 410-756-2602
FAX 410-756-2275
PUMP DIVISION
TEST PROCEDURE

Customer: Smith Pump Company
Project: Thomas E Taylor PS
Tag: P-06-02-09
Flowserve Order: S006101
Pump: 27ENM-2
Qty. Pumps: (1)

PERFORMANCE TESTING

HYDRO TEST
One (1) pump will be non-witness Hydro Tested to at least 235 PSIG. Test duration ten minutes minimum. Test
Certification will be provided.

PERFORMANCE, NPSHr & OTHER TESTING
One (1) pump will be tested for performance in accordance with attached Flowserve standard procedure. Curves will be
drawn from the test data to show head, consumed power, and efficiency at the full load speed. Data will be taken from a
minimum of eight points from shutoff to run out capacity. Pumps will be tested at full speed.

Two-hour Mechanical Run test will be performed.

Pumps will be tested using the 900HP 1200 RPM job motor.

Performance test is scheduled as a non-witnessed test.

Vibration readings will be taken at each performance test data point and once every fifteen minutes during the two-hour
mechanical run test; readings are for reference only.

Test will be performed at a minimum submergence level of 56.00.

Test resultant curves and data will be forwarded to customer FOR APPROVAL prior to shipment. Test approval is
required as a prerequisite for shipping.

All testing is based on HYDRAULIC INSTITUTE, HI 2011. Acceptance criteria for this test shall be to level 1U.

Per ANSI/HI-2011 14.6.3.1, Flowserve guarantees one condition point to the acceptance level above. That guarantee is
for the following condition of service point:

Full Load Speed of 1193 RPM
Flow =11800 GPM
TDH =220 ft
Bowl Efficiency =84 %







CONSTANT SPEED SHOP TEST PROCEDURE


ALL TESTING IS BASED ON THE HYDRAULIC INSTITUTE
TEST CODE AND WILL BE PERFORMED AS FOLLOWS:

A. CONDUCT OF THE TESTS
Measurements will be taken for capacity, TDH and BHP. A test curve will be submitted
showing calculated results plotted at rated RPM. Test data will be submitted showing raw data
and calculated results of GPM, TDH and BHP at the rated speed.

B. PARAMETERS MEASURED DURING SHOP PERFORMANCE TESTS WITH THE
CORRESPONDING MEASURING DEVICES:

1. SUCTION HEAD
A pressure transducer will be connected to a piezometer ring at the suction pipe. This
gauge will read suction pressure in inches of Mercury.

2. DISCHARGE HEAD
A pressure transducer will be connected to a piezometer ring at the pump discharge pipe.
This gauge will read discharge pressure in lbs/sq.in.

3. CAPACITY
A mag meter will be connected on the discharge pipe. This will read capacity in GPM.

4. SPEED
RPM will be directly measured using a phototac.

5. POWER INPUT TO THE PUMP
A Multilin relay (Total Measuring system supplied by GE for measuring power, voltage and
current) will be used to measure the power input to the motor.

6. TEMPERATURE
Water temperature measured in degrees F. (Measured before and after test).

7. Ambient conditions such as temperature and barometric pressure.

8. Instrument elevations relative to datum.









TEST CARD READINGS

1. SPEED: Actual RPM from Phototac.

2. SUCTION: TRANSDUCER reading in "Hg.

3. DISCHARGE: PRESSURE GAUGE reading in PSI.

4. CAPACITY: MAG METER reading in GPM.

5. POWER INPUT TO MOTOR: Multilin reading.

6. TEMPERATURE: Temperature reading in
o
F.



CALCULATIONS

SPEED (RPM) =Direct reading.

SUCTION HEAD (FEET) = Hg x 1.131

DISCHARGE HEAD (FEET) =PSI X2.31

PUMP POWER (BHP) = Wattmeter reading x Multiplying Factor
746

TOTAL HEAD (TDH-FEET) =Discharge head - suction head +
distance between gauges +velocity
head correction (if applicable)

PUMP WIRE TO WATER = GPM x TDH
EFFICIENCY 3960 x BHP

VELOCITY HEAD (SVH or DVH-FEET) =
( )
2
2
I.D. PIPE 634 . 19
GPM



NPSHA (FEET) =P
barom.
in "Hg x 1.131 - P
vapor
+Suction
Head +Z +SVH








PUMP DIVISION

Smith Pump
Thomas E Taylor Pump Station
FLOWSERVE ORDER #: S006101


COATING INFO



INTERIOR COAT (Bowl Assembl y/Discharge Case):

TNEMEC POTA-POX PLUS SERIES N140

SURFACE PREP: SSPC-SP5
3 COAT(S)
EACH COAT 3-4 MILS DRY FILM THICKNESS MINIMUM
9-12 MILS DRY FILM THICKNESS TOTAL
COLOR: 15BL Tank White



EXTERIOR COAT (PARTS):

TNEMEC POTA-POX PLUS SERIES N140

SURFACE PREP: SSPC-SP5
3 COAT(S)
EACH COAT 3-4 MILS DRY FILM THICKNESS MINIMUM
9-12 MILS DRY FILM THICKNESS TOTAL
COLOR: 15BL Tank White

5310 TANEYTOWN PIKE
TANEYTOWN, MD 21787

PHONE: 410-756-2602
FAX: 410-756-2275
POTA-POX

PLUS
PRODUCT DATA SHEET
N140 or V140
PRODUCT PROFILE
GENERIC DESCRIPTION Polyamidoamine Epoxy
COMMON USAGE Innovative potable water coating which offers high-build edge protection and allows for application at a wide range of
temperatures (down to 35F or 2C with 44-700 Accelerator). For use on the interior and exterior of steel or concrete
tanks, reservoirs, pipes, valves, pumps and equipment in potable water service. Note: Series V140 conforms with air
pollution regulations limiting Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) to a maximum of 250 grams/litre (2.08 lbs/gal). In areas
requiring less than 100 grams/litre VOC, please refer to the Series L140 data sheet.
COLORS 1211 Red Oxide, 1255 Beige, 11WH White, 15BL Tank White, 35GR Black and 39BL Delft Blue. Note: Epoxies chalk with
extended exposure to sunlight. Lack of ventilation, incomplete mixing, miscatalyzation or the use of heaters that emit
carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide during application and initial stages of curing may cause yellowing to occur.
SPECIAL QUALIFICATIONS Certified by NSF International in accordance with ANSI/NSF Std. 61. Ambient air cured Series N140 (with or without 44-
700 Epoxy Accelerator) is qualified for use on tanks and reservoirs of 1,000 gallons (3,785L) capacity or greater, pipes 14
inches (30 cm) in diameter or greater, valves four (4) inches (10 cm) in diameter or greater and fittings four (4) inches (10
cm) in diameter or greater. Series V140 is qualified for use on tanks of 20,000 gallons (75,708L) capacity or greater, valves
two (2) inches (5 cm) in diameter or greater and fittings 1/2 inch (1 cm) in diameter or greater. Note: NSF certification for
Series V140 applies to colors 1255 Beige, 1211 Red and 15BL Tank White only. Conforms to AWWA D 102 Inside Systems
No. 1 and No. 2 (with or without 44-700). Conforms to AWWA C 210 (without 44-700). Contact your Tnemec
representative for systems and additional information. A two-coat system at 4.0-6.0 dry mils (100-150 dry microns) per
coat passes the performance requirements of MIL-PRF-4556F for fuel storage. Reference the "Search Listings" section of the
NSF website at www.nsf.org for details on the maximum allowable DFT.
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Extensive test data available. Contact your Tnemec representative for specific test results.
Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice. The online catalog at www.tnemec.com
should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative
for current technical data and instructions.
7/29/2009, by Tnemec Co., Inc.
COATING SYSTEM
PRIMERS Self-priming, 20, FC20, 22, 91-H
2
O, 94-H
2
O, L140, L140F, N140F, V140, V140F
TOPCOATS Interior: Series 20, FC20, 22, L140, L140F, N140F, V140, V140F.
Exterior: Series 27, 66, L69, L69F, N69, N69F, V69, V69F, 73, L140, L140F, N140, N140F, V140, V140F, 161, 180, 700, 701,
1074, 1074U, 1075, 1075U, 1080, 1081. Refer to COLORS on applicable topcoat data sheets for additional information.
Note: When topcoating with Series 700, an intermediate coat of Series 73 or 1075 is required. Note: The following recoat
times apply for Series N140: Immersion ServiceSurface must be scarified after 60 days. Atmospheric ServiceAfter 60
days, scarification or an epoxy tie-coat is required. Contact your Tnemec representative for specific recommendations.
Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice. The online catalog at www.tnemec.com
should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative
for current technical data and instructions.
SURFACE PREPARATION
PRIMED STEEL Immersion Service: Scarify the Series N140, 20 or FC20 prime coat surface by blasting with fine abrasive before topcoating
if it has been exterior exposed for 60 days or longer and N140 is the specified topcoat.
STEEL Immersion Service: SSPC-SP10/NACE 2 Near-White Blast Cleaning with a minimum angular anchor profile of 1.5 mils.
Non-Immersion Service: SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning with a minimum angular anchor profile of 1.5 mils.
CAST/DUCTILE IRON Contact your Tnemec representative or Tnemec Technical Services.
CONCRETE Allow new concrete to cure 28 days. For optimum results and/or immersion service, abrasive blast referencing SSPC-
SP13/NACE 6, ICRI-CSP 2-4 Surface Preparation of Concrete and Tnemecs Surface Preparation and Application Guide. Fill
all holes, pits, voids and cracks with 63-1500, 215 or 218.
ALL SURFACES Must be clean, dry and free of oil, grease and other contaminants.
Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice. The online catalog at www.tnemec.com
should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative
for current technical data and instructions.
TECHNICAL DATA
VOLUME SOLIDS 67.0 2.0% (mixedA, B & 44-700 Epoxy Accelerator)
RECOMMENDED DFT 2.0 to 10.0 mils (50 to 225 microns) per coat. Note: MIL-PRF-4556F applications require two coats at 4.0-6.0 mils (100-150
microns) per coat. Otherwise, the number of coats and thickness requirements will vary with substrate, application
method and exposure. Contact your Tnemec representative.
CURING TIME AT 5 MILS DFT Without 44-700 Accelerator:
Temperature To Handle To Recoat Immersion
75F (24C) 6 hours 9 hours 7 days
With 44-700 Accelerator:
Temperature To Handle To Recoat Immersion
75F (24C) 4 hours 5 hours 7 days
65F (18C) 7-8 hours 9-11 hours 8 days
55F (13C) 12-14 hours 16-20 hours 9-10 days
45F (7C) 18-22 hours 28-32 hours 12-13 days
35F (2C) 28-32 hours 46-50 hours 16-18 days
Curing time varies with surface temperature, air movement, humidity and film thickness.
Note: For valve applications allow 14 days cure at 75F (24C) prior to immersion. For pipe applications allow 30 days
cure at 75F (24C) prior to immersion. Ventilation: When used in enclosed areas, provide adequate ventilation during
application and cure.
VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS N140: Unthinned: 2.4 lbs/gallon (285 grams/litre) V140: Unthinned: 1.95 lbs/gallon (234 grams/litre)
Thinned 5% (#60): 2.6 lbs/gallon (311 grams/litre) Thinned 2.5% (#4): 2.08 lbs/gallon (250 grams/litre)
Thinned 10% (#4): 2.8 lbs/gallon (334 grams/litre)
HAPS N140: Unthinned: 2.4 lbs/gal solids Thinned 5% (#60): 2.4 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10% (#4): 3.3 lbs/gal solids
V140: Unthinned: 2.1 lbs/gal solids Thinned 2.5% (#4): 2.3 lbs/gal solids
Page 1 of 2
THEORETICAL COVERAGE 1,070 mil sq ft/gal (27.2 m/L at 25 microns). See APPLICATION for coverage rates.
NUMBER OF COMPONENTS Two: Part A (amine) and Part B (epoxy) or Three: Part A, Part B and 44-700 Epoxy Accelerator
PACKAGING 5 gallon (18.9L) pails and 1 gallon (3.79L) cans - Order in multiples of 2.
Reference 44-700 Epoxy Accelerator product data sheet for its packaging information.
NET WEIGHT PER GALLON N140: 12.66 0.25 lbs (5.82 .11 kg) (mixed) V140: 13.00 0.25 lbs (5.90 .11 kg) (mixed)
STORAGE TEMPERATURE Minimum 20F (-7C) Maximum 110F (43C)
TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (Dry) Continuous 250F (121C) Intermittent 275F (135C)
SHELF LIFE 24 months at recommended storage temperature.
FLASH POINT - SETA N140 & V140 Part A: 82F (28C) N140 Part B: 80F (27C) V140 Part B: 86F (30C) 44-700: None
HEALTH & SAFETY Paint products contain chemical ingredients which are considered hazardous. Read container label warning and Material
Safety Data Sheet for important health and safety information prior to the use of this product.
Keep out of reach of children.
7/29/2009, by Tnemec Co., Inc.
PRODUCT DATA SHEET
POTA-POX

PLUS | N140 or V140
APPLICATION
COVERAGE RATES
Dry Mils (Microns) Wet Mils (Microns) Sq Ft/Gal (m/Gal)
Suggested 6.0 (150) 9.0 (230) 179 (16.6)
Minimum 2.0 (50) 3.0 (75) 537 (49.9)
Maximum 10.0 (225) 15.0 (375) 107 (10.0)
Note: Roller or brush application requires two or more coats to obtain recommended film thickness. Allow for overspray
and surface irregularities. Wet film thickness is rounded to the nearest 0.5 mil or 5 microns. Application of coating below
minimum or above maximum recommended dry film thicknesses may adversely affect coating performance. Reference
the Search Listings section of the NSF website at www.nsf.org for details on the maximum allowable DFT.
MIXING l. Start with equal amounts of both Parts A & B.
2. Using a power mixer, separately stir Parts A & B.
3. (For accelerated version. If not using 44-700, skip to No. 4.)
Add four (4) fluid ounces of 44-700 per gallon of Part A while Part A is under agitation.
4. Add Part A to Part B under agitation, stir until thoroughly mixed.
5. Both components must be above 50F (10C) prior to mixing. For application of the unaccelerated version to surfaces
between 50F to 60F (10C to 16C) or the accelerated version to surfaces between 35F to 50F (2C to 10C), allow
mixed material to stand 30 minutes and restir before using.
6. For optimum application properties, the material temperature should be above 60F (16C).
Note: The use of more than the recommended amount of 44-700 will adversely affect performance.
THINNING Use No. 4 or No. 60 Thinner for N140. Use No. 4 Thinner for V140. For air spray, thin up to 10% or 3/4 pint (380 mL) per
gallon with No. 4 Thinner or thin up to 5% or 1/4 pint (190 mL) per gallon with No. 60 Thinner. For airless spray, roller
or brush, thin up to 5% or 1/4 pint (190 mL) per gallon. Caution: Series N140 NSF certification is based on thinning with
No. 4 or No. 60 Thinner for tanks and only No. 60 Thinner for pipe, valves and fittings. Series V140 NSF certification is
based on thinning with No. 4 Thinner only. Use of any other thinner voids ANSI/NSF Std. 61 certification. Note: When
using Series V140, a maximum of 2.5% of No. 4 Thinner may be used to comply with VOC regulations.
POT LIFE Without 44-700 15 hours at 50F (10C) 5 hours at 77F (25C) 3 hours at 100F (38C)
With 44-700 8 hours at 35F (2C) 4 hours at 77F (25C) 1 hour at 100F (38C)
APPLICATION EQUIPMENT Air Spray
Gun Fluid Tip Air Cap Air Hose ID Matl Hose ID
Atomizing
Pressure
Pot Pressure
DeVilbiss JGA E 765 or 704
5/16 or 3/8
(7.9 or 9.5 mm)
3/8 or 1/2
(9.5 or 12.7
mm)
75-100 psi
(5.2-6.9 bar)
10-20 psi
(0.7-1.4 bar)
Airless Spray
Tip Orifice Atomizing Pressure Matl Hose ID Manifold Filter
0.015-0.019
(380-485 microns)
3000-4800 psi
(207-330 bar)
1/4 or 3/8
(6.4 or 9.5 mm)
60 mesh
(250 microns)
Low temperatures or longer hoses require higher pot pressure. Use appropriate tip/atomizing pressure for equipment,
applicator technique and weather conditions.
Roller: Roller application optional when environmental restrictions do not allow spraying. Use 3/8 or 1/2 (9.5 mm to
12.7 mm) synthetic woven nap roller covers.
Brush: Recommended for small areas only. Use high quality natural or synthetic bristle brushes.
SURFACE TEMPERATURE Without 44-700 Minimum 50F (10C) Maximum 135F (57C)
With 44-700 Minimum 35F (2C) Maximum 135F (57C)
The surface should be dry and at least 5F (3C) above the dew point. Coating will not cure below minimum surface
temperature.
CLEANUP Flush and clean all equipment immediately after use with the recommended thinner or MEK.
Values may vary with color.
PRODUCT DATA SHEET
POTA-POX

PLUS | N140 or V140
WARRANTY & LIMITATION OF SELLER'S LIABILITY: Tnemec Company, Inc. warrants only that its coatings represented herein meet the formulation standards of Tnemec Company, Inc. THE
WARRANTY DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE PARAGRAPH SHALL BE IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES THAT EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF. The
buyer's sole and exclusive remedy against Tnemec Company, Inc. shall be for replacement of the product in the event a defective condition of the product should be found to exist and the
exclusive remedy shall not have failed its essential purpose as long as Tnemec is willing to provide comparable replacement product to the buyer. NO OTHER REMEDY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST SALES, INJURY TO PERSON OR PROPERTY, ENVIRONMENTAL INJURIES OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS) SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO THE BUYER. Technical and application information herein is provided for the purpose of establishing a general profile of the coating and
proper coating application procedures. Test performance results were obtained in a controlled environment and Tnemec Company makes no claim that these tests or any other tests, accurately
represent all environments. As application, environmental and design factors can vary significantly, due care should be exercised in the selection and use of the coating.
Tnemec Company Incorporated 6800 Corporate Drive Kansas City, Missouri 64120-1372 1-800-TNEMEC1 Fax: 1-816-483-3969 www.tnemec.com
PDSN140 Page 2 of 2
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal












Motor Submittal































SMITH
PUMP
COMPANY, INC.




301 M&B Industrial
(800) 299-8909 (254) 776-0377




Waco, Texas 76712
FAX (254) 776-0023

Section 26 19 00 Medium-Voltage Induction Motors


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals:

1. Submit complete motor data with driven equipment Shop Drawings.
See drawing 10002803261
2. Induction motor name and specification number of driven equipment.
P06-02-09
26 19 00 Medium Voltage Induction Motor
44 42 56.03 Vertical Turbine Pumps
3. Rated motor horsepower.
900 Hp
4. Voltage, phase and frequency ratings.
4,000 Volts / 3 Phase / 60 Hz
5. Design full load current at rated horsepower for utilization (motor)
voltage.
106 amps @ 770 Hp @ 4,000 volts
6. Number of poles and full-load speed.
6 poles / 1193 rpm
7. Service factor.
1.0
8. Power factor at full, 3/4-load and 1/2-load.
.84 @ Full / .80 @ 3/4 load / .71 @ 1/2 load
9. Locked rotor, pull-up, breakdown, and full-load torque.
Locked rotor torque 3170 ft. lb
Pull-up torque 3170 ft. lb
Breakdown torque 9509 ft. lb
Full load torque 3962 ft. lb
10. Guaranteed minimum full-load efficiency, include nominal efficiencies
at 1/2-load and 3/4-load.
Full load 95.5% / Nominal 95.45% / 1/2 Load 94.6% / 3/4 Load 95.4%
11. Maximum number of successive cold and hot starts.
Motor suitable for 3 cold starts or 2 hot starts on the first hour.
12. Code letter for locked-rotor kVA/HP.
Code H
13. Locked-rotor inrush in percent of full-load current.
680%
14. Motor thermal performancehot and cold start curves.
See document 058502/2014
15. Winding insulation class and temperature rise class.
Class F / Class B
16. Frame size.
6809
17. Enclosure.
TEFC
18. Motor type/model and dimension drawing. Include motor component
weights.
Vertical solid shaft / HGF see drawing 10002803261
Motor component weights not available until manufacturing has begun.
19. Current transformers, surge arrestors and surge capacitors.
Not applicable due to VFD
20. Motor terminal box, RTD box, vibration detector box, and space heater
box dimensions, location on motor, and wiring.
See drawing 10002803261
21. Motor lead termination support insulators.
See drawing 10002803261
22. Schematic wiring diagram for motor and for devices such as resistance
temperature detectors, vibration sensors, zero speed switches, leak
detectors, space heaters, differential pressure switches, current
transformers, as applicable.
See Document HGF-3222 for motor lead, RTD, and space heater
wiring.
See drawing 10002803261 for RTD and space heater wiring.
23. Bearing Data:
This data will not available until the motor has been released for
production and a complete bill of materials is generated. A thrust bearing
cross sectional drawing has been provided. See thrust bearing cross
sectional document.
a. Identify type and manufacturer of radial journal and thrust bearing
to be installed.
b. Specify proposed bearing insulation materials and methods and
recommended bearing lubricant(s).
c. Bearing protection data including bearing housing vibration
sensors, and resistance temperature detectors, as applicable.
24. Complete lube oil system requirements.
Motor has self-cooled thrust bearing design and does not require lube oil
system
25. Anticipated maximum maintenance weights for rotors and removable
housing elements.
This data will not available until the motor has been released for
production and a complete bill of materials is generated.
26. Assembly clearances; this requirement includes, but is not limited to
diametrical bearing clearances, air gap, coupling interference fit to shaft
and bearing housing interference fit.
This data will not available until the motor has been released for
production and a complete bill of materials is generated.

27. Shaft radial and axial runout tolerances at various lateral locations.
This data will not available until the motor has been released for
production and a complete bill of materials is generated.
28. Shaft mass elastic diagram.
This data will not available until the motor has been released for
production and a complete bill of materials is generated.
29. Motor rotor wk
2
(lb-ft
2
).
707 lb-ft
2

30. Motor shaft grounding pickup method shall be via readily accessible,
spring-loaded contact brush.
Confirmed
31. Instrumentation, including but not limited to, vibration transducers
vibration monitoring system, RTDs, and motor protection relay leak
detectors. Provide detailed catalog information indicating complete
model number derivation and wiring diagrams.
This data will not available until the motor has been released for
production and a complete bill of materials is generated.
32. Water or oil cooling if required for motor thrust bearings.
Not applicable

B. Informational Submittals:

1. List demonstrating manufacturers requisite experience, as well as
location of manufacturer and number of years of production.
History: WEG started September 16, 1961
Manufacturing Plant Location: J aragua do Sul, SC - Brazil
2. Lateral and torsional analysis report.
See various analysis documents by Smith Pump Company
3. Driven equipment and motor manufacturers detailed mass elastic data.
See Torsional Analysis document (table 1) by Smith Pump Company
4. Name, address, telephone number, and contact name for factory-trained
and authorized service organization representing synchronous motor
manufacturer.
N/A These motors are not Synchronous.
WEG Electric Corp (ATL) is US headquarters.
Warranty/Service claims for Large Motors are coordinated by Warranty
Services Maquinas Service Supervisor, Large Energy. Currently Eric
Thomasson located in ATL home office, 678-534-4650,
ethomasson@weg.net.
Service work is usually performed at EASA certified service centers
based on the location of the motors.
5. Written installation, connection, and commissioning instructions for
specific motor(s) to be furnished.
See Motor O&M manual
6. Factory test results.
Available after motor has been tested. Results will be submitted and will
require engineer approval for release for delivery of motor.
DATA SHEET
Nr.: 058502/2014
Date: 04-APR-2014
Three-phase Induction Motor - Squirrel Cage
Customer : WEG ELECTRIC CORPORATION - WEC
Product code :
Product line : Special Motor
Frame : HGF 6809/10/11T
Output : 900 HP
Frequency : 60 Hz
Poles : 6
Rated speed : 1193 rpm
Slip : 0,58 %
Rated voltage : 4000V
Rated current : 121 A
L. R. Amperes : 823 A
Il/In : 6,8 Code H
No load current : 46,0 A
Rated torque : 3962 ft.lb
Locked rotor torque : 80 %
Breakdown torque : 240 %
Insulation class : F
Temperature rise : 80 K
Locked rotor time : 15 s (hot)
Service factor : 1,00
Duty cycle : S1
Ambient temperature : 0C to +40C
Altitude : 1000 m.a.s.l
Enclosure : IP55 (TEFC)
Mounting : V1
Rotation : Both
Aprox. weight* : 10606 lb
Moment of inertia : 707 sq.ft.lb
Sound Pressure Level : 81,0 dB(A) (global)
Foundation loads
- Max. traction : 11982 lb
- Max. compression : 22588 lb
Load Power factor Efficiency (%)
100% 0,84 95,5
75% 0,80 95,4
50% 0,71 94,6
Bearing Quantity (lubricant)
Front 6324-C3 72 g
Rear 29420 37 l
Lubrication interval: 4034 h (Front)
Lubrication interval: 8000 h (Rear)
Grease - MOBIL POLYREX EM (Front)
Oil - MOBIL SHC629 VG150 (Rear)
Notes:
Suitable for VFD applications up to 4160V (non-sinusoidal output). Conditions must remain within the following:
- Maximum voltage peak on motor terminals: 10300V (phase-phase)
- Maximum voltage peak on motor terminals: 6000V (phase-earth)
- dV/dt inverter terminals: <= 2700V/s (phase-phase)
- dV/dt inverter terminals: <= 2700V/s (phase-earth).
Operation with VFD, 6 to 60 Hz, parablolic toque.
Copper bar rotor.
Pull-up torque: 80%.
Motor suitable for 3 cold starts or 2 hot starts on the first hour.
Continuous downthrust: 16500 lbf;
Maximum momentary downthrust: 26500 lbf
Maximum momentary upthrust: 4950 lbf
This is an updated revision. The previous one must be disregarded. The figures given herewith are regarded as estimated values based on
calculation and applied to sinusoidal power supplied motors, within permissible tolerances under NEMA MG 1-20. Noise level with
tolerance of +3 dB(A). (*) Weight value can be changed without previous notification.
Performed
celioneib
Checked
emanoels
Revision
Nr.: 3 Date: 23-APR-2014
Approved
FOR APPROVAL
( ) Approved
( ) Approved with comments
( ) Not approved
0,00
0,25
0,50
0,75
1,00
1,25
1,50
1,75
2,00
2,25
2,50
A
0,0
1,0
2,0
3,0
4,0
5,0
6,0
7,0
8,0
9,0
10,0
B
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Percent of synchronous speed
A

-

T
o
r
q
u
e

r
e
l
a
t
e
d

t
o

f
u
l
l

l
o
a
d

t
o
r
q
u
e
B

-

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

r
e
l
a
t
e
d

t
o

f
u
l
l

l
o
a
d

c
u
r
r
e
n
t
Curves
Nr.: 058502/2014
Date: 04-APR-2014
PERFORMANCE CURVES RELATED TO SPEED
Three-phase Induction Motor - Squirrel Cage
Customer : WEG ELECTRIC CORPORATION - WEC
Product code :
Product line : Special Motor
Output : 900 HP
Frame : HGF 6809/10/11T
Rated speed : 1193 rpm
Frequency : 60 Hz
Rated voltage : 4000 V
Insulation class : F
Rated current : 121 A
Il/In : 6,8 Code H
Duty cycle : S1
Service factor : 1,00
Enclosure : IP55 (TEFC)
Locked rotor torque : 80 %
Breakdown torque : 240 %
Notes:
Suitable for VFD applications up to 4160V (non-sinusoidal output). Conditions must remain within the following:
- Maximum voltage peak on motor terminals: 10300V (phase-phase)
- Maximum voltage peak on motor terminals: 6000V (phase-earth)
- dV/dt inverter terminals: <= 2700V/s (phase-phase)
- dV/dt inverter terminals: <= 2700V/s (phase-earth).
This is an updated revision. The previous one must be disregarded.The figures given herewith are regarded as estimated values
based on calculation and applied to sinusoidal power supplied motors, within permissible tolerances under NEMA MG 1-20.
Performed
rfranca
Checked
crislainen
Revision
Nr.: 2 Date: 07-APR-2014
Approved






F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L


(

)

A
p
p
r
o
v
e
d


(

)

A
p
p
r
o
v
e
d

w
i
t
h

c
o
m
m
e
n
t
s


(

)

N
o
t

a
p
p
r
o
v
e
d
Percent of rated output
A

-

E
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
c
y

(
%
)
B

-

P
o
w
e
r

f
a
c
t
o
r
C

-

S
l
i
p

(
%
)
D

-

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

a
t


4
0
0
0
V

(
A
)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0 0,0
1,0
2,0
3,0
4,0
5,0
0
40
80
120
160
A
B
C
D
Curves
Nr.: 058502/2014
Date: 04-APR-2014
PERFORMANCE UNDER LOAD
Three-phase Induction Motor - Squirrel Cage
Customer : WEG ELECTRIC CORPORATION - WEC
Product code :
Product line : Special Motor
Output : 900 HP
Frame : HGF 6809/10/11T
Rated speed : 1193 rpm
Frequency : 60 Hz
Rated voltage : 4000 V
Insulation class : F
Rated current : 121 A
Il/In : 6,8 Code H
Duty cycle : S1
Service factor : 1,00
Enclosure : IP55 (TEFC)
Locked rotor torque : 80 %
Breakdown torque : 240 %
Notes:
Suitable for VFD applications up to 4160V (non-sinusoidal output). Conditions must remain within the following:
- Maximum voltage peak on motor terminals: 10300V (phase-phase)
- Maximum voltage peak on motor terminals: 6000V (phase-earth)
- dV/dt inverter terminals: <= 2700V/s (phase-phase)
- dV/dt inverter terminals: <= 2700V/s (phase-earth).
This is an updated revision. The previous one must be disregarded.The figures given herewith are regarded as estimated values
based on calculation and applied to sinusoidal power supplied motors, within permissible tolerances under NEMA MG 1-20.
Performed
rfranca
Checked
crislainen
Revision
Nr.: 2 Date: 07-APR-2014
Approved






F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L


(

)

A
p
p
r
o
v
e
d


(

)

A
p
p
r
o
v
e
d

w
i
t
h

c
o
m
m
e
n
t
s


(

)

N
o
t

a
p
p
r
o
v
e
d
Curves
Nr.: 058502/2014
Date: 04-APR-2014
THERMAL CAPACITY IN OVERLOAD
Three-phase Induction Motor - Squirrel Cage
Customer : WEG ELECTRIC CORPORATION - WEC
Product code :
Product line : Special Motor
Output : 900 HP
Frame : HGF 6809/10/11T
Rated speed : 1193 rpm
Frequency : 60 Hz
Rated voltage : 4000 V
Insulation class : F
Rated current : 121 A
Il/In : 6,8 Code H
Duty cycle : S1
Service factor : 1,00
Enclosure : IP55 (TEFC)
Locked rotor torque : 80 %
Breakdown torque : 240 %
Notes:
Suitable for VFD applications up to 4160V (non-sinusoidal output). Conditions must remain within the following:
- Maximum voltage peak on motor terminals: 10300V (phase-phase)
- Maximum voltage peak on motor terminals: 6000V (phase-earth)
- dV/dt inverter terminals: <= 2700V/s (phase-phase)
- dV/dt inverter terminals: <= 2700V/s (phase-earth).
This is an updated revision. The previous one must be disregarded.The figures given herewith are regarded as estimated values
based on calculation and applied to sinusoidal power supplied motors, within permissible tolerances under NEMA MG 1-20.
Performed
rfranca
Checked
crislainen
Revision
Nr.: 2 Date: 07-APR-2014
Approved






F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L


(

)

A
p
p
r
o
v
e
d


(

)

A
p
p
r
o
v
e
d

w
i
t
h

c
o
m
m
e
n
t
s


(

)

N
o
t

a
p
p
r
o
v
e
d
I/In
T
i
m
e

(
s
)
A

-

O
v
e
r
l
o
a
d
B

-

L
o
c
k
e
d

r
o
t
o
r

(
h
o
t
)
C

-

L
o
c
k
e
d

r
o
t
o
r

(
c
o
l
d
)
1,0 2,0 3,0 4,0 5,0 6,0 7,0
10
100
1000
10000
100000
A
B
C
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal












VFD Submittal
(Submitted as separate submittal)



























SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal














Controls Submittal
(Submitted as separate submittal)















SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal











Pressure Switch


















245
Consult factory for guidance in product selection
Phone (203) 378-8281 or visit our web site at
www.ashcroft.com
Code Process
Range
& Temp.
(2)
Vac. 0-600 1000 2000-
Material Limits in.H
2
O psi psi 3000
F psi
B-Buna N 0 to 150
V-Viton 20 to 300
T-Teon 0 to 150
S-SS
(6)(9)
0 to 300



P-Monel
(6)
0 to 300



3 - SWITCH ELEMENTS FOR PPA & PDA


CONTROLS
Description/Maximum Electrical Ratings

Code
UL/CSA Listed
10A,125/250 Vac
H General purpose 1/2A, 125 Vdc
1/4A, 250 Vdc
Hermetically sealed
J switch, general
11A, 125/250 Vac

purpose
5A, 30 Vdc

SWITCH ELEMENTS FOR PPD, PPS,


PDD & PDS CONTROLS
Code
Switch Elements
Single Dual
UL/CSA Listed
S
(PS) (PD)
K
(4)
KK Narrow deadband 15A, 125/250 Vac
F
(4)
FF Sealed environment 15A, 125/250 Vac
proof
15A, 125/250/480 Vac
G
(5)
GG General purpose 1/2A, 125 Vdc
1/4A, 250 Vdc
Hermetically sealed
P
(3)
PP switch, narrow 5A, 125/250 Vac
deadband
Hermetically sealed
J JJ switch, general
11A,125/250 Vac

purpose
5A, 30 Vdc

TO ORDER THIS P-SERIES PRESSURE SWITCH:
Select: PPD N7 GG B 25 XK3 30#
1. Function:
2. Enclosure:
3. Switch Element:
4. Actuator Seal:
5. Pressure Port:
6. Options (see pages 250-251):
7. Pressure Range (see page 248):
Pressure and Differential
Pressure Switches, Watertight
and Explosion-Proof Enclosure,
P-Series
UL, CSA
(7)
listed
Fixed or adjustable deadband
Readily available
Standard pressure connection
materials:
Pressure psi ranges
- 316L stainless steel
Differential pressure ranges
- Nickel plated brass
(8)
Pressure and differential inches
of water ranges
- Epoxy coated carbon steel
Setpoints adjustable from 15-100%
of range
Dual Seal Rating models available
This top-of-the-line Ashcroft

pro-
cess switch series includes many
state-of-the-art features for safety
and reliability in virtually all process
applications.
Die cast aluminum enclosure is
standard with NEMA 4X (weather-
proof, corrosion resistant) NEMA 7
(explosion-proof enclosure Class
I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C & D and
Class II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F & G).
Dual chamber design allows set-
point changes to be made safely
even with power connected.
Single or dual independently
adjustable setpoints meet all
setpoint requirements
1 - FUNCTION
PPA - Pressure control, single setpoint,
adjustable deadband
PPD - Pressure control, two independently
adjustable setpoints, xed deadband
PPS - Pressure control, single setpoint,
xed deadband
PDA - Differential pressure control, single
setpoint, adjustable deadband
PDD - Differential pressure control, two indepen-
dently adjustable setpoints, xed deadband
PDS - Differential pressure control, single
setpoint, xed deadband
2 - ENCLOSURE
N7 - NEMA 7/9, IP65, watertight, corrosion
resistant and explosion proof Div. 1 & 2
6 - OPTIONS
See pages 250-251
7 - STANDARD PRESSURE RANGES
See page 248
4 - ACTUATOR SEAL
(1)
5 - PRESSURE PORT
(1)
Order Code
25
1
4 NPT Female

1
4 NPT Female and

06

1
2 NPT Male Combination
07
1
2 NPT Female
HERMETICALLY SEALED SWITCH
We recommend hermetically sealed switch elements
for improved reliability. The hermetically sealed switch
provides uncompromising contact protection in harsh
or corrosive environments.
Features:
UL-recognized component,
guide WSQ2, File E85076
All-stainless steel welded
construction
LOOK FOR THIS AGENCY
MARK ON OUR PRODUCTS
NOTES:
1. These items are wetted by process uid.
2. Ambient operating temperature limits 20 to 150F,
all styles. Setpoint shift of 1% of range per 50F
temperature change is normal. Switches calibrated at
70F reference.
3. Estimated dc rating, 2.5A, 28 Vdc (not UL listed).
4. Estimated dc rating, .4A, 120 Vdc (not UL listed).
5. Not UL listed at 480 Vac.
6. Available on pressure only.
7. Refer to Option Table.
8. Order Option XUD, stainless steel process connection.
9. On differential switches, stainless steel is
available in 15, 30, 60 and 90 psid ranges only.
Includes Teon O-ring and 316 SS connection.
PDA-N7-H-B-25-0-200
248
Consult factory for guidance in product selection
Phone (203) 378-8281 or visit our web site at
www.ashcroft.com
NOTES:
1. Switches may generally be set between 15% and 100%
of nominal range on increasing pressure. Consult fac-
tory for applications where setpoints must be lower.
2. All deadbands are given in English units as shown in
the nominal range column. Deadbands shown are for
switches with Buna N diaphragm.
4. Deadbands for PPS, PPD, PDS, PDD, PTD, and PDS
models are xed within the range of values shown.
5. Available with remote mount thermal system only.
6. Deadbands given are for zero static working pressure.
7. All deadbands given in F.
8. Not available with 2
3
/4 stem.
9. Proof pressure is 4000 psi with stainless steel and
monel welded diaphragms.
Approximate deadbands for optional diaphragms:
Viton: Multiply Buna N value by 1.4
Teon: Multiply Buna N value by 1.2
Stainless Steel: Multiply Buna N value by 1.7
Monel: Multiply Buna N value by 1.7
3. Deadbands for PTA, PPA and PDA are
adjustable between the values shown.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
Overpressure Approximate Deadband
(2,6)
Switch Element (Buna-N Diaphragm)

Ratings
PDA
(3)
PDS
(4)
PDD
(4)


Static Working Proof
Switch Element
Nominal Range
(1)

Pressure psi psi
J, H G J, H K, F P GG JJ, HH KK,FF PP
30 in.H
2
Od 750 mmH
2
O 5.4 21.6 5.5-27 3-5 4-6.5 0.5-1 .5-2 3-5 4-6.5 0.5-1 1.0-2.8
60 in.H
2
Od 1500 mmH
2
O 5.4 21.6 5.5-54 3-5 4.5-6.5 0.5-2 1-2 3-5 4.-6.5 0.5-2 1.0-2.8
100 in.H
2
Od 2500 mmH
2
O 5.4 21.6 8.5-90 4-6 4.0-8.5 1-2 1-3 4-7 4.-8.5 1-2 2.0-4.2
150 in.H
2
Od 3750 mmH
2
O 5.4 21.6 18-135 5-11 10-18 1.5-3 2-6 8-14 10-18 1.5-3. 3.0-8.4
15 psid 2 kg/cm
2
500 2000 2.5-13 1-2 1-3 0.5-1 0.5-2 1-2 1-3 0.5-1 1.0-2.8
30 psid 2 kg/cm
2
500 2000 3.5-27 1-2.5 2-4.5 0.5-1 1-2 1-2.5 2-4.5 0.5-1.5 1.0-2.8
60 psid 4 kg/cm
2
500 2000 6.5-54 2-4 4-7 1-1.5 1-2.5 1-2.4 4-7 1-2 1.0-3.5
100 psid 7 kg/cm
2
500 2000 10-90 5-7 5-10 1-2.5 2-4 5-7 5-10 1-2.5 2.0-5.6
200 psid 14 kg/cm
2
1000 4000 20-180 10-1 5 10-18 1-4 5-8 10-20 10-18 3-6 3.0-11.2
400 psid 28 kg/cm
2
1000 8000 45-360 16-30 16-45 4-8 5-15 16-30 16-45 4-8 40.-21.0
TEMPERATURE RANGE SELECTION
Approximate Deadband (Buna N Diaphragm)
(2)
Nominal Range Max. PTA
(3)
PTS
(4)
PTD
(4)


Temp.
Switch Element
F C
F
J, H G J, H K, F P GG JJ, HH KK, FF PP
40 to 60 40 to16 400 18-90 2-10 9-18 1-2 1-5 2-10 9-18 1-2 2.0-7.0
0 to 100

20 to 40 400 30-90 2-15 10-30 1-3 1.5-7 2-15 10-30 1.5-3 3.0-10.0
75 to 205

20 to 95 400 34-120 2-17 10-34 1.5-3.5 1.5-8 2-17 10-34 1.5-3.5 3.0-12.0
150 to 260

65 to125 400 25-100 2.5-12 9-25 1-2.5 1-7 2.5-12 9-25 1-2.5 3.0-10.0
235 to 375

110 to 190 500 35-130 2-18 10-35 1-3.5 1.5-8 2-18 10-35 1-3.5 3.0-12.0
350 to 525
(8)
175 to 275 700 40-165 3-25 15-40 2-4.5 2.5-11 3-25 15-40 2-4.5 4.0-15.5

500 to 750
(5)
200 to 400 900 50-200 20-36 36-60 5-10 6-21 20-36 36-60 5-10 7.0-30.0
PRESSURE/VACUUM SWITCHES
Overpressure Approximate Deadband
(2)
Switch Element (Buna-N Diaphragm)

Ratings
PPA
(3)
PPS
(4)
PPD
(4)


Proof Burst
Switch Element
Nominal Range
(1)

psi psi
J, H G J, H K, F P GG JJ, HH KK,FF PP
Vacuum
30 in.Hg 760 mmHg 100 kPa 250 400 7-26 3-5 3-6.5 1-2 1-2.5 3-5 3-6.5 1-2 1.0-3.5
Compound
30 in.Hg/ 760 mmHg/ 100 kPa 250 400 10-25 3-5 2.5-3.5 1-2 1-2.5 3-5 2.5-4.5 1-2 1.0-3.5/
15 psi 1.0 kg/cm
2
100 kPa 4-13 1-2 1-3 0.5-2 0.5-2 2-4 1-3 0.5-1 1.0-2.8
Pressure
30 in.H
2
O 750 mmH
2
O 7.5 kPa 20 35 4.-27 1.5-3.5 2-5 0.5-1 0.5-2 1.5-3.5 2-5 0.5-1 1.0-2.8
60 in.H
2
O 1500 mmH
2
O 15 kPa 20 35 5-54 1.5-3.5 2.5-5 0.5-2.0 1-2 1.5-3.5 2.5-5.0 .0.5-2.0 1.0-2.8
100 in.H
2
O 2500 mmH
2
O 25 kPa 20 35 8.5-90 4-6 4-8.5 1-2 1-3 4-7 4-8.5 1-2 2.0-4.2
150 in.H
2
O 3750 mmH
2
O 37 kPa 20 35 18-135 5-11 10-18 1.5-3 2-6 8-14 10-18 1.5-3 3.0-8.4
15 psi 1 kg/cm
2
100 kPa 500 1500 2.5-13 1-2 1-0.5 0.5-1 0.5-2 1-2 1-3.0 0.5-1 1.0-2.8
30 psi 2.5 kg/cm
2
200 kPa 500 1500 3.5-26 1-2.5 2-4.5 0.5-1.5 0.5-1.5 1-2.5 2-4.5 0.5-1.5 1.0-3.0
60 psi 4 kg/cm
2
400 kPa 500 1500 6.5-54 2-4 4-7 1-2 1-2.5 2-4 4-7 1-2 2.0-3.5
100 psi 7 kg/cm
2
700 kPa 1000 3000 10-90 5-7 5-10 1-2.5 2-4 5-7 5-10 1-2.5 2.0-5.6
200 psi 14 kg/cm
2
1400 kPa 1000 3000 20-180 10-15 10-18 1-4 5-15 10-20 15-25 3-6 4.0-12.0
400 psi 28 kg/cm
2
2800 kPa 2400 3000 45-360 16-30 16-45 4-8 5.0-15 16-30 16-45 4-8 5.0-21.0
600 psi 42 kg/cm
2
4200 kPa 2400 3000 75-540 16-50 20-75 5-8 6-25 16-50 20-75 5-15 8.0-35.0
1000 psi
(9)
70 kg/cm
2
7000 kPa 12000 14000 160-900 75-130 50-160 7-30 10-85 75-130 50-160 7-30 20.0-119.0
2000 psi 140 kg/cm
2
14000 kPa 12000 14000 350-1800 150-200 150-350 20-50 25-110 150-200 150-350 20-50 35.0-154.0
3000 psi 210 kg/cm
2
21000 kPa 12000 14000 400-2600 180-250 180-400 30-70 30-190 180-250 180-400 30-70 40.0-266.0
Nominal Ranges and Deadbands
Pressure and Temperature
Switches, P-Series
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal












Pressure Gauge




























76
Consult factory for guidance in product selection
Phone (203) 378-8281 or visit our
web site at www.ashcroft.com
STANDARD RANGES
Pressure Compound

psi

psi

0/15 30 in.Hg/15 psi
0/30 30 in.Hg/30 psi
0/60 30 in.Hg/60 psi
0/100 30 in.Hg/100 psi
0/160 30 in.Hg/150 psi
0/200 30 in.Hg/300 psi
0/300
0/400 Vacuum
0/600 30/0 in.Hg
0/800 34/0 ft H2O
0/1000
0/1500
0/2000
0/3000
0/5000
0/10,000
0/20,000
0/30,000
BOURDON SYSTEM SELECTION
Ordering Bourdon Tube & Tip Material
(1)
Socket Tube Range Selection NPT
Code (all joints TIG welded except A) Material Type Limits (psi) Conn.
(2)

A
Phosphor Bronze
Brass C-Tube 12/1000
1
/4,
1
2
Tube-Brass Tip, Silver Brazed
R 316L stainless steel 1019 steel
C-Tube 12/1500
1
4,
1
2
Helical 2000/20,000
1
4,
1
2
S 316L stainless steel 316L stainless steel
C-Tube 12/1500
1
4,
1
2
Helical 2000/20,000
1
4,
1
2

P K Monel Monel 400
C-Tube 15/1500
1
4,
1
2
Helical 2000/30,000

1
4,
1
2
(3)
Type 1279 Duragauge

pressure
gauge is offered in 4
1
/2 phenolic
case for superior chemical and heat
resistance. Solid-front case design
with blow-out back for safety. Dry,
liquid-lled, hermetically sealed,
weatherproof or PLUS!

options
available. Field convertible to liquid-
ll with conversion kit (detailed on
page 247). All case styles provide full
temperature compensation.
4
1
/2 full-size Bourdon tube
Patented Duratube with as-welded-
tube construction controls stress
for longer life
Round Cap Tip construction
lowers stresses for longer life
Easily adjustable, self-locking
micrometer pointer
Burn-resistant phenol turret case
Exclusive Tefon coated 400 series
stainless steel rotary movement
for longer life
PLUS!

Performance Option:
- Liquid-flled performance in a dry
gauge
- Fights vibration and pulsations
without liquid-flled headaches
MADE IN U.S.A.
Duragauge

Pressure Gauge
Type 1279, ASME B 40.100
Grade 2A (0.5% of span)

(1) For selection of the correct Bourdon system material, see the media application table on page 265.
(2) Other connections available on application.
(3) 30,000 psi range supplied with
1
4 high pressure connection,
1
2 NPT optional.
NOTE:
Equivalent standard
kg/cm
2
, and kPa metric
ranges are available.
(
*
) S denotes solid front case design
TO ORDER THIS 1279 DURAGAUGE:
Select: 45 1279 SS* 04L XXX 2000#
1. Dial size4
1
2
2. Case type1279
Ringthreaded reinforced polypropylene
3. Bourdon system selection ordering code
4. Connection
1
4 NPT (02),
1
2 NPT (04), Lower (L), Back (B)
5. Optional featuressee page 261-262 (See pages 82 and 83 for additional ranges)
6. Standard pressure range
7. Accessoriessee pages 255-260
- See pages 6-7 for details
- Order as option XLL
Liquid flled case option (Code L)
Epoxy-coated system for superior
corrosion resistance
See pages 82 and 83 for additional ranges.
45-1279-SSL-04L-XTS-0-160
261
Consult factory for guidance in product selection
Phone (203) 378-8281 or visit our web site at
www.ashcroft.com
Options for Process, Stainless
Steel, Test and Industrial
Pressure Gauges
T
E
S
T

G
A
U
G
E
S

1
0
0
8
S

1
0
1
0
,

1
0
1
7
,

1
2
2
0
1
4
9
0
/
1
4
9
5

S
E
R
I
E
S
1
0
0
9

(
4
1
/
2

,

6

)
1
0
0
9

(
2
1
/
2

,

3
1
/
2

)
D
U
R
A
G
A
U
G
E

G
A
U
G
E
S
CODE DESCRIPTION PRESSURE GAUGE TYPE
NOTES:
The options listed above are only a partial listing. For other options on these or other pressure instruments please call the factory for availability.
(1) Available on 63mm and 100mm.
(2) Available on 40mm and 50mm. Standard window material is glass for 40/50mm 1008S.
(3) Standard 63 & 100mm.
XLL PLUS!

Performance
(1)
XBF WaII mounting bracket
XFW Back ange
XFF Front ange


XUC U-clamp
XLJ Dry liquid-llable gauge
XOS Overload stop STD
(3)
STD
XVS Underload stop STD
(3)
STD
XTS Throttle screw
XTU Throttle plug
XS4 Slotted link movement (decrease)
XRJ Slotted link (increase)
XAP Adjustable pointer
XMP Micrometer pointer STD STD
XSH Red set hand stationary
XEO Red set hand adjustable
XEP Maximum pointer
XEQ Minimum pointer
XPD Plastic window STD STD
(2)
STD
XSG Safety glass
XRG Regular glass STD STD STD STD STD
XDA Dial marking
XNN Paper tag
XNH Stainless steel tag
XAB Absolute pressure
XAJ
1
2% optional accuracy STD STD
XAN 1% optional accuracy STD STD
XRA Retard scale
XBD Black dial
X6B Oxygen-cleaned gauges (gaseous)
XTB Tip bleed
XED High and low electric contacts
XEE Double high-electric contacts
XEF Double low-electric contacts
XEG Electric contacts off at low or
high and in-between
XGV Silicone-lled gauge


XGX Halocarbon-lled gauge
XCH Carrying handle
XC4 Calibration Chart
1
2
5
9
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal













Mechanical Seal




























442

S P L I T M E C H A N I C A L S E A L
H I G H P E R F O R M A N C E E A S Y T O I N S T A L L
442
442

SPLI T MECHANI CAL SEAL PATENTED


Broad range of sizesto diameters of 24 inches (610 mm) and beyond
Easy to install/simple field repairno glued or bonded components
Superior performance, high pressure, and vacuum sealing
Compact design fits most rotating equipment
The difference is obvious
Chesterton, the world leader in split seal technology, has the largest installed base
globally. Our broad experience in split sealing enables a wide array of users to improve
plant efficiencies. Today, with years of proven performance, Chesterton split seals are
used in more types of equipment, sealing more types of process materials.
SI DE ENTRY MI XERS HORI ZONTAL SPLI T CASE PUMPS VERTI CAL PUMPS
Operating Parameters
Pressure* 28" (710 mm) Hg to 450 Psig (30 bar g)
Temperature To 250F (120C)
Speed To 4000 fpm (20 m/s)
Size 1.250" (32 mm) to 7.750" (195 mm)
Materials of Construction
Component Standard Materials
Rotary Face Ceramic
Silicon Carbide
Stationary Face Carbon
Duplex Carbide

Silicon Carbide
Elastomers Aflas

Ethylene Propylene
Fluorocarbon
Spring Elgiloy

Metal Parts 316 Stainless Steel


*Seal pressure capabilities are dependent on the fluid sealed, temperature,
speed, and seal face combinations.
Consult Chesterton Engineering for your applications, including applications
exceeding published operating parameters, and for additional seal sizes.
PERFORMANCE
442 high pressure and vacuum sealing
Patented ramped stationary design keeps seal face splits together under pressure and
vacuum conditions, ensuring reliable sealing during pressure to vacuum shifts.
Under pressure conditions
the seal ring halves are forced
together.
Under vacuum conditions
atmospheric pressure acts on
o-rings, forcing them against
the ramped surfaces of the
seal faces.
Ramped surfaces cause radial
and axial closing forces to keep
splits together.
Chesterton patented innovation
drives performance
The 442s unique, patented adjustable gland, with
captured fasteners, and automatic centering deliver
unsurpassed ease of use.
We raised the bar! The 442 Split Seal pressure capability has been increased
to 450 Psig (30 bar g). This is over twice that of most split seals, enabling the
use of the 442 in a much larger application base.
Proven Design, Superior Performance
Chesterton split seals are installed in all types of
equipment and deliver years of reliable service.
2
Why disassemble equipment?
Chestertons 442 Split Mechanical Seal offers a reliable sealing
solutionreducing maintenance costs.
Reduces install time Avoids coupling realignment
Eliminates sleeve wear Increases equipment availability
Easy to install
P shaped spacer positions the 442 seal for
easy installation.
Ball-and-socket o-rings are leak-free, without
the use of adhesives.
Installation video is available to demonstrate
easy installation.
RELI ABI LI TY THROUGH I NNOV
Applications include:
Cooling tower pumps
Raw water pumps
Side entry mixers
Blenders
Processing tanks
Fermentors
Condensate pumps
Process pumps
Top entry mixers
Bottom entry mixers
Vacuum pumps
Boiler feed pumps
Stern tubes
Conveyors
Fans
Dryers
Cookers
Water turbines
442 Split Seal Innovations
Patented Adjustable Gland
Patented adjustable gland tabs fit your
equipment bolt position. Easy adjustment
avoids special order gland designs
necessary with other split seals.
Integral Flush Ports
Dual flush ports, located 180

apart and
combined with the adjustable gland,
give maximum flexibility when venting
or flushing.
Patented Captured Fasteners
Captured fasteners remain in the 442 seal
housings when disassembled. Captured
fasteners make installation easier.
Non-Clogging Springs
Non-clogging finger springs, positioned out of
the sealed fluid, avoid clogging while allowing
substantial axial shaft movement.
Balanced Seal Design
Hydraulically-balanced, computer-modeled
seal face design generates less heat for more
reliable sealing.
Patented Automatic Centering
Centering buttons align the rotating element
inside the seal gland. Automatic centering
delivers simplified installation.
Compact Gland
The 442 low-profile gland fits more equipment
without the need for modification or special
adaptation.
Captive Groove Design
The 442 seals captive o-ring groove holds the
split shaft o-ring in place, without adhesives,
to simplify installation and field repair.
8
7
6
5
4
3
1
2
4
8
6
5
7
1
4
3
VATI ON
3
GLOBAL SOLUTI ONS, LOCAL SERVI CE
Since 1884, Chesterton has been providing value driven solutions
to meet industrys needs. Chesterton solutions have been
implemented around the world with documented success and
recognition. Increasing equipment reliability, optimizing energy
consumption, and providing local technical support and service
are what Chesterton offers industry worldwide.

Servicing Plants in Over 100 Countries

Global Manufacturing Operations

Over 500 Service Centers and Sales Offices Worldwide

Over 1200 Trained Local Service Specialists and Technicians


Visit our website at
www.chesterton.com
DISTRIBUTED BY:
FORM NO. 073385 PART A PRINTED IN USA 5/07
860 Salem Street
Groveland, MA 01834 USA
Telephone: 781-438-7000
Fax: 978-469-6528
www.chesterton.com
A.W. ChestertonCompany,2007. All rights reserved.
Registeredtrademark ownedandlicensedby
A.W. ChestertonCompanyinUSAandother countries.
Chesterton ISO certificates available on www.chesterton.com/corporate/iso
Aflas is a registered trademark of Asahi Glass Company Ltd.
Elgiloy is a registered trademark of Elgiloy Limited Partnership.
Technical data reflects results of laboratory tests and is intended to indicate general characteristics only.
A.W. CHESTERTON CO. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESSED, OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE. LIABILITY, IF ANY, IS LIMITEDTO PRODUCT REPLACEMENT ONLY.
442

Installation
Instructions
MECHANICAL SEAL
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2
EQUIPMENT PREPARATION
1
3 4

200
.005"
0,13 mm
32 "
0,8 m
R
a
.002"
0,05mm

1000


CAUTIONS
These instructions are general in nature. It is assumed that
the installer is familiar with seals and certainly with the
requirements of their plant for the successful use of
mechanical seals. If in doubt, get assistance from someone
in the plant who is familiar with seals or delay the installation
until a seal representative is available. All necessary auxiliary
arrangements for successful operation (heating, cooling,
flushing) as well as safety devices must be employed. These
decisions are to be made by the user. The chemical listing
is intended as a general reference for this seal only. The
decision to use this seal or any other Chesterton seal in a
particular service is the customer's responsibility.
2
SEAL PREPARATION
SCREW AND BOLT TORQUE
SEAL SIZE HOLDER CAP SCREWS* GLAND CAP STUFFING BOX
(X) SCREWS** (Y) BOLTS** (Z)
up to 2.50" 40 in-lbf 43 in-lbf 125 - 175 in-lbf 15 - 20 ft-lbf
(60 mm) (4,5 Nm) (4,8 Nm) (14-20 Nm) (13,5 -27 Nm)
up to 4.75" 100 in-lbf 110 in-lbf 150 - 200 in-lbf 20 - 25 ft-lbf
(120 mm) (11,3 Nm) (12,4 Nm) (17-23 Nm) (27-34 Nm)
up to 7.75" 325 in-lbf 325 in-lbf 200 - 300 in-lbf 20 -30 ft-lbf
(195 mm) (36,8 Nm) (36,8 Nm) (23-34 Nm) (27-40 Nm)
* Recommended maximum. ** Typical values.
Torque necessary to seat stuffing box gasket varies with bolt size and gasket sealing surfaces.
5 15
11
12
4
3
2
10
16
1. Rotary Holder
2. Socket Head Cap Screw (X)
3. Holder Gasket
4. Shaft O-ring
5. Rotary O-ring
6. Rotary Face
7. Stationary Face
8. Stationary O-Ring
9. Gland Gasket
10. Socket Head Cap Screw (Y)
11. Stuffing Box Gasket
12. Anti-Rotation Pin
13. Bolt Tab
14. Spring
15. Centering Button
16. Gland
17. Stuffing Box Bolts (Z)
1
9
8
14
7
17
6
13
Please read these instructions and
make sure you understand them
before installing the seal.
Installation is easy provided the parts
are handled and installed carefully.
Make sure your hands are clean.
Any dirt particles on the seal faces or
splits during handling may cause seal
failure. Prepare a clean work surface on
which to place parts during
assembly/disassembly.
Prepare the Seal for Installation (1-6)
1. Disengage the socket head cap
screws from one half of the gland.
With the gland in a horizontal
position, springs up, separate
the halves and place them on
the clean work surface.
2. You now have access to the rotary
holder. Disengage the two socket
head cap screws from one half
of the rotary holder and place
the holder halves on the
clean work surface.
3. Remove the rotary and stationary
seal faces from their packages and
place on the clean work surface.
4. Make sure that the gland gaskets,
holder gaskets, stuffing box gasket
(no grease), and shaft O-ring are
properly greased and seated in
their grooves. Note the gold mark
on one end of each half of the cut
static o-ring. Assure that the O-ring
is placed in the rotary holder such
that the two gold marks mate at
one joint. Do not glue the gland
or holder gaskets in place.
5. Snap open the ball and socket joint
of the O-rings by pulling at the seam.
(NOTE: The rotary O-ring is slightly
longer and is marked with a purple
dot.) Do not apply grease or glue
to the balls and sockets of the
O-rings.
6. Install seal per instructions
(pages 3 & 4).
NOTES:
The gland, rotary holder, and
face halves are matched pairs; mixing
components from different seals will
result in seal failure.
Handle parts carefully. Greasy
fingerprints on seal faces or misaligned
face splits may cause leakage.
EQUIPMENT START UP
1. Rotate the shaft by hand to ensure
no metal-to-metal contact within
the seal. A slight drag may be found
due to the seal faces but the shaft
should rotate freely.
2. Attach appropriate plumbing to the
seal. Take all necessary precautions
and follow normal safety procedures
before starting the equipment.
3. Depending on how carefully the
seal components were handled
during installation, split seals
may drip on startup. For example,
greasy fingerprints on the faces or
misaligned face splits may cause
leakage. This type of leakage usually
decreases and stops over a period
of time as a carbon face wears in or
leak paths are sealed. However,
leakage greater than 60 drops per
minute should be investigated
immediately. If the leakage remains
steady, check O-rings and gaskets
for proper installation and check the
faces for chips, scratches, and
proper alignment.
3
INSTALLATION
2 1 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12
13 14 15
INSTALLATION
23 24
4
22
SEAL REBUILD
1. Only the gland and rotary holder are
reused.
CAUTION: The gland, holder,
and face halves are matched pairs;
do not mix halves from different seals
since this will cause seal failure.
2. The following tools may be required
for rebuild:
Vice grips (remove drive pin)
Arbor press (replace drive pin)
Blunt thin lever (remove buttons)
Rubber mallet (replace buttons
and springs)
Channel lock pliers
(remove springs)
Isopropyl alcohol/acetone
(clean gasket surface)
3. Disassemble the seal, noting the
condition of the parts. Analyze the
cause of failure and correct the
problem, if possible, before
reinstalling the seal.
4. Rebuild of the rotary holder is
optional if the shaft O-ring, holder
gaskets and drive pin are in good
condition.
Seal Drive Pin
Size Protrusion
up to 2 1/2" 0.188"
(60 mm) (4,8 mm)
up to 4 3/4" 0.290"
(120 mm) (7,4 mm)
up to 7 3/4" 0.435"
(195 mm) (11 mm)
5. Replacement of springs is optional.
Do not replace if springs are in good
condition. Ensure all springs are
properly seated, and parallel to the
back of the gland.
6. Remove the stuffing box gasket
from the gland face and remove
the adhesive residue with isopropyl
alcohol or acetone. After peeling
off the protective backing, seat the
gasket halves in the gland recess,
overlapping the gland splits. Be
careful not to wrinkle the gasket
as you install it.
NOTE:
Please see Seal Rebuild images
1 through 18.
16 17 18
19 20 21
5
4 5 6
1 2 3
SEAL REBUILD
7 8
12
15
9
13
16
14
10
17 18
11
6
DIMENSIONAL DATA (DRAWINGS)
MOUNTING CONFIGURATIONS
P NPT
2 PLACES
L
B
G
C
D
F
E
A H
O
M
N
2 BOLTS 3 BOLTS 4 BOLTS
4.875" to 7.750" (125 mm to 195 mm) Extra Large
up to 1.500" (up to 38 mm) Small
2 BOLTS 3 BOLTS 4 BOLTS
1.625" to 2.500" (40 mm to 60 mm)
2.625" to 4.750" (65 mm to 120 mm)
7
DIMENSIONAL DATA (INCH)
A B C D E F G MIN H L O
MAX MIN MAX MIN 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" 3/4" 7/8" MIN MAX O-RING
1.250 4.91 1.86 2.10 1.48 0.17 1.78 3.17 3.29 3.42 3.54 3.67 2.35 2.79 -219
1.375 5.01 1.94 2.38 1.48 0.17 1.78 3.25 3.38 3.50 3.63 3.75 2.63 2.86 -221
1.500 5.13 2.06 2.50 1.48 0.17 1.78 3.38 3.50 3.62 3.75 3.87 2.75 2.99 -223
1.625 5.26 2.19 2.63 1.48 0.17 1.78 3.50 3.62 3.75 3.87 4.00 2.87 3.11 -224
1.750 5.38 2.31 2.75 1.48 0.17 1.78 3.63 3.75 3.87 4.00 4.12 3.00 3.24 -225
1.875 5.50 2.44 2.88 1.48 0.17 1.78 3.75 3.87 4.00 4.12 4.25 3.12 3.36 -226
2.000 5.63 2.56 3.00 1.48 0.17 1.78 3.88 4.00 4.12 4.25 4.37 3.25 3.49 -227
2.125 5.76 2.69 3.12 1.48 0.17 1.78 4.00 4.12 4.25 4.37 4.50 3.37 3.62 -228
2.250 5.88 2.81 3.25 1.48 0.17 1.78 4.13 4.25 4.37 4.50 4.62 3.50 3.74 -229
2.375 6.01 2.94 3.37 1.48 0.17 1.78 4.25 4.37 4.50 4.62 4.75 3.62 3.87 -230
2.500 6.13 3.06 3.75 1.48 0.17 1.78 4.63 4.75 4.87 5.00 5.12 4.00 4.24 -231
2.625 7.76 3.35 4.25 1.84 0.26 2.24 5.38 5.50 5.63 5.75 5.88 4.75 4.98 -232
2.750 7.76 3.35 4.25 1.84 0.26 2.24 5.38 5.50 5.63 5.75 5.88 4.75 4.98 -233
2.875 8.01 3.60 4.50 1.84 0.26 2.24 5.63 5.75 5.88 6.00 6.13 5.00 5.23 -234
3.000 8.01 3.60 4.50 1.84 0.26 2.24 5.63 5.75 5.88 6.00 6.13 5.00 5.23 -235
3.125 8.26 3.85 4.75 1.84 0.26 2.24 5.88 6.00 6.13 6.25 6.38 5.25 5.48 -236
3.250 8.26 3.85 4.75 1.84 0.26 2.24 5.88 6.00 6.13 6.25 6.38 5.25 5.48 -237
3.375 8.51 4.10 5.00 1.84 0.26 2.24 6.13 6.25 6.38 6.50 6.63 5.50 5.73 -238
3.500 8.51 4.10 5.00 1.84 0.26 2.24 6.13 6.25 6.38 6.50 6.63 5.50 5.73 -239
3.625 8.77 4.35 5.25 1.84 0.26 2.24 6.38 6.50 6.63 6.75 6.88 5.75 5.98 -240
3.750 8.77 4.35 5.25 1.84 0.26 2.24 6.38 6.50 6.63 6.75 6.88 5.75 5.98 -241
3.875 9.02 4.60 5.50 1.84 0.26 2.24 6.63 6.75 6.88 7.00 7.13 6.00 6.24 -242
4.000 9.02 4.60 5.50 1.84 0.26 2.24 6.63 6.75 6.88 7.00 7.13 6.00 6.24 -243
4.125 9.27 4.85 5.75 1.84 0.26 2.24 6.88 7.00 7.13 7.25 7.38 6.25 6.49 -244
4.250 9.27 4.85 5.75 1.84 0.26 2.24 6.88 7.00 7.13 7.25 7.38 6.25 6.49 -245
4.375 9.52 5.10 6.00 1.84 0.26 2.24 7.13 7.25 7.38 7.50 7.63 6.50 6.74 -246
4.500 9.52 5.10 6.00 1.84 0.26 2.24 7.13 7.25 7.38 7.50 7.63 6.50 6.74 -247
4.625 9.77 5.35 6.25 1.84 0.26 2.24 7.38 7.50 7.63 7.75 7.88 6.75 6.99 -248
4.750 9.77 5.35 6.25 1.84 0.26 2.24 7.38 7.50 7.63 7.75 7.88 6.75 6.99 -249
4.875 11.276 5.865 7.000 2.91 0.29 3.45 8.375 8.500 8.625 7.50 7.74 -353
5.000 11.276 5.990 7.000 2.91 0.29 3.45 8.375 8.500 8.625 7.50 7.74 -354
5.125 11.528 6.115 7.250 2.91 0.29 3.45 8.625 8.750 8.875 7.75 7.99 -355
5.250 11.528 6.240 7.250 2.91 0.29 3.45 8.625 8.750 8.875 7.75 7.99 -356
5.375 11.778 6.365 7.500 2.91 0.29 3.45 8.875 9.000 9.125 8.00 8.24 -357
5.500 11.778 6.490 7.500 2.91 0.29 3.45 8.875 9.000 9.125 8.00 8.24 -358
5.625 12.030 6.615 7.750 2.91 0.29 3.45 9.125 9.250 9.375 8.25 8.49 -359
5.750 12.030 6.740 7.750 2.91 0.29 3.45 9.125 9.250 9.375 8.25 8.49 -360
5.875 12.282 6.865 8.000 2.91 0.29 3.45 9.375 9.500 9.625 8.50 8.74 -361
6.000 12.282 6.990 8.000 2.91 0.29 3.45 9.375 9.500 9.625 8.50 8.74 -362
6.125 12.532 7.115 8.250 2.91 0.29 3.45 9.625 9.750 9.875 8.75 8.99 -362
6.250 12.532 7.240 8.250 2.91 0.29 3.45 9.625 9.750 9.875 8.75 8.99 -363
6.375 12.784 7.365 8.500 2.91 0.29 3.45 9.875 10.000 10.125 9.00 9.25 -363
6.500 12.784 7.490 8.500 2.91 0.29 3.45 9.875 10.000 10.125 9.00 9.25 -364
6.625 13.034 7.615 8.750 2.91 0.29 3.45 10.125 10.250 10.375 9.25 9.50 -364
6.750 13.034 7.740 8.750 2.91 0.29 3.45 10.125 10.250 10.375 9.25 9.50 -365
6.875 13.286 7.865 9.000 2.91 0.29 3.45 10.375 10.500 10.625 9.50 9.75 -365
7.000 13.286 7.990 9.000 2.91 0.29 3.45 10.375 10.500 10.625 9.50 9.75 -366
7.125 13.538 8.115 9.250 2.91 0.29 3.45 10.625 10.750 10.875 9.75 10.00 -366
7.250 13.538 8.240 9.250 2.91 0.29 3.45 10.625 10.750 10.875 9.75 10.00 -367
7.375 13.788 8.365 9.500 2.91 0.29 3.45 10.875 11.000 11.125 10.00 10.25 -367
7.500 13.788 8.490 9.500 2.91 0.29 3.45 10.875 11.000 11.125 10.00 10.25 -368
7.625 14.040 8.615 9.750 2.91 0.29 3.45 11.125 11.250 11.375 10.25 10.50 -368
7.750 14.040 8.740 9.750 2.91 0.29 3.45 11.125 11.250 11.375 10.25 10.50 -369
KEY (drawings)
SIZE M N P
up to 2.50" .53 .094 1/4
(38 mm) (13,5) (2,4)
up to 4.75" .53 .094 3/8
(120 mm) (13,5) (2,4)
up to 7.75" 1.03 .188 1/2
(195 mm) (26,0) (4,8)
KEY (chart)
A Shaft Size
B Maximum Gland Diameter
C Min./Max. Stuffing Box Diameter
D Gland Length
E Minimum Stuffing Box Depth
F Outboard Length Required
G Minimum Bolt Circle by Bolt Size
H Minimum Stuffing Box Face O.D.
L Gland Hub OD
M Holder ID from Box
N Installation Dimension
O Shaft O-ring Number
P NPT Size
A B C D E F G MIN H L O
MAX MIN MAX MIN 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 14 mm 16 mm 18 mm 20 mm 22 mm MIN MAX O-RING
32,0 124,7 47,2 53,3 37,6 4,3 45,2 78,9 80,9 82,9 84,9 86,9 59,9 70,9 -219
33,0 124,7 47,2 53,3 37,6 4,3 45,2 78,9 80,9 82,9 84,9 86,9 59,9 70,9 -220
35,0 126,7 49,3 60,5 37,6 4,3 45,2 80,6 82,6 84,6 86,6 88,6 66,8 72,6 -221
38,0 130,3 52,3 63,5 37,6 4,3 45,2 83,9 85,9 87,9 89,9 91,9 69,9 75,9 -223
40,0 133,6 55,6 66,8 37,6 4,3 45,2 87,0 89,0 91,0 93,0 95,0 73,2 79,0 -223
43,0 136,7 58,7 70,0 37,6 4,3 45,2 90,3 92,3 94,3 96,3 98,3 76,2 82,3 -224
45,0 136,7 58,7 70,0 37,6 4,3 45,2 90,3 92,3 94,3 96,3 98,3 76,2 82,3 -225
48,0 139,7 62,0 73,2 37,6 4,3 45,2 93,3 95,3 97,3 99,3 101,3 79,5 85,3 -226
50,0 143,0 65,0 76,2 37,6 4,3 45,2 96,6 98,6 100,6 102,6 104,6 82,6 88,6 -226
55,0 146,3 68,3 79,2 37,6 4,3 45,2 99,9 101,9 103,9 105,9 107,9 85,9 91,9 -228
60,0 152,7 74,7 85,6 37,6 4,3 45,2 106,8 108,8 110,8 112,8 114,8 92,2 98,8 -230
65,0 197,1 85,1 108,0 46,7 6,6 56,9 138,5 140,5 142,5 144,5 146,5 120,7 126,5 -231
70,0 197,1 85,1 108,0 46,7 6,6 56,9 138,5 140,5 142,5 144,5 146,5 120,7 126,5 -233
75,0 203,5 91,4 114,3 46,7 6,6 56,9 144,8 146,8 148,8 150,8 152,8 127,0 132,8 -234
80,0 209,8 97,8 120,7 46,7 6,6 56,9 151,2 153,2 155,2 157,2 159,2 133,4 139,2 -236
85,0 216,2 104,1 127,0 46,7 6,6 56,9 157,5 159,5 161,5 163,5 165,5 139,7 145,5 -237
90,0 216,2 104,1 127,0 46,7 6,6 56,9 157,5 159,5 161,5 163,5 165,5 139,7 145,5 -239
95,0 222,8 110,5 133,4 46,7 6,6 56,9 163,9 165,9 167,9 169,9 171,9 146,1 151,9 -241
100,0 229,1 116,8 139,7 46,7 6,6 56,9 170,5 172,5 174,5 176,5 178,5 152,4 158,5 -242
110,0 241,8 129,5 152,4 46,7 6,6 56,9 183,2 185,2 187,2 189,2 191,2 165,1 171,2 -245
115,0 241,8 129,5 152,4 46,7 6,6 56,9 183,2 185,2 187,2 189,2 191,2 165,1 171,2 -247
120,0 248,2 135,9 158,8 46,7 6,6 56,9 189,5 191,5 193,5 195,5 197,5 171,5 177,5 -248
125,0 286,4 150,1 177,8 73,9 7,4 87,6 214,6 216,6 218,6 190,5 196,6 -354
130,0 292,8 155,1 184,2 73,9 7,4 87,6 220,9 222,9 224,9 196,9 202,9 -355
135,0 299,2 160,1 190,5 73,9 7,4 87,6 227,3 229,3 231,3 203,2 209,3 -356
140,0 299,2 165,2 190,5 73,9 7,4 87,6 227,3 229,3 231,3 203,2 209,3 -358
145,0 305,6 170,2 196,9 73,9 7,4 87,6 233,6 235,6 237,6 209,6 215,6 -360
150,0 312,0 175,2 203,2 73,9 7,4 87,6 240,0 242,0 244,0 215,9 222,0 -361
155,0 318,0 180,1 209,6 73,9 7,4 87,6 246,3 248,3 250,3 222,3 228,3 -362
160,0 324,7 185,1 215,9 73,9 7,4 87,6 253,0 255,0 257,0 228,6 235,0 -363
165,0 324,7 190,1 215,9 73,9 7,4 87,6 253,0 255,0 257,0 228,6 235,0 -364
170,0 331,0 195,1 222,3 73,9 7,4 87,6 259,3 261,3 263,3 235,0 241,3 -364
175,0 337,5 200,2 228,6 73,9 7,4 87,6 265,7 267,7 269,7 241,3 247,7 -365
180,0 337,5 205,2 228,6 73,9 7,4 87,6 272,0 274,0 276,0 247,7 254,0 -366
185,0 343,9 210,2 235,0 73,9 7,4 87,6 272,0 274,0 276,0 247,7 254,0 -367
190,0 350,2 215,1 241,3 73,9 7,4 87,6 278,4 280,4 282,4 254,0 260,4 -368
195,0 356,6 220,1 247,7 73,9 7,4 87,6 284,7 286,7 288,7 260,4 266,7 -368
FORM NO. 072878 REV. 3 PRINTED IN USA 9/06
442 is a trademark of the A.W. Chesterton Company.
DIMENSIONAL DATA (METRIC)
KEY
A Shaft Size
B Maximum Gland Diameter
C Min./Max. Stuffing Box Diameter
D Gland Length
E Minimum Stuffing Box Depth
F Outboard Length Required
G Minimum Bolt Circle by Bolt Size
H Minimum Stuffing Box Face O.D.
L Gland Hub OD
M Holder ID from Box
N Installation Dimension
O Shaft O-ring Number
P NPT Size
860 Salem Street
Groveland, MA 01834 USA
Telephone: 781- 438-7000 Fax: 978- 469- 6528
www.chesterton.com
A.W. Chesterton Company, 2006. All rights reserved.
Registered trademark owned and licensed by
A.W. Chesterton Company in USA and other countries.
Large Sizes:
2.625" through 4.750" (65 mm through 120 mm)
Carbon/Ceramic -
(1750 RPM) 200 psig/14 bar g
Carbon/Reaction Bonded Silicon Carbide -
(1750 RPM) 250 psig/18 bar g
* Use high pressure holder above 200 psig (14 bar g)
Extra Large Sizes:
4.875" through 7.750" (125 mm through 195 mm)
Carbon/Ceramic -
(875 RPM) 200 psig/14 bar g
Carbon/Reaction Bonded Silicon Carbide -
(875 RPM) 200 psig/14 bar g
* Use high pressure holder above 150 psig (10 bar g)
Consult Application Engineering for
higher operating conditions.
OPERATING LIMITS
Speed Limits:
To 4000 fpm (20 mps)
Temperature Limits:
To 250F (120C)
Pressure Limits:
All 442 seals can withstand operating pressures
from full vacuum (28"/ 710 mm Hg) to the maximum
pressures at the conditions listed below.
Small Sizes:
1.250" through 2.500" (32 mm through 60 mm)
Carbon/Ceramic -
(1750 RPM) 350 psig/24 bar g
Carbon/Reaction Bonded Silicon Carbide -
(3600 RPM) 450 psig/30 bar g
* Use high pressure holder above 300 psig (20 bar g)
* Elgiloy is a Registered Trademark of Elgiloy Limited Partnership.
Asahi Glass Company Ltd. Registered Trademark.
ISO Certifications available at www.chesterton.com/corporate/iso

860 Salem Street
Groveland, MA 01834 USA

Tel: 978-469-6446
Fax: 978-469-6594

www.chesterton.com
Mechanical Seals Division




TO: Chesterton Customer
FROM: Applications Engineering.
SUBJ ECT: Startup Leakage Rates of Split Mechanical Seals

In applications using Chesterton 221 and/or 442 split seals, which are designed to run leak-free, it
is not unusual to have some leakage at start-up. Successful seal operation can be affected by shaft
size and speed, face combination and operating pressure, as well as fluid cleanliness and care
taken during installation.

The successful seal installation should be based upon any leakage at startup being reduced or not
visible at all. This occurs by the split components developing optimized interface and the
lubricated elastomers settling into proper position. It is this time frame that is referred to as the
Run in Duration.

The below split seal installation table has been created from installation experience and Chesterton
specialists feedback. The table should be used as a guide to judge seal installation and operation.

SEAL SIZE RUN IN
LEAKAGE
RUN IN
DURATION
OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE
1.5 to 2.5 <60 dpm* 24 hrs-72 hrs <40 dpm*
2.75 to 4.75 <90 dpm* 48 hrs -
144 hrs
<60 dpm*
5 to 7.750 <120 dpm* 72 hrs -
216 hrs
<80 dpm*
8 to 12 <150 dpm*
(12-15 ml/min)
96 hrs -
288 hrs
<100 dpm*

*dpm - drops per minute


Regards,

Application Engineering
Mechanical Seals.
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal












Vibration Switch





























1





.



General Description

These Robertshaw Vibraswitch Malfunction
Detectors are acceleration sensitive vibration
instruments with electronic circuitry to provide
maximum protection to rotating and reciprocating
machinery due to damages resulting from
mechanical malfunctions. Although identical in
outside appearance and dimensionally the same as
the existing Models 365 and 366, these instruments
include "built-in" electronic circuitry for start and/or
monitoring time delay functions for the prevention
of false shutdowns resulting from transient
vibrations. All models include provisions for remote
reset.

"Start Delay" is often required on machines that start
automatically and exhibit excessive vibration for
short periods of time only during starting. Proper set
point adjustment on the Vibraswitch for adequate
protection during normal running conditions may
cause the Vibraswitch to "trip" as the instrument
senses these high starting transient vibrations
without the use of "Start Delay." Examples of such
machines are refrigeration compressors and
high-speed turbines.

"Monitor Delay" is required on machines that
exhibit excessive vibration of a transient nature
which occurs during normal operation. If a
Vibraswitch without monitor delay has its set point
sufficiently high so as not to trip-out under the
transient vibration levels, inadequate protection
would result during the normal running conditions.
Examples of this type machine include liquid pumps
that experience momentary cavitations resulting in
excessive vibration.










Sales Manual Section 140
Product Specification Model 375A/376A

Model 375A/376A
Vibraswitch

Malfunction
Detectors















Features and Benefits:

Complete Vibration Protection in a
Single Package
Reasonably priced, lower installation costs

Explosion Proof Model (375A)
FM Approved

Weather Proof Model (376A)
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X (optional)

Acceleration Sensitive
Measures destructive forces

Selectable Time Delay Control Options
Permits maximum application flexibility

Ease of Adjustment
Set it and forget it one adjustment

Continuous Reliable Protection
No attention required after installation

Solid State Switching
Alarm or shutdown voltage completely
isolated from instrument supply

See revised submitted Metrix 440DR
Click here for redirect
2
Principle of Operation

The Model 375A and 376A Vibraswitches employ a
magnetic circuit opposed by inertial and adjustable spring
forces in the actuating mechanism. Operation of the unit
may be understood by reference to Figure 1










FIGURE 1

The armature is constrained so as to respond to only a
single direction of motion, by a frictionless flexure pivot
composed of two overlapping blocks with a leaf spring
loaded in one direction to hold the blocks together. The
armature rotates about the pivot, being forced in one
direction by the adjusting spring force and the other
direction by the magnetic force.

When the entire assembly is subjected to vibration
perpendicular to the base, the peak acceleration times the
effective mass of the armature produces an inertial force,
aided by the adjustable spring tending to force the
armature away from the stop pin and the restraining force
of the magnet. When the peak acceleration exceeds the set
point level, the armature leaves the stop pin, increasing
the air gap and decreasing the magnetic force with the
armature continuing to move up until it reaches the latch
magnet, actuating the switch during its upward travel. The
effect of temperature in the mechanism is negligible as
the elastic modulus of the adjusting spring and magnetic
flux through the air gap both decrease slightly with
increasing temperature thereby compensating each other.


Electronic Operation

"Start Delay Only" models hold the Vibraswitch armature
in its "reset" position for a preset starting time after
application of supply voltage to the instrument. This
prevents the Vibraswitch from tripping out during
machine startup. Fixed timing periods of 15, 30, 60 or 90
seconds are available. After the time period, the
Vibraswitch functions as normal with shutdown or alarm
functions provided by utilizing the SPDT switch contacts
in the unit.

"Monitor Delay Only" models prevent nuisance
shutdowns due to tripping-out of the Vibraswitch during
high level short term transient vibration conditions by
automatically resetting the Vibraswitch. Under continuing
high vibration, the Vibraswitch trips, is immediately reset,
trips out again and is reset; this sampling process
continuing until the time delay period has elapsed, after
which the unit remains "tripped" out. An AC output by
means of a solid state "TRIAC" switch can be used for
either ALARM or SHUTDOWN. The "TRIAC" switch
can be set for either NO or NC operation by repositioning
the jumper plug located on the circuit board.

"Start and Monitor Delay" models provide the control
functions of both START delay and MONITOR delay in
a single instrument. The "Start and Monitor Delay"
models employ the same "TRIAC" switch found in the
"Monitor Delay Only" models.


Specifications

Enclosure:
375A ...................... Aluminum, unpainted (standard)
FM Approved for Class I, Division 1,
Groups C & D; Class II, Division 1,
Groups E, F & G hazardous locations
Aluminum, epoxy painted (optional)
376A ...............Aluminum base, unpainted (standard)
with ABS thermoplastic cover &
Kraton thermoplastic gasket, NEMA 4.
Epoxy painted base (optional), NEMA 4X
Switch Contacts:
Start Delay Only Models:
SPDT (dry contacts)
5 A at 120 or 240 VAC
Monitor or Start & Monitor Delay Models:
SPST Triac (solid state contacts)
2 A maximum, 50 mA minimum at
120 VAC only (will not switch DC)
Field selectable for NO or NC operation
Set Point Range:
Mounted Horizontal ..................... 0 to 4.5 G (peak)
Mounted Vertical .......................... 0 to 3.5 G (peak)
Frequency Range .......................................... 0 to 300 Hz
Set Point Adjustment .............1 G per turn (approximate)
Temperature limits:
Storage .................... -40 to +160 F (-40 to +71 C)
Operating ................ -20 to +140 F (-29 to +60 C)
Shock ........................................ 75 G @ 11 ms maximum
Supply Voltage: ...................... 120 VAC 10%, 50/60 Hz
Supply Power: ........................................ 15 W maximum
Delay Time Accuracy: ............................................ 30%
Net weight:
375A .................................................. 6.5 lbs (2.9 kg)
376A ................................................... 2.25 lbs (1 kg)
Shipping weight:
375A ..................................................... 7 lbs (3.2 kg)
376A ..................................................... 3 lbs (1.4 kg)
Agency Certification:
375A .................. FM Files 0Q7A3.AE & 0R1H7.AE
376A ................................................................. None





S E T P O I N T
A D J U S T M E N T S C R E W
C O M P R E S S I O N
S P R I N G
L E A F S P R I N G
A R M A T U R E
S E N S I T I V E A X I S
R E S E T B U T T O N
L A T C H I N G M A G N E T
H O L D O W N M A G N E T
A I R G A P
S T O P P I N R E S E T C O I L
F L E X U R E P I V O T
S W I T C H
3
Ordering Information
375A A 3 C 4 E

Key Model Number
Supply Voltage See Table 1
Delay Function See Table 2
Start Delay Time See Table 3
Monitor Delay Time See Table 4
Special Options See Table 5

Key Model Number
Designation Description
375A Explosion Proof Vibraswitch, FM Certified
376A Weather Proof Vibraswitch, NEMA 4

Table 1 Supply Voltage
Designation Description
A 120 VAC 10%, 50/60 Hz

Table 2 Delay Function
Designation Description
1 Start Delay Only
2 Monitor Delay Only
3 Start & Monitor Delay

Table 3 Start Delay Time
Designation Description
A None
C 15 Seconds
D 30 Seconds
E 60 seconds
F 90 Seconds

Table 4 Monitor Delay Time
Designation Description
0 None
2 2 Seconds
3 5 Seconds
4 10 Seconds

Table 5 Special Options
Designation Description
Omit No special options
For the 375A Epoxy painted enclosure
E
For the 376A Epoxy painted base,
NEMA 4X


Accessory Items
(Must be ordered separately)
Part no. Description
904GB016
Rainshield for unprotected outdoor
installations, steel, zinc plated
904GB016-03
Rainshield, steel, zinc plated and painted
with gray epoxy enamel.

Model 376A Dimensions













































Note:
The mechanical reset pushbutton on the Vibraswitch will
only reset the mechanical portion of the Vibraswitch and
will not re-initiate the Start and/or Monitor Delay function
and will not reset the solid state switch. The mechanical
reset is normally only used when adjusting the set point.










4
Model 375A Dimensions




























Rainshield
Dimensions

Rainshields are recommended
for outdoor installations.
When using a rainshield the
Vibraswitch must be mounted
Vertical as shown.
Rainshields must be ordered
separately.
















































xxxxx








































Robertshaw Industrial Products
1602 Mustang Drive
Maryville, Tennessee 37801
Phone: (865) 981-3100 Fax: (865) 981-3168
http://www.robertshawindustrial.com

Q-3925 (5/07) Printed in U.S.A.
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal















Other Items





























SMITH
PUMP
COMPANY, INC.




301 M&B Industrial
(800) 299-8909 (254) 776-0377




Waco, Texas 76712
FAX (254) 776-0023

7437 Tower Street Ft. Worth, Texas 76118 (817) 589-2060 FAX (817) 595-4900
1900 Howard Lane West Austin, Texas 78728 (512) 310-1480 FAX (512) 310-1417
P.O. Box 33516 San Antonio, Texas 78265 (210) 656-0530 FAX (210) 656-2372




DISCHARGE HEAD
ENGINEERING ANALYSIS
(Reed Frequency)

PROJECT 169737-01

Dake Construction

On the

Upper Trinity Regional Water District
Thomas Taylor RWTP
High Service Pump Station


VERTICAL TURBINE
PUMP


April 10, 2014

Revision A May 6, 2014
Revision B J une 18, 2014




INTRODUCTION

PURPOSE

Assess structural adequacy of the Discharge Head and Motor assembly.

SCOPE

Natural Frequency analysis of discharge head and motor assembly for variable
speed drive system.

Stress analysis of discharge head at design head and closed valve startup
conditions.


DOCUMENTS

HEAD 5013-058 manufacturing drawings.

WEG motor data, frame HFG-6809 WPI motor, drawing 10002803261 Rev 00, 900
hp, 1193 rpm, 10,606 lbs, 4000V 3P, 42.8 hz reed frequency, 40.02 CG. See note
in Analysis Conditions.

Flowserve 27EPM two stage pump data, pump curve EC-1698, drawing GS006101.


ANALYSIS METHOD

Commercially available CAE programs are used.

SOLIDWORKS

Complete solid modeling of discharge head and simulation of motor.

SIMULATION PROFESSIONAL

Finite Element Analysis (FEA) of discharge head and motor assembly for reed
frequency analysis.

Finite Element Analysis of discharge head stresses at design and closed valve
startup conditions.

ANALYSIS CONDITIONS

A 900 hp motor drives the pump at 60-100% of the nominal motor operating speed
of 1200 rpm. Actual speed varies from 716-1193 rpm.

Pump shutoff head is 390 feet at 1193 rpm, design head is 220 feet.

Although the motor manufacturer gives a single reed frequency for the motor,
experience has revealed that motors of this type have two separate reed
frequencies, one in line with the conduit box and one at 90 to the box. For this
analysis the simulated motor has two reed frequencies separated by 20% (typical
for this type motor) and is oriented on the discharge head to generate the lowest
system reed frequency.

Special Motor Note: The manufacturer gives a reed frequency of 42.8 Hz for this
motor. Experience with WEG has shown their vertical motor reed frequency
estimates are much higher than what the motor actually tests at. Emperical
evidence with other motor manufacturers indicates this motor should have a reed
frequency in the vicinity of 25 Hz not 42.8 Hz. Motor data used in this discharge
head design is with both 42.8 Hz and 25 Hz reed frequency with the same motor
weight and CG as given by WEG. Prior to installation the motor reed frequency will
be tested and the motor-discharge head reed frequency reanalyzed with this new
information. Any required discharge head modifications will be made prior to
installation.

RESULTS

REED FREQUENCY

Finite element analyses show that the closest discharge head motor
assembly natural resonant frequency is more than 20% below system minimum
operating speed of 716 rpm.

Reed frequency is acceptable.

STRESS ANALYSIS

Finite element analysis of forces shows that the discharge head has a design
factor greater than five at design head. Design factor is greater than three at
shutoff head.

Maximum discharge head stresses are acceptable.


ANALYSIS DETAILS

VON MISES STRESS AT 220 DESIGN HEAD

Highest stress is 6,083 psi at stuffing pipe extension into miter elbow. Header
is presumed to be free floating, i.e. not restrained.

VON MISES STRESS AT 390 STARTUP HEAD

Highest stress is 10,533 psi, located at stuffing pipe extension into miter elbow.
Header is presumed to be free floating, i.e. not restrained.

REED FREQUENCY, 1
st
MODE, 90 DEG TO DISCHARGE BRANCH

Natural frequency is 410 cpm, or 57% of minimum operating speed with 25Hz
motor, frequency is 415 cpm or 58% with 42.8Hz motor.

REED FREQUENCY, 2
nd
MODE, 0 DEG TO DISCHARGE BRANCH

Natural frequency is 434 cpm, or 61% of minimum operating speed with 25Hz
motor, frequency is 442 cpm or 62% with 42.8Hz motor.

REED FREQUENCY, 3
nd
MODE

Natural frequency is 2893 cpm, or 242% of maximum operating speed with
25Hz motor, frequency is 3243 cpm or 272% with 42.8Hz motor.




















Stress Distribution in Discharge Head at
Shutoff Head



SMITH
PUMP
COMPANY, INC.




301 M&B Industrial
(800) 299-8909 (254) 776-0377




Waco, Texas 76712
FAX (254) 776-0023

7437 Tower Street Ft. Worth, Texas 76118 (817) 589-2060 FAX (817) 595-4900
1900 Howard Lane West Austin, Texas 78728 (512) 310-1480 FAX (512) 310-1417
P.O. Box 33516 San Antonio, Texas 78265 (210) 656-0530 FAX (210) 656-2372




BELOW GROUND DYNAMIC
ENGINEERING ANALYSIS

PROJECT 169737-01

For

Dake Construction

On the

Upper Trinity Regional Water District
Thomas Taylor RWTP
High Service Pump Station


VERTICAL TURBINE
PUMP


April 11, 2014

Revision A May 6, 2014
Revision B June 30, 2014



Page 2 of 7

INTRODUCTION

PURPOSE

Assess system response of the Motor Pump assembly to include frequency
and vibration amplitudes.

SCOPE

Natural Frequency response analysis of pump system comprised of motor,
discharge head, column pipes, pump (includes suction bell and discharge
case), and enclosing tubes for variable speed drive system.

DOCUMENTS

Manufacturing drawings for head 5013-058 Rev A, columns 5002-123, 5002-124,
Rev A and vortex suppressor 5050-161.

WEG motor data, frame HFG-6809 WPI motor, drawing 10002803261 Rev 00, 900
hp, 1193 rpm, 10,606 lbs, 4000V 3P, 42.8 hz reed frequency, 40.02 CG. See note
in Analysis Conditions.

Flowserve 27EPM two stage pump data, pump curve EC-1698, drawing GS006101.


ANALYSIS METHOD

Commercially available CAE programs are used.

SOLIDWORKS

Complete modeling of discharge head, columns, and enclosing tubes with
simulation of pump and motor. For improved accuracy mixed mode modeling is
utilized. Columns are modeled as a combination of solids (flanges) and shell
elements (all other column parts). Discharge head is modeled as solid
elements. Vortex suppressor is represented as a remote mass.

SIMULATION PROFESSIONAL

Finite Element Analysis (FEA) of pump system for reed frequency analysis.

Page 3 of 7

ANALYSIS CONDITIONS

A 900 hp motor drives the pump at 60-100% of the nominal motor
operating speed of 1200 rpm. Actual speed varies from 716-1193 rpm.

Motor reed frequency as given by the manufacturer is a single value.
Experience has shown that motors of this type do not have just one
reed frequency; they have two reed frequencies of interest. Actual
motor reed frequencies are typically aligned at 0 & 90 to the terminal
box. For these reed frequency calculations the simulated motor has
two reed frequencies separated by ~20%.

Special Motor Note: The manufacturer gives a reed frequency of 42.8
Hz for this motor. Experience with WEG has shown their vertical motor
reed frequency estimates are much higher than what the motor actually
tests at. Empirical evidence with other motor manufacturers indicates
this motor should have a reed frequency in the vicinity of 25 Hz not
42.8 Hz. Motor data used in this discharge head design is 25 Hz and
42.8 Hz reed frequency with the same motor weight and CG as given
by WEG. Prior to installation the motor reed frequency will be tested
and the motor-discharge head reed frequency reanalyzed with this new
information. Any required modifications will be made prior to
installation.

Note: Previous Below Ground Analysis did not include water in the
column this was an error. Mass added to the column by water lowers
reed frequencies.

RESULTS REED FREQUENCY

Finite element analyses show that the first seven response frequencies
go from well below minimum run speed to above maximum run speed.
Frequencies are given in Cycles Per Minute.

Modes 1 and 2 are almost the same frequency but vibrate at 90to
each other. Modes 3 and 4 likewise are nearly the same frequency but
again their directions of motion are at 90to each other. Modes 5 & 6
are again almost the same frequency with motion again at 90to each
other. Modes 5 & 6 are inside the run range of the pump. Modes 7 & 8
are well above full run speed.

Results with 25Hz motor reed frequency



Mode 1,2 Mode 3,4 Mode 5,6 Mode 7 Mode 8
CPM 129-133 474-484 964-966 2295 2304
% Run 11% 41% 81% 193% 194%
Page 4 of 7



Results with 42.8Hz motor reed frequency





There is no significant change in column vibration modes when motor reed
frequency changes.



MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4

Modes 1 & 2 are dominated by the pump swinging back and forth as a pendulum
while Modes 3 & 4 are characterized by relatively small motion the column string.

Mode 1,2 Mode 3,4 Mode 5,6 Mode 7 Mode 8
CPM 129-133 481-491 967-968 2294 2311
% Run 11% 41% 81% 193% 194%
Page 5 of 7




MODE 5 MODE 6 MODE 7 MODE 8

Mode 5 & 6 are C shapes at 90 to each other. Mode 7 has the column and
pump rotating about the pump axis and Mode 8 is dominated by vertical motion
like a pogo stick.


RESULTS FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS

Reed Frequency Analysis shows that there are resonant modes within the system
run speed range. It is necessary to determine magnitude of vibrations within this
range and determine whether these vibration levels are within Hydraulic Institute
limits. To this end a Frequency Response analysis was conducted.

A Frequency Response Analysis requires force inputs across the frequency range
of interest which the FEA program uses to determine maximum deflections,
velocities and acceleration of components. The forces applied in this analysis are
the maximum imbalance forces permitted by a components balance grade when
running at full RPM. Motor balance grade is G2.5, for shafting and pump impellers
Page 6 of 7

balance grade is G6.3. With maximum imbalance defined, force curves were
generated using this defined imbalance at various speeds. Separate force curves
were generated for motor, shafting, and pump. Forces for all components at a
particular frequency were applied simultaneously in-phase for maximum effect.

Damping is required in a Frequency Response Analysis, otherwise at resonant
frequencies with forces applied indefinitely at that frequency the system develops
an infinite response. Modal damping was used in this analysis. Higher values of
modal damping reduce response to forces. For bolted steel structures the modal
damping ratio is typically in the range of 3%-7%. This range is for structures
vibrating in air. When immersed in or filled with viscous fluids damping ratio
increases. The column pipe and pump in this study are both filled with water with
the pump and a portion of the column pipe immersed in water. A modal damping
ratio higher than 3% can be justified but for this analysis the conservative value of
3% was used.

Hydraulic Institute Standard figures 9.6.4.2.3.1 and 9.6.4.2.5.1b give the maximum
vibration level of a vertical turbine pump as 0.170 inch/second. The standard
defines the location of this vibration as taken as the base of the motor. Since H.I.
does not give velocity values for the pump, maximum motor velocity is used.



Page 7 of 7

The response graph shows that the system is very responsive to forces applied at
the same frequency as Modes 1 & 2 but less responsive at the frequency of Modes
3 & 4. As forcing frequency increases and approaches Modes 5 & 6 there is a
increase in response. As forcing frequency increases past Modes 5 & 6 system
response does not decrease but continues to slowly increase. In this area forces
due to component imbalance increase rapidly with the square of RPM. Although
the response graph extends past 1200 rpm the pump is not permitted to run beyond
rated speed.

Response graph shows pump does not approach vibration limit. Pump vibration is
acceptable, speed lockout is not required.


H:\2001PROJ ECTS\VERTICAL TURBINE\[FLSVTP-UTRWD Thomas Taylor - 27ENM.xls]CRITICAL SPEED 4/10/2014
Shaft Critical Speed Calculations

The following is the equation used for calculating shaft critical speeds
( Fn above for Hinged/Hinged spans (H/H))
Fn =1.40 x (H/H) ( for Fixed/Hinged spans (F/H)) Fn =1.9 x (H/H) ( for Fixed/Fixed spans (F/F))
where:
I =moment of inertia of cross-section (0.05xD4) (in4)
E =modulus of Elasticity of material (lbs/in2) 25%This is the fire pump critical info. - do not change
g =acceleration due to gravity 386 inches/sec2 20%Input special specified % here
L =Length of shaft between two consecutive bearings (in) =column length +length to bearing 20%Input special specified % Under here
n =order of natural frequency or critical speed (1st or 2nd)
T =Axial thrust or force (lbs)
Fn =Natural frequency ( cycles/unit time ) also critical speed ( rev/unit time )
Pump operating speed 1193
Modulus of Elasticity 29000000
Pump thrust 17038
Shaft Dia (D) 2 17/25
weight of shaft in lb/in 1.5795
Specified % OVER, from operating speed requirement 20% --use 20% if nothing is specified in specifications
Specified % UNDER, from operating speed requiremen 20% --use 20% if nothing is specified in specifications
Type Column Order of fn
20% over operating speed = 1432 rpm of Length Critical (RPM)
20% under operating speed = 954 rpm Span (in) Speed
Head flange to SB bearing F/H 34.25 1 15412
(hard bearing to rubber bearing) 2 61037
Max. Column Length (Input B64) H/H 55.50 1 4281
(rubber bearing to rubber bearing) 2 16694
from Fairbanks Morse (10/25/04)
MODIFIED BY CLINTON TABOR TO FIT SPCO INPUTS (10/26/04)
Fn
n
L
g
w
E I
n
L
T =


|
\

|
.
| +
|
\

|
.
|
30
2
t

SMITH
PUMP
COMPANY, INC.

301M&BIndustrial
(800)2998909(254)7760377

Waco,Texas76712
FAX(254)7760023


TORSIONAL FREQUENCY ANALYSIS

PROJECT 169737-01

For

Dake Construction

On the

Upper Trinity Regional Water District
RTWS Thomas E. Taylor
Service Pump Station


VERTICAL TURBINE
PUMP P-06-02-09


May 07, 2014

Revision A - J une 18, 2014

Page|1

TORSIONALFREQUENCYANALYSIS
METHODOFCALCULATION
Thetorsionalnaturalfrequenciesandthemodeshapesofthisrotatingtrainwerecalculated
usingacomputerprogrambasedontheHolzerTabulationmethod.
Thesystemismodeledusingmassmomentsofinertiafortheimpeller,thelineshaftand
themotor.Themotorismodeledwithonemassmomentofinertia.

INPUTDATA
ThemasselasticdatainFigures1&Table1representstherotorsystemarrangement
forthecalculation.Thepolarmassmomentsofinertia(Jvalues)andthetorsionalspring
constant(Kvalues)aretheusedforthetorsionalnaturalfrequencycalculations.
ThemotorreferencedinTable1isa6pole1200RPMmotoroperatedatavariable
speedwithrotorinertiaof705lbft
2
.
ThepumpreferencedinTable1isaFLOWSERVEFS36ENM2STAGE.Ithasfivevanesand
totalpumpinertiaof155.68lbft
2
.
Table1:TorsionalAnalysisInputData
SpanNo. PolarMomentof
Inertia(lbft
2
)
TorsionalStiffness
(inlb/rad)
Component
1 705 19090268 Motor/MotorShaft
2 3.386117 539874 MotorCoupling/TopShaft
3 1.061864 1051448 TopShaft/LineShaft
4 0.545222 1051448 LineShaft/LineShaft
5 0.545222 1051448 LineShaft/LineShaft
6 0.545222 1051448 LineShaft/LineShaft
7 0.545222 1051448 LineShaft/LineShaft
8 0.545222 2878340 LineShaft/PumpShaft
9 155.68 Pump

Page|2

Figure1:CampbellDiagram

J=705lbft
2
k=19100000 inlb/rad
k=1050000 inlb/rad
k=540000 inlb/rad
k=1050000 inlb/rad
J=3.39lbft
2
J=1.06 lbft
2
J=156lbft
2
J=0.545lbft
2
k=1050000 inlb/rad
J=0.545lbft
2
J=0.545lbft
2
J=0.545lbft
2
J=0.545lbft
2
k=1050000 inlb/rad
k=1050000 inlb/rad
k=2880000inlb/rad

Page|3


TORSIONALEXCITATIONFREQUENCY
Thefirstfrequencycanbeapproximatedusingtheequationbelow.Thisequation
simplifiestheentiresystemdowntotwomassesattheendsofashaftthatisactingas
spring.ThisnumbershouldbesimilartothefirstfrequencyfoundusingtheHolzer
Tabulationmethodandactsasacheckforthesystem.
InthefollowingequationGisthemodulusofrigidityandRisradiusoftheshaft.The
modulusofrigidityusedforthe416SSshaftingis11.2E+06PSI.
C =
nR
4
2
k =
uC
L
= Sbot Stincss
[
Moto
= Polor momcnt o incrtio o motor
[
Pump
= Polor momcnt o incrtio o pump impcllcrs
=
1
2n
_
k(]
Mctcr
+]
Pump
)
]
Mctcr
]
Pump

= 8.6 Ezor516CPM
TORSIONALANALYSISRESULTS
Naturalfrequenciesandmodeshapes:
Thecalculatedtorsionalnaturalfrequencies(CPM)forthisrotortrainarelistedbelow:
Table2:Results
ModeNo. NaturalFrequency(CPMandHz) SeparationMargin
1 516/8.6 NoInterference
2 8728/914 NoInterference
3 16750/1754 NoInterference
4 25898/2712 NoInterference

Thecalculatedseparationmarginwasestablishedbyusingtheshaftexcitationthathasthe
smallestseparationmarginwithrespecttoagivennaturalfrequency.
TheinterferencediagraminFigure2showsthefirstthreecalculatednaturalfrequenciesand
potentialexcitationmodes.Thesystemisconsideredsatisfactoryifthetorsionalnatural

Page|4

frequenciesare20%awayfrompotentialexcitationmodes.Therearenointerferencepoints
withinthespecifiedmargin,butafatigueanalysiswillstillbeperformed.

Figure2:TorsionalResonanceInterferenceDiagram

Page|5

TORSIONALENDURANCEEQUATIONS
ShearEnduranceStrength
S
c
= 7,u9S psi = k
u
k
b
k
c
k
d
k
c
k
]
S
c

k
u
= u.797 = surocc conJition moJiicotion octor
k
b
= u.779 = sizc moJiicotion octor
k
c
= u.S77 = looJ moJiicotion octor
k
d
= 1 = tcmpcroturc moJiicotion octor
k
c
= u.SS = miscclloncous -cccts moJiicotion octor
S
c
= 6u,uuu psi = rotory -bcom tcst spccimcn cnJuroncc limit
S
0t
= 7S,uuu psi = ultimotc Hotcriol Strcngtb u.7S
o
u
= 2Su psi = Altcrnoting Strcss o
M
= 12,Su1 psi = Hcon Strcss
=
Hosc Powc63000
RPM
o =
16:
n
4

moJ -0ooJmon = [
c
c
S
c
+
c
M
S
Ut

-1
0crbcr = S
c
[1 -
c
M
S
Ut
2

ThestressanalysisandfatigueevaluationswereperformedusingamodifiedGoodman
equationandGerberequation.Shaftstressis37504withstressconcentration,alternating
stressis250psiusinganamplituderatioof2%.AGoodmandesignfactorof1.65afterstress
concentrationwasfound,Goodmandesignfactorof4.95withoutstressconcentration.These
valuesareacceptable.AchartofthisdataisavailableinFigure3.
Figure3:FatigueLifeChart

0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
0 10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 60000 70000 80000
A
l
t
e
r
n
a
t
i
n
g

S
t
r
e
s
s
,

P
S
I
MeanStress,PSI
Goodman
Gerber
Stresses
Concentrated

Page|6

ANGULARVELOCITYvs.TORQUE
TheHolzermethodforfindingthenaturalfrequenciesofarotatingassemblyrequiressetting
upspringequationsandmakingiterativechangestoanassumedangularinputvelocitytofind
valueswhereresidualmotionattheotherendoftheassemblyiszero.Inotherwords,thereis
notorqueavailabletorotateanythingthatmaybeattachedtotheendofthelastshaft.When
residualtorqueiszerotheassemblyisvibratinginresonancewiththeinputfrequency.

Figure4isagraphmakeoftheseiterations.Eachlocationwheretheplottedlinecrosseszerois
anaturalfrequencyofthesystem.
Figure4:AngularVelocityvsTorque

Figures5through8representtwistingoftheshaftalongitslengthatonenaturalfrequency.
Theseplotsshowrelativeangulardisplacement,notlateralmotion.Thepointwhererotary
vibrationisminimumislocatedwheretheangulardisplacementlinecrosseszero.Maximum
stressoccurswherelineslopeismaximum.

8E+11
7E+11
6E+11
5E+11
4E+11
3E+11
2E+11
1E+11
0
1E+11
2E+11
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
R
e
s
i
d
u
a
l

T
o
r
q
u
e
,

U
n
i
t
l
e
s
s
AngularVelocity,Radians/Sec

Page|7

Figure5:1
st
ModeShape:516CPM(53.97rad/sec)

Figure6:2
nd
ModeShape:8728CPM(914.01rad/sec)

4
3.5
3
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
0.5
1
1.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

A
n
g
u
l
a
r

D
i
s
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
ShaftSections,MotortoBowl
8.59Hz
500
400
300
200
100
0
100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

A
n
g
u
l
a
r

D
i
s
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
ShaftSections,MotortoBowl
145.47Hz

Page|8

Figure7:3
rd
ModeShape:16750CPM(1754.01rad/sec)

Figure8:4
rd
ModeShape:25898CPM(2712.01rad/sec)

CONCULSION
Therearenotorsionalexcitationmodeswithin20%ofthisunitsrunspeed.Shaftingwas
subjectedtofatigueanalysisandpassed.
1500
1000
500
0
500
1000
1500
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

A
n
g
u
l
a
r

D
i
s
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
ShaftSections,MotortoBowl
279.16Hz
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

A
n
g
u
l
a
r

D
i
s
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
ShaftSections,MotortoBowl
431.63Hz

Page|9

References
(1) Nestorides,E.J.,AHandbookonTorsionalVibration,CambridgePress(1958).
(2) Shigley,J.E.,Mischke,C.R.,Budynas,R.G.,MechanicalEngineeringDesign,McGrawHill,
SeventhEdition(2004).



SMITH
PUMP
COMPANY, INC.




301 M&B Industrial
(800) 299-8909 (254) 776-0377




Waco, Texas 76712
FAX (254) 776-0023

7437 Tower Street Ft. Worth, Texas 76118 (817) 589-2060 FAX (817) 595-4900
1900 Howard Lane West Austin, Texas 78728 (512) 310-1480 FAX (512) 310-1417
P.O. Box 33516 San Antonio, Texas 78265 (210) 656-0530 FAX (210) 656-2372




DISCHARGE HEAD
REACTION LOADS
(Forces & Moments Analysis)

PROJECT 169737-01

For

Dake Construction

On the

Upper Trinity Regional Water District
RTWS Thomas E. Taylor
Service Pump Station


VERTICAL TURBINE
PUMP P-06-02-09


April 16, 2014

Revision A J une 30, 2014


ALLOWABLE DISCHARGE FLANGE LOADS
HEAD 5013-058

Sideload Fx = 2420 lbs max
Thrust Load Fy = 2180 lbs max
Download Fz = 2700 lbs max

Moment Mx = 7300 ft-lb max
Moment My = 8900 ft-lb max
Moment Mz = 6300 ft-lb max

BASE REACTIONS

Sideload Fx = 2,420 lbs max
Thrust Load Fy = 2,180 lbs max
Download Fz = 24,750 lbs max
Upload, Fz = NA No Upload

Moment Mx =19,600 ft-lb max
Moment My =15,750 ft-lb max
Moment Mz =19,700 ft-lb max

LOAD CONDITIONS

A variable speed drive is used to start the 900 Hp motor. Nominal motor operating
range is 590 to 1180 rpm. Although unlikely to be achieved during start-up, 200%
of full motor torque is included in reaction calculations.

Base reactions are calculated from maximum discharge loads, motor torque, and
estimated weights of motor, head, column, pump shafting, etc. These reactions
have a restrained discharge flange.

Discharge flange restraint as shown by piping layouts on contract drawings M1 &
M2 combined with thrust harness shown on sheet M7 is acceptable. Thrust
harness bolt tension must be properly adjusted.

Base reactions do not include dynamic vibration forces. Out of balance conditions
can exceed permissible head loads. Base mass must be five times greater than
pump motor assembly for proper vibration control. Base loading is down.

HEAD 5013-058
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal

















Tnemec Paint





















SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal
Paint Schedule
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating

Blast: SSPC SP5 or better
Coating:
Primer: Tnemec N140 - 1 coat 4 Mils DFT (3-5 DFT per manufacturer)
Intermediate: Tnemec N140 - 1 coat 5 Mils DFT (4-6 DFT per manufacturer)
Top Coat: Tnemec N140 - 1 coat 5 Mils DFT (4-6 DFT per manufacturer)

Bowl Assembly: By Flowserve
Interior (Flow path)
Tnemec N140 - 3 coats 9-12 Mils min TDFT, Color - "Tank White"
Exterior
Tnemec N140 - 3 coats 9-12 Mils min TDFT. Color "Tank White"

Column: By Smith Pump Company
Interior
Tnemec N140 3 coats min 14-16 mils TDFT. Finish coat "Tank White"
Exterior
Tnemec N140 3 coats min 14-16 mils TDFT. Finish coat "Tank White"

Soleplate: (Non-machined surfaces) By Smith Pump Company
Interior
Tnemec N140 3 coats min 14-16 mils TDFT. Finish coat "Tank White"
Exterior
Tnemec N140 3 coats min 14-16 mils TDFT. Finish coat "Tank White"

Discharge Head: By Smith Pump Company
Interior (Flow path)
Tnemec N140 3 coats min 14-16 mils TDFT. Finish coat "Tank White"
Exterior
Tnemec N140 3 coats min 14-16 mils TDFT. Finish coat "Tank White"

Motor: By WEG
Motors to be supplied with Manufacturer's Standard Paint and Color

Machined Surfaces: By Smith Pump Company
Coat with CRC to prevent rusting



SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal

SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal



SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal




















Drawings

























0 3 0 .
C L I A T E D
1 : 2 E L A C S
" 4 / 3 1 N I M
B - B N O I T C E S
0 0 . 6 4
5 7 . 3 5 0 0 . 3 5
S R E N R O C S S E C E R
" 8 5 . Q S
F E R
5 7 . 3 5 . Q S " 8 / 1 2 F E R
" 8 / 1 2 F E R
" 2 4 F E R
4 X 0 5 7 . 1 U R H T
C N U 7 - 4 / 1 - 1 U R H T
8 X 9 0 1 . 1 U R H T
0 5 . 2 2
N O 0 0 5 . 9 4 . C . B
X 4 L L A U R H T 5 7 8 .
L L A U R H T C N U 8 - 1
G N I L E V E L R O F
B B
P M U P H T I M S
Y N A P M O C
S L A M I C E D
1 . - / + X .
6 0 . - / + X X .
0 3 0 . - / + X X X .
5 1 0 0 . - / + X X X X .
S E L G N A
2 - / + C E D O N
1 - / + X .
5 . - / + X X .
5 2 . - / + X X X .
S E C N A R E L O T
A
E T A L P E L O S 5 7 . 1 x 4 5 x 4 5 , 3 5 0 - 0 2 0 5
P S H , P T W R O L Y A T S A M O H T
. D . W . R Y T I N I R T R E P P U
N O I T C U R T S N O C E K A D
1 0 - 7 3 7 9 6 1
L L I H M 2 H C
D E T O N S S E L N U S E H C N I N I S N O I S N E M I D
V E R E T A D N O I T P I R C S E D
A
1
Y B
E T A D Y B E L A C S K C V E R
4 1 / 0 1 / 4 W S L 6 1 : 1 P M J
: G N I W A R D
: T C E J O R P
: G N E
: T C A R T N O C
: R E N W O
: T C E J O R P
: T C U D O R P
D E N I H C A M 3 5 0 - 0 2 0 5 \ 0 2 0 5 \ G W D D A C \ : T
a R 0 5 2 S E C A F R U S D E N I H C A M L L A H S I N I F
0 3 0 . / 0 1 0 . S E G D E P R A H S D N A S R E N R O C L L A K A E R B
R 0 4 0 . / 5 1 0 . S T E L L I F L L A S U I D A R
0 2 1 / 0 9 S E L O H D E D A E R H T L L A R E F M A H C
0 3 0 . - / + D A E R H T E N O F O H T P E D A O T
B 2 H - D T S - D E F R E P S D R A D N A T S D A E R H T W E R C S
4 1 / 4 / 5 D E G N A H C S R E T N E C T L O B , W A O
: Y T I T N A U Q
W S L
P
l
a
n

1
3
seal
end view
outlet
orice
owserve.com
P
l
a
n

1
3
What
Recirculation from seal chamber to pump suction through orice.
Standard ush plan on vertical pumps.

Why
Continuous seal chamber venting on vertical pumps.
Seal chamber heat removal.

Where
Vertical pumps.
Seal chamber pressure is greater than suction pressure.
Moderate temperature uids with moderate solids.
Non-polymerizing fuids.

Preventative Maintenance
Vent piping loop prior to starting vertical pumps.
Use an orice with a minimum 3 mm (1/8 inch) diameter.
Calculate ow rates to size orice for adequate seal chamber ow.
Reduce seal chamber pressure with proper orice and throat bushing sizing.
Typical failure mode is a clogged orifce - check temperatures at pipe ends.
" 6 3
7 9 9 . 5 2
" 2 / 1 1
" 2 / 1 1
5 7 . 1
0 0 . 0 8
0 0 . 4 3
D - D N O I T C E S
# 0 5 1 " 4 2
E G N A L F F F
R O F D E P P A T & D E N I H C A M
E P I P N M U L O C " 4 2
D O E G N A L F " 0 5 . 9 2
. C . B " 5 2 . 7 2 N O C N U 7 - " 5 2 1 . 1 x 4 2
N W O H S T O N S D R A U G
" 7 2
C N U 9 - 8 / 7 L L A U R H T
8 X 6 6 7 . L L A U R H T
N O 0 0 0 . 2 3 . C . B
8
L L A U R H T 5 7 3 . 1
0 5 . 2 2
N O 0 0 5 . 9 4 . C . B
T P N " 1
T P N " 1 D D
0 0 . 2 3
5 7 3 . 1
0 0 . 9 E L G N A
N O 0 0 5 . 9 2 . C . B
x 0 2
L L I H M 2 H C
1 0 - 7 3 7 9 6 1
N O I T C U R T S N O C E K A D
. D . W . R Y T I N I R T R E P P U
S P S H , P T W R O L Y A T S A M O H T
L A T T I M B U S D A E H E G R A H C S I D
Y B
1 8 5 0 - 3 1 0 5
P M U P H T I M S
Y N A P M O C
S L A M I C E D
1 . - / + X .
6 0 . - / + X X .
0 3 0 . - / + X X X .
5 1 0 0 . - / + X X X X .
S E C N A R E L O T
S E L G N A
2 - / + C E D O N
1 - / + X .
5 . - / + X X .
5 2 . - / + X X X .
L A T T I M B U S 8 5 0 - 3 1 0 5 \ 3 1 0 5 \ . . D A C \ : T
P M J 0 2 : 1 W S L 4 1 / 8 / 4
A
N O I T P I R C S E D E T A D V E R
D E T O N S S E L N U S E H C N I N I S N O I S N E M I D
A
T H G I E H D ' G H C 4 1 / 6 / 5
a R 0 5 2 S E C A F R U S D E N I H C A M L L A H S I N I F
0 3 0 . / 0 1 0 . S E G D E P R A H S D N A S R E N R O C L L A K A E R B
R 0 4 0 . / 5 1 0 . S T E L L I F L L A S U I D A R
0 2 1 / 0 9 S E L O H D E D A E R H T L L A R E F M A H C
0 3 0 . - / + D A E R H T E N O F O H T P E D A O T
B 2 H - D T S - D E F R E P S D R A D N A T S D A E R H T W E R C S
: T C U D O R P
: T C E J O R P
: R E N W O
: R T C R T N C
: G N E
: T C E J O R P
: G N I W A R D
V E R K C E L A C S Y B E T A D
W S L
: Y T Q : N / P
" 2 2
H S E M E R I W L E E T S S S E L N I A T S
G N I N E P O . Q S " 2 / 1 x E R I W 0 2 1 .
S S 6 1 3 N E P O % 5 6
D U T S " 3 X C N U " 6 1 / 7
T U N X E H E L B U O D
" 6 1 / 5 4 3 R E V O
S P M A L C
" 4 / 3 3 3 D O
G N I R D E L L O R
M O T T O B & P O T
" 4 / 1 3 3 D I
P M A L C
E T A L P E L F F A B
S E C A L P 4
: S E T O N
H T I W L L E B N O I T C U S M N E 7 2 - S F S T I F . 1
. R E T E M A I D L L E B " 0 . 2 3
S S 4 0 3 E R A S P M A L C D N A E T A L P L L A . 2
S S 6 1 3 S I H S E M E R I W . 3
S S 8 - 8 1 E R A S T U N & S D U T S . 4
. S B L 0 8 1 T H G I E W D E T A M I T S E . 5
A
N O I T P I R C S E D E T A D V E R
D E T O N S S E L N U S E H C N I N I S N O I S N E M I D
A
L L I H M 2 H C
1 0 - 7 3 7 9 6 1
N O I T C U R T S N O C E K A D
. D . W . R Y T I N I R T R E P P U
P S H , P T W R O L Y A T S A M O H T
R O S S E R P P U S X E T R O V
1 1 6 1 - 0 5 0 5
Y B
P M U P H T I M S
Y N A P M O C
S L A M I C E D
1 . - / + X .
6 0 . - / + X X .
0 3 0 . - / + X X X .
5 1 0 0 . - / + X X X X .
S E C N A R E L O T
S E L G N A
2 - / + C E D O N
1 - / + X .
5 . - / + X X .
5 2 . - / + X X X .
L A T T I M B U S 1 6 1 - 0 5 0 5 \ 0 5 0 5 \ . . D A C \ : T
P M J 8 : 1 W S L 4 1 / 0 1 / 4
S T U O L L A C L A I R E T A M D E D D A 4 1 / 6 / 5
a R 0 5 2 S E C A F R U S D E N I H C A M L L A H S I N I F
0 3 0 . / 0 1 0 . S E G D E P R A H S D N A S R E N R O C L L A K A E R B
R 0 4 0 . / 5 1 0 . S T E L L I F L L A S U I D A R
0 2 1 / 0 9 S E L O H D E D A E R H T L L A R E F M A H C
0 3 0 . - / + D A E R H T E N O F O H T P E D A O T
B 2 H - D T S - D E F R E P S D R A D N A T S D A E R H T W E R C S
: T C U D O R P
: T C E J O R P
: R E N W O
: R T C R T N C
: G N E
: T C E J O R P
: G N I W A R D
V E R K C E L A C S Y B E T A D
: Y T Q : N / P
W S L
SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal


















Start-Up Reports
(Later)
























SMITHPUMPCOMPANY,INC.JasonPopko
169737Upper
TrinityRegionalWaterDistrictThomasE.TaylorHighServicePumpStation
SUBMITTALRevision2completesubmittal

















Manufacturers Manuals














USER INSTRUCTIONS



Vertical Turbine Pumps
Wet Pit (VTP)
Double Casing (VPC)

Installation
Operation
Maintenance
E, S and A series VTPs in wet pit and suction barrel designs
ranging in sizes from 50 mm (6 in.) to 1300 mm (52 in.) with
a single or multiple stages. (This manual does not cover
VTPs fitted with thrust bearing assemblies and VTPs built
for cryogenic service).

PCN=71569224 10-13(E), Based on VTP-QS-0896 Original
Instructions
































These instructions must be read prior to installing,
operating, using and maintaining this equipment
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 2 of 76 flowserve.com
CONTENTS
PAGE

PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY ....................... 4
1.1 General ............................................................ 4
1.2 CE Marking and Approvals .............................. 4
1.3 Disclaimer ........................................................ 4
1.4 Copyright ......................................................... 4
1.5 Duty Conditions ............................................... 4
1.6 Safety .............................................................. 5
1.7 Safety Labels Summary .................................. 8
1.8 Specific Machine Performance ........................ 8
1.9 Noise Level ...................................................... 8
1.10 Specific machine performance ................ 9
2 TRANSPORT AND STORAGE ....................... 10
2.1 Consignment receipt and unpacking ............. 10
2.2 Handling ........................................................ 10
2.3 Lifting ............................................................. 10
2.4 Storage .......................................................... 14
2.5 Recycling and End of Product Life ................ 14
3 DESCRIPTION ................................................ 14
3.1 Configuration ................................................. 14
3.2 Nomenclature ................................................ 16
3.3 Design of Major Parts .................................... 17
3.4 Performance and Operation Limits................ 21
4 INSTALLATION ............................................... 21
4.1 Location ......................................................... 21
4.2 Preparation .................................................... 21
4.3 Foundation ..................................................... 21
4.4 Grouting ......................................................... 23
4.5 Lifting and Assembly ..................................... 24
4.6 Initial Alignment ............................................. 30
4.7 Piping ............................................................. 31
4.8 Electrical Connections ................................... 34
4.9 Final Shaft Alignment Check ......................... 34
4.10 Protection Systems ................................ 34
5 COMMISSIONING, STARTUP, OPERATION
AND SHUTDOWN ........................................... 35
5.1 Pre-commissioning Procedure ...................... 35
5.2 Pump Lubricants ........................................... 35
5.3 Impeller Adjustment ....................................... 38
5.4 Direction of Rotation ...................................... 41
5.5 Guarding ........................................................ 41
5.6 Priming and Auxiliary Supplies ...................... 41
5.7 Starting the Pump .......................................... 42
5.8 Operating the Pump ...................................... 45
5.9 Stopping and Shutdown ................................ 46
5.10 Hydraulic, mechanical and electrical duty46
6 MAINTENANCE ............................................... 46
6.1 General .......................................................... 47
6.2 Maintenance Schedule .................................. 47
6.3 Spare Parts .................................................... 49
6.4 Recommended Spares and Consumables .... 49
6.5 Tools Required ............................................... 49
6.6 Fastener Torques ........................................... 50
6.7 Setting Impeller Clearance............................. 51
6.8 Disassembly ................................................... 51
6.9 Examination of Parts ...................................... 51
6.10 Assembly ................................................ 55
7 FAULTS; CAUSES AND REMEDIES ............. 56
8 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LISTS .................... 58
8.1 Cross Section: Product Lubricated VTP ........ 58
8.2 Cross Section: Enclosed Tube VTP ............... 61
8.3 Cross Section: Suction Barrel VTP ................ 64
8.4 General Arrangement Drawing ...................... 67
9 CERTIFICATION .............................................. 67
10 OTHER RELEVANT DOCUMENTATION AND
MANUALS ........................................................ 67
10.1 Supplementary User Instructions ........... 67
10.2 Change Notes ........................................ 67
11 APPENDIX ....................................................... 68
11.1 Bill of Materials Reference Numbers ..... 68



VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 3 of 76 flowserve.com
INDEX
PAGE

PAGE

Alignment of shafting (see 4.3, 4.6 and 4.9)
Assembly (6.10) ....................................................... 55
ATEX marking (1.6.4.2) ............................................. 7
Bill of materials reference numbers (11.1) .......68
CE marking and approvals (1.2) ................................ 4
Certification (9) ........................................................ 67
Change notes (10.2) ................................................ 67
Clearances, impeller (6.7) ....................................... 51
Commissioning and operation (5) ........................... 35
Compliance, ATEX (1.6.4.1) ...................................... 6
Configurations (3.1) ................................................. 14
Copyright (1.4) ........................................................... 4
Design of major parts (3.3) ...................................... 17
Direction of rotation (5.4) ......................................... 41
Disassembly (6.8) .................................................... 51
Disclaimer (1.3) ......................................................... 4
Dismantling (6.8, Disassembly) ............................... 51
Drawings (8) ............................................................ 58
Duty conditions (1.5) .................................................. 4
Electrical connections (4.8) ..................................... 34
End of product life (2.5) ........................................... 14
Examination of parts (6.9) ....................................... 52
Fastener torques (6.6) ............................................. 50
Faults; causes and remedies (7) ............................. 56
Foundation (4.3) ...................................................... 21
General arrangement drawing (8.4) ........................ 67
General assembly drawings (8) ............................... 58
Grouting (4.4)........................................................... 23
Guarding (5.5).......................................................... 41
Handling (2.2) .......................................................... 10
Hydraulic, mechanical and electrical duty (5.10) ..... 46
Impeller clearance (6.7) ........................................... 51
Inspection (6.2.1 and 6.2.2) ..................................... 48
Installation (4) .......................................................... 21
Lifting (2.3) ............................................................... 10
Location (4.1) ........................................................... 21
Lubrication (5.2) ....................................................... 35
Maintenance (6) ....................................................... 47
Maintenance schedule (6.2) .................................... 47
Name nomenclature (3.2) ........................................ 16
Nameplate (1.7.1) ...................................................... 8
Nozzle loads (4.7.2) ................................................. 31
Operating limits (3.4.1) ............................................ 21
Ordering spare parts (6.3.1) .................................... 49
Parts lists (8) ............................................................ 58
Performance (3.4) .................................................... 21
Piping (4.7) .............................................................. 31
Pre-commissioning (5.1) .......................................... 35
Priming and auxiliary supplies (5.6) ........................ 41
Protection systems (4.10) ........................................ 34
Reassembly (6.10, Assembly) ................................. 55
Receipt and unpacking (2.1) .................................... 10
Recommended spares (6.4) .................................. 499
Recycling (2.5) ......................................................... 14
Replacement parts (6.3 and 6.4) ............................. 49
Running the pump (5.8) ........................................... 45
Safety action (1.6.3) ................................................... 5
Safety labels (1.7.2) ................................................... 8
Safety markings (1.6.1) .............................................. 5
Safety, protection systems (see 1.6 and 4.10)
Sealing arrangements (3.3.7) .................................. 19
Sectional drawings (8) .............................................. 58
Setting impeller clearance (6.7) ............................... 51
Sound pressure level (1.9, Noise level) ..................... 8
Spare parts (6.3) ...................................................... 49
Specific machine performance (1.8) .......................... 8
Starting the pump (5.7) ............................................ 42
Stop/start frequency (5.7.8) ..................................... 45
Stopping and shutdown (5.9) ................................... 46
Storage, pump (2.4) ................................................. 14
Storage, spare parts (6.3.3) ..................................... 49
Supplementary manuals or info. sources (10) ......... 67
Supplementary User Instructions (10.1) .................. 67
Thermal expansion (4.6.1) ....................................... 30
Tools required (6.5) .................................................. 49
Torques for fasteners (6.6) ...................................... 50
Trouble-shooting (7) ................................................. 56
Vibration (5.7.7) ........................................................ 44
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 4 of 76 flowserve.com
1 INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY
General 1.1
These instructions must always be kept
close to the product's operating location or
directly with the product.

Flowserve products are designed, developed and
manufactured with state-of-the-art technologies in
modern facilities. The unit is produced with great
care and commitment to continuous quality control,
utilizing sophisticated quality techniques, and safety
requirements.

Flowserve is committed to continuous quality
improvement and being at service for any further
information about the product in its installation and
operation or about its support products, repair and
diagnostic services.

These instructions are intended to facilitate
familiarization with the product and its permitted use.
Operating the product in compliance with these
instructions is important to help ensure reliability in
service and avoid risks. The instructions may not
take into account local regulations; ensure such
regulations are observed by all, including those
installing the product. Always coordinate repair
activity with operations personnel, and follow all plant
safety requirements and applicable safety and health
laws and regulations.
These instructions must be read prior to
installing, operating, using and maintaining the
equipment in any region worldwide. The
equipment must not be put into service until all
the conditions relating to safety noted in the
instructions, have been met. Failure to follow
and apply the present user instructions is
considered to be misuse. Personal injury,
product damage, delay or failure caused by
misuse are not covered by the Flowserve
warranty.
CE Marking and Approvals 1.2
It is a legal requirement that machinery and equipment
put into service within certain regions of the world shall
conform with the applicable CE Marking Directives
covering Machinery and, where applicable, Low Voltage
Equipment, Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC),
Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) and Equipment for
Potentially Explosive Atmospheres (ATEX).

Where applicable the Directives and any additional
Approvals cover important safety aspects relating to
machinery and equipment and the satisfactory provision
of technical documents and safety instructions. Where
applicable this document incorporates information
relevant to these Directives and Approvals.
To confirm the Approvals applying and if the product is
CE marked, check the serial number plate markings
and the Certification. (See section 9, Certification.)
Disclaimer 1.3
Information in these User Instructions is believed
to be complete and reliable. However, in spite of
all of the efforts of Flowserve Corporation to
provide comprehensive instructions, good
engineering and safety practice should always be
used.

Flowserve manufactures products to exacting
International Quality Management System Standards
as certified and audited by external Quality Assurance
organizations. Genuine parts and accessories have
been designed, tested and incorporated into the
products to help ensure their continued product quality
and performance in use. As Flowserve cannot test
parts and accessories sourced from other vendors the
incorrect incorporation of such parts and accessories
may adversely affect the performance and safety
features of the products. The failure to properly select,
install or use authorized Flowserve parts and
accessories is considered to be misuse. Damage or
failure caused by misuse is not covered by the
Flowserve warranty. In addition, any modification of
Flowserve products or removal of original components
may impair the safety of these products in their use.
Copyright 1.4
All rights reserved. No part of these instructions may
be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or
transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
permission of Flowserve.
Duty Conditions 1.5
This product has been selected to meet the
specifications of your purchase order. The
acknowledgement of these conditions has been sent
separately to the Purchaser. A copy should be kept
with these instructions.
The product must not be operated beyond
the parameters specified for the application. If
there is any doubt as to the suitability of the
product for the application intended, contact
Flowserve for advice, quoting the serial number.

If the conditions of service on your purchase order
are going to be changed (for example liquid pumped,
temperature or duty) it is requested that the user
seeks the written agreement of Flowserve before
start up.
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 5 of 76 flowserve.com
Safety 1.6

Summary of safety markings 1.6.1
These User Instructions contain specific safety
markings where non-observance of an instruction would
cause hazards. The specific safety markings are:
This symbol indicates electrical safety
instructions where non-compliance will involve a high
risk to personal safety or the loss of life.
This symbol indicates safety instructions where
non-compliance would affect personal safety and
could result in loss of life.
This symbol indicates hazardous and toxic fluid
safety instructions where non-compliance would affect
personal safety and could result in loss of life.
This symbol indicates safety
instructions where non-compliance will involve some
risk to safe operation and personal safety and would
damage the equipment or property.
This symbol indicates explosive atmosphere
zone marking according to ATEX. It is used in safety
instructions where non-compliance in the hazardous
area would cause the risk of an explosion.
This symbol is used in safety instructions to
remind not to rub non-metallic surfaces with a dry
cloth; ensure the cloth is damp. It is used in safety
instructions where non-compliance in the hazardous
area would cause the risk of an explosion.
This sign is not a safety symbol but indicates
an important instruction in the assembly process.

Personnel qualification and training 1.6.2
All personnel involved in the operation, installation,
inspection and maintenance of the unit must be
qualified to carry out the work involved. If the
personnel in question do not already possess the
necessary knowledge and skill, appropriate training
and instruction must be provided. If required the
operator may commission the manufacturer/supplier
to provide applicable training.

Always coordinate repair activity with operations and
health and safety personnel, and follow all plant
safety requirements and applicable safety and health
laws and regulations.

Safety action 1.6.3
This is a summary of conditions and actions to
prevent injury to personnel and damage to the
environment and to equipment. For products
used in potentially explosive atmospheres
section 1.6.4 also applies.
NEVER DO MAINTENANCE WORK
WHEN THE UNIT IS CONNECTED TO POWER
GUARDS MUST NOT BE REMOVED WHILE
THE PUMP IS OPERATIONAL
DRAIN THE PUMP AND ISOLATE PIPEWORK
BEFORE DISMANTLING THE PUMP
The appropriate safety precautions should be taken
where the pumped liquids are hazardous.
FLUORO-ELASTOMERS (When fitted.)
When a pump has experienced temperatures over
250 C (482 F), partial decomposition of fluoro-
elastomers (example: Viton) will occur. In this
condition these are extremely dangerous and skin
contact must be avoided.
HANDLING COMPONENTS
Many precision parts have sharp corners and the
wearing of appropriate safety gloves and equipment
is required when handling these components. To lift
heavy pieces above 25 kg (55 lb) use a crane
appropriate for the mass and in accordance with
current local regulations.
APPLYING HEAT TO REMOVE IMPELLER
There may be occasions when the impeller has either
been shrunk fit on to the pump shaft or has become
difficult to remove due to products of corrosion.

If you elect to use heat to remove the impeller, it must
be applied quickly to the impeller boss. TAKE
GREAT CARE!

Before applying heat ensure any residual hazardous
liquid trapped between the impeller and pump shaft is
thoroughly drained out through the impeller keyway
to prevent an explosion or emission of toxic vapour.
This must be carried out with the shaft in the vertical
position. On some pump sizes a cavity exists in the
impeller bore so on occasions a significant volume of
liquid may drain out.
THERMAL SHOCK
Rapid changes in the temperature of the liquid within
the pump can cause thermal shock, which can result
in damage or breakage of components and should be
avoided.
HOT (and cold) PARTS
If hot or freezing components or auxiliary heating
supplies can present a danger to operators and
persons entering the immediate area action must be
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 6 of 76 flowserve.com
taken to avoid accidental contact. If complete
protection is not possible, the machine access must
be limited to maintenance staff only, with clear visual
warnings and indicators to those entering the
immediate area. Note: bearing housings must not be
insulated and drive motors and bearings may be hot.

If the temperature is greater than 80 C (175 F) or
below -5 C (23 F) in a restricted zone, or exceeds
local regulations, action as above shall be taken.
HAZARDOUS LIQUIDS
When the pump is handling hazardous liquids care
must be taken to avoid exposure to the liquid by
appropriate siting of the pump, limiting personnel
access and by operator training. If the liquid is
flammable and/or explosive, strict safety procedures
must be applied.

Gland packing must not be used when pumping
hazardous liquids.
PREVENT EXCESSIVE EXTERNAL
PIPE LOAD
Do not use pump as a support for piping. Do not
mount expansion joints, unless allowed by Flowserve
in writing, so that their force, due to internal pressure,
acts on the pump flange.
ENSURE CORRECT LUBRICATION
(See section 5, Commissioning, startup, operation
and shutdown.)
START THE PUMP WITH OUTLET
VALVE PARTLY OPENED
(Unless otherwise instructed at a specific point in the
User Instructions.)
This is recommended to minimize the risk of
overloading and damaging the pump motor at full or
zero flow. Pumps may be started with the valve
further open only on installations where this situation
cannot occur. The pump outlet control valve may
need to be adjusted to comply with the duty following
the run-up process. (See section 5, Commissioning
start-up, operation and shutdown.)
NEVER RUN THE PUMP DRY
INLET VALVES TO BE FULLY OPEN
WHEN PUMP IS RUNNING
Running the pump at zero flow or below the
recommended minimum flow continuously will cause
damage to the pump and mechanical seal.
DO NOT RUN THE PUMP AT
ABNORMALLY HIGH OR LOW FLOW RATES
Operating at a flow rate higher than normal or at a flow
rate with no back pressure on the pump may overload
the motor and cause cavitations. Low flow rates may
cause a reduction in pump/bearing life, overheating of
the pump, instability and cavitation/vibration.

Products used in potentially explosive 1.6.4
atmospheres
Measures are required to:
Avoid excess temperature
Prevent build up of explosive mixtures
Prevent the generation of sparks
Prevent leakages
Maintain the pump to avoid hazard

The following instructions for pumps and pump units
when installed in potentially explosive atmospheres
must be followed to help ensure explosion protection.
For ATEX, both electrical and non-electrical
equipment must meet the requirements of European
Directive 94/9/EC. Always observe the regional legal
Ex requirements eg Ex electrical items outside the
EU may be required certified to other than ATEX eg
IECEx, UL.

Scope of compliance 1.6.4.1
Use equipment only in the zone for which it is
appropriate. Always check that the driver, drive
coupling assembly, seal and pump equipment are
suitably rated and/or certified for the classification of the
specific atmosphere in which they are to be installed.

Where Flowserve has supplied only the bare shaft
pump, the Ex rating applies only to the pump. The
party responsible for assembling the ATEX pump set
shall select the coupling, driver and any additional
equipment, with the necessary CE Certificate/
Declaration of Conformity establishing it is suitable for
the area in which it is to be installed.

The output from a variable frequency drive (VFD) can
cause additional heating affects in the motor and so, for
pumps sets with a VFD, the ATEX Certification for the
motor must state that it is covers the situation where
electrical supply is from the VFD. This particular
requirement still applies even if the VFD is in a safe area.

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 7 of 76 flowserve.com
Marking 1.6.4.2
An example of ATEX equipment marking is shown
below. The actual classification of the pump will be
engraved on the nameplate.
II 2 GD c IIC 135 C (T4)

Equipment Group
I = Mining
II = Non-mining

Category
2 or M2 = high level protection
3 = normal level of protection

Gas and/or dust
G = Gas
D = Dust

c = Constructional safety
(in accordance with EN13463-5)

Gas Group
IIA Propane (typical)
IIB Ethylene (typical)
IIC Hydrogen (typical)

Maximum surface temperature (Temperature Class)
(see section 1.6.4.3.)

Avoiding excessive surface 1.6.4.3
temperatures
ENSURE THE EQUIPMENT TEMPERATURE
CLASS IS SUITABLE FOR THE HAZARD ZONE

Pumps have a temperature class as stated in the
ATEX Ex rating on the nameplate. These are based
on a maximum ambient of 40 C (104 F); refer to
Flowserve for higher ambient temperatures.

The surface temperature on the pump is influenced
by the temperature of the liquid handled. The
maximum permissible liquid temperature depends on
the temperature class and must not exceed the
values in the table that follows.

Temperature class
to EN13463-1
Maximum surface
temperature permitted
Temperature limit of
liquid handled *
T6
T5
T4
T3
T2
T1
85 C (185 F)
100 C (212 F)
135 C (275 F)
200 C (392 F)
300 C (572 F)
450 C (842 F)
Consult Flowserve
Consult Flowserve
115 C (239 F)
180 C (356 F)
275 C (527 F)
400 C (752 F)
* The table only takes the ATEX temperature class into consideration.
Pump design or material, as well as component design or material,
may further limit the maximum working temperature of the liquid.

The temperature rise at the seals and bearings and
due to the minimum permitted flow rate is taken into
account in the temperatures stated.

The operator is responsible to ensure that the
specified maximum liquid temperature is not
exceeded

Temperature classification Tx is used when the
liquid temperature varies and the pump could be
installed in different hazarous atmospheres. In this
case the user is responsible for ensuring that the
pump surface temperature does not exceed that
permitted in the particular hazardous atmosphere.

If an explosive atmosphere exists during the
installation, do not attempt to check the direction of
rotation by starting the pump unfilled. Even a short
run time may give a high temperature resulting from
contact between rotating and stationary components.

Where there is any risk of the pump being run
against a closed valve generating high liquid and
casing external surface temperatures, fit an external
surface temperature protection device.

Avoid mechanical, hydraulic or electrical overload by
using motor overload trips, temperature monitor or a
power monitor and make routine vibration monitoring
checks.

In dirty or dusty environments, make regular checks
and remove dirt from areas around close clearances,
bearing housings and motors.

Preventing the buildup of explosive 1.6.4.4
mixture
ENSURE THE PUMP IS PROPERLY FILLED
AND VENTED AND DOES NOT RUN DRY
Ensure the pump and relevant suction and discharge
pipeline system is totally filled with liquid at all times
during the pump operation, so that an explosive
atmosphere is prevented. In addition it is essential to
make sure that seal chambers, auxiliary shaft seal
systems and any heating and cooling systems are
properly filled.

If the operation of the system cannot avoid this
condition, fit an appropriate dry run protection device
(for example liquid detection or a power monitor).

To avoid potential hazards from fugitive emissions of
vapor or gas to atmosphere the surrounding area
must be well ventilated.

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 8 of 76 flowserve.com
Preventing sparks 1.6.4.5
To prevent a potential hazard from mechanical
contact, the coupling guard must be non-sparking.

To avoid the potential hazard from random induced
current generating a spark, the base plate must be
properly grounded.
Avoid electrostatic charge: do not rub non-metallic
surfaces with a dry cloth; ensure cloth is damp.

For ATEX applications the coupling must be selected
to comply with 94/9/EC. Correct coupling alignment
must be maintained.

Additional requirement for metallic pumps on
non-metallic base plates
When metallic components are fitted on a non-
metallic base plate they must be individually earthed.

Preventing leakage 1.6.4.6
The pump must only be used to handle liquids
for which it has been approved to have the correct
corrosion resistance.

Avoid entrapment of liquid in the pump and associated
piping due to closing of suction and discharge valves,
which could cause dangerous excessive pressures to
occur if there is heat input to the liquid. This can occur if
the pump is stationary or running.

Bursting of liquid containing parts due to freezing
must be avoided by draining or protecting the pump
and ancillary systems.

Where there is the potential hazard of a loss of a seal
barrier fluid or external flush, the fluid must be
monitored.

If leakage of liquid to atmosphere can result in a
hazard, install a liquid detection device.


Maintenance to avoid the hazard 1.6.4.7
CORRECT MAINTENANCE IS REQUIRED TO
AVOID POTENTIAL HAZARDS WHICH GIVE A
RISK OF EXPLOSION

The responsibility for compliance with maintenance
instructions is with the plant operator.

To avoid potential explosion hazards during
maintenance, the tools, cleaning and painting
materials used must not give rise to sparking or
adversely affect the ambient conditions. Where there
is a risk from such tools or materials, maintenance
must be conducted in a safe area.

It is recommended that a maintenance plan and
schedule is adopted. (See section 6, Maintenance.)
Safety Labels Summary 1.7

Nameplate 1.7.1
For details of nameplate, see the Declaration of
Conformity, or separate documentation included with
these User Instructions.

Safety labels 1.7.2




Oil lubricated units only:

Specific Machine Performance 1.8
For performance parameters see section 1.5, Duty
conditions. When the contract requirement specifies
these to be incorporated into User Instructions these
are included here. Where performance data has
been supplied separately to the purchaser these
should be obtained and retained with these User
Instructions if required.
Noise Level 1.9
Attention must be given to the exposure of personnel
to the noise, and local legislation will define when
guidance to personnel on noise limitation is required,
and when noise exposure reduction is mandatory.
This is typically 80 to 85 dBA.

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 9 of 76 flowserve.com
The usual approach is to control the exposure time to
the noise or to enclose the machine to reduce
emitted sound. You may have already specified a
limiting noise level when the equipment was ordered,
however if no noise requirements were defined, then
attention is drawn to the following table to give an
indication of equipment noise level so that you can
take the appropriate action in your plant.

Pump noise level is dependent on a number of
operational factors, flow rate, pipework design and
acoustic characteristics of the building, and so the
values given are subject to a 3 dBA tolerance and
cannot be guaranteed.

Similarly the motor noise assumed in the pump and
motor noise is that typically expected from standard
and high efficiency motors when on load directly driving
the pump. Note that a motor driven by an inverter may
show an increased noise at some speeds.

If a pump unit only has been purchased for fitting with
your own driver then the pump only noise levels in the
table should be combined with the level for the driver
obtained from the supplier. Consult Flowserve or a
noise specialist if assistance is required in combining
the values.

It is recommended that where exposure approaches
the prescribed limit, then site noise measurements
should be made.

The values are in sound pressure level L
pA
at 1 m
(3.3 ft) from the machine, for free field conditions
over a reflecting plane.

For estimating sound power level L
WA
(re 1pW) then
add 17 dBA to the sound pressure value.

The noise levels shown in table 1.9.1 are
extracted from typical motor manufacturers
data/catalogue to provide the average expected
motor noise values at no load for reference only and
are not guaranteed. The values could vary
depending upon the test and surrounding conditions.
The combined noise level of the pump and the motor
could exceed the values shown. It is to be noted that
adding motors with similar noise levels increases the
total noise level. Therefore, the dB correction to the
values listed above is required to obtain the
combined noise levels of motor and the pump.
Actual on-site noise measurement by experts is
recommended and safety measures are to be taken
accordingly.
Typical vertical motor noise data (Hollow 1.9.1
and Solid shafts)

Motor
Frame
Size.
NEMA
RPM Sound
Pressure
(dBA )
(WP- I
enclosure)
Sound
Power
(dBA )
(WP- I
enclosure
180 3600 70.0 78.0
1800 60.0 68.0
1200 & slower 55.0 63.0
210 3600 70.0 78.2
1800 60.0 68.2
1200 & slower 55.0 63.2
250 3600 75.0 83.4
1800 70.0 78.4
1200 & slower 60.0 68.4
280 3600 75.0 83.8
1800 70.0 78.8
1200 & slower 60.0 68.8
320 3600 75.0 84.0
1800 65.0 74.0
1200 & slower 65.0 74.0
360 3600 75.0 84.2
1800 65.0 74.2
1200 & slower 65.0 74.2
400 3600 80.0 89.5
1800 70.0 79.5
1200 & slower 65.0 74.5
440 3600 80.0 90.0
1800 70.0 80.0
1200 & slower 70.0 80.0
449 1800 85.0 97.8
1200 & slower 80.0 92.8
5000

3600 90.0 102.8
1800 85.0 97.8
1200 & slower 80.0 92.8
5800 3600 90.0 103.7
1800 90.0 103.7
1200 & slower 80.0 93.7
6800 1800 90.0 103.9
1200 & slower 85.0 98.8
8000 1800 90.0 104.7
1200 & slower 85.0 99.7
Specific machine performance 1.10
For performance, parameters see section 1.5, Duty
conditions. Whenever there is a contract
requirement to incorporate specific machine
performance into User Instructions, those are
included here. In cases where performance data has
been supplied separately to the purchaser, the same
should be retained with these User Instructions, if
required.

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 10 of 76 flowserve.com
2 TRANSPORT AND STORAGE
Consignment receipt and unpacking 2.1
Immediately after receipt of the equipment it must be
checked against the delivery and shipping
documents for its completeness and that there has
been no damage in transportation. Any shortage and
or damage must be reported immediately to
Flowserve and received in writing within one month
of receipt of the equipment. Later claims cannot be
accepted.

Check any crates, boxes and wrappings for any
accessories or spare parts which may be packed
separately with the equipment or attached to side
walls of the box or equipment.

Each product has a unique serial number. Check that
this number corresponds with that advised and
always quote this number in correspondence as well
as when ordering spare parts or further accessories.
Handling 2.2
Boxes, crates, pallets or cartons may be unloaded
using fork lift vehicles or slings dependent on their
size and construction.
Lifting 2.3
Equipment in excess of 25Kg (55lbs) should be
lifted by mechanical means. Fully trained personnel
must carry out lifting, in accordance with local
regulations.

Before lifting the driver alone, refer to the
manufacturers instructions.

Lifting of W-type cast discharge head 2.3.1
(head only-pump not attached)
Lift the unassembled cast discharge heads (pump
not attached) by installing eyebolts as shown using
the flange mounting holes. Lower the head over
shaft into place.
PIN
EYE BOLTS
CAST HEAD
UNASSEMBLED

Do not use the lifting pins at the base
of the discharge head while lifting unassembled cast
discharge heads unless the discharge head is
secured by slings to prevent overturning. Never lift
the completely assembled pump with eyebolts
through this flange.

Lifting of type-W cast discharge head with 2.3.2
pump attached
Cast discharge heads with pump attached are
recommended to be lifted by using pins suitable with
that head size (refer to the table shown). The slings
are attached as shown maintaining minimum length
of the sling from the shaft end as shown in the detail.

PIN
CAST HEAD
WITH PUMP
ATTACHED
305 mm (12 in.) MIN.
" L "


Cast heads with discharge size mm (in.)
100
(4)
150
(6)
200
(8)
250
(10)
300
(12)
Pin
Dia.
25
(1)
32
(1.25)
32
(1.25)
32
(1.25)
38
(1.5)
L
1220
(48)
1370
(54)
1370
(54)
1520
(60)
1520
(60)
L is approximate length


Lifting of fabricated discharge heads with 2.3.3
or without the pump
If the pump is supplied with a fabricated discharge
head use 2 point or 3 point method of lifting as shown
in the details provided in 2.3.3.1 & 2.3.3.2. This
method is applicable to the lifting of discharge heads
with or without the pump.
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 11 of 76 flowserve.com

Two point lifting of fabricated discharge 2.3.3.1
head types TF, UF & HFH (with or
without pump attached)

Fabricated heads with discharge size mm (in.)
100-200
(4-8)
250-600
(10-24)
700-900
(28-36)
Pin
Dia.
32 (1.25) 38 (1.50) 44 (1.75)
Weight <2300 (5000) <4500 (10000) <6800 (15000)

Three point lifting of fabricated 2.3.3.2
discharge head of type HFL (with or
without pump attached)


HFL STYLE FABRICATED
WITH 3 POINT LIFTING


Lifting of bowl assembly only 2.3.4
Clamp the bowl assembly and center the lifting hook
for lifting and lowering the assembly into the
sump/suction barrel.

a) Lower the bowl assembly until the clamp
extensions rest on the foundation (use
appropriate supports).
b) Build the very first section of the column piping,
and lower the entire assembly to assemble the
next column section.
c) Continue to build until it is ready for discharge
head assembly.
d) Install the discharge head.
e) Assemble the motor.

Example: Lifting of bowl assembly




50 mm (2in.) HOLE
FABRICATED WITH
2 POINT LIFTING
"L"
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 12 of 76 flowserve.com
Lifting of suction barrel 2.3.5
Suction barrel (also referred as Can) is always
supplied separately and has to be installed into the
sump first. Install eyebolts on the flange of the
suction barrel and attach slings and straps to bring
the suction barrel to a vertical position. Move the
barrel for installation. Provide hand support to
prevent the suction barrel from swaying during
movement.

Example: Lifting of suction barrel


Lifting of fully assembled pumps 2.3.6
If the pump is fully assembled, it has to be
adequately strapped and supported at least two
places before it can be lifted from the shipping crate
and moved to the installation site. See details
shown. Same rules are applicable when the pump is
pulled out from the sump and moved to another
location.

S
U
C
T
I
O
N

B
A
R
R
E
L

(
C
A
N
)
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 13 of 76 flowserve.com

Pump must be supported
at least two places
when lifted.
Do not use chains
to wrap around.
Two (2)
cranes are
required

Examples shown here are for illustration only. See section 2.3 1~2.3.6 for specific lifting
instructions based on design variations. The pumps vary in weight, length and physical appearances from the
types shown here.
Therefore, before lifting is attempted, exercise caution to prevent any injuries or loss of life.



Pump must be supported at
least two places when lifted.
Do not use chains to wrap around.

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 14 of 76 flowserve.com
Storage 2.4
Store the pump in a clean, dry
location away from vibration. Leave piping
connection covers in place to keep dirt and other
foreign material out of pump casing. Turn the pump
at frequent intervals to prevent brinelling of the
bearings and the seal faces, if fitted, from sticking.

Inspection before storage 2.4.1
a) Inspect the preservative coating/painted surfaces
on the various parts. Touch up the areas, If
necessary.
b) Inspect all covers over pump openings and piping
connections. If found damaged, remove the
covers and inspect interiors of the opening for any
deposits of foreign materials or water.
c) If necessary, clean and preserve the interior parts
as noted above to restore the parts to the "as
shipped" condition. Replace covers and fasten
securely.
d) Exercise caution with pumps exposed to weather.
Containers are not leak proof. Parts may be
coated with a residual amount of protective
coating, which will wash away if exposed to
elements.

Short term storage (up to 6 months) 2.4.2
Follow the steps given in section 2.4.1. Select a
storage space so that the unit will not be subjected to
excess moisture, extreme weather conditions,
corrosive fumes, or other harmful conditions.

Driver storage instructions: Check driver
manufacturers User Instructions

Long term or extended storage 2.4.3
If a situation arises for a long-term storage, ( more
than 6 months) please contact Flowserve for special
storage instructions and warranty related information.

Recycling and End of Product Life 2.5
At the end of the service life of the product or its
parts, the relevant materials and parts should be
recycled or disposed of using an environmentally
acceptable method and local regulations. If the
product contains substances which are harmful to the
environment, these should be removed and disposed
of in accordance with current regulations. This also
includes the liquids and or gases in the "seal system"
or other utilities.
Make sure that hazardous substances or
toxic fluids are disposed of safely and that the correct
personal protective equipment is used. The safety
specifications must be in accordance with the current
regulations at all times.

3 DESCRIPTION
Should questions arise concerning the pump,
Flowserve pump division will require the complete
serial number to be of assistance. The serial number
is stamped on a metal nameplate affixed to the
discharge head assembly. The driver will have a
separate nameplate attached to it. If you are
requesting information on the driver, please provide
both the driver serial number and the pump serial
number for Flowserve representative.
Configuration 3.1
VTPs, are engineered pumps as:(a) Wet pit type and
(b) suction barrel (can) type pumps. Most pumps are
built with customer specific features and for
applications such as water pumping stations, deep
wells, storm water service, industrial and cryogenic
applications. The pumps vary in size, impeller types
and length, whether it is an open shaft or enclosed
shaft designs and type of discharge head used.
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 15 of 76 flowserve.com
Sump and deep well VTP 3.1.1

DRIVER
DISCHARGE
HEAD
ASSEMBLY
COLUMN
ASSEMBLY
BOWL
ASSEMBLY


Suction barrel (Can) VTP 3.1.2


SUCTION
BARREL
(CAN)
BOWL
ASSEMBLY
COLUMN
ASSEMBLY
DISCHARGE
HEAD
ASSEMBLY
DRIVER


Most common VTP models 3.1.3
The VTP configurations shown in sec 3.1.1 and 3.1.2
are typical for variety of VTP models with the bowl
assembly types such as EB, EG, EH, EJ, EK, EL,
EM, EN, EP, EQ, SK, SL, SN, SP, SR, ST, & AV.
The impeller models in each of these pumps are
designated separately (see section 3.2 for more
details) and the pump sizes could vary from 150mm
(6 in) to 1300 mm (52 in.). The size expressed is in
terms of nominal bowl diameter and is always in
inches.

Some units will not require a column
assembly. In such cases, the bowl assembly is
connected directly to the discharge head. Vertical
turbine pumps can have single or multiple stages.

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 16 of 76 flowserve.com
Nomenclature 3.2
The pump size/ serial number will be engraved on
the nameplate typically as below: The nameplate is
attached to the discharge head assembly.

Bowl assembly nomenclature 3.2.1

12 E J H-3



Nominal Bowl Diameter-inches

Impeller Type (A or E or S)
A=Axial, E=Enclosed, S=Semi-open

Bowl Model Types
B,J,K,H,L,M,N,P,Q,R,T,V.

Impeller Model Designation
L, M, H, Y..

No. of Stages
The typical nomenclature above is the general guide
to the VTP configuration description. Identify the
actual pump size and serial number from the pump
nameplate. The driver will have a separate
nameplate attached it.

Discharge head nomenclature 3.2.2
Consists of alphanumeric code as follows.
Examples: 8W16, 10HF20, 6TF16,.

10 HF 20



Nominal driver base diameter in inches

Discharge head type (see details below)

Nominal discharge diameter in inches

W = Cast head- for horizontal above the ground discharge
HF = Fabricated head for above the ground discharge
TF & LF = Fabricated heads with base flange
UF = Fabricated head for below ground discharge
HFL = Fabricated head for above ground discharge - Low H.P
HFH = Fabricated head for above the ground discharge -High H.P.

Please see section 3.2.2.1 for discharge head types
and identification.

Types of discharge heads 3.2.2.1
Typical discharge head types. Details (a) thru (g).

a) W type cast discharge head



b) HF type fabricated discharge head
(Typically with square base plate)



c) TF type fabricated discharge head


VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 17 of 76 flowserve.com
d) LF type fabricated discharge head
(Typically with a circular base plate- ANSI type.
Also available with suction barrel mounting)



e) UF type fabricated discharge head


f) HFL type fabricated discharge head

g) HFH type fabricated discharge head

The discharge heads shown in section
3.2.2.1 (a) thru (g) are for illustration only. The shaft
and coupling arrangements vary. For the actual
configuration of the pump that has been purchased,
please refer to the drawings supplied with the pump
or order specific sectionals from Flowserve.
Design of Major Parts 3.3

Please refer to appendix for Europump part
number equivalents

Drivers 3.3.1
A variety of drivers may be used, however, electric
motors are most common. For the purposes of this
manual, all types of drivers can be grouped into two
categories.

a) Hollow shaft drivers: where the head shaft extends
through a tube in the center of the rotor and is
connected to the driver by a clutch assembly at the top
of the driver.

b) Solid shaft drivers: where the rotor shaft is solid
and projects below the driver-mounting base. This
type driver requires an adjustable coupling for
connecting to the pump.

Discharge Head Assembly 3.3.2
(See also section 3.2.2.1)
The discharge head supports the driver and bowl
assembly as well as supplying a discharge connection
in most cases.

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 18 of 76 flowserve.com
A shaft sealing arrangement is located in the
discharge head to seal the shaft at its exit from the
liquid chamber.

The shaft seal will usually be either a mechanical
seal assembly or stuffing box with an open lineshaft
or a tube-packing box with an enclosed lineshaft.

Column assembly 3.3.3
The column assembly consists of column pipe, which
connects the bowl assembly to the discharge head
and carries the pumped fluid to the discharge head.
Houses and supports the shaft and may contain
bearings. Typical column assemblies are:

a) flanged column assembly

b) threaded column assembly: from 100 mm~355
mm (4~14 in.) sizes only.

The column supports shaft assembly, that is either

a) Open lineshaft construction utilizing the fluid being
pumped to lubricate the lineshaft bearings.
Or
b) Enclosed lineshaft construction has an enclosing
tube around the lineshaft and utilizes oil or other
fluid to lubricate the lineshaft bearings.

The shafts are threaded or key coupled with thrust
stud design or clamp ring design.

See sectional drawings supplied with the pump for
exact column assembly details as per the order. The
size and configuration vary depending upon the
specific order requirements and application criteria.

Bowl assemblies 3.3.4
The bowl assembly consists of impellers rigidly
mounted on the pump shaft coupled to an electric
motor. Impellers are cast wheels with multiple diffuser
vanes and are generally coated to meet the hydraulic
requirements. See section 8.0 for cross sectional and
part details.

Suction strainers 3.3.5
VTPs can also be fitted with strainers [316] to prevent
foreign particles from entering the pump. The type of
strainers and the mesh size depends on the
application. Examples are shown below. Strainers
are fastened [422] directly to the suction bell [55] or
attached using clips [421]. Cone shaped strainers
are provided with internal or external threads to
attach it to the main assembly.

a) Slip-on strainer


b) Clip-on strainer


c) Cone (threaded) strainer


SUCTION BELL (55)
CLIP
(421)
CAP SCREW (422)
STRAINER (316)
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 19 of 76 flowserve.com
d) Bolt on strainer


Impellers 3.3.6
VTPs are supplied with enclosed, or semi open
impeller types. Impellers are low, medium and high
capacity type designed for maximum coverage of all
VTP applications. Impellers are cast and machined
to match each order and to provide required surface
finish to achieve hydraulic characteristics. Impellers
are dynamically balanced and held in position on the
shaft by a tapered lock collet or split ring and key.

Stuffing box 3.3.7
Some VTPs are fitted with stuffing boxes. In such
cases, stuffing boxes are normally adequate for
working pressures up to 20.7 bar (300 psi). Refer to
stuffing box User Instructions for specifications.

Low pressure stuffing box 3.3.7.1
This type of packing box is fitted on to an open
lineshaft for pressures less than 6.5 bar (100 psi) and
used only on W-type discharge heads (see Section
3.2.2.1 to see for W type discharge head detail).






High pressure stuffing box 3.3.7.2
This type of packing box is fitted on to an open lineshaft for pressures up to 20 bar (300 psi) uses six rings of
packing with two lantern rings and allows grease lubrication.




(17) PACKING GLAND
(354) STUD
(355) HEX NUT
(13) PACKING SET
PRESSURE
REDUCING
BUSHING (117)
STUFFING BOX (83)
O-RING (347)
HEX NUT (327A)
STUD (326A)
SLINGER (346)
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 20 of 76 flowserve.com
Extra high pressure stuffing box 3.3.7.4
In cases where the pressures are expected to cross 20 bar (300 psi) up to 65 bar (1000 psi), extra high-
pressure stuffing box is used.


3.3.8 Mechanical shaft seal
VTPs can also be fitted with a mechanical seal. The requirement to fit the mechanical seal to be provided at
the time of contract.


VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 21 of 76 flowserve.com
Accessories 3.3.8
Accessories may be fitted when specified by the
customer.
Performance and Operation Limits 3.4
This product has been selected to meet the
specifications of the purchase order. See section 1.5.

The following data is included as additional information to
help with the installation. It is typical and factors such as
temperature, materials and seal type may influence this
data. If required, a definitive statement for your particular
application can be obtained from Flowserve.

Operating limits 3.4.1

Pumped liquid temperature
limits*
5 C (40 F) to +80 C (176 F)
Maximum ambient
temperature*
Up to +40 C (104 F)
Maximum pump speed refer to the nameplate

*Subject to written agreement from Flowserve.
Special designs and materials may be available for
pumps operating above and below these specified
limits. Contact Flowserve for upgrade options
available for your specific application.

4 INSTALLATION
Equipment operated in hazardous locations
must comply with the relevant explosion protection
regulations. See section 1.6.4, Products used in
potentially explosive atmospheres.
Location 4.1
When equipment has been in storage for greater than 6
months, a complete inspection should be conducted in
accordance with section 2.4.3. The pump should be
located to allow room for access, ventilation,
maintenance and inspection with ample headroom for
lifting and should be as close as practicable to the
supply of liquid to be pumped. Refer to the general
arrangement drawing for the pump set.

Inspection prior to installation 4.1.1
Six months prior to the scheduled installation date, a
Flowserve Pump Division representative is to be
employed to conduct an inspection of the equipment
and the facility. If any deterioration of equipment is
noticed, the Flowserve Pump Division representative
may require a partial or complete dismantling of the
equipment including restoration and replacement of
some components.

Preparation 4.2
The pump should be located to allow room for access,
ventilation, maintenance and inspection with ample
headroom for lifting and should be as close as
practicable to the supply of liquid to be pumped.

Refer to the general arrangement drawing for the pump
dimensions and details.

General installation check-list 4.2.1
The following checks should be made before starting
actual installation.

a) Make sure that motor nameplate ratings and the
power supply system match correctly.
b) Check the sump depth and pump length match-
up.
c) Check the liquid level in the sump.
d) Check the installation equipment to be sure that it
will safely handle the pump weight and size.
e) Check all pump connections (bolts, nuts etc) for
any shipping and handling related problems.

Always support shafting in at least
three places when lifting or installing. No installation
should be attempted without adequate equipment
necessary for a successful installation.


On hollow shaft drivers, check the clutch size
against the shaft size, which must go through the
clutch
On solid shaft drivers, check the motor shaft size
against the coupling bore size

Apply thread lubricant sparingly to
male shaft threads only at the time of making up
shaft connection. Excess lubricant should be
avoided.

Always check motor rotation before
connecting driver to pump. Reserve rotation due to
improper motor direction can cause extensive damage
to the pump.

Foundation/Anchor Bolts 4.3

There are many methods of installing
pump units to their foundations. The correct method
depends on the size of the pump unit, its location and
vibration limitations. Non-compliance with the
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 22 of 76 flowserve.com
provision of correct foundation and installation may
lead to failure of the pump and, as such, would be
outside the terms of the warranty.

The foundation must consist of material that will afford
rigid support to the discharge head and will absorb
expected stresses that may be encountered in service.

Concrete foundations should have anchor bolts
installed in sleeves that allow alignment and have
holes in the mounting plate as illustrated in the detail
below. Sleeve should be filled with non-bonding
moldable material after sleeve is set in place.

When a suction barrel is supplied as in the case of the
type "TF" discharge head, the suction vessel must
provide permanent, rigid support for the pump and
motor.

All foundation / anchor bolt
recommendations should be verified by prevailing
industry standards.

Detail of a typical foundation bolt, grouted.


Leveling of pumps mounted on the 4.3.1
discharge head flange

Example of a typical discharge head with the
mounting flange



Some wet pit pumps are installed directly by using
the flange that comes as an integral part of the
discharge head. The pump is lowered into the pit
and aligned with the anchor bolts [372].

The mounting flange is shimmed to achieve required
level by using a precision machinists level. The
pump is to be leveled to within 0.16 mm/m
(0.002 in./ft). The data to be recorded for future
reference. Anchor bolt nuts [373] are tightened
sufficient enough to hold down the pump in place.

Grout is poured and allowed to set for at least 72~80
hours (cure as required) before any further work is
done on the pump.

If leveling nuts are used to level the
base, they must be backed off as far as possible prior
to grouting.

Always shim near foundation bolts and then back off
the leveling nuts. Now tighten the foundation bolts. If
done otherwise there is a risk of significantly lowering
the structural natural frequency that could result in
separation of the base from the grout.

Directly mounted pumps are not user
friendly for service. Re-installation of these pumps
requires re-leveling and re-grouting.

Leveling of pumps mounted on a 4.3.2
soleplate and the soleplate is grouted
Some pumps are mounted on a separate plate
known as soleplate [23]. In such cases, the level
shall be set with a master level or a precision
machinists level. The mounting surface needs to be
leveled to within 0.16 mm/m (0.002 in./ft).

The level should not exceed 0.125 mm (0.005 in.)
elevation difference taken on any two points on the
individual soleplate. Accurate shimming and grouting
of the soleplate is very important. Record the leveling
data for future reference. Grout the soleplate and
allow to set at least 72~80 hours (cure as required)
before the pump is lowered into the pit. Align the
discharge head boltholes with the anchor bolts [372].
Check and adjust the pump level to within
0.16 mm/m (0.002 in./ft) with respect to the soleplate
and torque the nuts [373] to the required level.

DISCHARGE
HEAD FLANGE
CONCRETE
372
373
101
MOUNTING PLATE


ANCHOR BOLT
GROUT
NUT
NON-BONDING
MOLDABLE MATERIAL
FOUNDATION
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 23 of 76 flowserve.com
Example of pump mounted on a soleplate



Leveling of pumps with the suction barrel 4.3.3
(also referred as Can VTPs)
The suction barrel [315] is first lowered into the pit and
aligned with the anchor bolts [372]. The suction barrel
flange is leveled by using a master level or a precision
machinists level. Levels should be taken on the
equipment mounting surfaces. The suction barrel
flange mounting surface needs to be leveled to within
0.16 mm/m (0.002 in./ft) using shims and grouted.
Allow the grout to set for at least 72~80 hours before
the pump is installed. Check the barrel mounting
surface level after the grout is set and then proceed
with the pump installation. Lower the pump assembly
into the pit and align the discharge head flange bolt
holes to the anchor bolts [372].

Check and adjust the pump level with respect to the
barrel flange to within 0.16 mm/m (0.002 in./ft) and
final torque the nuts [373]. The leveling data to be
recorded for future reference.

Example of a pump installed with a suction barrel.


Leveling of pumps with suction barrel 4.3.4
mounted on a soleplate
The soleplate [23] is installed on the foundation and
aligned with the anchor bolts [372]. Level the
soleplate with the help of a machinists level to within
0.16 mm/m (0.002 in./ft). Tighten the nuts [373] and
grout. Cure and allow grout to set for 72~80 hours.
Lower the suction barrel into the pit and level again
with respect to the soleplate [23] to within 0.16 mm/m
(0.002 in./ft). The level should not exceed 0.125 mm
(0.005 in.) elevation difference taken on any two
points on the soleplate. The pump [101] is now
lowered into the suction barrel and installed. Make
sure that the discharge head flange is still in level
within 0.16 mm/m (0.002 in./ft) with respect to the
suction barrel [315].

Example of pump with a suction barrel mounted on a
soleplate


Grouting 4.4
Where applicable, grout in the foundation bolts.
After adding pipe work connections and re-checking
the coupling alignment, the mounting plate/soleplate
should then be grouted in accordance with good
engineering practice. If in any doubt, please contact
Flowserve service center for advice.

Grouting provides solid contact between the pump
unit and foundation that prevents lateral movement of
running equipment and dampens resonant vibrations.
Care should be taken to ensure maximum surface
contact with grout between the pump base, sole
plate, suction can and foundation (no voids).

Foundation bolts should only be fully
tightened after the grout has been cured.

372
373
CONCRETE
FOUNDATION
101
304
SOLE
PLATE
23
DISCHARGE
HEAD FLANGE
DISCHARGE
HEAD FLANGE
372
373
374
CONCRETE
FOUNDATION
315
101
304
374
372
373
CONCRETE
FOUNDATION
315
101
304
SOLE
PLATE
DISCHARGE
HEAD FLANGE
23
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 24 of 76 flowserve.com
Lifting and Assembly 4.5
Motors may be supplied separately from the pumps.
It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that
the motor is assembled to the pump and aligned as
detailed in section 4.5. Discharge head column
piping and the pump assembly are supplied either
separately or as fully assembled depending upon the
pump size and weight. If the parts are shipped
separately, it is the customers responsibility to install
and align the pump with driver to the satisfaction of
Flowserves installation instructions.

Installation of pumps that are shipped 4.5.1
unassembled

Lifting 4.5.1.1
See lifting methods in section 2.3.

Equipment and tools required for 4.5.1.2
installation of unassembled pumps

The following list covers the principal tools/items
required for installation.

a) Two (2) mobile cranes capable of hoisting and
lowering the pump and/or motor.
b) Two (2) steel clamps of suitable size.
c) Two (2) sets of chain tongs & cable sling for
attaching to the pump and motor lifting eyes.
d) Pipe clamp for lifting bowl assembly and the
column pipe. Approximately 4.5 m (15 ft) of 19
mm (3/4 in.) diameter rope may be required.
e) General purpose hand tools, pipe wrenches, end
wrenches, socket set, screwdrivers, Allen
wrenches, wire brush, scraper and fine emery
cloth.
f) Thread sealing compound designed for stainless
steel and light machinery oil.

Parts and accessories may be placed
inside shipping containers or attached to skids in
individual packages. Inspect all containers, crates
and skids for attached parts before discarding.

Uncrating and cleaning of unassembled 4.5.1.3
pump
a) Clean the parts of any dirt, packing material and
other foreign matter.
b) Flush the pump inside and outside with clean
water. Clean all machined surfaces.
c) Remove any rust spots found on the machined
surfaces with fine emery cloth.
d) Clean all threaded connections and any accessory
equipment.
Lineshaft when shipped separately
should be left in the crate to avoid damage or loss of
straightness.

Installing the bowl and column 4.5.1.4
assembly
a) Sump and piping should be thoroughly cleaned
of all loose debris before starting installation.
b) Check all bolts for tightness.
c) Do not lift or handle the bowl assembly by the
pump shaft.
d) When installing bowl assemblies in sizes of 152
mm (6 in.) or 203 mm (8 in.), leave bowl securely
fastened to the wooden skid that is attached for
shipping until the bowl assembly is raised to a
vertical position. This will help prevent breaking
the bowls or bending the shaft.
e) If a strainer is to be used, attach it to the bowl
assembly using fasteners as necessary..
f) Position lifting equipment so it will center over the
foundation opening.
g) If a base plate is used, level the plate to 0.16 mm
per m (0.002 in. per ft) and then grout and anchor
in place.
h) Check for axial clearance or endplay and record
that number for future reference (while bowls are
in a horizontal position you should be able to push
or pull the pump shaft indicating axial clearance).
i) Carefully lift the suction barrel and the bowl
assembly with suitable straps or clamps (See
section 2.4 for lifting and safety rules).
j) Lower the bowl assembly into the well or sump.
Set clamp or holding device that is attached to
bowls on a flat surface. This is to stabilize bowl
assembly and reduce possibility of cross threading
the shaft.
k) Proceed to install the column assembly (refer to
specific column pipe drawings).

Installation of discharge head 4.5.1.5

Choose one of the following discharge head type
installation procedure that is appropriate to the pump
configuration that has been purchased

Installation of discharge head with product 4.5.1.5.1
lubrication
Pump head may be shipped with the sealing
housing installed. For ease of assembly and to
prevent damage, we recommend removing the
housing before putting the head on the pump.

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 25 of 76 flowserve.com
For pumps supplied with hollow shaft drivers and a
one-piece headshaft (headshaft couples below
sealing housing) proceed to step (a).
For pumps supplied with a two-piece headshaft
(headshaft couples above the sealing housing) or
solid shaft drivers, proceed to step (b) directly
skipping step (a).

a) Attach the headshaft to the lineshaft with a
coupling and tighten (left hand threads).
b) Lift discharge head over shaft and lower carefully
into place (See section 2.3 for recommended
lifting methods and safety instructions). Be sure
not to bend the shaft. Fasten the top column
flange and bearing retainer, if supplied to bottom
of head. (Note that W heads do not have a
bearing retainer at the top column flange).
c) If baseplate is not included use shims or wedges
between the pump and foundation to level the
pump. The shaft must be centered in the
discharge head.

See section 4.4.4 for coupling installation on solid
shaft drivers and section 4.2.1~4.2.4 for pump
leveling details

Installation of discharge head with the 4.5.1.5.2
enclosing tube
Pump head may be shipped with the sealing
housing installed. For ease of assembly and to
prevent damage, we recommend removing the
housing before putting the head on the pump.

For pumps supplied with hollow shaft drivers and a
one-piece headshaft (headshaft couples below
sealing housing) proceed to step (a). For pumps
supplied with a two-piece headshaft (headshaft
couples above the sealing housing) or solid shaft
drivers, proceed to step (b) directly skipping step (a).
a) Attach the headshaft to the lineshaft with a
coupling and tighten (left hand threads).
b) Attach the top enclosing tube to the column
enclosing tube and tighten (left hand threads).
c) Lift the discharge head over shaft and enclosing
tube then lower carefully into place ( See section
2.3 for recommended lifting methods and safety
instructions). Be sure, not to bend the shaft.
Fasten the top column flange and alignment ring if
supplied to bottom of head. (W heads do not have
an alignment ring at the top column flange).
d) Use shims or wedges between the pump and
foundation to level the pump. The shaft must be
centered in the discharge head.
See section 4.4.4 for coupling installation on solid
shaft drivers and section 4.2.1~4.2.4 for pump
leveling details.

Installation of pumps that are shipped 4.5.2
fully assembled

Lifting 4.5.2.1
See lifting methods in section 2.3.

Equipment and tools required for 4.5.2.2
installation of a fully assembled pump
a) Mobile crane capable of hoisting and lowering the
entire weight of the pump and motor.
b)
Cable slings for attaching to the pump and motor
lifting eyes.
c)
Ordinary hand tools: Pipe wrenches, end
wrenches, socket set, screwdrivers, Allen
wrenches, wire brush, scraper and fine emery
cloth.
d)
Thread sealing compound designed for type of
connection and light machinery oil.

The single most common cause of pump
vibration is from a bent shaft. Shafting is
straightened to stringent tolerances prior to shipping
and great care must be exercised in its handling.

Always support shafting in at least three places when
lifting or installing.

Parts and accessories may be placed
inside shipping containers, or attached to skids in
individual packages.

Inspect all containers, crates and skids for attached
parts before discarding.

Lifting heavy objects is dangerous. Use of
appropriate tools and procedures is must.

Uncrating and cleaning of a fully 4.5.2.3
assembled pump

a) Clean the parts of all dirt, packing material and
other foreign matter.
b) Flush the pump inside and outside with clean
water.
c) Clean all machined surfaces. Remove any rust
spots found on the machined surfaces with fine
emery cloth.
d) Clean all threaded connections and any accessory
equipment.

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 26 of 76 flowserve.com
Installing the fully assembled pump 4.5.2.4
If a base plate is used, level the plate to 0.16 mm per
m (0.002 in. per ft), grout and anchor in place.

See sections 4.2.1~4.2.4 for pump leveling details.

Position lifting equipment so it will center over the
foundation opening.

Sump and piping should be
thoroughly cleaned of all loose debris before starting
installation.

Set up installation unit so that the lifting cable will be
centered directly over the well or sump. Carefully lift
the bowl assembly and suction barrel with a clamp.
Lower the bowl assembly into the well or sump. Set
the clamps or holding device that is attached to bowls
on a flat surface. This is to stabilize bowl assembly
and reduce possibility of cross threading the shaft.

a) When installing 152 mm (6 in.) or 203 mm (8 in.)
pump assembly, leave the pump securely
fastened to the wooden skid (as shipped) until the
bowl assembly is raised to a vertical position
b) Lift the pump to a vertical position. If a strainer is
used, attach it to the bowl assembly.
c) Position pump over sump or suction barrel. Align
the discharge of the pump with external piping
then lower onto the base. Level the entire pump.
d) If a stuffing box and a hollow shaft driver are
included, attach the head shaft to the pump shaft
(left hand threads).
e) If a mechanical seal is included, install the seal at
this point per the attached instructions.

If the pump includes a suction barrel (can), follow the
procedure as listed below. (See lifting instructions in
section 2.3)

a) Install the suction barrel first and grout the
mounting flange and bolts directly to the
foundation.
b) If soleplate is used, mount and grout the
soleplate and mount the suction barrel onto the
soleplate.
c) Level the soleplate & the suction barrel flange as
required.
d) Check to ensure suction barrel is free of debris
and other foreign material.
e) Install the pump.
Installation of couplings on solid shaft 4.5.3
drivers.
If the pump purchased is having a solid
shaft driver, one of the following coupling
arrangement between the driver and the pump shaft
is applicable. Choose the procedure appropriate to
the coupling arrangement required.

Clean threads on pump shaft and on
adjusting nut. Check for burrs and nicks.

All burrs, nicks and rust must be removed from all
mating parts of flanged coupling and pump before
installation. Failure to remove all burrs, nicks and
rust may result in misalignment causing pump to fail.

Installation of adjustable flanged 4.5.3.1
coupling WA/PA.
a) The key [46A] for the driver shaft keyseat should
be a snug or tight fit in the shaft keyseat, and a
sliding fit in the keyseat of the driver half coupling
[42].
b) The key with pin [46] should be a sliding fit in
pump shaft keyseat and a snug or tight fit in pump
half coupling [44] keyseat.
c) Side clearance of keys in keyseats should be
checked with a feeler gauge. Clearance for
WA/PA coupling should not exceed 0.076 mm
(0.003 in.) for a snug fit or 0.127mm (0.005 in) for
a sliding fit. These are maximum allowable
clearances. Closer fits are preferred, if possible.
It may be necessary to file-dress keys to obtain
proper fit.
d) Insert the key [46] with pin into pump half of
coupling [44] putting the pin in the hole in keyseat.
The key should not extend below coupling.
e) Lubricate pump coupling half and key assembly
with light oil and slide it onto pump shaft [12A] with
flange up. Slide it past threads.
f) Lubricate adjusting nut [66A] with light oil and
thread it onto pump shaft [12A] (left hand threads)
with male register down. Thread it on until top of
shaft and top of nut are even.
g) Uncrate and lift driver to allow access to drive
shaft.
The driver must be set on supports
capable of carrying the entire weight of the driver
before proceeding to step (h). Failure of supports
could cause damage to the motor or loss of life.

h) Clean and check driver shaft. Remove any burrs.

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 27 of 76 flowserve.com
i) Check the fit of the straight key and split thrust
rings [312A] in their respective keyseats. (Refer to
paragraph (a) regarding fit of the straight key).
j) Install straight key into keyseat. The bottom of the
key must be above the top of circular keyseat for
the split thrust rings.
k) Lubricate driver half coupling lightly and slide it
onto driver shaft. Slide bottom of coupling above
the top of the keyseat for split thrust rings.
l) Install split thrust rings into circular keyseat and
slide the coupling down over them.
m) Tighten the coupling bolts as follows.

Coupling bolts tightening torques
Coupling
size
Flange diameter
mm (in.)
Torque NM
(Inlb)
1 & 2
112 & 137
(4.4 & 5.4)
121.5 (1075)
3, 4 & 5
156, 188, & 213
(6.1, 7.4, & 8.4)
237.0 (2100)
6
251
(9.9)
424.0 (3750)
Torque values are for standard fasteners lubricated with a high
stress lubricant (such as, graphite and oil, moly-disulphite, white lead
etc.). For stainless steel bolts, multiply listed torques by 0.80.

n) Proceed with the driver installation.



TYPE WA/PA COUPLING DETAIL
Installation of adjustable flanged spacer 4.5.3.2
coupling WSA/PSA.

Follow procedure from (a) thru (l) as listed in section
4.5.4.1.

c) Bolt spacer [314] to the driver half coupling [42]
using the short set of socket head cap screws
[364]. The male register should be pointing
down. Tighten all cap screws evenly to the bolt
torques as listed in 4.5.4.1 under item (m).
d) Proceed with the driver installation.



TYPE- WSA/PSA COUPLING DEATILS
(12A) TOP SHAFT
(46) KEY ASSEMBLY
(364) CAP SCREW
(44) DRIVEN COUPLING
(66A) ADJUSTING NUT
(312A) SPLIT THRUST
(46A) DRIVE KEY
(42) DRIVER COUPLING
MOTOR SHAFT
HALF
HALF
RING
(12A) TOP SHAFT
(46) KEY ASSEMBLY
(364) CAP SCREW
(44) DRIVEN COUPLING
(42) DRIVER COUPLING
(312A) SPLIT THRUST
(363) HEX NUT
MOTOR SHAFT
HALF
RING
HALF
(364) CAP SCREW
(314) SPACER
(46A) DRIVE KEY
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 28 of 76 flowserve.com
Installation of non-adjustable flanged 4.5.3.3
coupling WNA/PNA.
Follow procedure from (a) thru (e) as listed in section
4.5.4.1.

f) Install one set of split thrust rings [312A] in to the
circular keyway in pump shaft. Pull up the pump
half of the coupling [44] over the split keys.
g) Slide driver half coupling [42] onto driver shaft in
the same manner as the pump half of the
coupling.
h) Set the spacer ring [314] between the two halves
of the coupling together. Tighten all cap screws
[364] evenly to the bolt torques as listed in
4.5.4.1 under item (m).
i) Proceed with the driver installation.



TYPE-WNA/PNA COUPLING DETAILS

Installation of drivers 4.5.4
Drivers will come with either hollow shaft or
solid shaft as specified on the order/contract.
Choose the correct installation procedure from the
following paragraphs.

Reverse rotation with the pump shaft
connected can cause extensive damage to the pump.
Always check rotation before connecting driver to
pump.

Installation of hollow shaft driver 4.5.4.1
a) Clean driver mounting flange on discharge head
and check for burrs or nicks on the register and
mounting face. Oil lightly.
b) Remove driver clutch.
c) See (j) regarding installation of motor guide
bushing, if required.
d) Lift driver and clean mounting flange, checking for
burrs and nicks.
e) Center motor over pump and rotate to align
mounting holes.
Electric motors - rotate junction box into desired
position.
Gear Drives - rotate input shaft into desired
position.
f) Lower carefully into place making certain that the
female register on the driver mates over the male
register on the pump.
g) Bolt driver to discharge head.
h) Check the driver manufacturer's instruction
manual for special instructions including
lubrication instructions and follow all "startup"
directions.
i) Electric motors should be checked for rotation at
this time. Make certain the driver clutch has been
removed. Make electrical connections and
"bump" motor (momentarily start, then stop) to
check rotation. DRIVER MUST ROTATE
COUNTERCLOCK-WISE when looking down at
top end of motor. To change the direction of
rotation on a three-phase motor, interchange any
two line leads. To change direction of rotation on
a two phase motor, interchange the leads of either
phase
j) Some motors will be supplied with a "lower guide
bushing" or "steady bushing" which is installed at
the bottom of the motor to stabilize the shaft at this
point. Some motor manufacturers mount this
guide bushing before shipping while others will
ship the guide bushing with instructions for field
mounting.
MOTOR SHAFT
(42) DRIVER COUPLING
(363) HEX NUT
(46A) DRIVE KEY
(312A) SPLIT THRUST
(314) SPACER RING
(312A) SPLIT THRUST
(44) DRIVEN COUPLING
(364) CAP SCREW
(46) KEY ASSEMBLY
(12A) TOP SHAFT
HALF
RING
RING
HALF
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 29 of 76 flowserve.com
k) Check the packing slip to see if a guide bushing is
required, if so, determine if the bushing is already
mounted or not and proceed accordingly. Refer to
motor instruction manual.
l) Carefully install drive clutch on driver making sure
that it fits down properly.
m) Clean threads on top of head shaft and head shaft
nut. Lubricate male threads lightly. Install head
shaft.
n) Install gib key [335] in clutch and shaft. This must
be a sliding fit and may require filing and dressing.
Do not force.
o) Thread adjusting nut down on shaft until it bears
against clutch. (Threads on 43 mm (1.68 in.) and
larger head shaft adjusting nuts are left-handed
and all others are right handed). Do not thread
nut further at this time. See impeller adjusting
instructions in section 5.3.



Installation of solid shaft driver without 4.5.4.2
jacking screws
When lowering the motor and driver
half of coupling onto pump, do not let pump half of
the coupling touch the driver half of the coupling.

Before bumping motor make sure coupling halves
are not touching and that the driver can rotate freely,
without rotating the pump

Driver half coupling must be in proper position so the
circular key will not come out.

a) Clean driver mounting flange on discharge head
and check for burrs or nicks on the register and
mounting face. Oil lightly.
b) Center motor over pump and rotate to align
mounting holes.
Electric motors: Rotate junction box into desired
position.
Gear Drives: Rotate input shaft into desired
position.
c) Lower driver carefully into place making certain
that the female register on the driver mates over
the male register on the pump.
d) Bolt driver to discharge head.
e) Check driver manufacturer's instructions for
special instructions including lubrication
instructions and follow all "startup" instructions.
f) Electric drivers should be checked for rotation at
this time. Make electrical connections "bump"
motor (momentarily start, then stop) to check
rotation. DRIVER MUST ROTATE
COUNTERCLOCKWISE when looking down at
top end of motor. To change the direction of
rotation on a three-phase motor, interchange any
two line leads. To change direction of rotation on
a two-phase motor, interchange the leads of either
phase.
g) See impeller adjustment instructions (section 5.3)
before bolting the pump and driver half of the
coupling together.

Installation of solid shaft driver with 4.5.4.3
jacking screws

a) Clean driver mounting flange on discharge head
and check for burrs or nicks on the register and
mounting face. Oil lightly.
b) Center motor over pump and rotate to align
mounting holes.
Electric motors: Rotate junction box into
desired position.
Gear Drives: Rotate input shaft into desired
position.
c) Lower driver carefully into place. Mount the dial
indicator base on the O.D. of the motor half
coupling. Set the indicator on the pump shaft,
position the dial to zero being careful that the
indicator is in direct line with one of the
jackscrews. Record this reading then rotate the
motor shaft and indicator 180 degrees. Record
this reading being careful to note plus or minus
values. Take the difference of the two readings
and using the jackscrews move the motor one-
half of the difference. Repeat this step until the
T.I.R. reading is a maximum of 0.051mm
(0.002in.). Then repeat this step for the set of
jack screws located 90 degrees to the first set.
Once all readings are within 0.051mm (0.002in.),
tighten motor bolts and check for any movement
in readings.
d) Check driver manufacturer's instructions for
special instructions including lubrication
instructions and follow all "startup" instructions.
e) Electric drivers should be checked for rotation at
this time. Make electrical connections and
"bump" motor (momentarily start, then stop) to
check rotation. DRIVER MUST ROTATE
COUNTER-CLOCKWISE when looking down at
top end of motor. To change the direction of
rotation on a three-phase motor, interchange any
(334) LOCK SCREW
COUPLING
HEAD SHAFT (10)
HEAD SHAFT NUT (66)
DRIVER
GIB KEY(335)
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 30 of 76 flowserve.com
two line leads. To change direction of rotation on
a two-phase motor, interchange the leads of
either phase.
f) See impeller adjustment instructions (section 5.3
before bolting the pump and driver half of the
coupling together.
Initial Alignment 4.6

Thermal expansion 4.6.1

The pump and motor will normally
have to be aligned at ambient temperature and
should be corrected to allow for thermal expansion at
operating temperature. In pump installations
involving high liquid temperatures greater than 300F,
the unit should be run at the actual operating
temperature, shut down and the alignment checked
immediately.

Preparation before alignment 4.6.2
To ensure proper alignment the following items are
very important.

a) All machined mating surfaces (such as the
mating flanges of pump and motor) must be
clean and free of burrs and nicks.
b) Exterior strain must not be transmitted to the
pump. The most common cause of trouble is
forcing the piping to mate with the pump. It is
recommended that flexible connectors be installed
in the piping adjacent to the pump.
c) All threads should be checked for damage and
repaired if necessary. Lubricate all threaded
connections with a suitable thread lubricant (an
anti-galling compound).

Alignment methods 4.6.3
Ensure pump and driver are isolated
electrically and the half couplings are disconnected.

The alignment MUST be checked.
Although the pump will have been aligned at the
factory it is most likely that this alignment will have
been disturbed during transportation or handling.
If necessary, align the motor to the pump, not the
pump to the motor.

Adding or removing shims between the
motor and the discharge head helps alignment in the
vertical direction. The motor assembly may also
have to be adjusted in the horizontal direction to line
up the driver and shaft centers. Alignment screws
are provided to lock the motor assembly in its final
aligned position.

See section 5.3.2.1 for final coupling alignment for
solid shaft.

Before bumping motor make sure that the
coupling halves are not touching and that the driver
can rotate freely without rotating the pump. Driver
half coupling must be in proper position so the
circular key will not come out.

Angular and parallel misalignment 4.6.4

Check the direction of pump rotation
before the coupling is fully connected. The power
supply to the driver to be connected only after the
final alignment is complete.



a) Angular Offset: The median lines of shaft
intersect halfway between the ends of the two
shafts.
b) Axial Offset: Another offset is the displacement
of one or both of the shafts. A typical example is
thermal expansion.
c) Parallel Offset: The median lines run parallel.
The maximum allowable parallel offset depends
on the size of coupling and is indicated in the
instruction manual of manufacturer of coupling.

For couplings with narrow flanges use a dial indicator
as shown in the detail to check both parallel and
angular alignment.

Parallel offset
Angular offset
Axial offset
a)
b)
c)
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 31 of 76 flowserve.com
Paral l el
Angul ar


a) Pumps with thick flanged non-spacer couplings
can be aligned by using a straight-edge across
the outside diameters of the coupling hubs and
measuring the gap between the machined faces
using feeler gauges, measuring wedge or
calipers.

b) When the electric motor has sleeve bearings, it is
necessary to ensure that the motor is aligned to
run on its magnetic centerline.
Refer to the motor User Instructions for details.

If the motor does not run in its
magnetic center the resultant additional axial force
may overload the pump thrust bearing.

If the pump is handling hot liquid, the alignment must
be rechecked in warm condition of the unit. The
alignment of the unit shall be checked again after 200
service hours.
Piping 4.7

Protective covers are fitted to the pipe
connections to prevent foreign particles or objects
entering the pump during transportation and
installation. Ensure that these covers are removed
from the pump before connecting pipes.

Pipe work velocities 4.7.1
In order to minimize friction losses and hydraulic
noise in the pipe work it is good practice to choose
pipe work that is one or two sizes larger than the
pump suction and discharge.

Typically, main pipe velocities should not exceed 2
m/s (6 ft/sec) on the suction and 3 m/s (9 ft/sec) on
discharge.

Take into account the available NPSH that must be
higher than the required NPSH of the pump.

Never use the pump as a support for
piping.

Maximum forces and moments allowed on 4.7.2
VTP pump flanges (See table 4.6.2.1)
Maximum forces and moments allowed on the pump
flanges vary with the pump size and type. To
minimize these forces and moments that may, if
excessive, cause misalignment, hot bearings, worn
couplings, vibration and possible failure of the pump
casing. The following points should be strictly
followed.

a) Prevent excessive external pipe load.
b) Never draw piping into place by applying force to
pump flange connections.
c) Do not mount expansion joints so that their force,
due to internal pressure, acts on the pump
flange.

Ensure piping and fittings are flushed
before use.
Ensure that the piping arrangement has been
provided to flush the pump before removal in cases
of hazardous liquid pumps.



VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 32 of 76 flowserve.com


DISCHARGE
SUCTION
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 33 of 76 flowserve.com
Table of maximum forces and moments allowed on VTP pump flanges 4.7.2.1

Head
Type
Forces &
Moments
Discharge Head Size mm(in.)
100
(4)
150
(6)
200
(8)
255
(10)
305
(12)
355
(14)
400
(16)
460
(18)
508
(20)
610
(24)
760
(30)
915
(36)
W
Fx
0.53
(120)
0.80
(180)
1.13
(255)
1.47
(330)
1.67
(375)
1.78
(400)

Fy
0.67
(150)
1.00
(225)
1.47
(330)
1.83
(410)
2.00
(450)
2.23
(500)

Fz
0.45
(100)
0.67
(150)
0.94
(210)
1.22
(275)
1.34
(300)
1.45
(325)

Mx
0.50
(370)
0.75
(550)
1.06
(780)
1.37
(1015)
1.52
(1125)
1.59
(1175)

My
0.26
(190)
0.39
(285)
0.53
(390)
0.67
(495)
0.74
(550)
0.78
(575)

Mz
0.37
(275)
0.57
(425)
0.77
(570)
1.04
(770)
1.15
(850)
1.18
(875)

HF
&
LF
Fx
1.07
(240)
1.60
(360)
2.27
(510)
2.94
(660)
3.34
(750)
3.56
(800)
4.23
(950)
4.90
(1100)
5.34
(1200)
6.01
(1350)
7.12
(1600)
8.46
(1900)
Fy
1.34
(300)
2.00
(450)
2.94
(660)
3.65
(820)
4.00
(900)
4.45
(1000)
5.12
(1150)
5.79
(1300)
6.23
(1400)
7.12
(1600)
8.46
(1900)
9.79
(2200)
Fz
0.89
(200)
1.36
(300)
1.87
(420)
2.45
(550)
2.67
(600)
2.89
(650)
3.34
(750)
4.00
(900)
4.45
(1000)
4.90
(1100)
5.56
(1250)
6.23
(1400)
Mx
1.00
(740)
1.49
(1100)
2.11
(1560)
2.75
(2030)
3.05
(2250)
3.18
(2350)
3.66
(2700)
4.06
(3000)
4.47
(3300)
5.42
(4000)
6.50
(4800)
7.60
(5600)
My
0.51
(380)
0.77
(570)
1.06
(780)
1.34
(990)
1.49
(1100)
1.56
(1150)
1.83
(1350)
2.03
(1500)
2.51
(1850)
2.71
(2000)
3.25
(2400)
3.80
(2800)
Mz
0.75
(550)
1.15
(850)
1.54
(1140)
2.09
(1540)
2.30
(1700)
2.37
(1750)
2.71
(2000)
3.05
(2250)
3.39
(2500)
4.07
(3000)
4.88
(3600)
5.70
(4200)
TF
(1)
Fx
1.07
(240)
1.60
(360)
2.27
(510)
2.94
(660)
3.34
(750)
3.56
(800)
4.23
(950)
4.90
(1100)
5.34
(1200)
6.00
(1350)
7.12
(1600)

Fy
1.34
(300)
2.00
(450)
2.94
(660)
3.65
(820)
4.00
(900)
4.45
(1000)
5.12
(1150)
5.79
(1300)
6.23
(1400)
7.12
(1600)
8.46
(1900)

Fz
0.89
(200)
1.34
(300)
1.87
(420)
2.45
(550)
2.67
(600)
2.89
(650)
3.34
(750)
4.00
(900)
4.45
(1000)
4.90
(1100)
5.56
(1250)

Mx
1.00
(740)
1.49
(1100)
2.11
(1560)
2.75
(2030)
3.05
(2250)
3.18
(2350)
3.66
(2700)
4.07
(3000)
4.47
(3300)
5.42
(4000)
6.50
(4800)

My
0.51
(380)
0.77
(570)
1.06
(780)
1.34
(990)
1.49
(1100)
1.56
(1150)
1.83
(1350)
2.03
(1500)
2.51
(1850)
2.71
(2000)
3.25
(2400)

Mz
0.75
(550)
1.15
(850)
1.54
(1140)
2.09
(1540)
2.30
(1700)
2.37
(1750)
2.71
(2000)
3.05
(2250)
3.39
(2500)
4.07
(3000)
4.88
(3600)

UF
Fx

CONTACT FLOWSERVE CUSTOMER SERVICE
Fy
Fz
Mx

CONTACT FLOWSERVE CUSTOMER SERVICE
My
Mz
Units: Force (F) in kN (lbf); Moments (M) in kNm (lbfft)
1. Forces and moments shown for TF head are for the discharge flange. For the suction flange, use the values for the next large size
head.
Loads shown are maximum allowable for standard construction. Contact Flowserve if higher values are
required or temperatures are higher than ambient
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 34 of 76 flowserve.com
Auxiliary piping 4.7.3

Drains 4.7.3.1
Normal pump leaks and gland leakage to be drained
through a separate piping arrangement or back into
the suction/sump.

Pumps fitted with gland packing 4.7.3.2
The pumped liquid is allowed to flow through the
gland packing at discharge pressure and drained out
of the pump or re-circulated back into the suction. A
separate flush supply may be required in some
cases. The piping plans and flush supply are to be
selected based on the application and operating
parameters.

In some special cases where the discharge pressure
exceeds 6.5 bar (100 psi) a special flushing plan is
recommended.

Pumps fitted with mechanical seals 4.7.3.3
Auxiliary piping to circulate the flushing liquid back
into the suction is required. In case of external clean
source requirements for pump applications such as
high temperature service, contaminated fluids,
oxidizing fluids, a special piping plan to carry the
clean liquid into the seal chamber with adequate
pressure is required and several piping plans are
available to suit the specific pump application.
See section 5.4 for Direction of
rotation before connecting motor to the power supply.

Final checks 4.7.4
After connecting the piping to the pump, rotate the
shaft several times by hand to ensure no pipe strain.
If pipe strain exists, correct piping.
Electrical Connections 4.8
Electrical connections must be made
by a qualified Electrician in accordance with relevant
local national and international regulations.
It is important to be aware of the EUROPEAN
DIRECTIVE on potentially explosive areas where
compliance with IEC60079-14 is an additional
requirement for making electrical connections.
It is important to be aware of the EUROPEAN
DIRECTIVE on electromagnetic compatibility when
wiring up and installing equipment on site. Attention
must be paid to ensure that the techniques used
during wiring/installation do not increase
electromagnetic emissions or decrease the
electromagnetic immunity of the equipment, wiring or
any connected devices. If in any doubt contact
Flowserve for advice.
The motor must be wired up in
accordance with the motor manufacturer's
instructions (normally supplied within the terminal
box) including any temperature, earth leakage,
current and other protective devices as appropriate.
The identification nameplate should be checked to
ensure the power supply is appropriate.
A device to provide emergency stopping must
be fitted.
If not supplied pre-wired to the pump unit, the
controller/starter electrical details will also be
supplied within the controller/starter.

For electrical details on pump sets with controllers
see the separate wiring diagram.
See section 5.4, Direction of rotation
before connecting the motor to the electrical supply.
Final Shaft Alignment Check 4.9
After connecting piping to the pump, rotate the shaft
several times by hand to ensure there is no binding
and all parts are free. Recheck the coupling
alignment, as previously described, to ensure no pipe
strain. If pipe strain exists, correct piping.
Protection Systems 4.10
The following protection systems are
recommended particularly if the pump is installed in a
potentially explosive area or is handling a hazardous
liquid. If in doubt, consult Flowserve.

If there is any possibility of the system allowing the
pump to run against a closed valve or below
minimum continuous safe flow a protection device
should be installed to ensure the temperature of the
liquid does not rise to an unsafe level.

If there are any circumstances in which the system
can allow the pump to run dry, or start up empty, a
power monitor should be fitted to stop the pump or
prevent it from being started. This is particularly
relevant if the pump is handling a flammable liquid.

If leakage of product from the pump or its associated
sealing system can cause a hazard it is
recommended that an appropriate leakage detection
system is installed.
To prevent excessive surface temperatures at the
bearings, it is recommended that temperature and/or
vibration monitoring is done on a regular basis.
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 35 of 76 flowserve.com
5 COMMISSIONING, STARTUP,
OPERATION AND SHUTDOWN
These operations must be carried out
by fully qualified personnel. Turn off power supply for
safety while pump commissioning is in progress.
Pre-commissioning Procedure 5.1

The gland is to be filled with grease and flush supply
to be in place. Flush piping to be checked for leaks.
Mechanical seals to be checked for leaks, flush flow
and pressure.

a) Pumps with the enclosing tubes and oil-lubed
bearings must be filled with the proper lubricant to
avoid running dry and to guarantee acceptable
performance of the pump. A separate oil tank is
attached to the pump (see detail in section 5.2.2).
b) For can pumps check all vent connections for
complete filling of the pump. The venting
procedure can take from 10 minutes up to 2 hours,
depending on the kind of fluid .
c) Check the direction of rotation of the pump
(Coupling spacer dismantled). Should be counter
clockwise when viewed from the driver end.
d) The pump rotor and the shaft seal must be in
correct axial position.
e) Check the readiness of all auxiliary systems (seal
sys., lubrication system etc.,) for startup.
f) All pipe work, including the internal and the
auxiliary pipe work, must be connected correctly
and must be absolutely tight. Check the tightness
of all connections of the auxiliary pipe work. The
suction valve must be open, the discharge valve
shall be closed or partially open as required.
g) Turn the pump by hand, if required with the help of
a lever, to check the free rotation of the rotor. The
rotor must turn uniformly and noiselessly. Some
resistance may be felt due to the friction in the
bearings and seals.
h) Check the readiness of the driver for startup. Refer
to the manual for the driver to be sure that all
precautions are in place to energize the motor.

Pump Lubricants 5.2
Other than the stuffing box lubrication, mechanical
seal and/or lineshaft lubrication, the pump will not
require further periodic lubrication. On water pumps,
the suction bearing on the bowl assembly should be
repacked when required. Pumps that pump
hydrocarbons or have carbon, rubber, epoxy or
Teflon suction bearings do not have the suction
bearings packed. If the pump will be started after a
longer storage period, the bearings should be first
flushed and cleaned by using a suitable cleaning
agent. It is not necessary to remove the oil sprayed
for short or long-term storage as this will mix up
thoroughly with the lubrication oil.

Re-checking the motor lubrication should
be in accordance with the motor manufacturers user
instructions supplied separately with the pump.

Open lineshaft lubrication 5.2.1
Open lineshaft bearings are lubricated by the pumped
fluid where the static water level is less than 9 m (30 ft)
below the discharge head and will usually not require
pre or post-lubrication. Care is to be taken to ensure
that the gland or seal is supplied with the required
flush flow.

All open lineshaft pumps where the static water level is
more than 9 m (30 ft) below the discharge head should
be adequately pre-lubricated before starting the pump.

Pre-lubrication duration 5.2.1.1
Allow flush water to flow down the shaft for 45
minutes for pumps over 9 m (30 ft) and increase the
pre-lube duration by at least 15 minutes for every 5 m
(15 ft) additional shaft length beyond 20 m (65 ft).
The fittings for pre-lube are provided at the discharge
head.

Typical pre-lube pipe connection 5.2.1.2
(examples (a) thru (d))
In general all W type cast discharge heads are
provided with a standard size pipe fitting for pre-lube
connection. Fabricated discharge heads are fitted
with a special piping arrangement to allow pre-lube
liquid flow onto the shaft.

It is the responsibility of the user to install a
reliable pre-lube system to achieve the pump pre-
lubrication. Flowserve will not supply these types of
systems or accessories with the pump.


VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 36 of 76 flowserve.com
Examples of typical pre-lube methods used in the industry are as follows.

Example (a)
TANK
PIPING MUST BE
MINIMUM LENGTH AS
GATE VALVE SHOULD
MAX. DISCHARGE
1" MIN PIPE
PRESSURE

Pre-lubrication recommended tank volume for pumps started at rated RPMs for all cases of pre-lubrication
methods suggested in this section
Depth to water level
(at the time of starting the
pump) m (ft)
Pre-Lubrication tank
size.m
3
(US gal)
More than Upto
0 9 (30) 0
9 (30) 30 (100) 0.19 (50)
30 (100) 60 (200) 0.38 (100)
60 (200) 150 (500) 0.75 (200)

Example (b)



STARTUP
LEVEL
MAX
LEVEL
GATE VALVE SHOULD WITHSTAND
MAX. DISCHARGE PRESSURE
PIPING MUST BE KEPT TO
MINIMUM LENGTH AS POSSIBLE
DRAIN
PLUG
25 mm (1in.) MIN
PIPE LINE
LEVEL
GAUGE
LUBRICATION
TANK
VENT
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 37 of 76 flowserve.com
Example (c)


Example (d)


STARTUP
LEVEL
25mm (1in.) PIPE
LINE
DRAIN
PLUG
PIPING MUST BE KEPT TO
MINIMUM LENGTH AS POSSIBLE
LUBRICATION
TANK
MAX
LEVEL
VENT
LEVEL
SWITCH
SOLENOID GATE VALVE SHOULD
WITHSTAND MAX. DISCHARGE PRESSURE
FLOAT
LEVEL
TIME DELAY RELAY
SOLENOID GATE VALVE SHOULD
WITHSTAND MAX. DISCHARGE PRESSURE
LUBRICATION
TANK
25mm (1 in.) MIN
PIPE LINE
DRAIN
PLUG
PIPING MUST BE KEPT TO
MINIMUM LENGTH AS POSSIBLE
LEVEL
GAUGE
MAX
LEVEL
STARTUP
LEVEL
VENT
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 38 of 76 flowserve.com
Enclosed shaft lubrication 5.2.2
VTPs with the enclosed shafting are lubricated by a
dedicated oil supply system or injection lubricated by
extraneous liquid; usually clean water to meet the
application requirements.

Oil lubricated pumps 5.2.2.1
The lubricating oil must be available and should be
allowed to run into the enclosing tube in sufficient
quantity to thoroughly lubricate all lineshaft bearings.
The gravity flow system is the most commonly
utilized system for oil.

The oil reservoir (example shown in detail below)
must be kept filled with a good quality light turbine oil
(about 30 cSt) at the operating temperature and
adjusted to feed a minimum of 3 drops per minute
per 30 m (100 ft) of column length, at never less than
5 drops per minute total.



Pre-lubrication of oil lubricated pumps 5.2.2.2
As a general rule, the oil must be allowed to flow by
gravity at least 45 minutes before the pump is started
for the first time or in case the pump was turned off
for a longer duration. Adequate care should be taken
to make sure that the flow is available and is
consistent for subsequent startups.

Injection lubricated pumps 5.2.2.3
Enclosed lineshaft bearings are lubricated by
extraneous liquid (usually clean water), which is fed
to the tension nut either by gravity flow, or by a
pressure injection system.
Injection systems are designed for each
installation. Injection pressure and quantity of liquid
will vary. Normally 0.45-0.90 m
3
/h (2-4 gpm) at 0.7-
1.4 bar (10-20 psi) over maximum pump discharge
pressure of clean liquid is required.

Pre-lubrication of injection lubricated 5.2.2.4
pumps
As a general rule, the liquid flow is to be started at
least 15~20 minutes before the pump is started for
the first time or in the event of pump not being in use
for longer duration.

The injected lubricant flow is never stopped for short
off periods. Adequate care should be taken to
make sure that the flow is available and consistent
for subsequent startups and operation. Injection
pressure to be adjusted as recommended before the
startup.

Enclosed shaft lubricants 5.2.3
The following oils are recommended for enclosed
lineshaft bearing lubrication under normal operating
conditions. See tables 5.2.3.1 and 5.2.3.2.

It is recommended that detergent type
oils not be used.

Non-food/food grade lubricant oils 5.2.3.1

Equivalent turbine oil (food or non-food grades as
required) with the matching properties has to be
selected. Oils with a viscosity range of 30 cSt
(mm
2
/sec) to 37 cSt (mm
2
/sec) at 40 C (100 F) with a
minimum viscosity index of 90 are recommended.

The pour point of the oil must be in accordance with
the lowest expected temperature of the bearing
housing during a stop of the pump.

Oil level 5.2.4
The correct oil level is in the middle of the oil sight
glass and shall be checked when the pump is not in
operation. Periodically check if the lubricating oil is
mixed with any condensed water. Careful opening of
the oil drain during a stop of the pump will show any
water.
After the initial start the level will decrease
due to circulation of the oil through the bearings.
If the oil level is higher than specified, it could
result in higher bearing temperatures resulting in
poor lubrication.
Impeller Adjustment 5.3
Proper impeller adjustment positions the impeller
inside the bowl assembly for maximum performance.
The impellers must be raised slightly to prevent them
from dragging on the bowls, but not raised too high so
as to adversely affect hydraulic performance.

The impeller must be down against the bowl seat
when starting impeller adjustment. When pumps are
subjected to suction pressure, the pressure acting
against the shaft tends to raise it. Make sure the shaft
is down when starting to adjust the impellers.
(77) LUBRICANT TANK
(341) SHUT OFF VALVE
(79) TANK BRACKET
(342) FLOW REGULATION
VALVE
(344) LUBRICANT SUPPLY
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 39 of 76 flowserve.com

If, after making the impeller adjustment the pump does
not deliver its rated capacity, the impellers can be
lowered one step at a time until the lowest possible
adjustment is achieved without the impellers dragging.
On the other hand, if the impellers appear to be
dragging after the initial adjustment, the unit should be
stopped and the impellers raised one step. Dragging
impellers will increase the load significantly and can
usually be heard and felt as increased vibration. A
sharp rise in motor amperage will occur when
impellers are dragging.

Impeller adjustment for a hollow shaft 5.3.1
driver
Impeller adjustment when using hollow shaft drivers is
as follows. The driver canopy will have to be removed
before beginning.
a) Install headshaft [10] if not already in place.
b) Install driver clutch in accordance with the driver
instruction manual and bolt into place.
c) Check shaft position. Lower shaft until there is a
definite feel of metal contacting metal. This
indicates the impellers are "on bottom" and in the
correct starting position for impeller adjustment.
d) Thread headshaft nut [66] down (right hand
threads) except 43 mm (1.7 in.) and larger sizes
that are having left hand threads, until impellers
are just raised off their seat and the shaft will
rotate freely.
e) Check a separate document that is supplied with
the pump that provides recommended impeller
setting and running clearance information..

Detail showing head shaft and lock screw
arrangement




If at any time during the life of this pump the
pumping conditions or total pump length changes,
contact the factory for recalculation of the impeller
setting.

f) Tighten the adjusting nut to match impeller setting
recommended by Flowserve. See table 5.3.1.1 &
5.3.1.2.
g) Using the cap screw provided, bolt the headshaft
nut [66] down & lock using lock screw [334] to the
motor coupling. See the details of head shaft and
lock screw arrangement under item (h) below.

Always lock headshaft nut by
tightening the lock screw [334] before starting driver.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the pump
and driver.

h) If a mechanical seal is used, adjust the
mechanical seal at this time.

Impeller clearance settings 5.3.1.1
Flowserve recommends the following impeller
settings based on the pump sizes.

If the pump size
is

Setting for
enclosed
impellers
Setting for semi-
open impellers
Size 6 thru size
12
3~4 mm
(0.13~0.15 in.)
0.25 mm to 0.38 mm
(0.010 in. to 0.015 in.)
Size 14 and
above.
6~7 mm
(0.25~0.27 in.)
0.63 mm to 0.76 mm
(0.025 in. to 0.030 in.)

Shafts elongate due to the hydraulic thrust
of the pump and the impellers must be compensated
for this elongation. Shaft elongation varies for each
model depending upon the size, shaft length, shaft
diameter, impeller weight, number of stages. Please
see the documentation supplied along with the pump
for exact impeller setting value matched for the
specific pump that you have purchased

Head shaft nut adjustment 5.3.1.2

Head
Shaft size
mm
(in.)
Threads
per every
25 mm
(1 in.)
length of
the shaft
Lateral adjustment
mm (in.)
One complete
turn of nut will
result in shaft
movement of
Each face of
nut
25 (1.0) 14
1.81
(0.070)
0.30
(0.012)
32 (1.25)
38 (1.50)
43 (1.69)
12
2.11
(0.080)
0.35
(0.014)
43 (1.69)
50 (1.94)
55 (2.19)
62 (2.44)
10
2.54
(0.100)
0.40
(0.016)
68 (2.69)
75 (2.94)
8
3.17
(0.120)
0.53
(0.020)

(334) LOCK SCREW
COUPLING
HEAD SHAFT (10)
HEAD SHAFT NUT (66)
DRIVER
GIB KEY(335)
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 40 of 76 flowserve.com
Impeller adjustment for a solid shaft 5.3.2
driver
Impeller adjustment when using solid shaft drivers is
accomplished in the adjustable flanged coupling
located below the driver.

Adjusting adjustable flanged coupling 5.3.2.1
a) Assemble coupling on pump shaft and driver
shaft (if not installed earlier).
b) Check motor direction of rotation.
c) Check and write down Flowserve recommended
impeller setting for final adjustment.
d) Pump to motor alignment and final coupling
Mount two magnetic indicator bases on the
discharge head at 90 degrees to each other
Set the indicator tips on the shaft just above
the seal and at 90 degrees to each other.
(Usually parallel and perpendicular to the
discharge nozzle) push the shaft (parallel to
discharge) back and forth (without bending
shaft)
Note and record the minimum and maximum
indicator readings. Do the same procedure
at 90 degrees to the discharge


Set the shaft in the center of the maximum
and minimum indicator readings both
directions. If the shaft will not stay in this
position, use small wooden wedges between
the shaft and seal bolts to hold the shaft.
The indicators can now be removed
Alternate method for pump with packing:
Using an inside micrometer, measure the
space between the shaft and the packing box
bore. Do this both parallel and perpendicular
to the discharge nozzle

Using the wedges center the shaft so the
measurements taken at 180 degrees to each other are
within 0.10 mm (0.004 in.) of being equal
(For pumps using jackscrews for motor go to
step f).

e) Mount the magnetic base on the drive half
coupling (a band clamp may be necessary to hold
base due to limited space). Position the tip of the
indicator on the pump shaft just above the seal.
Slowly rotate the driver shaft.


Note and record the T.I.R. reading. If this reading
is more than 0.25 mm (0.010 in.) for WA and WSA
couplings or 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) for PA and PSA
couplings, unbolt the drive and reposition the
driver in the direction required to reduce the T.I.R.
to within the allowable limits.

If a register fit is used for alignment,
driver will be able to be moved only a few
thousandths of an inch. If enough movement is
not obtainable then the male register can be filed
to obtain acceptable T.I.R. readings (Go to step
g).

f) On pumps using jackscrews for motor alignment,
mount the dial indicator base on the O.D. of the
motor half coupling. Set the indicator on the shaft,
position the dial to zero being careful that the
indicator is in direct line with one of the
jackscrews. Record this reading then rotate the
motor shaft and indicator 180 degrees.

Record this reading being careful to note plus or
minus values. Take the difference of the two
readings and using the jackscrews move the
motor one half of the difference. Repeat this step
until the T.I.R. reading is a maximum of 0.05 mm
(0.002 in.).

IF NEEDED
INSERT
PACKING
PIECES/WEDGES
ALL AROUND
TO CENTER
THE SHAFT
DIAL
INDICATOR #1
DIAL
INDICATOR #2
MECHANICAL
SEAL
CENTER SHAFT IN STUFFING
BOX USING FOUR WOOD OR
METAL WEDGES
DIAL INDICATOR
RIGID BRACKET
SECURE WITH TWO BOLTS
STUFFING BOX
EXTENSION
MOTOR HALF
COUPLING
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 41 of 76 flowserve.com
Then repeat this step for the set of jackscrews
located 90 degrees to the first set. Once all
readings are within 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) tighten
motor bolts and check for any movement in
readings.

g) Set the impeller setting gap between the
adjusting nut and the driver portion of the
coupling. See impeller setting data supplied
along with the pump. If this information is not
found, contact Flowserve. Align the match marks
on the pump half coupling with the driver half
coupling. On pumps with enclosed impellers the
match marks can be lined up by increasing the
impeller gap until the marks are in line with the
driver half coupling marks.
On pumps with semi-open impellers,
the match marks probably will not be in line when
the gap is set. DO NOT try to align the marking
on the nut with the other markings.
For pumps with enclosed impellers go to step (h).
h) Using 2 bolts of the coupling, at 180 degrees to
each other, slowly raise pump half coupling until
impellers are just lifted off the seat (This can be
gauged by trying to turn shaft by hand. At the
point the impellers are lifted the pump will turn).
Be sure to lift both sides evenly.
i) Measure the resultant gap between the motor half
coupling and the adjusting nut.
j) Find the difference between the original gap and
the new gap. Add this difference to the original
gap and reset the adjusting nut.
k) Bolt the coupling together and tighten bolts by
tightening opposite sides.
l) Remove wooden wedges, if used. Mount
magnetic base on pump and set the tip of indicator
on the shaft just above the seal. Slowly rotate the
shaft and note the T.I.R. reading.

Unless otherwise specified, the allowable T.I.R.
readings are:

WA and WSA couplings 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
PA and PSA couplings 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)

If the reading is larger than the allowable values
specified above, unbolt the pump and rotate the driver
portion of the coupling to different hole and repeat
steps (h) and (i) until acceptable readings are
obtained.

m) If a mechanical seal is used, adjust the
mechanical seal at this time.

Direction of Rotation 5.4
Ensure the pump is given the same
rotation as specified or as marked on the
pump/driver. Please contact Flowserve
representative, if you have any questions before the
startup.

To avoid dry running the pump must either be filled
with liquid or have the flexible coupling disconnected
before the driver is switched on.

If maintenance work has been carried
out to the site's electricity supply, the direction of
rotation should be re-checked as above in case the
supply phasing has been altered.
Guarding 5.5
Guarding is supplied fitted to the pump set.
Fasteners for guards must remain captive in the guard
to comply with the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.
When releasing guards, the fasteners must be
unscrewed in an appropriate way to ensure that the
fasteners remain captive. Whenever guarding is
removed or disturbed ensure that all the protective
guards are securely refitted prior to start-up
Priming and Auxiliary Supplies 5.6
Ensure electrical, hydraulic,
pneumatic, sealant and lubrication systems (as
applicable) are connected and operational.

Ensure the inlet pipe and pump
casing are completely full of liquid before starting
continuous duty operation.

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 42 of 76 flowserve.com
Pump submergence 5.6.1
Minimum submergence is required to prevent vortex
formation.



The submergence varies in general from 2 to 3 times
the nominal bowl diameter and is always specific to
each pump model. The submergence needed for
adequate NPSH to the first stage impeller may be
different from the general rule mentioned earlier.
Location of the first stage impeller eye to be taken
into account for minimum priming submergence. It is
also equally important to take note of the minimum
distance to be maintained to the suction bell from the
sump floor (with or without strainer). Therefore, refer
to the Flowserve supplied general assembly drawing
on minimum submergence or contact Flowserve
before the pump is started.
Starting the Pump 5.7

Pre-starting checks 5.7.1

Before starting the pump the following checks should
be made.
a) Rotate the pump shaft by hand to make sure the
pump rotates freely and the impellers are
correctly positioned.
b) Ensure that the electric motor has been properly
lubricated in accordance with the instructions
furnished with the driver.
c) Ensure the electric motor has been checked for
proper rotation. The pump must be disconnected
from the driver at the coupling before checking.
The electric motor must rotate counter-clockwise
when looking down on the top of the driver.
d) Check all connections to the driver and control.
Do not overfill the grease cavity. Over greasing
can lead to overheating and premature failure of
the thrust bearing.
e) Check that all piping connections are tight.
f) Check all foundation bolts for tightness.
g) Check all bolting connections for tightness
(coupling bolts, mechanical seal gland bolts,
driver bolts etc).
h) Make sure the mechanical seal is properly
adjusted and locked into place. Ensure that all
seal spacers are in the running position prior to
operation.
i) All guards must be secured in position prior to
pump startup to prevent possible contact with
rotating parts.
To ensure proper alignment three items are very
important during installation and they are:
All machined mating surfaces (such as the
mating faces of the pump and motor) must be
clean and free from burrs and nicks.
These surfaces should be cleaned thoroughly
with a scraper, wire brush and emery cloth if
necessary and all nicks or burrs removed with a
fine file
Exterior strain must not be transmitted to the
pump. The most common cause of trouble in this
respect is forcing the piping to mate with the
pump. It is recommended that flexible
connectors be installed in the piping adjacent to
the pump.
All threads should be checked for damage and
repaired if necessary. If filing is necessary,
remove the part from the pump if possible, or
arrange to catch all the filings so they do not fall
onto other parts of the pump. Clean all threads
with a wire brush and approved cleaning solvent,
ends of shafts must be cleaned and any burrs
removed since alignment depends on the shaft
ends butting squarely. Lubricate all threaded
connections with a suitable approved thread
lubricant (an approved anti-galling compound
should be used on stainless mating threads)
j) On pumps equipped with mechanical seals, clean
fluid should be put into the seal chamber. With
pumps under suction pressure, this can be
accomplished by bleeding all air and vapor out of
the seal chamber and allowing the fluid to enter.
With pumps not under suction pressure, the seal
chamber should be flushed liberally with clean
fluid to provide initial lubrication. Make sure the
mechanical seal is properly adjusted and locked
into place. Insure that all seal spacers are
removed prior to operation.
First
stage imp.
eye location.
Min. Liquid Lvl.
Min.distance
from the sump floor.
Bowl dia
Nom.
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 43 of 76 flowserve.com
Typical safety guards 5.7.1.1


After initial startup, pre-lubrication of
the mechanical seal will usually not be required as
enough liquid will remain in the seal chamber for
subsequent startup lubrication.

A screen guard is furnished with all pumps
having a two-piece headshaft or an adjustable
flanged coupling. This screen must be secured in
place prior to pump startup to prevent possible
contact with rotating parts. Typical arrangement is
shown in section 5.7.1.1.

Stuffing box adjustment 5.7.2
On the initial starting it is very important that the
packing not be tightened excessively. New packing
must be run in properly to prevent damage to the shaft
and shortening of the packing life.

The stuffing box must be allowed to leak for proper
operation. The proper amount of leakage can be
determined by checking the temperature of the
leakage, this should be cool or just lukewarm - NOT
HOT - usually 40 to 60 drops per minute will be
adequate.

When adjusting the packing gland, bring both nuts
down evenly and in small steps until the leakage is
reduced as required. The nuts should only be
tightened about one half turn at a time at 20 to 30
minute intervals to allow the packing to "run-in".
Under proper operation, a packing set will last a long
time. Occasionally a new ring of packing will need to
be added to keep the box full.

After adding two or three rings of packing, or when
proper adjustment cannot be achieved, the stuffing
box should be cleaned completely of all old packing
and re-packed.

Open shaft lubrication before startup 5.7.3
Open lineshaft bearings are lubricated by the
pumped fluid on short-coupled units less than 15 m
(50 ft) long and usually do not require pre- or post-
lubrication. All open lineshaft pumps where the static
water level is more than 15 m (50 ft) below the
discharge head should be adequately pre-lubricated
before startup. These units should have a non-
reverse ratchet on the driver to prevent backspin
when turning off pump. If there is no NRR, post-
lubrication is also necessary.

Enclosed shaft lubrication before start up 5.7.4
Enclosed lineshaft bearings are lubricated by an
extraneous liquid (usually oil or clean water

The oil reservoir must be kept filled with a good
quality of light turbine oil (about 30 cSt (mm
2
/sec) at
operating temperature) and adjusted to feed 3
drops/minute for every 30 m (100 ft) of column.

Injection systems are designed for each installation.
Injection pressure and quantity of lubricating liquid
will vary. Usually 0.45 to 0.90 m
3
/h (2 to 4 gpm) at
0.7 to 0.14 bar (10 to 20 psi) over maximum pump
discharge pressure of clean liquid is required.

For recommended oils for enclosed lineshaft bearing
lubrication under normal operating conditions, please
see tables 5.2.3.1 and 5.2.3.2. If none of the above
oils are available, oil with the following specifications
should be obtained. Turbine type oil with rust and
oxidation inhibitors added, viscosity 30 cSt (mm
2
/sec)
to 37 cSt (mm
2
/sec) at 40 C (100 F) with a minimum
viscosity index of 90.

In the case of product-lubricated
bearings, the source of product supply should be
checked against the order. There may be
requirements for an external clean supply, particular
supply pressure or the commencement of lubrication
supply before pump startup.
GUARDS
INSTALLED
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 44 of 76 flowserve.com
Initial Starting 5.7.5
Ensure flushing and/or cooling/
heating liquid supplies are turned ON before
starting the pump.

a) If the discharge line has a valve in it, partially
open the discharge valve closest to the pump.
The discharge valve is intended to add sufficient
system resistance to the pump. Failure to
maintain pump flow rates within the limits of the
pump and motor could result in severe damage.
b) OPEN all inlet valves.
c) Prime the pump & check lubrication system in
operation (check the liquid level).
d) Ensure all vent connections are closed
before starting.
e) Check the motor connections.
f) Start pre-lubrication liquid flow on pump if
required.
g) Start the pump and observe the operation. If
there is any difficulty, excess noise or vibration,
stop the pump immediately and refer to the
Trouble Shooting Chart (section 7.0) to
determine the probable cause.
Do not run the pump with the outlet
valve closed for a period longer than 30 seconds.
h) Open vent connections and ensure that the unit
is vented of all trapped vapor before closing the
vents.
Observe extreme
caution when venting and or draining hazardous
liquids. Wear protective clothing in the presence of
caustic, corrosive, volatile, flammable or hot liquids.
Do not breathe toxic vapors. Do not allow sparking,
flames or hot surfaces in the vicinity of the equipment.
i) Open the discharge valve as desired to operate
the unit at its design conditions.
j) Check complete pump and driver for leaks, loose
connections, or improper operation.
If possible, the pump should be left running for
approximately one half hour on the initial startup, this
will allow the bearings, packing or seals, and other
parts to "run-in" and reduce the possibility of trouble
on future starts.

If abrasives or debris are present,
upon startup, the pump should be allowed to run until
the pumpage is clean. Stopping the pump when
handling large amounts of abrasives (as is
sometimes present on initial starting) may lock the
pump and cause more damage than the pump is
allowed to continue operation.

Every effort should be made to keep abrasives out of
lines, sump, etc. so that abrasives will not enter the
pump.

In the case of product lubricated
bearings the source of product supply should be
checked against the order. There may be
requirements for an external clean supply, particular
supply pressure or the commencement of lubrication
supply before pump start-up.

Frequency of lubrication 5.7.6
The characteristics of the installation and severity of
service will determine the frequency of lubrication.
Lubricant and pump/motor bearing temperature
analysis is useful in optimizing lubricant change
intervals.

The motor bearing temperature limitations should be
considered for its lubrication requirements. Refer to
the driver manufacturers user instructions supplied
with the pump. If documents are not found contact
Flowserve.

Never mix greases containing different
bases, thickeners or additives.

Normal vibration levels, alarm and trip 5.7.7
Pumps generally fall under classification of rigid
support machines within the International Rotating
Machinery standard and maximum vibration levels
are based on those standards
Alarm and trip values for installed
pumps should be based on the actual measurements
(N) taken on the pump in a fully commissioned (new)
condition. Measuring vibration at regular intervals
and recording will help to track any deterioration in
pump or operating conditions. Measurements shall
be taken at the pump/motor interface.
Typical allowable field vibration values 5.7.7.1
for vertical turbines- sump or wet pit
types
Motor rating kW (hp)
Vibration
velocity-
unfiltered
Vibration
mm/sec (in./sec) rms
0.75-to 7.5 (1-10) N 6.1 (0.24)
7.5 to 75 (10 -100) N 6.1 (0.24)
75 to 750 (100 -1000) N 6.1 (0.24)-7.1 (0.28)
N = Normal; Alarm = N X1.25; TRIP = N X 2.0.
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 45 of 76 flowserve.com
Typical allowable field vibration values 5.7.7.2
for vertical turbines with suction barrel

Motor rating kW (hp)
Vibration
velocity-
unfiltered
Vibration
mm/sec (in./sec)
rms
0.75-to 7.5 (1-10) N 5.1 (0.20)
7.5 to 75 (10-100) N 5.1 (0.20)
75 to 750 (100-1000) N 5.1 (0.20)-6.1(0.24)
750 to 2250 (1000-3000) N 6.1 (0.24)-7.1(0.28)
N = Normal; Alarm = N X 1.25; TRIP = N X 2.0.

Motor start/stop frequency 5.7.8
Even though motors are normally suitable for at least
two consecutive starts, it is recommended to restart
only after coasting to rest between starts (minimum
of 15 minutes gap), with the motor initially at ambient
temperature. If more frequent starting is necessary,
refer to driver manufacturers instructions or contact
Flowserve with details.

The number of motor start and stops
in any given time affects motor life.

If the motor is expected to experience multi
starts in any given time, please refer to the drivers
user instructions before the pump is put into
operation.
Operating the Pump 5.8

Venting the pump 5.8.1
Make sure that the pump is vented to enable
all trapped air to escape, taking due care with the
hazardous or hot liquids. Under normal conditions
after the pump is fully vented and primed, it should
be unnecessary to re-vent the pump.


Pumps fitted with packed glands 5.8.2
If the pump has a packed gland, there must be some
leakage from the gland. Gland nuts should initially
be finger-tight only. Leakage should take place soon
after the stuffing box is pressurized.

The gland must be adjusted evenly to give
visible leakage and concentric alignment of the gland
ring to avoid excess temperature. If no leakage
takes place, the packing will begin to overheat.

If overheating takes place, the pump should be
stopped and allowed to cool before being re-started.
When the pump is re-started, check to ensure
leakage is taking place at the packing gland.

If hot liquids are being pumped it may be necessary
to loosen the gland nuts to achieve leakage.

The pump should be run for 30 minutes with steady
leakage and the gland nuts tightened by 10 degrees
at a time until leakage is reduced to an acceptable
level, normally a minimum of 40-60 drops per minute
is required.

Care must be taken when adjusting the gland
on an operating pump. Safety gloves are essential.
Loose clothing must not be worn to avoid being
caught by the pump shaft. Shaft guards must be
replaced after the gland adjustment is complete.

Never run gland packing dry, even for
a short time.

Pumps fitted with mechanical seal 5.8.3
Mechanical seals require no adjustment. Any slight
initial leakage will stop when the seal is run in.

Before pumping dirty liquids, it is advisable, if
possible, to run in the pump mechanical seal using
clean liquid to safeguard the seal face.

External flush or quench should be
started before the pump is run and allowed to flow for
a period after the pump has stopped.

Never run a mechanical seal dry,
even for a short time.

DISCHARGE VENT LINE
SUCTION VENT LINE
SEALING LIQUID
SUCTION
SOURCE
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 46 of 76 flowserve.com
Pump and motor bearing temperature 5.8.4
If the pumps are working in a potentially
explosive atmosphere, temperature or vibration
monitoring at the bearings is recommended.

If pump bearing temperatures (such as thrust
bearings) are to be monitored it is essential that a
benchmark temperature is recorded at the
commissioning stage and after the bearing
temperature has stabilized.
Record the bearing temperature (t) and the
ambient temperature (ta)
Estimate the likely maximum ambient
temperature (tb)
Set the alarm at (t+tb-ta+5) C [(t+tb-ta+10) F]
and the trip at 100 C (212 F) for oil lubrication
and 105 C (220 F) for grease lubrication

It is important, particularly with grease lubrication, to
keep a close watch on the bearing temperatures.
After startup the temperature rise should be gradual,
reaching a maximum after approximately 1.5 to 2
hours. This temperature rise should then remain
constant or marginally reduce with time.

Multiple Can Pump Operation 5.8.5

Additional procedures may be required in multiple
can pump systems when one or more pump remains
idle. Contact Flowserve for details.
Stopping and Shutdown 5.9

a) Close the outlet valve, but ensure that the pump
runs in this condition for no more than a few
seconds.
b) Stop the pump.
c) Switch off flushing and/or cooling/heating liquid
supplies at a time appropriate to the process.

For prolonged shutdowns and
especially when ambient temperatures are likely to
drop below freezing point, the pump and any cooling
and flushing arrangements must be drained or
otherwise protected.
Hydraulic, mechanical and electrical 5.10
duty
This product has been supplied to meet the
performance specifications of your purchase order,
however it is understood that during the life of the
product these may change. The following notes may
help the user decide how to evaluate the implications
of any change. If in doubt contact your nearest
Flowserve office.

5.10.1 Specific gravity (SG)
Pump capacity and total head in metres (feet) do not
change with SG, however pressure displayed on a
pressure gauge is directly proportional to SG. Power
absorbed is also directly proportional to SG. It is
therefore important to check that any change in SG
will not overload the pump driver or over-pressurize
the pump.

5.10.2 Viscosity
For a given flow rate the total head reduces with
increased viscosity and increases with reduced
viscosity. Also for a given flow rate the power
absorbed increases with increased viscosity, and
reduces with reduced viscosity. It is important that
checks are made with your nearest Flowserve office
if changes in viscosity are planned.

5.10.3 Pump speed
Changing pump speed effects flow, total head, power
absorbed, NPSH
R
, noise and vibration. Flow varies in
direct proportion to pump speed, head varies as speed
ratio squared and power varies as speed ratio cubed.
The new duty, however, will also be dependent on the
system curve. If increasing the speed, it is important
therefore to ensure the maximum pump working
pressure is not exceeded, the driver is not overloaded,
NPSH
A
> NPSH
R
, and that noise and vibration are
within local requirements and regulations.

5.10.4 Net positive suction head (NPSH
A
)
NPSH available (NPSH
A
) is a measure of the head
available in the pumped liquid, above its vapour
pressure, at the pump suction branch.

NPSH required (NPSH
R
) is a measure of the head
required in the pumped liquid, above its vapour
pressure, to prevent the pump from cavitating. It is
important that NPSHA > NPSH
R
. The margin between
NPSH
A
> NPSH
R
should be as large as possible. If any
change in NPSH
A
is proposed, ensure these margins
are not significantly eroded. Refer to the pump
performance curve to determine exact requirements
particularly if flow has changed.

If in doubt please consult your nearest Flowserve
office for advice and details of the minimum allowable
margin for your application.

5.10.5 Pumped flow
Flow must not fall outside the minimum and
maximum continuous safe flow shown on the pump
performance curve and or data sheet.
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 47 of 76 flowserve.com
6 MAINTENANCE
General 6.1
It is the plant operator's responsibility to
ensure that all maintenance, inspection and
assembly work is carried out by authorized and
qualified personnel who have adequately familiarized
themselves with the subject matter by studying this
manual in detail. (See also section 1.6.)

Any work on the machine must be performed when it
is at a standstill. It is imperative that the procedure
for shutting down the machine is followed, as
described in section 5.9.

Guard fasteners must remain captive during
dismantling of guards as described in section 5.5

On completion of work all guards and safety devices
must be re-installed and made operative again.

Before restarting the machine, the relevant
instructions listed in section 5, Commissioning, start
up, operation and shut down must be observed.

Oil and grease leaks may make the ground
slippery. Machine maintenance must always
begin and finish by cleaning the ground and the
exterior of the machine.

If platforms, stairs and guard rails are required for
maintenance, they must be placed for easy access to
areas where maintenance and inspection are to be
carried out. The positioning of these accessories
must not limit access or hinder the lifting of the part to
be serviced.

When air or compressed inert gas is used in the
maintenance process, the operator and anyone in the
vicinity must be careful and have the appropriate
protection.

Do not spray air or compressed inert gas on skin.

Do not direct an air or gas jet towards other people.

Never use air or compressed inert gas to clean
clothes.

Before working on the pump, take measures to
prevent an uncontrolled start. Put a warning board
on the starting device with the words:
" Machine under repair: do not start" .
With electric drive equipment, lock the main switch
open and withdraw any fuses. Put a warning board
on the fuse box or main switch with the words:
" Machine under repair: do not connect" .

Never clean equipment with inflammable solvents or
carbon tetrachloride. Protect yourself against toxic
fumes when using cleaning agents.
Maintenance Schedule 6.2
It is recommended that a maintenance plan
and schedule is adopted, in line with these User
Instructions, to include the following:
a) Any auxiliary systems installed must be
monitored, if necessary, to ensure they function
correctly.
b) Gland packings must be adjusted correctly to
give visible leakage and concentric alignment of
the gland follower to prevent excessive
temperature of the packing or follower.
c) Check for any leaks from gaskets and seals. The
correct functioning of the shaft seal must be
checked regularly.
d) Check bearing lubricant level, and if the hours
run show a lubricant change is required.
e) Check that the duty condition is in the safe
operating range for the pump.
f) Check vibration, noise level and surface
temperature at the bearings to confirm
satisfactory operation.
g) Check dirt and dust is removed from areas
around close clearances, bearing housings and
motors.
h) Check coupling alignment and re-align if
necessary.

Our specialist service personnel can help with
preventative maintenance records and provide
condition monitoring for temperature and vibration to
identify the onset of potential problems.

If any problems are found the following sequence of
actions should take place:
a) Refer to section 8, Faults; causes and remedies,
for fault diagnosis.
b) Ensure equipment complies with the
recommendations in this manual.
Contact Flowserve if the problem persists.

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 48 of 76 flowserve.com
Routine inspection (daily/weekly) 6.2.1
The following checks should be
made and the appropriate action taken to remedy
any deviations.
a) Check operating behavior; ensure noise,
vibration and bearing temperatures are normal.
b) Check that there are no abnormal fluid or
lubricant leaks (static and dynamic seals) and
that any sealant systems (if fitted) are full and
operating normally.
c) Check that shaft seal leaks are within acceptable
limits.
d) Check the level and condition of lubrication oil.
On grease lubricated pumps, check running
hours since last recharge of grease or complete
grease change.
e) Check any auxiliary supplies eg. heating/cooling
(if fitted) are operating correctly.
f) Refer to the manuals of any associated
equipment if routine checks needed.

Periodic inspection (every 6 Months) 6.2.2
a) Check foundation bolts for
security of attachment and corrosion.
b) Check pump operation hours to determine if
bearing lubricant shall be changed.
c) The coupling should be checked for correct
alignment and worn driving elements.
Refer to the manuals of any associated
equipment for periodic checks needed.

Re-lubrication 6.2.3

Pump lubrication 6.2.3.1
In general, VTPs that are product lubricated will not
require further periodic lubrication. Stuffing box and
mechanical seal needs flow of flush. Enclosed line
shaft pumps have to be provided with the required oil
quantity for an oil lubed system and the injection lube
flow at the required pressure for injection lubed
systems.

Driver lubrication 6.2.3.2
Refer to driver manufacturers User
Instructions supplied with the pump.

Impeller re-adjustment 6.2.4
Ordinarily, impellers will not require re-adjustment if
properly set at initial installation.
All adjustments of the impellers will
change the seal setting, therefore, the seal must be
loosened from the shaft until the adjustment is
completed and then reset.

Maintenance of the stuffing box 6.2.5

General 6.2.5.1
Maintenance of the stuffing box will consist of greasing
the box when required, tightening the packing gland
occasionally as the leakage becomes excessive, and
installing new packing rings or sets as required.

Greasing the stuffing box 6.2.5.2
Under ordinary operation, once-a-month greasing of
the stuffing box will be adequate. A high quality
industrial grade # 2 grease is recommended.


Replacing packing 6.2.5.3
Remove gland and all old packing. If the box contains
a lantern ring, remove this and all packing below it
using two long threaded machine screws.

Inspect shaft or sleeve for score marks or rough spots.
Be sure by-pass holes (if supplied) are not plugged.
Repair or replace badly worn shaft or sleeve.

If wear is minor dress down until smooth and
concentric. Clean box bore.

Oil inside and outside of replacement rings lightly and
install in box, staggering joints 90 degrees. Be sure to
replace lantern ring in proper position when used.

Replace gland and tighten nuts finger tight. The
packing gland must never be tightened to the point
where leakage from the packing is stopped.

A small amount of leakage is required for packing
lubrication.

Packing ring sizes vary with the shaft diameter.
Packing ring size information are as follows.

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 49 of 76 flowserve.com
PACKING RING SIZES
Packing Dimensions
Shaft size Packing ring size Outside diameter of
packing
mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.)
25 (1.00) 9.65 (0.38) 44.4 (1.75)
32 (1.25) 9.65 (0.38) 50.8 (2.00)
38 (1.50) 11.17 (0.44) 60.4 (2.38)
43 (1.69) 12.70 (0.50) 68.3 (2.68)
49 (1.93) 12.70 (0.50) 74.6 (2.93)
56 (2.20) 12.70 (0.50) 81.0 (3.19)
62 (2.44) 12.70 (0.50) 87.3 (3.43)
68 (2.68) 12.70 (0.50) 93.7 (3.69)
75 (2.95) 12.70 (0.50) 100.0 (3.93)
82 (3.22) 12.70 (0.50) 107.9 (4.24)
89 (3.50) 15.74 (0.62) 120.6 (4.74)
95 (3.75) 15.74 (0.62) 127.0 (5.00)
102 (4.00) 15.74 (0.62) 133.3 (5.24)
114 (4.50) 15.74 (0.62) 146.0 (5.74)

Startup with new packing 6.2.5.4
Check to see that the by-pass line (if used) is
connected and the packing gland is loose. Start
pump and allow it to run for 20 to 30 minutes. Do not
tighten the gland during this "run-in" period even if
leakage is excessive. Should the new packing cause
excessive heating during "run-in", flush the shaft and
packing box area with cold water or shut the pump
down and allow to cool.

For all repair instructions please call
Flowserve representative or customer service with
the order no. and unit details for specific repair
instruction literature.

All repair work to be carried out by trained and
authorized personnel only. Flowserves written
permission may be required for any
disassembly/repair of the pump that is still under
warranty.
Spare Parts 6.3

Ordering of spares 6.3.1
Flowserve keep records of all pumps that have been
supplied. When ordering spare parts we need the
following information:

1. pump type and pump size
2. serial number of the pump
3. number of the required spare parts
4. reference number and name of the part as listed
in the part list or in the sectional drawing

The pump size and serial number are as shown on
the pump nameplate.

How to select recommended spares 6.3.2

Generally a list of spare parts supplied along with the
pump that shows the parts that are included in each of
the following two classes of recommended spares. If
you do not find such documentation please contact
Flowserve for the list.

Class I minimum 6.3.2.1
Suggested for Domestic Service when pump is
handling clean non-corrosive liquids and where
interruptions in service are not important.

Class II average 6.3.2.2
Suggested for Domestic Service when pump is
handling abrasive or corrosive liquids and where some
interruptions in continuity of service are not
objectionable.

Please contact Flowserve Sales Representative in
your area to review the spares best suited to meet
your requirements.

Storage of spare parts 6.3.3
Spares should be stored in a clean dry area away
from vibration. Inspection and re-treatment of
metallic surfaces (if necessary) with preservative is
recommended at 6-month intervals.
Recommended Spares and 6.4
Consumables

A list of spares and consumables are generally
included along with this User Instructions and other
documents that you have received along with the
pump and is made specifically to your order. In the
event that the list is not found, please contact
Flowserve with pump type and order no.
Tools Required 6.5

Standard tools needed to maintain this pump are
follows.
Open ended spanners / wrenches (standard size
range)
Socket spanners / wrenches (standard size
range)
Allen keys/wrenches
Standard range of screw drivers
Soft mallet

For drive collet pumps:
Collet driver
Sand collar (if not provided on the unit)
Tie down bolt

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 50 of 76 flowserve.com
Other tools may be required depending on
the accessories/ special parts used per contract.
Flowserve in general is not obligated to ship the tools
with any pump shipped.
Fastener Torques 6.6

Torque values shown are for standard
fasteners lubricated with high stress lubricant such as
graphite-oil, moly-disulphite, white lead, etc.

Fastener torques for bowl assembly 6.6.1

BOLT TORQUE VALUES FOR CLASS 2 LUBRICATED TREADS



Thread Data
Material group
A


316 SS
B

ASTM B164
UNS
NO4400
C

Hastalloy
C276
D

ASTM A449
GRADE 5
E

ASTM
A193
Grade B7M

F

SAE J429
Grade 8
Approximate Yield stress N/mm
2
(psi)
Nominal
Diameter
Threads per
25 mm (in.)
207
(30000)
276
(40000)
345
(50000)
441
(60000)
552
(80000)
690
(100000)
mm (in.) Torque Nm (lbfft)
6 (0.25) 20 4(3) 5(4) 5(4) 7(5) 9(7) 12(9)
8 (0.31) 18 7(5) 8(6) 11(8) 14(10) 17(13) 21(16)
10 (0.37) 16 9(7) 14(10) 16(12) 20(15) 27(20) 34(25)
11 (0.43) 14 16(12) 20(15) 25(19) 31(23) 42(31) 53(39)
12 (0.5) 13 23(17) 31(23) 39(29) 47(35) 62(46) 78(58)
15 (0.56) 12 27(20) 45(33) 75(41) 66(49) 89(66) 111(82)
16 (0.62) 11 41(30) 60(44) 54(73) 88(65) 118(87) 149(110)
19 (0.74) 10 81(60) 101(75) 127(94) 149(110) 203(150) 257(190)
22 (0.87) 9 122(90) 163(120) 203(150) 258(190) 312(250) 420(310)
25 (1.00) 8 190(140) 244(180) 312(230) 366(270) 488(360) 610(450)
29 (1.13) 7 271(200) 352 (260) 448(330) 529(390) 705(520) 882(650)
29 (1.13) 7 271(200) 366(270) 461(340) 556(410) 732(540) 923(680)
32(1.25) 7 366(270) 488(360) 610(450) 746(550) 990(730) 1235(910)
32(1.25) 8 379(280) 502(370) 637(470) 760(560) 1017(750) 1275(940)
35(1.38) 6 434(320) 570(420) 719(530) 855(630) 1140(840) 1425(1050)
35(1.38) 8 461(340) 610(450) 760(560) 922(680) 1221(900) 1533(1130)
38(1.50) 6 556(410) 746(550) 936(690) 1126(830) 1506(1110) 1872(1380)
38(1.50) 8 597(440) 800(590) 990(730) 1194(880) 1587(1170) 1995(1470)
41(1.63) 5.5 719(530) 963(710) 1207(890) 1438(1060) 1927(1420) 2402(1770)
41(1.63) 8 773(570) 1031(760) 1302(960) 1560(1150) 2076(1530) 2592(1910)
44(1.75) 5 882(650) 1180(870) 1479(1090) 1778(1310) 2375(1750) 2958(2180)
44(1.75) 8 971(720) 1302(960) 1628(1200) 1940(1430) 2592(1910)
50(2.00) 4.5 1356(1000) 1778(1310) 2225(1640) 2673 (1970)
50(2.00) 8 1478(1090) 1968(1450) 2470(1820) 2958(2180)
57(2.25) 8 2143(1580) 2850(2100)
63(2.50) 8 2970(2190)

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 51 of 76 flowserve.com
Torques for couplings screws 6.6.2

Coupling
size #
Flange diameter
mm (in.)
Nm
(lbfft)
1 & 2 111 or 137
(4.4 or 5.4)
122
(90)
3-5 156, 187 213
(6.0, 7.4, 8.4)
237
(175)
6 250
(10.0)
424
(313)
Torque values are for standard fasteners lubricated with a high
stress lubricant (such as, graphite and oil, moly-disulphite, white lead
etc.). For stainless steel bolts, multiply listed torques by 0.80.
Setting Impeller Clearance 6.7

Please see section 5.3 for specific instructions on
impeller adjustment.
Disassembly 6.8
Refer to section 1.6, Safety, before
dismantling the pump.
Before dismantling the pump for
overhaul, ensure genuine Flowserve replacement
parts are available.
Refer to sectional drawings for part numbers and
identification.

Please take precaution during
disassembly that there is no risk of explosion due to
the nature of the materials/ tools/ equipment/ method
used. Wherever chemical and hazardous materials
are involved, proper safety rules have to be followed
to prevent any dangers to human lives or livestock.
Contact Flowserve for guidance, or local regulatory
agency for specific safety information.

Pump disassembly instructions 6.8.1
See section 8 for sectional drawings.
a) Disconnect all cables/wires and cooling water
pipe connections to the driver (if provided).
b) Carefully remove the flush or lubricant
connections and remove any associated piping
that would interfere with the dismantling.
c) Make sure that all the valves are shut completely
to avoid any leaks or spills.
d) Disconnect the coupling halves [471] (the driver
& pump).
e) Disconnect the suction (if used) and discharge
pipe connections to the discharge head.
f) Rig the motor to a suitable hoist and keep the
lifting mechanism in ready state.
g) Remove the motor to discharge head [304]
bolting and remove the motor from the discharge
head and place it on a safe and appropriate
location.
h) If the pump is of shorter length (with or without
can) rig the discharge head along with the entire
pump assembly (see section 2.3 for lifting) using
a suitable hoist (check the building height
clearance before the lifting is attempted)
i) Use eye bolts and hooks as necessary and get
the lifting mechanism in ready state.
j) Lifting of short set pumps
Remove the fasteners at the discharge
head/foundation/soleplate
Lift the entire pump assembly by clamping at
the discharge head [304] (See section 2.3)
k) Lifting of deep set pumps
Remove the fasteners at the foundation plate
or soleplate
Remove stuffing box/Mechanical seal [349]
completely. Protect the shaft against damage
while lifting the discharge head [304]
Lift the pump just enough to access the first
column pipe flange connection
Support the entire pump just below the first
column pipe joint [101]
Disconnect the discharge head [304] and lift
Now lift the pump again by using column pipe
flange and disconnect the first section of
column piping
Remove the bearing retainers [307] and shaft
couplings [70] and repeat the process until all
column piping is disassembled
Last step is to lift and remove the bowl
assembly

See section 2.3, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 for related
information.
Examination of Parts 6.9
Used parts must be inspected before
assembly to ensure the pump will subsequently run
properly. In particular, fault diagnosis is essential to
enhance pump and plant reliability.

Before proceeding with assembly, thoroughly clean
all bolts, nuts, threaded connections and mating
faces. Clean up any burrs with a file or emery cloth.

Cleanliness and proper lubrication are
required to guarantee ease of re-assembly and
proper pump operation.

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 52 of 76 flowserve.com
Examination of shaft/s 6.9.1
Check the shafts for straightness, pitting and wear.
Remove all burrs or nicks. Shaft damage is usually
best corrected by replacing the shaft.

The shaft must be straight to within 0.127 mm
(0.005 in.) total indicator reading. The detail below
shows the recommended method for checking shaft
straightness. If the shaft is not straight, it must be
straightened or replaced. If the deflection is gradual
over a considerable length, the shaft can usually be
straightened by supporting on two blocks straddling
the crooked section and applying pressure to the high
side to deflect the shaft in the opposite direction. If the
shaft has a sharp crook (dog-leg), it is recommended
that the shaft be replaced since the shaft will not
always remain straight, even if satisfactorily
straightened.



Even if the shaft is new or has been
previously straightened, it is recommended that the
shaft be re-checked at this point to ensure damage
has not occurred in transit or handling.

Examination of bearings 6.9.2
Check all bearings for total clearance over the shaft.
It is recommended that all bearings indicating visual
wear be replaced. In addition, any bearings whose
running clearance exceeds "As New" tolerances by
more than 50% should be replaced (see table 6.8.2.1).

Rubber bearings should always be replaced
when servicing a pump.
Shaft/bearing clearance 6.9.2.1
Shaft
Size
mm
(in.)

Shaft
Diameter/Tolerance
Min Dia- Max Dia
mm
(in.)
Bearing
Clearance
(Max/Min)
mm
(in.)
25.40
(1.000)
25.35
(0.998)
25.40
(1.000)
0.28/0.13
(0.011/0.005)
31.75
(1.250)
31.70
(1.248)
31.75
(1.250)
0.35/0.15
(0.012/0.006)
38.10
(1.500)
38.05
(1.498)
38.10
(1.500)
0.33/0.18
(0.013/0.007)
42.86
(1.690)
42.81
(1.685)
42.86
(1.687)
0.36/0.18
(0.014/0.007)
49.21
(1.940)
49.16
(1.935)
49.21
(1.937)
0.38/0.23
(0.015/0.008)
55.56
(2.190)
55.51
(2.185)
55.56
(2.187)
0.41/0.23
(0.016/0.009)
61.91
(2.440)
61.86
(2.435)
61.91
(2.437)
0.41/0.23
(0.016/0.009)
68.26
(2.690)
68.21
(2.685)
68.26
(2.687)
0.43/0.23
(0.017/0.009)
74.61
(2.940)
74.56
(2.935)
74.61
(2.937)
0.43/0.23
(0.017/0.009)
82.55
(3.250)
82.47
(3.247)
82.55
(3.250)
0.46/0.25
(0.018/0.010)
88.90
(3.500)
88.82
(3.497)
88.90
(3.500)
0.48/0.28
(0.019/0.011)
95.25
(3.750)
95.17
(3.747)
95.25
(3.750)
0.53/0.35
(0.021/0.012)
101.60
(4.000)
101.58
(3.997)
101.60
(4.000)
0.56/0.33
(0.022/0.013)
114.30
(4.500)
114.22
(4.497)
114.30
(4.500)
0.58/0.35
(0.023/0.014)
127.00
(5.000)
126.92
(4.997)
127.00
(5.000)
0.61/0.38
(0.024/0.015)
Bronze, epoxy, carbon and hard-backed rubber
bearings are pressed into their respective bores. They
can either be pressed out or machined on the inside
diameter until the wall is thin enough to collapse.

Some rubber bearings are the snap-in or glue-in type.
These can be removed by prying inward on the
outside of the bearing to collapse it.

If the bearing bore of the housing is heavily scarred or
corroded, the part should be replaced or reworked to
provide a true bore for the bearing.

Replacement bearings are designed to be pressed
into housings so bores will shrink to "as new"
tolerances. Measure the bore of bearings after
pressing and ream as necessary to assure "as new"
tolerances.

Inspection of bowl assembly 6.9.3
When repairing a bowl assembly that has
been in service for several years, the physical
condition or strength of all parts such as cap screws,
bowls and bowl threads must be carefully checked.
ROLLERS
DIAL INDICATOR
SHAFT
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 53 of 76 flowserve.com
When attempting to rework any part,
extreme care must be taken to maintain alignment of
mating parts and ensure as new tolerances.

The inspection, disassembly of bowl assembly
requires expertise and tools to perform the job
correctly. It is recommended to seek the services of
Flowserve trained technicians to inspect and repair
bowl assemblies.

Inspection of enclosed impellers 6.9.3.1
a) Clear all passageways and check for signs of
damage from abrasion or corrosion. Replace an
impeller that shows signs of excessive wear.
b) Check impeller running clearances against as
new tolerances listed in the section 0. If the
clearances exceed the maximum tolerances
shown by more than 50%, the new wear rings
should be installed to obtain correct tolerances.
c) If the original unit was furnished with bowl and
impeller wear rings, they may be pressed or
machined off.

Please note that certain repairs may require special
skills and it is recommended to contact Flowserve
authorized service center before attempting any such
repairs.

See wear ring tolerance chart in section 0.

Inspection of semi-open impellers 6.9.3.2
a) Clear all passageways and check for signs of
damage from abrasion or corrosion.
b) Replace any impeller, which shows signs of
excessive wear. If the bowl faces or impellers
are worn slightly (grooves in either impeller or
bowl under 0.79 mm (1/32 in.)), they can be
corrected by re-facing the impeller and bowl.
0.79 mm (1/32 in.) is the maximum that can be
machined off without harm to the hydraulic
performance of the pump.
c) The machining must match the face angle and
should be re-faced by an authorized Flowserve
repair facility or replaced.

If the impeller has a balance ring on the topside
(side opposite pumping vanes) running clearances
must be checked.

Please see section 6.9.4 for wearing ring tolerance
chart for enclosed impellers.


VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 54 of 76 flowserve.com
Wearing ring tolerance chart for enclosed impellers 6.9.4

Bowl ring
internal
diameter.
Nominal
mm (in.)

Clearance between bowl
and impeller wear rings Bowl ring
interference fit

Impeller ring
interference fit

Standard Galled
mm (in.)
50.8-76.2
(2-3)
0.330/0.229
(0.013/0.009)
0.533/0.432
(0.021/0.017)
0.101/0.050
(0.004/0.002)
0.076/0.025
(0.003/0.001)
76.2-101.6
(3-4)
0.356/0.229
(0.014/0.009)
0.635/0.483
(0.025/0.019)
0.127/0.050
(0.005/0.002)
0.102/0.025
(0.004/0.001)
101.6-127.0
(4-5)
0.381/0.279
(0.015/0.011)
0.635/0.533
(0.025/0.021)
0.152/0.076
(0.006/0.003)
0.127/0.038
(0.005/0.002)
127.0-152.4
(5-6)
0.406/0.305
(0.016/0.012)
0.660/0.559
(0.026/0.022)
0.178/0.076
(0.007/0.003)
0.127/0.038
(0.005/0.002)
152.4-177.8
(6-7)
0.406/0.305
(0.016/0.012)
0.686/0.584
(0.027/0.023)
0.178/0.076
(0.007/0.003)
0.127/0.038
(0.005/0.002)
177.8-203.2
(7-8)
0.432/0.330
(0.017/0.013)
0.711/0.610
(0.028/0.024)
0.203/0.076
(0.008/0.003)
0.152/0.051
(0.006/0.002)
203.2-228.2
(8-9)
0.457/0.356
(0.018/0.014)
0.737/0.635
(0.029/0.025)
0.254/0.102
(0.010/0.004)
0.178/0.051
(0.007/0.002)
228.2-254.0
(9-10)
0.457/0.356
(0.018/0.014)
0.762/0.660
(0.030/0.026)
0.254/0.102
(0.010/0.004)
0.229/0.051
(0.009/0.002)
254.0-279.4
(10-11)
0.457/0.356
(0.018/0.014)
0.788/0.686
(0.031/0.027)
0.254/0.102
(0.010/0.004)
0.229/0.076
(0.009/0.003)
279.4-304.8
(11-12)
0.457/0.356
(0.018/0.014)
0.813/0.711
(0.032/0.028)
0.280/0.102
(0.011/0.004)
0.229/0.076
(0.009/0.003)
304.8-330.2
(12-13)
0.508/0.356
(0.020/0.014)
0.890/0.737
(0.035/0.029)
0.280/0.102
(0.011/0.004)
0.229/0.076
(0.009/0.003)
330.2-355.6
(13-14)
0.508/0.356
(0.020/0.014)
0.914/0.762
(0.036/0.030)
0.305/0.102
(0.012/0.004)
0.254/0.102
(0.010/0.004)
355.6-381.0
(14-15)
0.508/0.356
(0.020/0.014)
0.940/0.788
(0.037/0.031)
0.305/0.127
(0.012/0.005)
0.254/0.102
(0.010/0.004)
381.0-406.4
(15-16)
0.559/0.406
(0.022/0.016)
0.965/0.813
(0.038/0.032)
0.305/0.127
(0.012/0.005)
0.254/0.102
(0.010/0.004)
406.4-431.8
(16-17)
0.559/0.406
(0.022/0.016)
0.990/0.838
(0.039/0.033)
0.305/0.127
(0.012/0.005)
0.254/0.102
(0.010/0.004)
431.8-457.2
(17-18)
0.610/0.457
(0.024/0.018)
1.010/0.864
(0.040/0.034)
0.305/0.127
(0.012/0.005)
0.254/0.102
(0.010/0.004)
457.2-482.6
(18-19)
0.610/0.457
(0.024/0.018)
1.041/0.889
(0.041/0.035)
0.330/0.406
(0.013/0.016)
0.279/0.127
(0.011/0.005)
482.6-508.0
(19-20)
0.610/0.457
(0.024/0.018)
1.070/0.914
(0.042/0.036)
0.330/0.406
(0.013/0.016)
0.279/0.127
(0.011/0.005)
508.0-533.4
(20-21)
0.660/0.508
(0.026/0.020)
1.092/0.934
(0.043/0.037)
0.356/0.152
(0.014/0.006)
0.305/0.127
(0.012/0.005)
533.4-558.8
(21-22)
0.660/0.508
(0.026/0.020)
1.118/0.965
(0.044/0.038)
0.356/0.152
(0.014/0.006)
0.304/0.127
(0.012/0.005)
558.8-584.2
(22-23)
0.660/0.508
(0.026/0.020)
1.143/0.990
(0.045/0.039)
0.356/0.152
(0.014/0.006)
0.304/0.127
(0.012/0.005)
584.2-609.6
(23-24)
0.660/0.508
(0.026/0.020)
1.168/1.020
(0.046/0.040)
0.381/0.179
(0.015/0.007)
0.330/0.152
(0.013/0.006)
609.6-635.0
(24-25)
0.660/0.508
(0.026/0.020)
1.194/1.041
(0.047/0.041)
0.406/0.179
(0.016/0.007)
0.330/0.152
(0.013/0.006)
635.0-660.4
(25-26)
0.660/0.508
(0.026/0.020)
1.220/1.066
(0.048/0.042)
0.406/0.203
(0.016/0.008)
0.356/0.179
(0.014/0.007)
660.4-685.8
(26-27)
0.660/0.508
(0.026/0.020)
1.244/1.092
(0.049/0.043)
0.406/0.203
(0.016/0.008)
0.356/0.179
(0.014/0.007)

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 55 of 76 flowserve.com
Assembly 6.10
To assemble the pump consult the sectional
drawings.

The pump that has been purchased may
have order specific assembly and parts
configurations. Specific cross sectional drawings that
reflect the exact pump/parts details can be purchased
from Flowserve. Contact Flowserve for drawings
purchase and cost information.

It is recommended to call for trained Flowserve
technicians for all your assembly needs.
Refer to seal manufacturers instructions for
disassembly and re-assembly of mechanical seals.

Please take precaution during
assembly process such that there is no risk of
explosion due to the nature of the materials/ tools/
equipment/ methods used. Wherever chemicals and
hazardous materials are involved, proper safety rules
must be followed to prevent any dangers to human
lives or livestock. Refer to applicable local regulatory
agency requirements for specific safety information.

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 56 of 76 flowserve.com
7 FAULTS; CAUSES AND REMEDIES
FAULT SYMPTOM
Pump over heat s and sei zes

Bear i ngs have shor t l i f e


Pump vi br at es or i s noi sy


Mechani cal seal has shor t l i f e


Mechani cal seal l eaks excessi vel y


Pump r equi r es excessi ve power


Pump l oses pr i me af t er st ar t i ng


I nsuf f i ci ent pr essur e devel oped


I nsuf f i ci ent capaci t y del i ver ed


Pump does not del i ver l i qui d

POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE REMEDIES
A. SYSTEM PROBLEMS
Pump not submerged. Check requirements/liquid level. Vent and/or prime.

Impeller not adjusted or loose on shaft. See PART/2-Section A7 for proper impeller adjustment.
Suction lift too high or level too low.
Check NPSHa>NPSHr, proper submergence, losses at
strainers/fittings.

Insufficient margin between suction
pressure and vapor pressure.
Excessive amount of air or gas in liquid. Check and purge pipes and system.
Line check valve backward/stuck. Reverse chuck valve /free the valve.
Unit running backwards. See start up instruction. Check motor phase/wiring
Air or vapor pocket in suction line. Check suction line design for vapor pockets.
Air leaks into suction line. Check suction pipe is airtight.
Intake strainer or impeller plugged or pump
in mud or sand.
Start and stop several times or use line pressure if
available to back flush or pull pump to clean.
Inlet of suction pipe insufficiently
submerged.
Check out system design.
Speed too low. Consult Flowserve.
Speed too high. Consult Flowserve.

Total head of system higher than differential
head of pump.
Check system losses or consult Flowserve.

Total system head is lower than pump
design head.

Specific gravity of liquid different from
design.
Check and consult Flowserve.
Check the pump design for the type of liquid to be
handled. Consult Flowserve.

Viscosity of liquid differs from the designed.

Operation at very low capacity. Measure. Check minimum permitted. Consult Flowserve.
Operation at high capacity.
Measure value and check maximum permitted. Consult
Flowserve.
B. MECHANICAL PROBLEMS
Misalignment due to pipe strain.
Check the flange connections and eliminate strains using
elastic couplings or a method permitted.

Improperly designed foundation./Loose
fasteners.
Check setting of base plate. Tighten, adjust, grout base as
required. Check fasteners and torque.

Shaft bent. Check shaft run outs. Consult Flowserve.
Rotating part rubbing on stationary part. Check. Consult Flowserve, if necessary.
Bearings worn. Replace bearings.
Wearing ring surfaces worn. Replace worn wear ring/surfaces.
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 57 of 76 flowserve.com
FAULT SYMPTOM
Pump over heat s and sei zes

Bear i ngs have shor t l i f e


Pump vi br at es or i s noi sy


Mechani cal seal has shor t l i f e


Mechani cal seal l eaks excessi vel y


Pump r equi r es excessi ve power


Pump l oses pr i me af t er st ar t i ng


I nsuf f i ci ent pr essur e devel oped


I nsuf f i ci ent capaci t y del i ver ed


Pump does not del i ver l i qui d

POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE REMEDIES
Impeller damaged or eroded. Replace. or consult Flowserve for an upgrade.
Leakage under sleeve due to joint failure. Replace joint and check for damage.

Shaft sleeve worn, scored, or running off
center.
Check and renew defective parts.
Mechanical seal improperly installed. Check alignment of faces/damaged parts/assembly
Incorrect type of mechanical seal. Consult Flowserve.

Shaft running off center because of worn
bearings or misalignment.
Check misalignment and correct if necessary. If alignment
satisfactory check bearings for excessive wear.

Impeller out of balance resulting in
vibration.
Check. Consult Flowserve for problem resolution ideas. Solids/Abrasive particles in liquid pumped.

Internal misalignment of parts preventing
seal ring and seat from mating properly.

Mechanical seal was run dry. Check mechanical seal/flush supply/pump and repair.
Internal misalignment due to improper
repairs causing impeller to rub.
Check method of assembly, possible damage or state of
cleanliness during assembly. Check and consult
Flowserve, if necessary.

Excessive thrust caused by a mechanical
failure inside the pump.
Check wear condition of impeller, its clearances and liquid
passages.
Excessive grease in ball bearings. Check method of re-greasing.
Lack of lubrication for bearings.
Check hours run since last change of lubricant, the
schedule and its basis.

Improper installation of bearings (damage
during assembly, incorrect assembly, wrong
type of bearing etc).
Check method of assembly, possible damage or state of
cleanliness during assembly and type of bearing used.
Remedy and consult Flowserve, if necessary.

Damaged bearings due to contamination. Check contamination source and replace bearings.
C. MOTOR/ELECTRICAL PROBLEMS
Wrong direction of rotation. Reverse 2 phases at motor terminal box.

Motor Protector open.
Check nameplate for voltage and current rating.
Replace faulty motor protectors.

Line voltage not correct/faulty control
box/wiring/low voltage.
Check wiring diagram.

Blown fuse/breaker open/dead motor/short
or loose connection.
Check/repair or replace fuses/breakers.
Motor running on 2 phases only. Check supply and fuses.
Motor running too slow. Check motor terminal box connections and voltage.

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 58 of 76 flowserve.com
8 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LISTS

Please refer to appendix for Europump
part number equivalents.

Cross Section: Product Lubricated VTP 8.1
Typical wet pit pump

SEE
SECTION
8.1.1
FOR PART
DETAILS
SEE
SECTION
8.1.2
FOR PART
DETAILS


See sections 8.1.1 and 8.1.2 for parts details

All the sectional drawings provided in this
section are typical representations of the most
common pump types and are provided for the
purposes of basic understanding of the equipment.
The details shown may not reflect the specifics of the
pump that has been purchased. Order-specific cross
sectional drawings and parts list can be purchased
from Flowserve separately. Contact Flowserve for
ordering and pricing information on such drawings
and documentation.



VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 59 of 76 flowserve.com
Parts identification: Discharge head and column assembly 8.1.1
Typical wet pit/sump type design-product lubricated VTP


Parts list-Discharge head and column 8.1.1.1
assembly
Ref no. Description
12A SHAFT-TOP
14 SLEEVE-LINESHAFT
39 BEARING-SLEEVE-LINESHAFT
101 COLUMN-PIPE-REG
117 BEARING-SLEEVE-THROTTLE BUSHING
131 GUARD-COUPLING
304 HEAD-DISCHARGE
307 RETAINER-BEARING
314 SPACER-FLANGED
325 SCREW-CAP-HEX HEAD
326 STUD-THREADED
326A STUD-THREADED
327 NUT-HEX
327A NUT-HEX
347 O-RING-STUFFING BOX
348 HOUSING-THROTTLE BUSHING
349 SEAL-MECHANICAL
354 STUD-THREADED
355 NUT-HEX
366 SCREW-SET
416 PLUG-PIPE
417 SCREW-CAP-HEX HEAD
418 WASHER
424 NAMEPLATE-FLS
425 DRIVE SCREW FOR SERIAL PLATE
431 O-RING
471 ASSEMBLY, MOTOR TO PUMP COUPLING
REF. NO. 471
(ASSEMBLY)
ELECTRIC MOTOR
366
14
39
307
101
327
325
12A
366
14
39
307
431
348
117
416
347
355
354
349
424
425
314
327
326
416
327A
326A
417
418
131
304
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 60 of 76 flowserve.com
Parts identification: Bowl assembly 8.1.2
Typical wet pit/sump type design-product
lubricated VTP





Parts list-Bowl assembly 8.1.2.1
Ref no. Description
2 IMPELLER
6 SHAFT-PUMP
55 BELL-SUCTION
64 COLLAR-PROTECTIVE
70 COUPLING-SHAFT-THREADED
101 COLUMN-PIPE-REG
125 PLUG-GREASE
309 CASE-DISCHARGE
310 BOWL
311 COLLET-DRIVE
316 STRAINER
320 BEARING-THREADED-DISCHARGE CASE
321 BEARING-SLEEVE-DISCHARGE CASE
323 BEARING-SLEEVE-BELL
328 SCREW-SET
337 PLUG-PIPE
356 SCREW-CAP-HEX HEAD
357 NUT-HEX
358 SCREW-CAP-HEX HEAD
360 SCREW-CAP-HEX HEAD
361 NUT-HEX
369 RING-FLOW
422 SCREW-CAP-HEX HEAD

125
323
328
64
358
2
311
358
2
311
358
2
311
356
321
360
361
70
101
320
6
309
337
357
310
369
310
310
55
422
316
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 61 of 76 flowserve.com
Cross Section: Enclosed Tube VTP 8.2
Typical enclosed tube/oil lubricated VTP






See sections 8.2.1 and 8.2.2 for parts details.

All the sectional drawings provided in this
section are typical representations of the most
common pump types and are provided for the
purposes of basic understanding of the equipment.
The details shown may not reflect the specifics of the
pump that has been purchased. Order-specific cross
sectional drawings and parts list can be purchased
from Flowserve separately. Contact Flowserve for
ordering and pricing information on such drawings
and documentation.

S E E S E C T IO N 8 .2 . 1 F O R
P A R T S D E T IA L S
S E E SE C T IO N 8 .2 . 2 F O R
P A R T S D E T A IL S
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 62 of 76 flowserve.com
Parts identification: Typical enclosed shaft and oil lube connections 8.2.1
Typical enclosed tube/oil lubricated VTP


Parts list-Enclosed shaft and oil lube connections 8.2.1.1
Ref no. Description
12A SHAFT-TOP
13 PACKING SET
39 BEARING-SLEEVE-LINESHAFT
77 OIL TANK
79 BRACKET
85 ENCLOSING TUBE
89 SEAL-OIL
103 BEARING-THREADED-LINE SHAFT
131 GUARD-COUPLING
301 ENCLOSING TUBE NUT
302 TUBE-TENSION
304 HEAD-DISCHARGE
307 RETAINER-BEARING
326 STUD-THREADED
327 NUT-HEX
341 VALVE-SHUTOFF
342 REGULATOR-SIGHT FEED
343 ELBOW-VENT
354 STUD-THREADED
374 O-RING-BARREL
381 SCREW-CAP-HEX HEAD
382 NUT-HEX
383 CAP
384 BAND
385 STOVE BOLT
386 NUT-HEX
387 LUBRICATION LINE
388 FITTING-ELBOW
389 FITTING-ADAPTER
396 CLIP-SAFETY
397 SCREW-CAP-HEX HEAD
414 PLUG-PIPE
417 SCREW-CAP-HEX HEAD
418 WASHER
424
SERIAL PLATE-FLOWSERVE
TANEYTOWN
425 DRIVE SCREW FOR SERIAL PLATE
431 O-RING
469 SCREW-CAP-HEX HEAD

302
385
(ASSEMBLY)
384
77
383
79
386
REF. NO. 344
(ASSEMBLY)
388
342
341
387
389
131
396
354
89
417
418
397
103
12A
85
374
103
ELECTRIC MOTOR
343
469
304
(ASSEMBLY)
REF. NO. 471
424
13
414
(ASSEMBLY)
425
301
39
307
85
431
327
326
382
381
85
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 63 of 76 flowserve.com
Parts identification: Bowl and enclosing tube assembly 8.2.2
Typical enclosed tube/oil lubricated VTP


103
103
361
354
354
321
125
426
2
358A
8
357
322
2
358A
357
8
426
89
85
101
309
357
310
369
REF. NO. 491
(ASSEMBLY)
310
319
319
55
422
316
431
430
6
26
312
32
430
429
428
26
312
32
430
429
428
323
328
64
426
427
REF. NO. 493
(ASSEMBLY)
REF. NO. 492
(ASSEMBLY)
(ASSEMBLY)
REF. NO. 492


Parts list-Bowl and enclosing tube 8.2.2.1
assembly.
Ref no. Description
2 IMPELLER
6 SHAFT-PUMP
8 RING-WEAR-IMPELLER
26 SCREW-CAP SOCKET HEAD
32 KEY-STRAIGHT
39 BEARING-SLEEVE-LINESHAFT
55 BELL-SUCTION
64 COLLAR-PROTECTIVE
85 ENCLOSING TUBE
89 SEAL-OIL
101 COLUMN-PIPE-REG
103 BEARING-THREADED-LINE SHAFT
125 PLUG-GREASE
309 CASE-DISCHARGE
310 BOWL
311 COLLET-DRIVE
312 RING-THRUST-SPLIT-IMPELLER
312* RING-THRUST-SPLIT-COUPLING
316 STRAINER
319 RING-WEAR-BOWL
319* RING-WEAR-BOWL
321 BEARING-SLEEVE-DISCHARGE CASE
322 BEARING-SLEEVE-BOWL
323 BEARING-SLEEVE-BELL
328 SCREW-SET
354 STUD-THREADED
357 NUT-HEX
358A STUD-THREADED
361 NUT-HEX
369 RING-FLOW
422 SCREW-CAP-HEX HEAD
426 SCREW-CAP-HEX HEAD
427 SCREW-CAP-HEX HEAD (JACKING LUG)
428 PIN-ROLL
429 PIN-ROLL
430 O-RING
431 O-RING
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 64 of 76 flowserve.com
Cross Section: Suction Barrel VTP 8.3
Typical











See sections 8.3.1 and 8.3.2 for parts details

All the sectional drawings provided in this
section are typical representations of the most
common pump types and are provided for the
purposes of basic understanding of the equipment.
The details shown may not reflect the specifics of the
pump that has been purchased. Order-specific cross
sectional drawings and parts list can be purchased
from Flowserve separately. Contact Flowserve for
ordering and pricing information on such drawings
and documentation.



SEE
SECTION
8.3.1
FOR PART
DETAILS
SEE
SECTION
8.3.2
FOR PART
DETAILS
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 65 of 76 flowserve.com
Parts identification: Discharge head/column/suction barrel 8.3.1
Typical product lubricated VTP with a suction barrel


374
101
417
131
304
418
372
373
416
425
424
(ASSEMBLY)
REF. NO. 471
327
326
382
381
327A
326A
349
355
348
117
347
354
23
413
412
39
307
431
ELECTRIC MOTOR


Parts list-Discharge head/column/suction barrel 8.3.1.1
Ref no. Description
23 PLATE-SOLE
39 BEARING-SLEEVE-LINESHAFT
101 COLUMN-PIPE-REG
117 BEARING-SLEEVE-THROTTLE BUSHING
131 GUARD-COUPLING
304 HEAD-DISCHARGE
307 RETAINER-BEARING
326 STUD-THREADED
326A STUD-THREADED
327 NUT-HEX
327A NUT-HEX
347 O-RING-STUFFING BOX
348 HOUSING-THROTTLE BUSHING
349 SEAL-MECHANICAL
354 STUD-THREADED
355 NUT-HEX
372 STUD-THREADED
373 NUT-HEX
374 O-RING-BARREL
381 SCREW-CAP-HEX HEAD
382 NUT-HEX
412 STUD-THREADED
413 NUT-HEX
416 PLUG-PIPE
417 SCREW-CAP-HEX HEAD
418 WASHER
424 DISPLAY NAMEPLATE-FLS
425 DRIVE SCREW FOR SERIAL PLATE
431 O-RING
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 66 of 76 flowserve.com
Parts identification: Column and bowl assembly 8.3.2
Typical product lubricated VTP with the suction barrel

322
315
354
355
355
2
8
355
8
322
*
354
2
8
8
32
*
355
354
327
326
*
319
319
310
310
*
THRUST RING DETAIL
*
312 312
26
32
F/ THRUST BALANCED IMPELLER
323
2
8
426
26
312
32
428
426
428
426
(ASSEMBLY)
REF. NO. 492
REF. NO. 492
(ASSEMBLY)
REF. NO. 492
(ASSEMBLY)
310
319
319
55
426
354
428
430
429
430
429
428
429
430
429
428
429
430
309
430
6
(ASSEMBLY)
REF. NO. 493
REF. NO. 491
(ASSEMBLY)
REF. NO. 491
(ASSEMBLY)
319
REF. NO. 491
(ASSEMBLY)


VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 67 of 76 flowserve.com
Parts list- Column and bowl assembly 8.3.2.1
Ref no. Description
2 IMPELLER
6 SHAFT-PUMP
8 RING-WEAR-IMPELLER
26 SCREW-CAP SOCKET HEAD
32 KEY-STRAIGHT
39 BEARING-SLEEVE-LINESHAFT
55 BELL-SUCTION
309 CASE-DISCHARGE
310 BOWL
312 RING-THRUST-SPLIT-IMPELLER
312* RING-THRUST-SPLIT-COUPLING
315 BARREL
319* RING-WEAR-BOWL
322 BEARING-SLEEVE-BOWL
323 BEARING-SLEEVE-BELL
326 STUD-THREADED
327 NUT-HEX
354 STUD-THREADED
355 NUT-HEX
426 SCREW-CAP-HEX HEAD
428 PIN-ROLL
429 PIN-ROLL
430 O-RING
491 ASSEMBLY, BOWL
492 ASSEMBLY, WEARING RING
493 ASSEMBLY, SUCTION BELL & WEAR RING
General Arrangement Drawing 8.4
The typical general arrangement drawing and any
specific drawings required by the contract will be sent
to the Purchaser separately unless the contract
specifically calls for these to be included into the User
Instructions. If these drawings are supplied
separately, the purchaser should retain those with the
User Instructions.

9 CERTIFICATION
Certificates determined from the Contract
requirements are provided with these instructions
where applicable. Examples are certificates for CE
marking and ATEX markings etc. If required, copies
of other certificates sent separately to the Purchaser
to be retained along with these User instructions.
10 OTHER RELEVANT
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
Supplementary User Instructions 10.1
Supplementary instructions determined from the
contract requirements for inclusion into user
Instructions such as for a driver, instrumentation,
controller, sub-driver, seals, sealant system,
mounting component etc are included in the Data
Book. If further copies of these are required they
should be obtained from the supplier for retention
with these user instructions.

Where any pre-printed set of user instructions are
used, and satisfactory quality can be maintained only
by avoiding copying these, they are included at the
end of these user instructions such as within a
standard clear polymer software protection envelope.
Change Notes 10.2
If any changes, agreed with Flowserve Pump
Division, are made to the product after its supply, a
record of the details should be maintained with these
User Instructions.

.

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 68 of 76 flowserve.com
11 APPENDIX
Bill of Materials Reference Numbers 11.1

Ref. #
Current system
description
Ref. #
Europump
terminology 1995
description
Ref. #
Hydraulic institute
2000 description
2 Impeller 2200 Impeller 2 Impeller / propeller
2 Impeller 2210 Impeller, suction stage 2 Impeller / propeller
6 Shaft pump 2110 Pump shaft 6 Shaft, pump
8 Ring wear impeller 2300 Impeller wear ring 8 Ring, impeller
10 Shaft head 2130 Top shaft / head shaft 10 Shaft, head
12 Shaft line 2120
Intermediate shaft, drive
shaft
12 Shaft, line
12 Shaft top (12a) 2130 Top shaft / head shaft 12 Shaft, line
13 Packing 4130 Packing 13 Packing
14 Sleeve lineshaft 3400 Bearing sleeve
17 Gland packing split 4120 Stuffing box gland 17 Gland
23 Plate base 6110 Base plate 129 Sole plate
24 Nut collet
26
Screw cap socket/head f/imp.
Thrust ring
6579.# Socket head cap screw

29 Ring lantern 4134 Lantern ring 29 Ring, lantern
32 Key impeller 6700.# Key 32 Key, impeller
39 Bearing sleeve f/tube nut 4132 Stuffing box bushing 39 Bushing, bearing
39 Bearing sleeve lineshaft 3300.# Bearing, bushing 39 Bushing, bearing
42 Coupling half driver 7200.1 Coupling half (driver) 42 Coupling half, driver
44 Coupling half driven 7200.2 Coupling half (driven) 44 Coupling half, pump
46
Key assembly driven coupling
half
6700.# Key 46 Key, coupling
46 Key driver coupling half 6700.# Key
55 Bell suction 1310 Suction bell 55 Bell, suction
64 Collar protective 2922
Sand guard protection
collar
64 Collar, protecting
66 Nut adjusting 2909 Adjusting nut 66 Nut, shaft, adjusting
66 Nut head shaft 2909 Adjusting nut 66 Nut, shaft, adjusting
70 Coupling shaft (threaded) 7119 Screwed coupling 70 Coupling, shaft
70 Coupling shaft (keyed) 7020 Shaft coupling 70 Coupling, shaft
71 Stand driver 3160 Driver pedestal
73 Gasket top column 4590.# Gasket
73 Oring top column (73a) 4610.# O-ring
77 Tank oil 3800 Lubricator 77 Lubricator
79 Bracket oil tank 3831 Lubricator bracket
83 Box stuffing 4110 Stuffing box housing 83 Box, stuffing
85 Tube enclosing 1917.# Shaft enclosing tube 85 Tube, shaft enclosing
89
Oring f/oil lube discharge
case
4610.# O-ring

89 Seal oil 4305 Shaft seal ring
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 69 of 76 flowserve.com
99
Housing bearing threaded
lineshaft
3240 Bearing carrier

101 Column pipe 1350 Column pipe 101 Pipe, column
103 Bearing threaded lineshaft 3050.# Connector bearing 103
Bearing, line
shaft,enclosing
117
Bearing sleeve
throttle/bushing
4132 Stuffing box bushing 63 Bushing, stuffing box
125 Plug pipe grease plug 6578.# Threaded plug
131 Guard coupling 7450 Coupling guard
171 Bushing auxiliary throttle 4140 Auxiliary seal
191 Coupling column threaded 6850 Pipe coupling 191 Coupling, column pipe
301 Nut enclosing tube 4110 Stuffing box housing
301 Nut packing injection/lube 4110 Stuffing box housing
302 Plate tube tension 1220 Cover 185 Plate, tube, tension
304 Head discharge 1370 Discharge head 187 Head, surface discharge
304 Plate surface 1370 Discharge head 105 Elbow, discharge
305 Flange top column 189 Flange, top column
306
Coupling column threaded
(duplicate to 191)
6850 Pipe coupling 191 Coupling, column pipe
307 Retainer bearing 3250 Bearing support 193
Retainer, bearing, open
line shaft
308 Tube enclosing top 1917.# Shaft enclosing tube
309 Case discharge 1140 Discharge casing 197 Case, discharge
309 Spool discharge 1140 Discharge casing
310 Bowl 1170.1 Pump bowl 199 Bowl, intermediate
311 Collet drive 2484
Clamping ring impeller
bushing
84 Collet, impeller lock
311 Collet threaded
312 Ring thrust split coupling 7410 Coupling ring 86 Ring, thrust, split
312
Ring thrust split coupling
clamp (312b)
2531 Split retaining ring

312 Ring thrust split impeller 2520
Loose (shaft) collar
shoulder ring
82 Ring, thrust, retainer
313 Case suction 1130 Suction casing 203 Case, suction
314 Spacer flanged 88 Spacer, coupling
315 Barrel 1100 Casing 205 Barrel or can, suction
316 Strainer suction 6531 Suction strainer 209 Strainer
319 Ring wear bowl 1500 Casing wear ring 213 Ring, bowl
320
Bearing threaded discharge
case
3050.# Connector bearing 103
Bearing, line
shaft,enclosing
321
Bearing sleeve discharge
case
3300.# Bearing, bushing 39 Bushing, bearing
322 Bearing sleeve bowl 3300.# Bearing, bushing 39 Bushing, bearing
323 Bearing sleeve suction 3300.# Bearing, bushing 39 Bushing, bearing
325
Screw cap hex/head column
to column
6570.# Screw

326
Screw cap hex/head column
to head
6570.# Screw

326
Stud threaded column to
head
6572.# Stud

326 Stud threaded packing gland 6572.# Stud
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 70 of 76 flowserve.com
326 Stud threaded seal housing 6572.# Stud
327 Nut hex column to column 6581.# Hexagon nut
327 Nut hex column to head 6581.# Hexagon nut
327 Nut hex packing gland 6581.# Hexagon nut
327 Nut hex seal housing 6581.# Hexagon nut
328 Screw set protective collar 6814.# Grub screw
328 Screw set stuffing box sleeve 6814.# Grub screw
330 Liner tube stabilizer
334 Screw lock adjusting nut 6570.# Screw
335 Key gib 6700.# Key
336 Stand driver f/m head
337
Plug pipe hex/socket
f/discharge case
6578.# Threaded plug

340 Housing packing
341
Valve shut/off f/tank oiler
assy.
342
Regulator sight feed f/tank
oiler assy.
343
Elbow vent f/enclosing tube
nut
344
Lubrication line w/fittings
f/tank oiler assy.
345 Grease zerk stuffing box 3853 Grease nipple
346 Slinger 2540 Oil flinger / oil deflector 40 Deflector
347
Oring stuffing box/throttle
bush. Hsg.
4610.# O-ring

348 Housing throttle/bushing 4210 Mechanical seal housing 83 Box, stuffing
349 Housing seal 4212 Seal plate 83 Box, stuffing
350 Stabilizer tube
351
Screw cap hex/head driver
adapter
6570.# Screw

352
Screw cap hex/head driver
stand
6570.# Screw

353 Nut hex driver stand 6581.# Hexagon nut
354
Stud threaded throttle
bushing housing
6572.# Stud

355
Nut hex throttle bushing
housing
6581.# Hexagon nut

356
Screw cap hex/head bowl to
discharge case
6570.# Screw

357
Nut hex bowl to discharge
case
6581.# Hexagon nut

358
Screw cap hex/head bowl to
bowl
6570.# Screw

359 Pin lock threaded/bowl 2923.# Pin
360
Screw cap hex/head column
to discharge case
6570.# Screw

361
Nut hex column to discharge
case
6581.# Hexagon nut

363 Nut hex flanged coupling 6581.# Hexagon nut
364
Screw cap socket/head
flanged coupling
6579.# Socket head cap screw

366 Screw set lineshaft sleeve 6814.# Grub screw
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 71 of 76 flowserve.com
369 Ring flow
370 Sleeve stuffing box 2450 Shaft sleeve
371 Oring stuffing box sleeve 4610.# O-ring
372 Stud threaded barrel 6572.# Stud
373 Nut hex barrel 6581.# Hexagon nut
374 Oring barrel 4610.# O-ring
377
Gasket suction f/adapter
column
4590.# Gasket

378 Gasket discharge 4590.# Gasket
379
Screw cap hex/head
discharge
6570.# Screw

380 Nut hex discharge 6581.# Hexagon nut
381 Screw cap hex/head motor 6570.# Screw
382 Nut hex motor 6581.# Hexagon nut
383 Cap lubricator tank
384 Band lubricator tank
385 Bolt stove f/tank oiler assy.
386 Nut hex f/tank oiler assy. 6581.# Hexagon nut
387
Lubrication line f/tank oiler
assy.
3840 Lubrication line

388
Fitting compression elbow
f/tank oiler assy.
389
Fitting compression straight
f/tank oiler assy.
390 Bearing assembly (ag)
392 Nipple pipe pre-lube
393 Valve gate pre-lube
394 Pin lifting f/head 2923.# Pin
395 Ring retaining f/head
396 Clip safety f/tube nut
397 Screw cap hex/head tube nut 6570.# Screw
399
Adapter column flanged to
flanged
1140 Discharge casing

400
Screw cap hex/head adapter
column
6570.# Screw

401 Nut hex adapter column 6581.# Hexagon nut
402
Bearing rubber cutless
discharge case
3300.# Bearing, bushing

403
Adapter column flanged to
threaded
1140 Discharge casing

405 Oring ingerseal 4610.# O-ring
409 Adapter driver f/m head
412 Stud threaded base plate 6572.# Stud
413 Nut hex base plate 6581.# Hexagon nut
414 Plug pipe head pre-lube 6578.# Threaded plug
415
Plug pipe head inspection
hole
6578.# Threaded plug

416 Plug pipe head pressure tap 6578.# Threaded plug
417
Screw cap hex/head coupling
guard
6570.# Screw

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 72 of 76 flowserve.com
418 Washer flat coupling guard
419
Plug pipe stuffing box relief
line
6578.# Threaded plug

420 Washer flat column
421 Clip strainer
422 Screw cap hex/head strainer 6570.# Screw
422
Screw mach submersible
strainer
6570.# Screw

424 Plate serial
425 Screw drive 6570.# Screw
426 Jackscrew bowl to bowl 6575.# Jack screw
427
Jackscrew discharge case to
column
6575.# Jack screw

428 Pin impeller wear ring 2923.# Pin
429 Pin bowl wear ring 2923.# Pin
430 Oring bowl 4610.# O-ring
431 Oring column 4610.# O-ring
432
Oring f/oil lube discharge
case
4610.# O-ring

433 Key keyed/coupling 6700.# Key
434 Ring retaining keyed/coupling 2530 Retaining ring
435 Stud thrust keyed/coupling 6572.# Stud
436
Oring reinforcing tube to
suction case
4610.# O-ring

437 Tube reinforcing
438 Oring reinforcing tube 4610.# O-ring
439 Ring reinforcing
440
Oring top injection tube to
housing
4610.# O-ring

441
Coupling column threaded
f/suction
6850 Pipe coupling

442 Housing bearing stand
443 Retainer oil
444 Bearing ball 3010 Anti-friction bearing
445 Spacer bearing
446 Bearing ball top
447 Stem bearing
448
Pin non-reverse f/4b-100 &
100
449 Spring compression f/4b-100
450 Cap bearing stem
451 Plate lube instructions
452
Screw drive lube instruction
plate
6570.# Screw

453 Nipple pipe level indicator
454 Tee pipe level indicator
455 Plug pipe level indicator 6578.# Threaded plug
456 Gauge oil level
457 Cap pipe level indicator
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 73 of 76 flowserve.com
458 Guard bearing stand
459 Sleeve seal 2445 Shaft sleeve
460 Seal mechanical 4200 Mechanical seal 65/80
Seal, mech. Stationary/
rotating elements
461 Collar drive
462 Guard cable f/submersible 8361 Cable guard
463 Plug upthrust (submersible)
464 Screw set upthrust plug 6814.# Grub screw
465
Stud threaded submersible
dr. Adapter to suct. Case
6572.# Stud

466
Nut hex submersible dr.
Adapter to suct. Case
6581.# Hexagon nut

467 Coupling motor submersible 7010 Drive coupling 70 Coupling, shaft
468
Key submersible motor
coupling
6700.# Key

469 Jackscrew motor 6575.# Jack screw
470 Washer flat tail water strainer
471 Coupling flanged assembly 7113 Rigid coupling
472 Cone diffusion
473 Jackscrew stuffing box 6575.# Jack screw
474 Clamp coupling guard
475 Valve check f/submersible 6301 Non-return valve
476 Thrust stand driver/stand 3160 Driver pedestal
477
Thrust stand coupling flg
flexible
7112 Flexible coupling

478 Thrust stand cap upper 3260.2 Bearing cover
479
Thrust stand screw cap
hex/hd upper/cap
6570.# Screw

480 Thrust stand grease zerk cap 3853 Grease nipple
481
Thrust stand fitng pipe plug
upper/cap
6578.# Threaded plug

482
Thrust stand oil/sleeve or
thrust/sleeve
2470 Centring sleeve

483 Thrust stand cap lower 3260.1 Bearing cover
484
Thrust stand screw cap
hex/hd lower/cap
6570.# Screw

485
Thrust stand fitng pipe plug
lower/cap
6578.# Threaded plug

487 Thrust stand key driver 6700.# Key
488 Thrust stand key pump shaft 6700.# Key
489
Thrust stand key thrust
sleeve
6700.# Key

490 Ring retaining teflon bearings
491 Bowl w/wr 1170.2 Pump bowl 199 Bowl, intermediate
492 Impeller w/wr 2200 Impeller 2 Impeller / propeller
493
Bell suction w/wr & case
suction w/wr
1310/1130
Suction bell / suction
casing
55 Bell, suction
494
Stud threaded bowl to
bowl/bell
6572.# Stud

495 Nut hex bowl to bowl/bell 6581.# Hexagon nut
496 Thrust stand vent plug 6521 Vent plug
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 74 of 76 flowserve.com
497 Thrust stand sight glass 8221 Sight glass
498 Thrust stand fitng pipe plug 6578.# Threaded plug
499
Thrust stand fitng pipe plug
bush redcr
6578.# Threaded plug

500 Thrust stand bearing housing 3200 Bearing housing
501
Thrust stand o-ring f/bearing
housing
4610.# O-ring

502
Thrust stand screw cap
hex/hd dr/stand to brg/hsg
6570.# Screw

503
Thrust stand fitng pipe plug
hex/sckt flush seal side
6578.# Threaded plug

504
Thrust stand fitng pipe plug
hex/sckt flush seal top
6578.# Threaded plug

505 Thrust stand bearing spindle 2471 Bearing adapter sleeve
506 Thrust stand lockwasher 6541 Lock washer
507 Thrust stand locknut 6580 Nut
508 Thrust stand oil impeller 4223 Pumping ring
509
Thrust stand o-ring f/bearing
housing cap
4610.# O-ring

510 Thrust stand seal labyrinth 4305 Shaft seal ring
511
Thrust stand screw cap
sockt/hd adjusting nut
6579.# Socket head cap screw

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 75 of 76 flowserve.com
NOTES:
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS (VTPS) CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ENGLISH 71569224 10-13
Page 76 of 76 flowserve.com


FLOWSERVE REGIONAL
SALES OFFICES:

USA and Canada
Flowserve Corporation
Pump
5215 North OConnor Blvd.,
Suite 2300
Irving, Texas 75039-5421 USA
Telephone +1 972 443 6500
Fax +1 972 443 6800

Europe, Middle East, Africa
Flowserve FSG - Italy
Worthing S.P.A.
Via Rossini 90/92
20033 Desio (Milan) Italy
Telephone +39 0362 6121
Fax +39 0362 628 882

Latin America and Caribbean
Flowserve Corporation
Pump
6840 Wynnwood Lane
Houston, Texas 77008 USA
Telephone +1 713 803 4434
Fax +1 713 803 4497

Asia Pacific
Flowserve Pte. Ltd
10 Tuas Loop
Singapore 637345
Telephone +65 6771 0600
Fax +65 6862 2329

Your Flowserve factory contacts:

Flowserve Pump Division
5310 Taneytown Pike, PO Box 91
Taneytown, MD 21787-0091, USA

Telephone: +1 (410) 756 2602
Customer Service FAX: +1 (410) 756 2615
Parts inquiry/Order PH: +1 (800) 526 3569




Flowserve Spain S.L.
Avenida Fuentemar 26-28
Coslada, Madrid, Spain 28023

Telephone +34 91 660 4600
Fax +34 91 674 0433
Your local Flowserve representative:

Flowserve Pumps
Flowserve GB Limited
PO Box 17, Lowfield Works
Newark, Notts NG24 3EN
United Kingdom

Telephone (24 hours) +44 1636 494 600
Sales & Admin Fax +44 1636 705 991
Repair & Service Fax +44 1636 494 833
Email newarksales@flowserve.com

To find your local Flowserve representative please
use the Sales Support Locator System found at
www.flowserve.com
www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 1
Motors | Automation | Energy | Transmission & Distribution | Coatings




Low and high voltage three phase
induction motors

M line - Squirrel cage rotor - Vertical



Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual





































www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 2





































































www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 3























Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual


Document No.: 11371757
Types: MGA, MGP, MGD, MGT, MGV, MGF, MGR, MGI, MGW and MGL
Language: English
Revision: 1
April 2011


www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 4








































































www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 5




Dear Customer,


Thank you for acquiring a WEG motor. This is a product developed with levels of quality and efficiency
that ensure an excellent performance.
Since electric motors play an important role in comfort and wellbeing, they need to be identified and
treated as driving machines, whose features include certain handling procedures such as storage,
installation, and maintenance.
All efforts were employed in order to ensure that all of the information provided in this manual is
accurate regarding the configurations and applications of the motor.
Therefore, careful reading of this manual before proceeding with the motor installation, operation or
maintenance is highly recommended in order to ensure safe and continuous motor operation,
ensuring its safety and that of its installations. In case of any remaining doubts, please contact WEG.
Maintain this manual close to the motor at all times so it can be consulted whenever necessary.


ATTENTION
1. Following the procedures provided in this manual is mandatory to maintain a valid product warranty;
2. Motor installation, operation, and maintenance procedures must be performed only by qualified
personnel.


NOTES
1. Total or partial reproduction of the information provided herein is allowed, provided that the source is
properly referenced;
2. If this manual is lost, a PDF copy may be downloaded from the www.weg.net website, or an extra copy
may also be provided by WEG.




WEG EQUIPAMENTOS ELTRICOS S.A.

















www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 6




































































www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................11
1.1 TERMINOLOGY ..............................................................................................................................11
1.2 SAFETY WARNINGS.......................................................................................................................11
2 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................12
2.1 QUALIFIED PERSONNEL................................................................................................................12
2.2 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................................12
2.3 MOTORS APPLIED IN HAZARDOUS AREAS..................................................................................12
2.3.1 General Precautions...............................................................................................................................12
2.3.2 Additional Precautions ...........................................................................................................................12
2.4 STANDARDS...................................................................................................................................13
2.5 ENVIRONMENT CHARACTERISTICS..............................................................................................13
2.6 OPERATION CONDITION................................................................................................................13
2.7 VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY .........................................................................................................13
3 RECEIVING, STORAGE AND HANDLING............................................................14
3.1 RECEIVING .....................................................................................................................................14
3.2 STORAGE.......................................................................................................................................14
3.2.1 Indoor storage ....................................................................................................................................14
3.2.2 Outdoor storage .................................................................................................................................14
3.2.3 Extended storage ...............................................................................................................................14
3.2.3.1 Storage location..................................................................................................................14
3.2.3.1.1 Indoor storage ................................................................................................14
3.2.3.1.2 Outdoor storage .............................................................................................15
3.2.3.2 Separate parts ....................................................................................................................15
3.2.3.3 Space heaters.....................................................................................................................15
3.2.3.4 Insulation resistance............................................................................................................15
3.2.3.5 Exposed machined surfaces................................................................................................15
3.2.3.6 Bearings..............................................................................................................................15
3.2.3.6.1 Grease-lubricated bearings.............................................................................15
3.2.3.6.2 Oil-lubricated Bearings....................................................................................15
3.2.3.6.3 Sleeve bearing................................................................................................16
3.2.3.7 Terminal box .......................................................................................................................16
3.2.3.8 Preparation for commissioning ............................................................................................16
3.2.3.8.1 Cleaning .........................................................................................................16
3.2.3.8.2 Bearing lubrication..........................................................................................16
3.2.3.8.3 Checking the insulation resistance ..................................................................16
3.2.3.8.4 Others ............................................................................................................16
3.2.3.9 Inspections and records during storage...............................................................................16
3.2.3.10 Maintenance Plan During Storage........................................................................................17
3.3 HANDLING......................................................................................................................................18
3.5.1 Motor Positioning...................................................................................................................................18
4 INSTALLATION..................................................................................................19
4.1 INSTALLATION SITE ......................................................................................................................19
4.2 DIRECTION OF ROTATION.............................................................................................................19
4.3 INSULATION RESISTANCE.............................................................................................................19
4.3.1 Safety instructions ..............................................................................................................................19
4.3.2 General considerations .......................................................................................................................19
4.3.3 Measuring stator windings ..................................................................................................................19
4.3.4 Minimum insulation resistance.............................................................................................................20
4.3.5 Polarization index................................................................................................................................20
4.3.6 Conversion of measured values ..........................................................................................................20
4.4 PROTECTIONS...............................................................................................................................20
4.4.1 Thermal protection..............................................................................................................................20
4.4.1.1 Temperature sensors ..........................................................................................................21
4.4.1.2 Winding temperature limits ..................................................................................................21
4.4.1.3 Alarm and shutdown temperatures......................................................................................21
4.4.1.4 Temperature and ohmic resistance of Pt100 thermoresistors...............................................22
4.4.1.5 Space heater.......................................................................................................................22
www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 8
4.4.2 Water leak sensor .............................................................................................................................. 22
4.5 COOLING....................................................................................................................................... 23
4.5.1 Water Radiators ................................................................................................................................. 23
4.5.1.1 Radiators for seawater applications .................................................................................... 23
4.5.2 Independent fans ............................................................................................................................... 23
4.6 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS................................................................................................. 23
4.6.1 Electric connections ........................................................................................................................... 23
4.6.1.1 Main connection................................................................................................................. 23
4.6.1.2 Grounding .......................................................................................................................... 24
4.6.2 Connection diagram........................................................................................................................... 25
4.6.2.1 IEC60034-8 connection diagram........................................................................................ 25
4.6.2.2 NEMA MG1 connection diagram ........................................................................................ 26
4.6.2.2.1 Direction of rotation........................................................................................ 26
4.6.2.3 Accessory connection diagram........................................................................................... 26
4.7 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS ............................................................................................... 27
4.7.1 Foundations....................................................................................................................................... 27
4.7.2 Stress on foundations ........................................................................................................................ 27
4.7.3 Types of bases................................................................................................................................... 27
4.7.3.1 Concrete base.................................................................................................................... 27
4.7.3.2 Sliding base........................................................................................................................ 27
4.7.4 Motor assembly ................................................................................................................................. 28
4.7.4.1 Motor with flange and solid shaft ....................................................................................... 28
4.7.4.2 Motor with flange and hollow shaft...................................................................................... 28
4.7.5 Natural frequency of the foundation.................................................................................................... 28
4.7.6 Alignment and leveling........................................................................................................................ 28
4.7.7 Hollow shaft motor alignment ............................................................................................................. 29
4.7.8 Couplings........................................................................................................................................... 29
4.7.8.1 Solid shaft motor coupling .................................................................................................. 30
4.7.8.1.1 Direct coupling............................................................................................... 30
4.7.8.1.2 Gear coupling ................................................................................................ 30
4.7.8.1.3 Coupling by pulleys and belts......................................................................... 30
4.7.8.2 Hollow shaft motor coupling ............................................................................................... 30
5 START-UP......................................................................................................... 31
5.1 DOL STARTING.............................................................................................................................. 31
5.2 DOL STARTING FREQUENCY........................................................................................................ 31
5.3 BLOCKED-ROTOR CURRENT (Ip/In).............................................................................................. 31
5.4 REDUCED CURRENT START-UP .................................................................................................. 31
6 COMMISSIONING ............................................................................................. 32
6.1 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION .......................................................................................................... 32
6.2 INITIAL START UP.......................................................................................................................... 32
6.3 OPERATION................................................................................................................................... 32
6.3.1 General .............................................................................................................................................. 32
6.3.2 Temperatures..................................................................................................................................... 33
6.3.3 Bearings ............................................................................................................................................ 33
6.3.4 Radiators ........................................................................................................................................... 33
6.3.5 Vibration ............................................................................................................................................ 33
6.3.6 Shaft Vibration Limits.......................................................................................................................... 33
6.3.7 Shutdown .......................................................................................................................................... 34
7 MAINTENANCE................................................................................................. 35
7.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................................................... 35
7.2 GENERAL CLEANING.................................................................................................................... 35
7.3 WINDING INSPECTION.................................................................................................................. 35
7.4 WINDING CLEANING..................................................................................................................... 35
7.5 COOLING SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................. 36
7.5.1 Radiator maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 36
7.6 ANTI-REVERSAL RATCHET MAINTENANCE ................................................................................. 36
7.7 SHUTDOWN MOTOR..................................................................................................................... 36
7.8 SHAFT GROUNDING DEVICE ........................................................................................................ 36
7.9 BEARING MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 37
7.9.1 Grease-lubricated rolling bearings ...................................................................................................... 37
7.9.1.1 Lubrication instructions....................................................................................................... 37
www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 9
7.9.1.2 Lubrication of bearings with spring device for grease removal ..............................................37
7.9.1.3 Grease type and quantify.....................................................................................................37
7.9.1.4 Alternative grease................................................................................................................38
7.9.1.5 Grease changing procedure ................................................................................................39
7.9.1.6 Low temperature grease .....................................................................................................39
7.9.1.7 Grease compatibility............................................................................................................39
7.9.1.8 Bearing assembly / disassembly..........................................................................................40
7.9.2 Oil-lubricated rolling bearings ..............................................................................................................41
7.9.2.1 Lubrication instructions........................................................................................................41
7.9.2.2 Oil types..............................................................................................................................41
7.9.2.3 Oil change...........................................................................................................................41
7.9.2.4 Bearing operation................................................................................................................42
7.9.2.5 Bearing assembly and disassembly .....................................................................................43
7.9.3 Sleeve bearings ..................................................................................................................................44
7.9.3.1 Bearing data........................................................................................................................44
7.9.3.2 Bearing installation and operation........................................................................................44
7.9.3.3 Water flow cooling...............................................................................................................44
7.9.3.4 Oil change...........................................................................................................................44
7.9.3.5 Sealing................................................................................................................................44
7.9.3.6 Sleeve bearing operation .....................................................................................................44
7.9.3.7 Sleeve bearing maintenance................................................................................................45
7.9.3.8 Backstop bearing (upper) ....................................................................................................45
7.9.3.9 Guide bearing (lower)...........................................................................................................45
7.9.4 Bearing protection ..............................................................................................................................46
7.9.4.1 Protection settings ..............................................................................................................46
7.9.4.2 Bearing temperature sensor disassembly/assembly.............................................................46
8 MAINTENACE PLAN..........................................................................................47
9 ABNORMALITIES, CAUSES AND SOLUTIONS...................................................48
9.1 MOTORS.........................................................................................................................................48
9.2 BEARINGS......................................................................................................................................50
10 WARRANTY.......................................................................................................51

































www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 10




































































www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 11
1 INTRODUCTION

This manual covers standard motors.
Motors with specialties may be provided with specific documents (designs, connection diagram, characteristic curves, etc.).
Along with this manual, such documents must be carefully evaluated before proceeding to the installation, operation or
maintenance of the motor.
In case of any additional clarifications regarding motors with constructive specialties, please contact WEG. All procedures
and standards provided in this manual must be followed in order to ensure proper motor operation and safety of all
personnel involved in its operation. Compliance to these procedures is equally important in order to ensure motor warranty.
Therefore, careful reading of this manual before installing and operating the motor is recommended. In case of any additional
clarifications, please contact WEG.


1.1 TERMINOLOGY

M G F 560 A


MOTOR LINE






M Master Line

TYPE OF ROTOR








G Cage

COOLING SYSTEM



A Open, self-ventilated IP23W
P Open, self-ventilated IP24W
D - Self-ventilated, air input and output by ducts
T Forced ventilation, air input and output by ducts
V Forced ventilation, ventilation over the motor and output by ducts
F - Self-ventilated with air-air heat exchanger on the motor
R - Self-ventilated with air-air heat exchanger around the motor
I - Forced ventilation on the internal and external air circuit, air-air heat exchanger
W Air-water heat exchanger
L Air-water heat exchanger, forced ventilation in the internal air system

IEC FRAME

Shaft end height in mm (450 to 5000)

FOOT HOLES

ABNT / IEC (S, M, L, A, B, C, D, E)



1.2 SAFETY WARNINGS

The following safety warnings are used in this manual:


DANGER
Noncompliance with the recommended procedures in this warning may lead to death, severe injuries and
substantial property damage.


ATTENTION
Noncompliance with the recommended procedures in this warning may lead to property damage.


NOTE
This provides relevant information for appropriate product operation and service.
www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 12
2 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

All personnel working in the assembly, operation or maintenance of electrical installations, must be constantly informed and
updated on the service safety instructions and standards and are advised to strictly comply with them. Before initiating any
tasks, the personnel in charge is responsible for making sure that all points were duly observed and for alerting the
respective staff about the dangers inherent to the task to be performed. When inappropriately applied, target of deficient
maintenance, or even when handled by non-qualified personnel, such motors may cause severe personal and/or property
damage. Therefore, it is recommended that these services are always performed by qualified personnel.

2.1 QUALIFIED PERSONNEL

The term qualified personnel represents those who, due to
their training, experience, education level, knowledge of
applicable standards, safety standards, accident
prevention and knowledge of operating conditions, have
been authorized by those in charge to execute all
necessary tasks, and to recognize and avoid any possible
danger.
Such qualified personnel must also know first aid
procedures and must be able to provide such services, if
necessary.
All operation, maintenance, and repair tasks are to be
exclusively performed by qualified personnel.

2.2 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

DANGER
During operation, this equipment exposes
energized or spinning parts that may present
high voltage or high temperatures.
Therefore, operation with open terminal
boxes, unprotected couplings or incorrect
handling, failing to comply with operating
standards, may cause severe personal and
property damage.

The personnel in charge of installation safety must ensure
that:
Only qualified personnel install and operate the
equipment;
Such personnel must have immediate access to this
manual and other documents provided with the motor
as well as perform tasks in strict compliance to the
service instructions, relevant standards, and specific
product documentation;
Failure to comply with installation and safety standards
may void the product warranty.
Firefighting equipment and first aid notices must be
available in visible and easily-accessible locations within
the work site.

All qualified personnel must also observe:
All technical data regarding allowed applications
(operating conditions, connections and installation
environment), provided in the catalog, purchase order
documents, operating instructions, manuals, and other
documentation;
The specific determinations and conditions for local
installation;
The use of appropriate tools and equipment for handling
and transportation;
That the individual component protection devices are
removed before the installation.
Individual parts must be stored in vibration-free
environments, avoiding falls and ensuring their protection
against aggressive agents and/or do not present risks to
the safety of personnel.
2.3 MOTORS APPLIED IN
HAZARDOUS AREAS

The specific hazardous area operation motors possess
additional safety characteristics which are defined in
specific rules for every type of risk area according to their
classification.
The general requirements for equipment operating in
hazardous areas are described in the following Brazilian
and international standards, respectively:
IEC 60034-1 - Rotating Electrical Machines - Part 1:
Rating and Performance
IEC 60079-0 - Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas
Atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0 - Atmosferas Explosivas - Parte
0: Equipamentos - Requisitos Gerais
IEC 60079- 1 - Explosive Atmospheres - Part 1:
Equipment Protection by Flameproof Enclosures 'd'
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-1 - Atmosferas Explosivas - Parte
1 - Proteo de Equipamento por Invlucro Prova de
Exploso d
IEC 60079-15 - Explosive Atmospheres - Part 15 -
Protection by Type of Protection n
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-15 - Equipamentos Eltricos para
Atmosferas Explosivas - Parte 15: Construo, Ensaio e
Marcao de Equipamentos Eltricos com Tipo de
Proteo n
ABNT IEC 60079- 7 - Electrical Apparatus for Explosive
Gas Atmospheres - Part 7: Increased Safety 'e'
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-7:2008 - Atmosferas Explosivas -
Parte 7: Proteo de Equipamentos por segurana
Aumentada "e"
IEC 60079- 2 - Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas
Atmospheres. Part 2: Pressurized Enclosures 'p'
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-2 - Atmosferas Explosivas - Parte 2:
Proteo de Equipamento por Invlucro Pressurizado p
IEC 60079-17 - Explosive Atmospheres - Part 17:
Electrical Installations Inspection and Maintenance
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-17 - Atmosferas Explosivas - Parte
17: Inspeo e Manuteno de Instalaes Eltricas

2.3.1 General Precautions

Before installing, operating, or performing maintenance in
electric motors in hazardous areas, the following
precautions must be adopted:
Study and understand the standards provided in the
Motors applied in hazardous areas item;
Comply with all requirements established in the
applicable standards.

2.3.2 Additional Precautions

Shutdown the motor and wait until it comes to a
complete halt before performing any maintenance,
inspection, or reparation services;
www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 13
All existing protections must be installed and properly
set before operating;
Ensure that motors are duly grounded;
Connection terminals must be duly connected, avoiding
any type of poor contact that might generate heating or
sparking.

NOTE
Comply with all other storage, transportation,
installation and maintenance instructions
provided in this manualand applicable to the
type of motor at hand.

2.4 STANDARDS

The motors are specified, designed, manufactured, and
tested according to the following standards:

Table 2.1: Standards applicable to three-phase induction motors

IEC NBR NEMA
Specification 60034-1 7094 MG1-1,10,20
Dimensions 60072 5432 MG1-4,11
Tests 60034-2 5383 MG1-12
Levels of
protection
60034-5 9884 MG1-5
Cooling 60034-6 5110 MG1-6
Constructive
Forms
60034-7 5031 MG1-4
Noise 60034-9 7565 MG1-9
Mechanical
vibration
60034-14 7094 MG1-7

2.5 ENVIRONMENT
CHARACTERISTICS

The motors were designed for the following operating
conditions:
Ambient temperature -15C to +40C;
Altitude: 1,000 m;
Environment according to the motorprotection level.


ATTENTION
Ambient temperature must not be below +5C
for water-cooled motors. Antifreeze fluid must
be added to the water for temperatures below
+5C.

Special operating conditions may be provided upon
request, which must be specified in the purchase order
and described on the nameplate and specific data sheet
of every motor.

2.6 OPERATION CONDITION

In order for the product warranty to remain valid, the
motor must be operated according to the rated data
indicated on the nameplate, and all applicable standards
and codes, as well as the information provided in this
manual, must be followed.

2.7 VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY

It is very important to ensure correct power supply to the
motor. The conductors and the entire protection system
must guarantee a power quality within established
parameters to the motor terminals, according to the
IEC60034-1 standard:
Voltage: may vary within a 10% range of rated value;
Frequency: may vary within 5% to +3% range of rated
value.



Figure 2.1: Voltage and frequency variation limits

The motor must be capable of performing its main
function in Zone A continuously, but it may not completely
meet its rated voltage and frequency performance
characteristics (see rated characteristics point in Figure
2.1), when it may show some deviations. Increase in
temperature may be greater than those from rated voltage
and frequency.
The motor must be capable of performing its main
function in Zone B. However, regarding rated voltage and
frequency performance characteristics, it may show
greater deviations than those in Zone A. Temperature
increase may be higher than those identified in rated
voltage and frequency and, most likely, greater than in
Zone A.
Extended operation in the boundaries of Zone B is not
recommended.












Voltage
Zone A
Frequency
Zone B (outside of zone A)
Rated voltage
www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 14
3 RECEIVING, STORAGE AND HANDLING

3.1 RECEIVING

All motors are tested and provided in perfect operating
conditions. All machined surfaces must be protected
against corrosion. Packages must be checked upon
receipt for eventual damages during transportation.


ATTENTION
All damages must be immediately
photographed, documented, and reported to
the transportation company, to the insurance
company and to WEG. Failure to comply with
such procedures will void the product
warranty.


ATTENTION
Parts supplied in additional packages must be
checked upon receipt.

When lifting a package (or container), the correct
hoisting points, the weight indicated in the package or
on the nameplate, and the operating capacity of the
hoisting devices must be observed.
Motors packed in wooden crates must always be lifted
by their own eyebolts/lifting lugs or by a proper forklift,
and must never be lifted by its wooden parts;
The package must never be dropped. Carefully place it
on the floor (without impact) to avoid bearing damage;
Do not remove the grease-based corrosion protection
from the shaft end, nor the closing plugs in junction box
holes;
These protections must remain in place until the final
assembly. A complete visual inspection of the motor
must be performed after removing the package;
The shaft locking device must only be removed shortly
before installing and storing the motor in a safe location
for future transportation.

3.2 STORAGE

Any damage to the painting or to the protections against
rust in the machined parts must be corrected.


ATTENTION
Space heaters must remain active during
storage in order to avoid water condensation
inside the motor.

3.2.1 Indoor storage

If the motor is not installed immediately after reception, it
must remain inside the package and stored in a location
protected against humidity, vapors, fast heat variations,
rodents, and insects.
The motor must be stored in vibration-free locations in
order to avoid bearing damage.


3.2.2 Outdoor storage

The motor must be stored in a dry location, free of
flooding and vibrations.
Repair all damages to the packaging before storing the
motor, which is necessary to ensure proper storage
conditions.
Place the motor on platforms or foundations to protect it
against land humidity and keep it from sinking into the soil.
Free air circulation underneath the motor must be
assured.
The cover or canvas used to protect the motor against the
weather must not be in contact with its surfaces. In order
to ensure free air circulation between the motor and such
covers, place wooden blocks as spacers.

3.2.3 Extended storage

When the motor is stored for a long period of time
before being operated, it is exposed to external agents,
such as temperature fluctuations, moisture, aggressive
agents, etc.
Empty spaces inside the motor, such as bearings,
terminal boxes, and windings, are exposed to humidity,
which can cause condensation and, depending on the
degree of air contamination, aggressive substances may
also penetrate these empty spaces.
Consequently, after long storage periods, the winding
insulation resistance may drop below acceptable values.
Internal components, such as rollers, may oxidize, and the
lubricant power of the lubricant agent in the rollers may be
adversely affected. All of these influences increase the risk
of damages before starting up the motor.

ATTENTION
All preventive measures described in this
manual, such as constructive aspects,
maintenance, packaging, storage, and
periodical inspections, must be followed and
recorded, in order to maintain the product
warranty.

The following instructions are valid for motors stored for
long periods of time and/or were idle for two or more
months before being operated.

3.2.3.1 Storage location

In order to ensure the best storage conditions for the
motor during long periods of time, the chosen location
must strictly meet the criteria described below.

3.2.3.1.1 Indoor storage

The storage room must be closed and covered;
The location must be protected against moisture,
vapors, aggressive agents, rodents, and insects;
The location must be free of corrosive gases, such as
chlorine, sulphur dioxide, or acids;
The environment must be free of continuous or
intermittent vibrations;
The environment must present an air-filtered ventilation
system;
www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 15
Ambient temperature between 5C and 60C, and must
not be subject to sudden temperature variations;
Relative humidity <50%;
Protection against dirt and dust accumulation;
Fire detection system;
The location must have power to supply the space
heaters.

In case the storage location does not meet any of these
requirements, WEG recommends that additional
protections are incorporated to the motor packaging
during the storage period, as follows:
Closed wooden crate or similar with proper electrical
installation, providing power to the space heaters.
If there is risk of infestation and fungus growth, the
package must be protected on the site by spraying or
painting it with proper chemical agents;
Package preparation must be carefully executed by
experienced personnel.

3.2.3.1.2 Outdoor storage

Outdoor storage is not recommended
In case outdoor storage is unavoidable, the motor must be
packed in a specific packaging for such condition, as
follows:
For outdoor storage, besides the packaging
recommended for internal storage, the package must
be covered with a protection against dust, moisture and
other foreign materials, using a resistant canvas or
plastic.
The package must be placed on gratings or
foundations, ensuring protection against dirt and
moisture and keeping the motor from sinking into the
soil;
After the motor is covered, a shelter must be
constructed in order to protect it against direct rain,
snow and excessive sun heat.


ATTENTION
In case the motor remains stored for long
periods of time, it is recommended to inspect
it regularly as specified in item Maintenance
Plan During Storage of this manual.

3.2.3.2 Separate parts

In case separate parts have been supplied (terminal
boxes, covers, etc.), these must be packed as specified in
items Indoor Storage and Outdoor Storage of this
manual;
Air relative humidity inside package must not exceed 50%.

3.2.3.3 Space heaters

The motor space heaters must remain powered during
storage to avoid moisture condensation inside the motor
and ensuring that the windings insulation resistance
remains within acceptable levels.



ATTENTION
The motor space heater must be powered on
while it is stored in a place with temperatures
< 5C and air relative humidity >50%.

3.2.3.4 Insulation resistance

During the storage period, motor windings insulation
resistance must be measured and recorded quarterly,
before the motor is installed.
Any eventual insulation resistance reduction must be
investigated.

3.2.3.5 Exposed machined surfaces

All exposed machined surfaces (e.g. shaft end and
flanges ) are factory-protected with a temporary rust
inhibitor.
This protection film must be reapplied at least twice a year
or when removed and/or damaged.
Recommended Products:
Name: Dasco Guard 400 TX AZ, Manufacturer: D.A. Stuart
Ltda
Name: TARP, Manufacturer: Castrol.

3.2.3.6 Bearings

3.2.3.6.1 Grease-lubricated bearings

The bearings are lubricated at the factory, in order to
perform motor tests.
During the storage period, every two months, the shaft
lock device must be removed and the shaft must be
manually revolved in order to distribute grease inside the
bearing and preserving good bearing conditions.
After 6 months of storage and before operating the motor,
the bearings must be lubricated again.
If the motor remains stored for over 2 years, the bearings
must be disassembled, cleaned, inspected, and
lubricated.

3.2.3.6.2 Oil-lubricated Bearings

Depending on the assembly position, the motor may be
transported with or without oil in the bearings;
The motor must be stored in its original operating
position and with properly lubricated bearings;
Oil levels must be respected, remaining in the middle of
the oil level sight glass;
During the storage period, every two months, the shaft
locking device must be removed and the shaft must be
manually revolved in order to uniformly distribute the oil
inside the bearing and maintaining good bearing
conditions.
After 6 months of storage and before operating the
motor, the bearings must be lubricated again;
If the motor remains stored for over 2 years, the bearing
must be disassembled, cleaned, inspected, and
lubricated;






www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 16
3.2.3.6.3 Sleeve bearing

Depending on the assembly position, the motor may be
transported with or without oil in the bearings and must
be stored in its original operating position with oil in the
bearings;
Oil levels must be respected, remaining in the center of
the oil level sight glass.


ATTENTION
During the storage period, every two months,
the shaft locking device must be removed and
the shaft must be turned at 30 rpm in order
to circulate the oil and maintain good bearing
operation conditions.

If it is not possible to rotate the motor shaft, the following
procedure must be adopted in order to protect the inner
part of the bearing and the contact surfaces against
corrosion:
Drain all oil from the bearing;
Disassemble the bearing;
Clean the bearing;
Apply anticorrosive material (e.g.: TECTIL 511 Valvoline
or Dasco Guard 400TXAZ) on the upper and lower
bearing bushing halves and on the motor shaft contact
surface;
Assemble the bearing;
Close all threaded holes with plugs;
Seal the gaps between the shaft and the bearing seal in
the shaft by applying a water proof adhesive tape.
All flanges (e.g.: oil inflow and outflow) must be closed
with blind caps;
Remove the upper-half of the bearing and apply an
anticorrosive fluid inside the bearing;
Place some dehumidifier bags (silica-gel) inside the
bearing. The dehumidifier absorbs moisture and
prevents water condensation within the bearing;
Close the bearing with the upper bearing half.

If the storage period is greater than 6 months:
Repeat the procedures described above;
Replace the dehumidifier bags (silica-gel) inside the
bearing.

If the storage period is greater than 2 years:
Disassemble the bearing;
Preserve and store all bearing parts.

3.2.3.7 Terminal box

When the insulation resistance in the motor windings is
measured, the main junction box and the other terminal
boxes must also be inspected, especially considering the
following aspects:
The inner part must be dry, clean, and free of any dust
accumulation;
The contact elements cannot be corroded;
The sealing must remain under appropriate conditions;
The cable inlets must be correctly sealed.
If any of these items is not correct, the parts must be
cleaned or replaced.




3.2.3.8 Preparation for commissioning

3.2.3.8.1 Cleaning

Motor inner and outer parts must be free of oil, water,
dust, and dirt. Motor inner part must be cleaned with
compressed air at reduced pressure;
Remove the rust inhibitor from the exposed surfaces
with a cloth damped in a petroleum-based solvent;
Make sure the bearings and cavities used for lubrication
are free of dirt and the cavity plugs are correctly sealed
and tightened. Oxidation and marks on bearing seats
and on the shaft must be carefully removed.

3.2.3.8.2 Bearing lubrication

Use the specified lubricant to lubricate the bearings.
Information on bearings and lubricants are indicated in the
bearings' nameplate, and lubrication must be performed
as described in item Bearing maintenance of this
manual, always considering the proper type of bearing.

NOTE
Sleeve bearings in which anticorrosive
material and dehumidifier were applied,
must be disassembled, washed, and the
dehumidifiers must be removed.
Assemble the bearings and apply
lubrication.

3.2.3.8.3 Checking the insulation resistance

Before operating the motor, the insulation resistance must
be measured according to item Insulation resistance of
this manual.

3.2.3.8.4 Others

Follow the remaining procedures described in item
Commissioning of this manual before operating the
motor.

3.2.3.9 Inspections and records during storage

Stored motors must be periodically inspected and
inspection records must be filed.

The following points must be inspected:
1. Physical damage;
2. Cleanliness;
3. Signs of water condensation;
4. Protective coating conditions;
5. Paint conditions;
6. Signs of vermin or insect activity;
7. Satisfactory operation of space heaters. It is
recommended that a signaling system or alarmis
installed in the location in order to detect power
interruption in the space heaters;
8. Record ambient temperature and air relative humidity
around the motor, winding temperature (using RTDs),
insulation resistance and index;
9. The storage location must also be inspected to assert
its compliance with the criteria described in the
Storage plan item.

www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 17
3.2.3.10 Maintenance Plan During Storage

During the storage period, motor maintenance must be performed and recorded in accordance with the plan described in
Table 3.1.

Table 3.1: Storage plan

Monthly
Every 2
months
Every 6
months
Every
2 years
Before
operating
Note
Storage Location
Inspect cleanliness conditions X X

Inspect humidity and temperature
conditions
X

Check for signs of insect infestation X

Measure vibration levels X

Packaging
Inspect physical damages X
Inspect the relative humidity inside the
motor
X

Replace dehumidifier in the package (if
any)
X Whenever necessary
Space heater
Check operation conditions X

Complete motor
Perform external cleaning X X
Check paint conditions X
Check oxidation inhibitor on exposed
machined parts
X
Replace the oxidation inhibitor X
Windings
Measure the insulation resistance X X

Measure the polarization index X X

terminal box and grounding terminals
Clean the boxes inner parts X X

Inspect seals and sealing X X

Grease or Oil lubricated bearings
Rotate the shaft X

Relubricate the bearing X X

Disassemble and clean the bearing X

Sleeve bearings
Rotate the shaft X

Apply anticorrosive and dehumidifier X

Clean and relubricate the bearings X

Disassemble and store bearing parts X

www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 18
3.3 HANDLING

The handling of vertical motors must be performed as
shown in Figure 3.1.
Always use upper motor eyes/lifting lugs. for vertical
movement, so that the lifting chains and cables are also
in the vertical position, avoiding excessive strain on the
eyes/lifting lugs.
The sole purpose of the housing eyebolts/lifting lugs is
to lift the motor. Never use them to lift active motor-
machine sets;

Figure 3.1: Handling motors

NOTES
Rated motor weight must be observed. Do
not jolt the motor when lifting it or drop it
abruptly as that may cause damage to the
bearings;
In order to lift the motor, use only the
specific eyes provided for this purpose. If
necessary, use a crossbeam to protect
motor parts;
The eyes/lifting lugs in the heat exchanger,
covers, bearings, radiator, terminal boxes,
etc., are specifically designed for their
respective component only;
Never lift the motor by the shaft;
In order to move the motor, the shaft must
be locked with the locking device supplied
with the motor.


ATTENTION
Steel cables, clevises and hoisting equipment
must have capacity to bear the motor weight.


3.5.1 Motor Positioning

Vertical motors are supplied with rear-end and front-end
eyebolts/lifting lugs.
Some motors are transported horizontally and need to be
moved back to their original position. The following
procedure illustrates how motors are moved from
horizontal to vertical position and vice-versa.


Figure 3.2: Motor positioning

1. Lift motor by the side eyes/lifting lugs using 2 hoists;
2. Lower the front-end of the motor and lift the rear-end
until the motor is balanced;
3. Release the front-end cables and turn the motor 180
in order to fasten the cables in the remaining
eyes/lifting lugs. located in the motor rear end;
4. Fasten loose cables to the eyes/lifting lugs on the rear
end of the motor until the motor reaches a vertical
position.

ATTENTION
Noncompliance with these recommendations
may cause damage to the equipment,
personnel injuries, or both.






www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 19
4 INSTALLATION

4.1 INSTALLATION SITE

Motors must be installed in easily accessible places,
allowing periodic inspections, local maintenance and, if
necessary, removal for external services.
The following environment characteristics must be
ensured:
Clean and well-ventilated location;
Other equipment or building must not block the motor
ventilation;
The area around and above the motor must be
sufficient for its maintenance or handling;
The environment must be in accordance with the motor
protection level.

4.2 DIRECTION OF ROTATION

The motor rotation direction is indicated on a plate fixed to
the drive end frame.


ATTENTION
Motors supplied with a single direction of
rotation must not operate in the opposite
direction.
In order to operate the motor in the opposite
direction, please contact WEG

4.3 INSULATION RESISTANCE

4.3.1 Safety instructions

DANGER
In order to measure the insulation resistance,
the motor must be shutdown.
The winding being tested must be connected
to the frame and grounded until all residual
electrostatic charges are removed. The
capacitors must also be grounded (if any)
before disconnecting and separating the
terminals, and measure the insulation
resistance with a megohmmeter.
Noncompliance with these procedures may
result in personnel injuries.

4.3.2 General considerations

When motor is not immediately operated, it must be
protected against moisture, high temperatures, and dirt,
avoiding impacts to the insulation resistance.
Winding insulation resistance must be measured before
operating the motor.
If the environment is too humid, the insulation resistance
must be measured periodically during storage. It is difficult
to establish fixed rules for the actual value of a motor
insulation resistance, as it varies according to
environmental conditions (temperature, humidity), machine
cleanliness conditions (dust, oil, grease, dirt), and quality
and condition of the insulating material used.
Evaluating periodical follow-up records is useful to
conclude whether the motor is able to operate.

4.3.3 Measuring stator windings

The insulation resistance must be measured with a
megohmmeter. Test voltage for motor windings must be
in accordance with Table 4.1 and the IEEE43 standard.

Table 4.1: Winding insulation resistance test voltage

Winding rated
voltage (V)
Insulation resistance test -
continuous voltage (V)
< 1000 500
1000 - 2500 500 - 1000
2501 - 5000 1000 - 2500
5001 - 12000 2500 - 5000
> 12000 5000 - 10000

Before measuring the stator winding insulation resistance,
verify if:
the CTs secondary connections are not open (if
applicable);
All power cables are disconnected;
The motor frame is grounded;
The winding temperature was measured;
All temperature sensors are grounded;

The stator windings insulation resistance measurement
must be carried out in the main terminal box.
The instrument (megohmmeter) must be connected
between the motor frame and the winding. The frame
must be grounded.

Figure 4.1: Megohmmeter connection

If the total winding measurement presents a value below
recommended, the neutral connections must be opened
and the insulation resistance of each phase must be
separately measured.

ATTENTION
Much higher values may be frequently obtained in
motors being operated for a long period of time.
Comparison with values obtained in previous tests
in the same motor, under similar load,
temperature, and humidity conditions, may be an
excellent parameter to evaluate the winding
insulation conditions, instead of exclusively using
the value obtained in a single test as basis.
Significant or abrupt reductions are considered
suspicious.





www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 20
Table 4.2: Insulation resistance referential limits in electric
machines

Insulation resistance value Insulation evaluation
2M or less Bad
< 50M Dangerous
50...100M Regular
100...500M Good
500...1000M Very good
> 1000M Excellent

4.3.4 Minimum insulation resistance

If the insulation resistance measured is less than 100M
at 40C before operating the motor, the windings must be
dried according to the following procedure:
Disassemble the motor and remove the rotor and
bearings;
Heat the frame with the stator winding up to 130C in
an industrial oven for at least 8 hours (for motors above
the 630 IEC or 104 frame NEMA series, at least 12
hours). Please contact WEG before employing other
methods;
Check if the insulation resistance is within acceptable
values, according to Table 4.2. If not, please contact
WEG.

4.3.5 Polarization index

The polarization index is traditionally defined by the relation
between the insulation resistance measured for 10 min.
and the insulation resistance measured for 1 min. This
measurement procedure is always carried out at relatively
constant temperatures.The polarization index allows the
evaluation of the motor insulation conditions according to
Table 4.3.

Table 4.3: Polarization index (relation between 10 minutes and 1
minute)

Polarization index Insulation evaluation
1 or less Bad
< 1.5 Dangerous
1.5 to 2.0 Marginal
2.0 to 3.0 Good
3.0 to 4.0 Very good
> 4.0 Excellent

DANGER
In order to avoid accidents, the motor winding
must be grounded immediately after
measuring the insulation resistance.

4.3.6 Conversion of measured values

The insulation resistance must be kept at 40C. If the
measurement is performed at a different temperature, it
will be necessary to correct the reading to 40C using an
insulation resistance variation curve related to the
temperature obtained from the motor itself. If this curve is
not available, the approximate correction provided by the
curve in Figure 4.2, according to the NBR 5383 / IEEE43
standard, may be employed.




Figure 4.2: Insulation resistance variation coefficient according to
the temperature

4.4 PROTECTIONS

Primarily, motor circuits have two types of protection:
motor protection against overload/blocked rotor and
circuit protection (terminal and distribution) against shorts.
Motors used on a continuous basis must be protected
against overload through a device integrated to the motor,
or an independent protection device, that usually is a
thermal relay with rated current equal or less than the
value obtained by multiplying the supply rated current at
the motor full load by:
1.25 for motors with service factor equal or greater than
1.15;
1.15 for motors with service factor equal to 1.0.
The motors also possess protection devices against
overheating (in case of overload, motor locking, low
voltage, lack of motor ventilation).

4.4.1 Thermal protection

Protection devices against overheating are installed in the
main stator, bearings and in other components that
require temperature monitoring and thermal protection.
These devices must be connected to an external
temperature monitoring and protection system.
In order to convert the insulation resistance
measured (Rt) to 40C, multiply it by the
temperature coefficient (Kt)
I
n
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n

r
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
c
e

v
a
r
i
a
t
i
o
n

c
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t

K
t
4
0

C

Winding temperature C
R40C = Rt x Kt40C
www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 21

4.4.1.1 Temperature sensors

Thermostat (bimetallic) - Bimetallic thermal detectors,
usually with normally closed silver contacts. They open at
a certain temperature. Thermostats are connected in
series or independently, according to the connection
diagram.

Thermistors (PTC or NTC type) - Thermal detectors
composed of semiconductors that suddenly vary their
resistance when reaching a certain temperature.
Thermostats are connected in series or independently,
according to the connection diagram.

NOTE
Thermostats and thermistors must be
connected to a control unit that will shutdown
the motor power supply or will activate a
signaling device.

Thermo resistance (Pt100) - A calibrated resistance
element. Its operation is based on the principle that a
metallic conductor electric resistance varies linearly
according to the temperature. The detector terminals must
be connected to a control panel with a temperature meter.

NOTE
RTD thermoresistances allow monitoring
through the absolute temperature informed by
its instant resistance value. With this
information, the relay may perform the reading
of the temperature, as well as the alarm and
shutdown parameterization, according to
predetermined temperatures.

4.4.1.2 Winding temperature limits

The temperature at the winding hottest point must be kept
below the insulation thermal class limit. The total
temperature is composed by the ambient temperature
plus temperature elevation (T), plus the difference between
the average winding temperature and the winding hottest
point temperature.
Ambient temperature is, by rule, 40C at most. Working
conditions above this value are considered special.
Table 4.4 displays the numeric values and the composition
of the acceptable temperature at the winding hottest
point.

Table 4.4: Insulation class

Insulation class F H
Ambient temperature C 40 40
T = temperature elevation (temperature
measurement method by resistance variation)
C 105 125
Difference between the hottest point and the
average temperature
C 10 15
Total: hottest point temperature C 155 180





ATTENTION
If the motor is operating at temperatures
above the limit values of the insulation thermal
class, insulation useful life and, consequently,
motor useful life will be significantly reduced or
it may even result in motor blow out.

4.4.1.3 Alarm and shutdown temperatures

The temperature level to trigger alarm and shutdown must
be parameterized at the lowest value possible. This
temperature level may be determined by test results or
through motor operating temperatures. Alarm temperature
may be set at 10C, above the machine full load operating
temperature, always considering the local ambient
temperature. Shutdown temperatures must not exceed
maximum acceptable temperature for the stator winding
insulation class and for the bearings (considering
lubrication type and system).

Table 4.5: Maximum stator temperature

Maximum adjustment
temperatures for the protections
(C)
Temperature
Class

Alarm Shutdown
F 130 155
H 155 180

Table 4.6: Maximum bearing temperature

Maximum adjustment temperatures for the protections
(C)
Alarm Shutdown
110 120

ATTENTION
Alarm and shutdown values may be defined
based on experience. However, they must not
exceed the maximum values indicated in
Table 4.5 and Table 4.6.

ATTENTION
Motor protection devices are listed in the
WEG diagram - Specific connection diagram
for each motor.
Failure to use such devices is the users
exclusive responsibility and, in case of
damages, may void the product warranty.

www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 22
4.4.1.4 Temperature and ohmic resistance of Pt100 thermoresistors

Table 4.7 shows temperature values in function of the ohmic resistance measured for Pt100 thermoresistors.



Table 4.7: Temperature X Resistance (Pt100)

C 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 100.00 100.39 100.78 101.17 101.56 101.95 102.34 102.73 103.12 103.51
10 103.90 104.29 104.68 105.07 105.46 105.95 106.24 106.63 107.02 107.40
20 107.79 108.18 108.57 108.96 109.35 109.73 110.12 110.51 110.90 111.28
30 111.67 112.06 112.45 112.83 113.22 113.61 113.99 114.38 114.77 115.15
40 115.54 115.93 116.31 116.70 117.08 117.47 117.85 118.24 118.62 119.01
50 119.40 119.78 120.16 120.55 120.93 121.32 121.70 122.09 122.47 122.86
60 123.24 123.62 124.01 124.39 124.77 125.16 125.54 125.92 126.31 126.69
70 127.07 127.45 127.84 128.22 128.60 128.98 129.37 129.75 130.13 130.51
80 130.89 131.27 131.66 132.04 132.42 132.80 133.18 133.56 133.94 134.32
90 134.70 135.08 135.46 135.84 136.22 136.60 136.98 137.36 137.74 138.12
100 138.50 138.88 139.26 139.64 140.02 140.39 140.77 141.15 141.53 141.91
110 142.29 142.66 143.04 143.42 143.80 144.17 144.55 144.93 145.31 145.68
120 146.06 146.44 146.81 147.19 147.57 147.94 148.32 148.70 149.07 149.45
130 149.82 150.20 150.57 150.95 151.33 151.70 152.08 152.45 152.83 153.20
140 153.58 153.95 154.32 154.70 155.07 155.45 155.82 156.19 156.57 156.94
150 157.31 157.69 158.06 158.43 158.81 159.18 159.55 159.93 160.30 160.67

4.4.1.5 Space heater

When the motor is equipped with a space heater to
prevent water condensation in its interior during long idle
periods, it must be assured that this space heater is
activated immediately after the motor is shutdown and
that it is turned off as soon as motor resumes operation.
Installed resistance supply voltage and power values are
informed in the motor connection diagram and in the
specific nameplate fixed to the motor.

4.4.2 Water leak sensor

Motors with air-water heat exchanger possess a water
leaking sensor that detects eventual water leaks from the
radiator to the inner part of the motor. This sensor must
be connected to the control panel according to the motor
connection diagram. This sensor signal must be used to
trigger the alarm.
When this protection becomes active, a heat exchanger
inspection must be carried out and, in case of verified
water leak in the radiator, the motor must be
disconnected and the problem must be corrected.

Formula: - 100 = C
0.386
www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 23
4.5 COOLING

Only a correct motor and cooling system installation can
ensure continuous operation without overheating.

4.5.1 Water Radiators

The water radiator (when used) is a surface heat
transmitter designed to indirectly dissipate electric
equipment heat , in a way that the air flowing in a closed
circuit is cooled by the radiator after having removed the
heat generated by equipment that require cooling.
Therefore, heat flows from the equipment to the air, and
from the air to the water.

NOTE
The cooling system protection devices must
be periodically monitored.

NOTE
Air and water inlets and outlets must not be
obstructed as they may cause overheating or
even motor blow out.

Clean water with the following characteristics must be
used as cooling fluid:
PH: between 6 and 9
Chlorides: maximum 25.0 mg/l;
Sulphates: maximum 3.0 mg/l;
Manganese: maximum 0.5 mg/l;
Solids in suspension: maximum 30.0 mg/l;
Ammonia: no traces


ATTENTION
Radiator data related to the air-water heat
exchanger is indicated in the motor
connection diagram and nameplate.
Such data must be observed for the correct
operation of the motor cooling system in order
to avoid overheating.

4.5.1.1 Radiators for seawater applications


ATTENTION
In case of radiators for seawater applications,
materials in contact with water (pipes and
flush plates) must be resistant to corrosion.
Additionally, radiators may be equipped with
sacrificial anodes (e.g.: zinc or magnesium), as
shown in Figure 4.3. In this application,
anodes are corroded during the operation,
protecting the exchanger heads.
In order to maintain the integrity of the radiator
heads, these anodes must be periodically
replaced, always considering the current level
of corrosion.


Figure 4.3: Radiator with sacrificial anodes

NOTE
The type, position and amount of sacrificial
anodes may vary according to the application.

4.5.2 Independent fans

Independent fans (when used) usually possess three-
phase asynchronous motor drivers. This motor terminal
box is usually located on its frame. The characteristic data
(frequency, voltage) is indicated in the motor nameplate,
whereas the direction of rotation is indicated by an
indicative plate on the fan housing or near it.

NOTE
Visually check the independent fan direction of
rotation before starting the machine.
If the fan is running in the wrong direction, the
connection between the 2 phases of the must
be inverted.

Air filters protecting the inner part of the motor against
contamination must also be periodically inspected. Filters
must be maintained in perfect operating conditions in
order to ensure the correct operation of the cooling
system and safety of the motor inner parts.

4.6 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

4.6.1 Electric connections

4.6.1.1 Main connection

Depending on the motor constructive form, stator terminals
are fixed to insulators or through copper terminals in the
main terminal box.
The location of power terminal boxes , neutral, and rotor is
identified in the motor specific dimension drawing.
Connections to terminals must be made according to the
connection diagram of the motor-specific stator.
Ensure that the power cables cross-section and insulation
are appropriate for the motor current and voltage.
Stator and rotor terminal identifications and the
corresponding connections are indicated in the motor-
specific connection diagram, in compliance with the
IEC60034-8 or NEMA MG1 standards.
Sacrificial anodes
www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 24
The motor rotation direction may be altered by the
inversion of any two phases. However, the motor must
turn in the direction specified in the connection plate and
in the nameplate fixed to the motor.

NOTE
The direction of rotation is decided by looking
at the shaft end on the drive end of the motor.
Motors with a single direction of rotation must
only turn in the indicated direction, since fans
and other devices are unidirectional.
In order to operate the motor in the opposite
direction, please contact WEG


ATTENTION
Before connecting the motor to the power
network, it is necessary to carefully measure
the winding insulation resistance.

In order to connect the motor main power supply cables,
unscrew the stator terminal box cover, cut the sealing
rings (normal motors without cable glands) according to
the diameters of the cables to be used, and insert the
cables inside the sealing rings. Cut the power supply
cables to the desired length , strip the ends and insert
terminals to be used.

4.6.1.2 Grounding

The motor frame and main terminal box must be
grounded before connecting the motor to the power
supply system.
Connect the cable metallic coating (if any) to the common
grounding conductor. Cut the appropriate length of the
grounding conductor and connect it to the existing
terminal in the terminal box and/or the one in the frame.
Firmly fix all connections.


ATTENTION
Do not use steel washers or washers made of
low electric conductivity materials to fix the
terminals.

Before making the connections, apply protective grease in
all connection contacts.
Insert all sealing rings in the respective grooves. Close the
terminal box cover making sure that the sealing rings are
placed correctly.






















































www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 25
4.6.2 Connection diagram

4.6.2.1 IEC60034-8 connection diagram

The connection diagrams below identify the terminals in the terminal box, and all possible connections to stator (phases) and
rotor in three-phase ring induction motors. The numbers described in each diagram allow the identification of the connection
diagram through a nameplate fixed to the motor including code numbers corresponding to the connection diagrams for
stator and accessories.

3 ELECTRICAL
TERMINALS
6 ELECTRICAL
TERMINALS
6 ELECTRICAL TERMINALS - DAHLANDER
9100

3 ELECTRICAL
TERMINALS +
NEUTRAL
9121

9101

Y
9102


LOWEST
SPEED
9103
YY


HIGHEST
SPEED
9104
Y



LOWEST
SPEED
9105
YY



LOWEST
SPEED
9106



HIGHEST
SPEED

9 ELECTRICAL TERMINALS 12 ELECTRICAL TERMINALS
9107


9108

9109
YY
9110
Y

9111

9112
YY

9113


9114
Y


12 ELECTRICAL TERMINALS - (part winding)
9115

FOR START UP
Y
9116

FOR START UP
IN
9117

Y ONLY FOR
START UP
9118

FOR RATED
SPEED

NOTE
When 2 or more of the connection cables are used in parallel with the purpose of dividing the electric current,
they will be identified by an additional suffix separated by a hyphen, as shown in the following example:



www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 26

4.6.2.2 NEMA MG1 connection diagram

3 ELECTRICAL
TERMINALS
6 ELECTRICAL
TERMINALS
6 ELECTRICAL TERMINALS - DAHLANDER
9200

3 ELECTRICAL
TERMINALS +
NEUTRAL
9221

9201

Y
9202



LOWEST
SPEED
9203
YY



HIGHEST
SPEED
9204
Y


LOWEST
SPEED
9205
YY



LOWEST
SPEED
9206




HIGHEST
SPEED

9 ELECTRICAL TERMINALS 12 ELECTRICAL TERMINALS
9207


9208


9209
YY

9210
Y

9211

9212
YY

9213

9214
Y

12 ELECTRICAL TERMINALS - (part winding)
9215


FOR START UP
Y
9216


FOR START UP
IN
9217


Y ONLY FOR
START UP
9218


FOR RATED
SPEED

NOTE
When 2 or more of the connection cables are used in parallel with the purpose of dividing the electric current,
they will be identified by an additional suffix separated by a hyphen, as shown in the following example:


4.6.2.2.1 Direction of rotation

The direction of rotation is indicated in the nameplate and may be noted by looking at the shaft end on the drive end of the
motor. The direction of rotation must be checked before coupling the motor to the driven machine;
Motors with connection and terminal identification described in items 4.6.2.1 and 4.6.2.2 of this manual have a clockwise
direction of rotation;
In order to reverse the direction of rotation, the connection of any of the two phases must be inverted;
Motors with a single direction of rotation, as indicated on the nameplate and through an indicative plate fixed to the frame,
have a unidirectional fan and must be operated only in the specified direction of rotation. To reverse direction of rotation of
unidirectional motors, please contact WEG.

4.6.2.3 Accessory connection diagram

For correct installation of the accessories, please see the specific drawing of the connection diagram of the motor.
www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 27

4.7 MECHANICAL
CHARACTERISTICS

4.7.1 Foundations

The foundation or structure in which the motor is
installed must be sufficiently rigid, flat, free of external
vibrations, and capable of resisting the mechanical
stress to which it will be submitted during start-up or in
case of short-circuit in the motor.
Choosing the type of foundation will depend on the
nature of the soil at the assembly site or floor resistance.
If the foundation dimensioning is not carefully
performed, serious vibration issues in the foundation
set, motor and driven machine may appear. If the
foundation dimensioning is not carefully performed,
serious vibration issues in the foundation block, motor,
and driven machine may appear.
The structural dimensioning of the foundation must be
performed based on the dimensional drawing, on data
regarding mechanical stress on the foundations and on
the motor fixing form.

NOTE
The user is responsible for the foundation
dimensioning and construction.

4.7.2 Stress on foundations

Based on Figure 4.4, the stress on the foundation may be
calculated by the following equations:







Where: F1 and F2 - Feet reaction on base (N)
t - gravity acceleration (9.81m/s
2
)
m - Motor mass (kg)
Cmax - Maximum torque (Nm)
A - Obtained in the motor dimension drawing (m)


Figure 4.4: Stress on the foundations

4.7.3 Types of bases

4.7.3.1 Concrete base

Concrete bases are the most used for these motors
installations.
The foundation type and size, screws, and anchor plates
depend on the size and type of motor.

Preparation example :
Remove all dirt from the foundation in order to ensure
an adequate anchoring between the foundation blocks
and the motor.
Fix the foundation blocks to the motor feet with bolts.
Place shims with different thickness (total thickness of
approximately 2mm) between the motor feet and the
foundation support surfaces, in order to perform an
accurate vertical alignment.
In order to ensure bolt centering relative to the foot
holes, bush them with a metal sheet or rigid paper
(prespan), enabling an accurate horizontal alignment .
Place leveling shims or bolts under the foundation
blocks in order to ensure appropriate leveling and
perfect alignment of the motor with the driven machine.
After adding the cement, it is necessary to precisely
control the alignment. Eventual small corrections may
be carried out with washers or metal sheets, or by
readjusting the fixing bolts tightening.
Firmly tighten all fixing bolts. Care must be taken so that
motor feet support surfaces are uniformly supported
without distorting the motor frame.
For the correct fixation, introduce two taper pins after test
completion. Pre-threaded holes on the motor feet must be
used.

4.7.3.2 Sliding base

In case of pulley operation, the motor must be assembled
on a sliding base (rails) and the lower part of the belt must
be tensioned.
The rail closest to the drive pulley is assembled in a way
that the positioning screw lies between the motor and the
driven machine The other rail must be assembled with the
screw placed in the opposite position, as shown in Figure
4.5.
The motor is screwed on the rails and positioned on the
foundation.
The drive pulley is then aligned in a way that its center is
located on same plane as the center of the moving pulley,
while the motor and machine shafts are perfectly parallel
to each other.
The belt must not be excessively stretched. After the
alignment, the rails are fixed.

Figure 4.5: Sliding base




) (
max) 4 (
. . . 5 . 0
1
A
C
g m F + + =
) (
max) 4 (
. . . 5 . 0
2
A
C
g m F + =
www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 28
4.7.4 Motor assembly

Assemble the motor safely and correctly align it with the
driven equipment, according to the assembly types
described below.
1. Motor assembly directly to the driven machine: both
units must be firmly coupled, and the driven machine
must be installed on a proper base;
2. Motor assembly on metal base: The base must be
sufficiently rigid and free of vibrations.


ATTENTION
Incorrect equipment assembly may cause
excessive vibration, resulting in premature
bearings wearing, and even shaft rupture.

4.7.4.1 Motor with flange and solid shaft

In order to assemble the motor on the driven machine,
proceed as follows:
1. Lift the motor by upper hoisting eyebolts/lifting lugs
and turn it to better position the grease fittings, pipes
and terminal boxes;
2. Clean both flanges to be coupled;
3. Remove the motor shaft locking device;
4. Move the motor towards the driven machine,
plugging the motor flange into the driven machine
flange;
5. Insert the flanges fixing bolts and tighten them with
proper torque;
6. Couple the motor shaft to the driven machine;
7. Rotate the assembly shaft, ensuring that it can turn
freely;
8. Align the equipment according to the procedure
described in this manual;
9. Tighten all flange fixing bolts, avoiding their bending
or coming off;
10. Rotate the assembly shaft again.

4.7.4.2 Motor with flange and hollow shaft

First, the motor must be fixed to its base and the driven
machine shaft must be inserted through the motor hollow
shaft.
In some cases, it might be necessary to lift the motors and
lower them on the driven machine shaft.
These procedures must be carefully performed in order to
avoid damage to the motor shaft or driven machine shaft.

Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the upper coupling protection cover and lift
the motor with a hoist to install it over the base;
2. Slowly and carefully lower the motor and fit it on the
base;
3. Position the motor in a way that allows access to the
terminal boxes and bearing lubrication. Install and
tighten the fixing bolts;
4. Insert the pump shaft inside the motor hollow shaft
5. Align the motor shaft and driven machine shaft as
described in this manual
6. Fix the pump shaft in the coupling and adjust the
fixation nut in the pump shaft.
7. Manually rotate the shaft in order to ensure it turns
freely and the shaft are perfectly aligned, always
observing the rotation direction of the anti-reversion
ratchet (if applicable);
8. After the alignment, tighten all flange bolts uniformly
and firmly;
9. Manually turn the shaft again in order to ensure it can
freely turn;
10. Insert the cover back to the upper coupling.

4.7.5 Natural frequency of the foundation

In order to ensure a safe operation, in addition to a stable
foundation, the motor must be accurately aligned with the
coupled equipment and components assembled on its
shaft, which need to be properly balanced.
After the motor is assembled and coupled, the relation
between the natural foundation frequency is:
Motor rotation frequency;
Twice as much as the rotation frequency;
Twice as much as the line frequency;

These natural frequencies must be as specified below:
The foundation natural frequency +25% or -20%
related to the frequencies provided above.
The foundation higher order natural frequencies +10%
or -10% related to the frequencies provided above.

4.7.6 Alignment and leveling

The motor must be correctly aligned with the driven
machine, especially when direct coupling is used.
A misalignment may result in bearing damage, generate
excessive vibration, and even in shaft rupture. The
alignment must be executed according to the coupling
manufacturer's recommendations.
Particularly for direct coupling, the motor and driven
machine shafts must be axially and radially aligned, as
illustrated in Figure 4.6 and Figure 4.7.

Parallel misalignment

Radial measurement


Figure 4.6: Parallel alignment

Figure 4.6 shows the parallel misalignment of both shaft
ends and the practical measuring form using adequate
dial indicators.
The measurement is performed in 4 points with a 90
displacement from each other and with the two half-
couplings spinning together in order to eliminate the
effects due to support surface irregularities in the extremity
of the dial indicator. Choosing a vertical point greater than
0, half of the dial indicator measurement difference in the
0 and 180 points represents a vertical coaxial failure. In
case of deviation, the appropriate correction must be
implemented by adding or removing assembly shims . Half
of the dial indicator measurement difference in the 90 and
270 points represents a horizontal coaxial failure.
This measurement indicates when it is necessary to lift or
lower the motor, or move it to the right or to the left on the
driven side in order to eliminate the coaxial failure.
www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 29
Half of the dial indicator maximum measurement
difference in a complete rotation represents the maximum
run out found.
Misalignment in the shaft complete spin cannot be greater
than 0.03mm.
When flexible couplings are used, values that are greater
than those indicated above are acceptable, provided that
they do not exceed the acceptable value provided by the
coupling manufacturer. Maintaining a safety margin for
these values is recommended.

Angular misalignment

Axial measurement

Figure 4.7: Angular alignment

Figure 4.7 shows the angular misalignment and the
practical form to carry out this measurement procedure.
The measurement is performed in 4 points with a 90
displacement from each other and with the two half-
couplings spinning together in order to eliminate the
effects due to support surface irregularities in the extremity
of the dial indicator. Choosing a vertical point greater than
0, half of the dial indicator measurement difference in the
0 and 180 points represents a vertical misalignment. In
case of deviation, the appropriate correction must be
implemented by adding or removing assembly shims .
This must be adequately corrected by adding or removing
assembly shims under the motor feet.
Half of the dial indicator measurement difference in the 90
and 270 points represents a horizontal misalignment,
which must be adequately corrected by displacing the
motor laterally/angularly.
Half of the dial indicator maximum measurement
difference in a complete rotation represents the maximum
angular misalignment found.
The misalignment in the shaft complete spin for rigid or
semi-flexible coupling cannot be greater than 0.03mm.
When flexible couplings are used, values that are greater
than those indicated above are acceptable, provided that
they do not exceed the acceptable value provided by the
coupling manufacturer.
Maintaining a safety margin for these values is
recommended.
In the alignment/leveling process, the influence of the
temperature over the motor and the driven machine must
be considered. Varying dilations in the components may
alter the alignment/leveling status during operation.
After aligning the set and having assured a perfect
alignment (both hot and cold), the motor fixation must be
carried out in the anchor plate or in the base, as shown in
Figure 4.8.


Figure 4.8: Motor fixation

4.7.7 Hollow shaft motor alignment

Hollow shaft motors require a precise alignment between
the motor and the driven machine shafts. The pump shaft
works as a pendulum supported by the upper coupling
and motor bearing.
1. Fix the dial indicator by its magnetic base to the
pump shaft and align it with the base surface (motor
shaft), adjusting the dial indicator to zero (Figure 4.9);
2. Remove the upper cover and rotate both motor and
pump shafts;
3. Read the dial indicator with 90 degrees from the
starting point;
4. An acceptable alignment is reached when the
indicator reading does not exceed 0.05 mm;
5. If necessary, use shims for the flange surface.


Figure 4.9: Hollow shaft motor alignment

When the motor alignment is within the established
limits, couple the load;
Drive the motor at minimum load and check for
vibrations;
Continue to increase the load and check for vibrations
until reaching full load.
Small misalignments may be corrected by inserting shims
between the flanges faces. These shims can also
compensate non-flat flanges.

4.7.8 Couplings

ATTENTION
Pins, nuts, washers, and shims for leveling
may be supplied with the motor, whenever
requested by the client.






Weld in 4 points
Upper
bearing
Lower guide
bearing
Flange
Dial indicator
Hollow
shaft
motor
Pump
shaft
www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 30
NOTES
User is responsible for the motor installation.
WEG is not liable for damages to the motor,
associated equipment, and installation,
occurred due to:
Excessive vibration transmission;
Incorrect installation;
Incorrect alignment;
Improper storage conditions;
Noncompliance with instructions before
start-up;
Incorrect electrical connections

4.7.8.1 Solid shaft motor coupling

Only appropriate coupling adaptable to the simple torque
transmission without generating transversal forces must
be used.
For both flexible and rigid coupling, the motor and driven
machine shaft centers must be located in a single line.
Flexible coupling allows mitigation of residual misalignment
effects and avoids vibration transferring between coupled
machines, which do not happen when rigid coupling is
used.
The coupling must always be assembled or removed with
the help of appropriate devices and never through rough
devices such as hammers, mallets, etc.

4.7.8.1.1 Direct coupling

For the purposes of cost, space saving, absence of belt
sliding and increased safety against accidents, direct
coupling is preferred, whenever possible. Also, in case of
transmission by turbo gear, direct coupling must be the
preferred choice.
.

ATTENTION
Carefully align the shaft ends and, whenever
possible, use flexible coupling, leaving a
minimum clearance (E) of 3 mm between the
couplings, as illustrated in Erro! Fonte de
referncia no encontrada..

Figure 4.10: Axial clearance (E)

4.7.8.1.2 Gear coupling

Incorrectly-aligned gear couplings generate vibrations in
the motor transmission itself. Therefore, it is vital to ensure
that the shafts are perfectly aligned and strictly parallel, in
case of transmissions by angled or spur gears, and in a
correctly adjusted angle in case of transmissions by bevel
or helical gears.
Gear teeth meshing may be controlled by the insertion of a
paper strip showing all teeth marks after the gear spins
one time.
4.7.8.1.3 Coupling by pulleys and belts




Figure 4.11: Coupling by pulleys and belts

When speed reduction or increase is required, pulley
transmission is indicated.
In order to avoid unnecessary radial stress on the
bearings, shafts and pulleys have to be perfectly aligned
with each other.
Biased working belts transmit alternating direction jolts on
the rotor and may cause bearing damage.
Belt slipping may be avoided by applying a resinous
material such as tar.
There must be only enough belt tension to avoid sliding
during operation.

NOTE
Belts with excessive tension increase the stress
applied to the shaft end, causing vibration and
fatigue, which may lead to shaft rupture.

Avoid using excessively small pulleys, as they generate
bends on the motor shaft due to the belt traction force,
which increases as the pulley diameter decreases.

ATTENTION
In each specific pulley dimension case, WEG
must be contacted in order to ensure a correct
application.

NOTE
Always use properly balanced pulleys. Avoid
key excess as it represents an increase in the
unbalance mass. Failure to comply with the
instruction above will cause an increase in
vibration levels.

4.7.8.2 Hollow shaft motor coupling

Hollow shaft vertical motors are generally designed to
drive depth or turbine pumps. The type of coupling is
specified by the pump manufacturer according to the
application. Remove the upper cover of the motor in order
to access the coupling.


Correct



Incorrect


Incorrect
www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 31
5 START-UP

5.1 DOL STARTING

Whenever possible, the start-up of a three-phase wound
rotor induction motor must be direct (at full voltage)
through a contactor. This start-up method is the simplest
and most viable method, though it must only be used
when the start-up current does not disrupt the power
supply.
It is important to consider that the starting current in
induction motors reaches values at the rate of 6 to 7 times
the rated current. It is vital to ensure that such current (Ip)
does not affect other consumers' power supplies, due to a
higher voltage drop in the power supply.
This scenario is identified during one of the following three
conditions:
a) When the power supply is "strong" enough and the
motor starting current is insignificant related to the
power supply capacity.
b) Motor start-up is always performed without any load,
reducing start-up time and, consequently, the
duration of the starting current and voltage drop,
which is tolerable for other consumers.
c) When the direct start-up is properly authorized by the
local power utility company.

Extremely high starting currents during the start-up may
generate the following hazardous consequences:
a) High voltage drop in the power grid energy supply
system, causing interferences in the equipment
installed in this system;
b) Electric installation components (cables, contactors)
must be over dimensioned, which generates high
costs;
c) Fines applied by the power utility company that limit
voltage drops in the power grid.

5.2 DOL STARTING FREQUENCY

Since induction motors have an elevated starting current,
the time spent to accelerate high inertial charges results in
a rapid motor temperature increase. If the interval between
successive start-ups is too short, that would lead to a
rapid winding temperature increase, reducing their useful
life or even burning the windings. The NBR 7094 Standard
establishes a minimum start-up regime which motors
must be capable of meeting.
a) Two successive start-ups, being the first one with a
cold motor, i.e. with its windings at ambient
temperature, and the second one immediately after,
but only after the motor has idled until rest;
b) A warm start up, i.e. with the windings at regime
temperature.

The first condition simulates a scenario in which the motor
first start-up is aborted, for instance, because of turning it
off using the motor protection, when a second motor
start-up is immediately allowed.
The second condition simulates a scenario of accidental
motor shutdown while in normal operation, for instance,
due to lack of energy in the power grid, when starting up
the motor right after energy recovery is allowed.

5.3 BLOCKED-ROTOR CURRENT
(Ip/In)

According to standard NBR 7094, the motor nameplate
must indicate the IP/In value, which is the relation between
the blocked-rotor current and the rated current.

5.4 REDUCED CURRENT START-UP

In case a direct start-up is not possible, the following
indirect start-up systems may be used to reduce the start-
up current:
With a star-delta starter;
With a series-parallel switch;
With a compensating switch or auto-transformer;
With a static starter or soft starter;
With a frequency inverter.

www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 32
6 COMMISSIONING

6.1 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION

Before a motor initial start-up or after a long period of
inactivity, the following items must be verified:
1. Motor fixation bolts must be tightened.
2. Measure the windings insulation resistance, ensuring
it is within recommended limits;
3. Check if the motor is clean and if the packaging,
measuring devices and aligning devices have been
removed from the motor working area;
4. Coupling connecting components must be in perfect
operating conditions, duly tightened and greased (if
required);
5. The motor must be adequately aligned;
6. Check for the correct operation of the anti-reverse
ratchet (if any);
7. Ensure that the bearings are properly lubricated. The
lubricant used must be the one recommended on the
nameplate. Check oil levels in motors with oil-
lubricated bearing. Forced lubrication bearings must
present oil pressure and flow values as described in
the nameplate;
8. Inspect the accessories cable connections (thermal
protectors, grounding, space heaters, etc.);
9. Ensure all electrical connections are in accordance
with the motor connection diagram;
10. Ensure that the conductors are connected to the
motor main terminals, and adequately tightened to
prevent them from loosening or to avoid the
occurrence of short-circuits;
11. Inspect cooling system. Inspect the radiators' water
supply system operation in water cooled motors.
Check the fans' direction of rotation in independent
ventilation motors;
12. The motor water inlet and outlet must be
unobstructed;
13. Mobile parts of the motor must be protected to
prevent accidents;
14. Terminal box covers must be properly fitted;
15. All motor screws must be properly tightened ;
16. Verify if the power supply voltage and frequency are in
accordance with the motor nameplate.

6.2 INITIAL START UP

After having performed all instructions provided above, the
following procedure to perform the motor initial start-up
must be followed:
1. Disconnect all space heaters;
2. Adjust all protections in the control panel;
3. Check oil levels in oil-lubricated bearings;
4. In bearings with forced lubrication, activate the oil
circulation system and verify the oil levels, flow and
pressure, ensuring that they are in accordance with
the data provided on the nameplate;
5. In case the system presents oil flow detection
equipment, the oil flow return signal in the circulation
system of both bearings must be awaited, which
assures that the oil has reached the bearings;
6. Turn on the cooling industrial water system, verifying
the necessary flow and pressure (motors with air-
water heat exchanger);
7. Turn on the fans (motors with forced ventilation);
8. Slowly rotate the motor shaft to check if there are any
parts being dragged and to identify unusual noises;
9. After the previous steps have been concluded, the
motor start-up sequence may be initiated;
10. Check the direction of rotation with uncoupled motor;
11. In order to reverse the direction of rotation, the
connection of any of the two phases must be
inverted;

ATTENTION
In order to reverse the motor rotation direction
with single direction of rotation, it is necessary
to contact WEG.

12. Keep the motor turning at a rated rotation speed and
record bearing temperatures in 1 minute intervals until
they become constant. Any sudden increase in
bearing temperature indicates lubrication or friction
surface issues
13. Monitor the temperature, oil levels in the bearings and
vibration levels. In case there is a significant variation
in any of these values, shutdown the motor start-up
process, identify possible causes and implement all
appropriate corrections;
14. When the bearings temperature stabilizes, the motor
operation process may be resumed.

ATTENTION
Noncompliance with the procedures provided
above may compromise the motor
performance, cause damages and even lead
to a motor blow out, voiding the product
warranty.

6.3 OPERATION

Operation procedures vary significantly depending on the
motor application and the type of control equipment used.
This manual described only general procedures. For
control system operation procedures, please consult the
specific equipment manual.

6.3.1 General

After successful first start-up test, couple the motor to
the driven load and resume the motor start-up
procedure, as described below:
Drive the coupled motor under load until it reaches its
thermal stability and verify whether there are unusual
noises or vibrations or excessive heating. If significant
variations are identified in the vibrations between the
initial operating condition and the condition upon
reaching thermal stability, the alignment and leveling
must be checked;
Measure the absorbed electric current and compare it
with the value indicated on the nameplate;
In a continuous regime, with no load variation, the
current value measured must not exceed the value
indicated on the nameplate multiplied by the service
factor;
www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 33
All measuring and control instruments and devices must
be permanently monitored in order to detect occasional
changes, determine the causes, and implement the
appropriate corrections.

6.3.2 Temperatures

Bearing , stator winding and cooling air temperatures
must be monitored while the motor is operating;
Bearing and stator winding temperatures must be stable
within 4 to 8 hours of operation;
Stator winding temperatures depend on the load.
Therefore, the activated load power must also be
monitored while the motor is operating.

6.3.3 Bearings

The system start-up, as well as the first hours of
operation, must be carefully monitored.

Before starting the motor, verify:
If the external lubrication system (if applicable) is
operational;
If the lubricant used complies with all specifications;
Lubricant characteristics;
Oil levels (oil-lubricated bearings);
If the bearing alarm and shutdown temperatures are set;
During the first system start-up, it is important to inspect
for unusual vibrations or noises;
If the bearing is not running silently and smoothly, the
motor must be immediately shutdown;
The motor must operate for several hours until bearing
temperatures stabilize within the previously mentioned
limits
If the temperature rises above the limits, the motor must
be immediately shutdown; bearings and temperature
sensors must be inspected and the appropriate
corrections must employed;
After bearing temperatures stabilize, verify if there are
any leaks in the plugs, gaskets and in the shaft end.

6.3.4 Radiators

Control and the radiator inlet and outlet temperatures
and adjust the water flow, if necessary;
Regulate water pressure just enough to overcome
pipeline and radiator resistances;
Installing thermometers in the radiator air and water
inlets and outlets and recording the temperatures in
certain timeframes are recommended for controlling the
motor operation;
Along with the thermometers, recording or signaling
(sirens and lamps) instruments may also be installed in
certain locations.

Radiator performance verification
For better control of the operation, it is recommended to
periodically measure and record radiator air and water
inlet and outlet temperatures.
Radiator performance is measured by the difference in
temperature between the cold water and the cold air
during regular operation. This difference must be
routinely monitored. Increases in such difference after
long periods of regular operation may indicate that the
radiator must be cleaned.
A reduction in performance or damage to the radiator
may also indicate air build up in the radiator. If so,
removing the air from the radiator and water pipes may
solve the problem;
The differential pressure on the water side may be
regarded as an indicator that the radiator needs to be
cleaned.
It is also recommended to measure and record
differential water pressures before and after the radiator.
New measurements must be routinely compared to the
initial measurement. Differential pressure increases
indicate that the radiator needs to be cleaned.

6.3.5 Vibration

Motors are balanced by the manufacturer according to the
vibration thresholds established in the IEC60034-14,
NEMA MG1 - Parte 7 and NBR 11390 standards (except
when the purchase agreement specifically provides
different thresholds).
Vibrations are measured vertically, horizontally and axially
at the end and front bearings.
When a client sends the half coupling to WEG, the motor
is balanced with the half coupling attached to the shaft. If
not, according to the aforementioned standards, the
motor is balanced using a half-key (that is, a bar of same
width, length and height is used to fill the key groove
during balancing).
Maximum motor operation vibration levels met by WEG
are specified in Table 6.1. These values are for general
and guidance purposes only, and the specific application
conditions must be considered.

Table 6.1: Vibration (RMS)

Vibration Levels (mm/s RMS)
Rated rotation
speed (rpm)
Frame < 355
355 to
630
> 630
Alarm 4.5 4.5 5.5
600 n 1800
Shutdown 7.0 7.0 8.0
Alarm 3.5 4.5 5.5
1800 < n 3600
Shutdown 5.5 6.5 7.5

The most frequent causes for vibrations are:
Misalignment between the motor and the driven
equipment;
Inadequate fixation of the motor to the base, with
"loose shims" under one or more of the motor feet,
and loose fixation screws;
Inadequate or not sufficiently strong base;
External vibrations from other devices.

ATTENTION
Operating the motor with vibration levels
above the values provided in Table 6.1 may
damage its useful life and/or performance.

6.3.6 Shaft Vibration Limits

In motors equipped with or programmed for the
installation of a proximity sensor (normally used in sliding
bearings), the shaft surfaces are prepared with a special
finishing in the areas adjacent to the bearings, with the
purpose of ensuring a correct shaft vibration
measurement.
www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 34
The shaft vibration measured in these motors must
comply with the IEC 60034-14 or NEMA MG 1 standards.
The alarm and shutdown values in Table 6.2 represent
acceptable shaft vibration values for coupled electric
machines, according to the ISO7919-3 standard.
These are referential and generic values, considering the
application specific conditions, specially the diametric
clearance between the shaft and the bearing.

Table 6.2: Shaft vibration

Shaft vibration (peak-to-peak m)
Rated rotation
(rpm)
Frame
280 to
315
355 to
450
> 450
Alarm 110 130 150
1800
Shutdown 140 160 190
Alarm 85 100 120
3600
Shutdown 100 120 150


ATTENTION
Operating the motor with shaft vibration
values close to the alarm or shutdown values
may cause damage to the bearing shell.

The main causes for shaft vibration increase are:
Coupling unbalance issues or other problems that may
generate vibration in the machine;
Problems with the shaft shape in the measurement
area, minimized during the manufacturing process;
Residual voltage or magnetism in the shaft surface
where the measurement is performed;
Scratches, bumps or variations in the shaft finishing in
the measurement area.

6.3.7 Shutdown

Motor shutdown depends on its application, but the main
recommendations are:
Reduce the driven equipment load, if possible;
Open the main circuit breaker;
Turn on the space heaters (if any) in case that is not
automatically performed by command devices;
Shutdown the bearing oil circulation system (if any);
Shutdown the heat exchanger radiator water supply
system (if any).

DANGER
While the rotor is operating, and even after it
is shutdown, touching any of its active parts
is life threatening.




ATTENTION
The terminal boxes of motors equipped with
capacitors must not be opened before full
discharge.
Capacitor discharge time: 5 minutes after the
motor is shutdown.



































































www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 35
7 MAINTENANCE

7.1 GENERAL

When used appropriately, an adequate maintenance
program for electric motors includes the following
recommendations:
Keep the motor and all related equipment clean;
Routinely measure insulation levels;
Routinely measure temperature rises (windings,
bearings and cooling system);
Check for occasional wearing effects, the operation of
the lubrication system and the bearings useful life;
Check ventilation systems to ensure air is flowing
correctly;
Check the heat exchanger;
Measure the machine vibration levels;
Check all related devices (hydraulic unit, water system,
etc.)
Check all of the motor accessories, protections and
connections, ensuring that they are operating properly.
In order to facilitate the heat exchange process with
the environment, the frame must be kept clean and
free of oil or dust accumulation in the external area;
Failure to comply with one of the recommendations
provided above may result in unexpected equipment
downtime. The frequency with which such inspections are
performed depends on local application conditions.
The frequency with which such inspections are performed
depends on local application conditions.
If the motor requires reconditioning or replacement of any
damaged parts, please contact WEG.


ATTENTION
Whenever the motor needs to be moved,
ensure that the shaft is properly locked to
prevent bearing damage . Use the device
provided with the motor to lock the shaft.

7.2 GENERAL CLEANING

In order to facilitate the heat exchange process with
the environment, the frame must be kept clean and
free of oil or dust accumulation in the external area;
The interior of the motor must also be kept clean, and
free from dust, debris and oils.
Use brushes or clean cotton cloths to clean. If the dust
is not abrasive, an industrial vacuum cleaner must be
used to remove the dirt from the fan cover and the
excess dust on fan blades and on the frame.
Debris impregnated with oil or moisture may be
removed with a cloth soaked in the appropriate
solvents.
Cleaning the terminal boxes is also recommended.
Terminals and connectors must be kept clean, rust-
free and in perfect operating conditions. Avoid contact
between connecting parts and grease or verdigris.

7.3 WINDING INSPECTION

The windings insulation resistance must be regularly
measured, especially during damp weathers or after
prolonged motor shutdown.The windings must regularly
undergo complete visual inspections, recording and
repairing each and every damage or fault identified.
Low values or sudden variations in the insulation
resistance must be carefully investigated.
At points where insulation resistance may be low (due to
an excess of dust or moisture), it may be increased back
to the required values by removing the dust and drying up
humidity on the windings.

7.4 WINDING CLEANING

For satisfactory operation and longer useful life of insulated
windings, it is recommended to keep them free of dirt, oil,
metallic dust, contaminants, etc.
Therefore, the windings must be routinely inspected and
cleaned, and must operate with clean air. If re-
impregnation is required, please contact WEG.
The windings may be cleaned with an industrial vacuum
cleaner equipped with a narrow, non-metallic tip or simply
with a dry cloth.
For extremely dirty conditions, an adequate liquid solvent
may be required for cleaning. This procedure must be
quick to prevent prolonged exposure of the windings to
solvent effects.
After being cleaned with solvents, the windings must be
completely dried.
Measure insulation resistance and polarization index to
ensure the windings are completely dry.
Winding drying time after cleaning varies depending on
weather conditions such as temperature, humidity, etc.

DANGER
Most solvents used are highly toxic,
flammable or both.
Solvents must not be applied to the flat parts
of high voltage motor coils, as it may affect
their protection against the corona effect.

Inspections
The following inspections must be performed after the
windings are carefully cleaned:
Check the connections and windings insulation.
Check if spacers, bindings, groove wedges, bandages
and supports are fixed correctly.
Check if there haven't been any ruptures; if there
aren't damaged welds, short-circuits between turns
and against the grounding on coils and connections. If
any irregularities are identified, immediately contact
WEG.
Ensure that all cables are properly connected and that
terminal fixation components are duly tightened. If
required, re-tighten them.

Re-impregnation
If any layer of resin on the windings is damaged during
cleaning or inspection, they must be corrected with
adequate material (in this event, please contact WEG).

Insulation Resistance
Insulation resistance must be measured after all
maintenance procedures have been performed.

www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 36

ATTENTION
Before re-powering the motor, if it has not
been operated for a long period, measuring
the stator windings insulation resistance
and ensure that values measured are within
the specified values.

7.5 COOLING SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE

Air-air heat exchanger pipes (if any) must be kept clean
and unobstructed to ensure a perfect heat exchange.
To remove dirt from the pipes, a round brush may be
used attached to the tip of a rod.
For air-water heat exchangers, a periodical cleaning
process is required for radiator pipelines in order to
completely remove any fouling.

NOTE
If the motor is equipped with filters on the air
inlets and outlets, these must be cleaned with
compressed air.
If the dust is hard to remove, wash the filters
with cold water and neutral detergent and
then dry them in a horizontal position.

7.5.1 Radiator maintenance

If clean water is used, the radiator may operate
continuously for several years with no need for cleaning. If
unclean water is used, the radiator must be cleaned every
12 months.
The amount of dirt in the radiator may be detected when
the outlet air temperature increases. When the cold air
temperature, in similar operating conditions rises above
the acceptable values, this may be an indication that pipes
are dirty.
If corrosion is detected, an appropriate corrosion
protection must be applied (such as, zinc anodes, plastic
cover, epoxy paint or other similar protection products) to
prevent further damage to the affected parts.
The outer coating of all radiator parts must be kept clean
and in good conditions.

Instructions for radiator removal and maintenance
Removal of the heat exchanger for maintenance must
follow the steps below:
1. Close all water inlet and outlet valves after shutting
down the ventilation;
2. Drain the water through drain plugs;
3. Unscrew the cylinder heads, keeping screws, nuts,
washers and gaskets in a safe location;
4. Carefully brush inside the pipes with nylon brushes to
remove residues. If during the cleaning process,
damage to radiator pipes is detected, they must be
repaired;
5. Re-attach the cylinder heads, replacing gaskets if
necessary.


7.6 ANTI-REVERSAL RATCHET
MAINTENANCE

The ratchet anti-reversal function must be inspected as
per the maintenance plan described in Table 15.1
(applicable).
Remove the motor upper cover and check for wearing
effects on pins and on the ratchet gear teeth. If excessive
wearing is detected, these parts must be replaced.

7.7 SHUTDOWN MOTOR

The following procedures must be adopted if the
motor is decommissioned for a long period of time:
Activate the space heaters in order to maintain the
temperature inside the motor slightly above ambient
temperature, thus avoiding humidity condensation and
a subsequent drop in the winding insulation resistance
and oxidation of metallic parts.
The radiators and all water tubing (if any) must be
drained in order to reduce corrosion and suspended
materials in cooling water.
Follow the remaining procedures described in the item
Prolonged Storage, provided in this manual.

Radiator storage after operation
When the radiator is decommissioned for a long period of
time, it must be drained and dried. The drying process
may be carried out with pre-heated compressed air.
During the Winter, if there is risk of freezing, the radiator
must be drained, even if it is not operating for a short
period of time, in order to avoid damages or deformations.

NOTE
During short shutdown periods, it is preferable
to maintain the water flow in low speed than
to interrupt its flow through the heat
exchanger without draining it, thus ensuring
that harmful products such as ammonium
compounds and hydrogen sulfide are carried
outside the radiator and do not remain in its
interior.

7.8 SHAFT GROUNDING DEVICE

In some induction Motors, especially when it is necessary
to use a frequency inverter to control the speed, a brush is
used for shaft grounding. Such device avoids the electric
current to flow through the bearings, which is extremely
harmful to its operation. The brush is placed in contact
with the shaft and connected by a cable to the motor
frame, which must be grounded. Ensure that the brush
holder fixation and connection to the frame are performed
correctly.










Figure 7.1: Shaft grounding brush

Shaft
www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 37
In order to avoid damage to the motors shafts during
transportation, they are protected with synthetic oil. In
order to ensure a perfect grounding brush operation, this
oil, as well as any residue between the shaft and the
brush, must be removed before the motor is operated.
The brush must be constantly monitored during its
operation and, when it reaches the end of its useful life, it
must be replaced by another brush with the same quality
(granulation).

7.9 BEARING MAINTENANCE

7.9.1 Grease-lubricated rolling bearings

Figure 7.2: Grease lubricated rolling bearing

7.9.1.1 Lubrication instructions

The lubrication system was designed so that, during the
bearing re-lubrication process, all old grease is removed
from the ball races and expelled through a drain that
allows grease drainage, but keeps dust or other harmful
contaminants from getting inside the bearing. This drain
also avoids rolling bearing damage by the well-known
excessive re-lubrication problem. It is recommended to
perform the lubrication process while the motor is running,
in order to ensure grease renewal in the rolling bearing
lodging. If that is not possible due to the presence of
turning pieces near the grease gun (pulleys, etc.) that may
risk the operators physical integrity, proceed as follows:
With the motor shutdown, inject approximately half of
the total grease quantity to be used and operate the
motor for approximately 1 minute in full rotation speed;
shutdown the motor and inject the remaining grease.
The injection of the entire amount of grease in an idle
motor may cause part of the lubricant to penetrate into
the inner part of the motor through the internal sealing
of the bearing cover.


ATTENTION
It is important to clean the grease fittings
before the lubrication process in order to
avoid foreign materials from being dragged
inside the rolling bearing.
For lubrication, use only a hand-held grease
gun.

NOTE
Rolling bearing data, type and amount of
grease and lubrication intervals are informed in
the nameplate fixed to the motor. Check this
information before initiating the lubrication
process.

The lubrication intervals informed on the nameplate
consider a rolling bearing operating temperature of
70C.
Based on the operating temperature rates listed
below, apply the following correction factors to the
rolling bearing lubrication intervals:
Operating temperature over 60C: 1.59.
Operating temperature from 70C to 80C: 0.63.
Operating temperature from 80C to 90C: 0.40.
Operating temperature from 90C to 100C: 0.25
Operating temperature from 100C to 110C: 0.16.

7.9.1.2 Lubrication of bearings with spring
device for grease removal

In order to perform bearing re-lubrication, old grease
removal is carried out by the grease removal spring device
installed in each bearing.

Lubrication procedures:
1. Before initiating the bearing lubrication process, clean
the grease fitting with a cotton cloth;
2. Remove the spring rod to remove the old grease,
clean the spring and place it back;
3. While the motor is operating, inject the amount of
grease specified in the rolling bearings nameplate with
a hand-held grease gun;
4. The grease excess comes out through the lower
drain and precipitates on the spring;
5. Maintain the motor under operation for as long as
necessary for all of the grease excess to be drained;
6. Such grease must be removed by pulling the spring
small rod and cleaning the spring. This procedure
must be repeated as many times as necessary for the
spring not to retain any grease;
7. Inspect the bearing temperature to ensure that there
was no significant alteration.

7.9.1.3 Grease type and quantify

Bearing re-lubrication must always be done with the
original grease, specified on the bearing nameplate and in
the motor documentation.

ATTENTION
WEG does not recommend the use of
different types of greases, other than the
motor original grease type.

















Grease inlet
Grease outlet
www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 38
7.9.1.4 Alternative grease

If it is not possible to use the original grease, the
alternative grease types listed on Table 7.3 may be used
as long as the following conditions are respected:
1. It is necessary to check if the motor rotation does not
exceed the limit established for each type of bearing
grease, according to Table 7.4;
2. The bearing lubrication intervals must be corrected by
multiplying the interval informed on the bearing
nameplate by the multiplication factor informed on
Table 7.3;
3. Follow the correct procedure for grease exchange
according to the Grease Exchange Procedure
provided in this manual.

Table 7.1: Alternative grease options and characteristics for
normal application

Manufacturer Grease
Constant
work
temperature
(C)
Multiplication
Factor
Exxon Mobil
UNIREX N3
(Lithium Complex
Soap)
(-30 to +150) 0.90
Shell
ALVANIA RL3
(Lithium Soap)
(-30 to +120) 0.85
Petrobras
LUBRAX
INDUSTRIAL
GMA-2
(Lithium Soap)
(0 to +130) 0.85
Shell
STAMINA RL2
(Diurea Soap)
(-20 to +180) 0.94
SKF
LGHP 2
(Poliurea Soap)
(-40 to +150) 0.94

Table 7.2 displays the most used types of bearing in horizontal Motors, the amount of grease and the rotation limits of
optional grease use.

Table 7.2: Grease application

Grease rotation limits [RPM]
Bearing
Grease
amount (g)
Shell STAMINA
RL2
SKF LGHP 2 Esso UNIREX N3
Shell ALVANIA
RL3
Petrobras
LUBRAX Industrial
GMA-2
6215 15 3600 3600 3600 3000 3000
6217 20 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800
6220 30 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800
6222 40 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800
6224 45 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800
6228 55 1800 1800 1800 1800 1500
6232 70 1800 1800 1800 1500 1200
6236 85 1800 1800 1500 1500 1200
6240 105 1800 1800 1200 1200 1000
6048 100 1500 1500 1200 1200 1000
6052 130 1500 1500 1200 1000 900
6064 290 1200 1200 1000 900 750
7216 20 3600 3600 3600 3000 1800
7218 25 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800
7222 40 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800
7224 45 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800
7228 55 1800 1800 1800 1800 1500
7322 60 1800 1800 1800 1800 1500
7324 70 1800 1800 1800 1800 1500
7326 80 1800 1800 1800 1500 1200
7328 95 1800 1800 1800 1500 1200
7330 105 1800 1800 1500 1500 1200
7332 115 1800 1800 1500 1200 1200
7332 DT 230 1800 1800 1500 1200 1200
7334 DT 260 1800 1800 1500 1200 1000
7338 DT 310 1500 1500 1200 1200 1000
www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 39
7.9.1.5 Grease changing procedure

In order to change the POLYREX EM103 grease for one
of the alternative grease types, the bearings must be
open to remove the old grease and to fill it up with the
new grease. If it is not possible to open the bearing, all of
the old grease must be purged, applying the new grease
until it starts to show in the outlet drawer while the motor
is operating.
To change the STABURAGS N12MF grease for one of
the alternative grease types, it is necessary to open the
bearings and completely remove the old grease, and then
add the new grease.


ATTENTION
Since there is no compatible grease with
STABURAGS N12MF, no other greases must
be applied in an attempt to purge it. It is not
possible to expel all of the old grease through
this procedure, at the risk of mixing the old
types of grease, which may damage the
bearings.

7.9.1.6 Low temperature grease

Table 7.3: Grease for low-temperature applications

Manufacturer Grease
Constant work
temperature
(C)
Application
Exxon Mobil
MOBILITH SHC
100
(Lithium
Complex Soap
and synthetic oil)
(-50 to +150)
Low
temperature

NOTE
Before using alternative grease types for low-
temperature applications, other than
MOBILITH SHC 100, please contact WEG.


ATTENTION
1. When the bearing is open, inject the new
grease through the grease fitting in order to
expel the old grease found in the grease
inlet tube and apply the new one on the
bearing, onto the inner outer fixing rings,
filling of the empty spaces. In the case of
double bearings (Ball bearing+ rolling
bearing), fill up 3/4 of the empty spaces
between the intermediate rings.
2. Never clean bearing with cotton based
cloths, as they may release lint, serving as a
solid particle.
3. It is important to make a correct lubrication,
i.e. to apply the proper amount of grease,
because an deficient lubrication, as well as
an excessive lubrication have harmful
effects on the bearing.
4. Excessive lubrication leads to the increase
of temperature, due to the great resistance
it offers to the rotational parts and, mainly,
due to grease beating, which leads to a
complete loss of its lubrication features.

NOTE
WEG is not responsible for grease exchange
or any eventual damages deriving from grease
exchange.


ATTENTION
Grease with different basic components must
never be mixed. Example: Lithium-based
grease must never be mixed with other
sodium or calcium based greases.


7.9.1.7 Grease compatibility

Compatibility between several types of grease may
eventually present an issue. One may say that different
types of grease are compatible when the properties of
the mix are within individual grease property categories.
Generally, greases with the same type of soap are
compatible; however, depending on the proportion of the
mix, there may be incompatibility. Therefore, mixing
different types of grease is not recommended without
previously contacting the grease supplier or WEG.
Some thickening agents and basic oils cannot be mixed
since they do not form a homogeneous mixture. In this
case, a tendency to hardening, or, otherwise, grease
softening, or a fall in the resulting mix melting point
cannot be ignored.
































www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 40
7.9.1.8 Bearing assembly / disassembly

Figure 7.3: Lower bearing Figure 7.4: Upper bearing


1. Temperature sensor
2. Grease fitting
3. Grease collection tray
4. Screw
5. Protection disc
6. Taconite seal
7. Screw
8. Outer fixing ring
9. Screw
10. Grease flinger
11. Lower cover
12. Bearing
13. Spring
14. Internal bearing cap






Before disassembling the bearings:
Remove the grease inlet and outlet extension tubes;
Thoroughly clean the bearing outer surface;
Remove the grounding brush (if applicable);
Remove the temperature sensors.

Lower bearing disassembly
Be particularly careful not to cause any damage to the
balls, rollers and surfaces of the bearing and shaft.
For bearing disassembly, carefully follow the instructions
below, keeping all parts in a safe and clean location:
1. Place the motor in a horizontal position;
2. Remove the screws (4), protection disc (5) and
taconite seal (6);
3. Remove the screws (7) from the bearing outer and
internal bearing caps (8 and 14);
4. Remove the outer fixing ring(8);
5. Remove the screw (9) securing the grease flinger
(10);
6. Remove the grease flinger (10);
7. Remove the lower cover (11);
8. Remove the bearing (12);
9. Remove the internal bearing cap(14), if applicable.
1. Grease fitting
2. Grease inlet tube
3. Temperature sensor
4. Grease collection tray
5. Grease outlet tube
6. Screw
7. Outer fixing ring
8. Spring
9. KMT nut
10. Spacer ring
11. Screw
12. Screw
13. Bearing hub
14. Upper cover
15. Bearing
16. Intermediate ring
17. Grease flinger
18. Guide ring
19. Internal bearing cap


Upper bearing disassembly
Be particularly careful not to cause any damage to the
balls, rollers and surfaces of the bearing and shaft.
For bearing disassembly, carefully follow the instructions
below, keeping all parts in a safe and clean location:
1. Use a hydraulic jack to support the motor shaft;
2. Remove the screws (6) from the bearing outer fixing
ring (7);
3. Remove the outer fixing ring (7);
4. Remove the KMT nut (9);
5. Remove the screws (11 and 12) and remove the
bearing hub;
6. Remove the upper cover (14);
7. Move the intermediate ring and the internal bearing
cap away from the bearing, in order to have enough
room for the bearing puller device;
8. Remove the bearing (15);
9. Remove the grease flinger (17), as well as the
intermediate ring and the internal bearing cap, if
applicable.







www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 41
Assembly
Thoroughly clean the bearings and inspect
disassembled parts, as well as the fixing rings interior;
Ensure that the bearing surfaces, shaft and fixing rings
are perfectly smooth;
Fill of the inner and outer fixing ring reservoirs with the
recommended grease (Figure 7.5) and lubricate the
bearing with sufficient grease before assembling it;
Before assembling the bearing onto the shaft, heat it up
to between 50C and 100C;
For a complete bearing assembly, follow the
disassembly instructions in the opposite order.












Figure 7.5: Bearing outer fixing ring

Bearing replacement
The appropriate tool (bearing puller) must always be used
for bearing disassembly.
Puller clips must always be applied to the side surface of
the inner ring being disassembled or to an adjacent part.

Figure 7.6: Bearing puller device

7.9.2 Oil-lubricated rolling bearings


Figure 7.7: Oil-lubricated rolling bearing


ATTENTION
The breather hose (6) cannot be bent, since
it may accumulate oil.





7.9.2.1 Lubrication instructions

Oil removal: To replace the oil in the bearing, remove the
oil outlet cover (3) and completely drain the oil

Oil inlet in the bearing:
Close oil outlet with the cover (3);
Remove the oil inlet cover or filter (1);
Pour the specified oil up to the level indicated in the oil
sight glass

NOTES
1. All threaded holes must be sealed with
plugs and there may be no leaks in any
of the connections;
2. The oil level is reached when the
lubricant fills up to about half of the level
sight glass;
3. Using a larger volume of oil does not
damage the bearing, but it may cause
leaks through the shaft seals;
4. Hydraulic oil may never be used or mixed
with bearing lubricating oil.

7.9.2.2 Oil types

Lubricating oil type and volume to be used are specified
in the nameplate attached to the motor.

7.9.2.3 Oil change

Bearing oil change must be carried out in accordance with
the following table, always considering the bearing
operating temperature:


Below 75C = 20,000 hours
Between 75 and 80C = 16,000 hours
Between 80 and 85C = 12,000 hours
Between 85 and 90C = 8,000 hours
Between 90 and 95C = 6,000 hours
Between 95 and 100C = 4,000 hours

The bearings useful life depends on their operating
conditions, on the motor operating conditions and
maintenance procedures.
The following recommendations must be observed:
The viscosity of the oil selected must be appropriate
regarding the bearing temperature. The type of oil
recommended by WEG takes these criteria into
account;
Insufficient oil may damage the bearing;
The minimum oil level recommended is reached when
the lubricant can be seen on the lower portion of the oil
level sight glass, while the motor is not operating.

ATTENTION
Oil levels must be checked daily and must
remain up to the middle of the oil level sight
glass.


1. Oil inlet
2. Oil level display
3. Oil outlet
4. Temperature sensor
5. Cooling water inlet and outlet
(optional use)
6. Breather hose
4
1
6
2
3
5
www.weg.net



l M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical 42
7.9.2.4 Bearing operation

The system start-up, as well as the first hours of
operation, must be closely monitored.
Before the system start-up, verify:
If the oil being used complies with the specifications on
the nameplate;
Lubricant specifications;
Oil levels;
If the alarm and shutdown temperatures are set for the
bearing.
During the first system start-up, it is important to inspect
for occasional vibrations or noises. If the bearing is not
running silently and smoothly, the motor must be
immediately shutdown.
The motor must operate for several hours until the bearing
temperature stabilizes within the previously stated limits. If
the temperature rises above recommended limits, the
motor must be shutdown and the bearings and sensors
must be inspected.
Once the bearing operating temperature is reached, check
if there are no oil leaks through plugs, gaskets or at the
shaft end.


www.weg.net



M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical | 43
7.9.2.5 Bearing assembly and disassembly



Figure 7.8: Upper bearing Figure 7.9: Upper bearing

10- Oil storage
20- Bearing hub
30- Oil flinger
60- Oil tray
80- Seal fixing ring
90- Inner hex screw
100- Teflon seal
110- Rubber profile
120- Bearing
130- Upper intermediate ring
140- Fixating nut
150- Inner hex screw
200- Lower intermediate ring
210- Inner hex screw
270- Shaft
280- Inner hex screw

Before upper bearing disassembly:
Use a hydraulic jack to support the rotor at the shaft
end;
Completely drain all oil from bearing;
Thoroughly clean the bearing outer surface;
Remove the temperature sensors.

Upper bearing disassembly
For bearing disassembly, carefully follow the instructions
below, keeping all parts in a safe and clean location:
Remove the bearing upper cover;
Remove the KMT nut (140);
Remove the intermediate ring (130);
Remove the screws (150) securing the bearing hub;
Remove the bearing (120);
Place the upper intermediate ring (130) back, directly
attaching it to the lower intermediate ring (200) and,
using a bearing puller, remove the upper ring (130), the
lower ring (200) and the bearing (120) set.
10- Oil storage
20- Oil flinger
30- Oil guide
40- Bearing hub
50- Bearing
60- Inner hex screw
70- Oil inlet hub
80- Seal fixing ring
100- Inner hex screw
110- Rubber profile
130- Inner hex screw
180- Segmented ring
190- Teflon seal
200- Seal fixing ring
210- Oil guide
250- Taconite seal

Before Lower Bearing Disassembly:
Completely drain all oil from the bearing;
Place motor in a horizontal position;
Thoroughly clean the bearing outer surface;
Remove the grounding brush (if applicable);
Remove the temperature sensors.

Lower Bearing Disassembly
For bearing disassembly, carefully follow the instructions
below, keeping all parts in a safe and clean location:
Remove the screws securing the Taconite seal (250);
Remove the Taconite seal (250);
Remove the oil reservoir (10);
Remove the segmented ring (180);
Remove the oil flinger (20);
Remove the bearing hub (40);
Remove the bearing (50).


www.weg.net



44 I M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical
7.9.3 Sleeve bearings

7.9.3.1 Bearing data

Characteristic information such as oil type, volume and
flow, are described in the bearings' nameplate and must
be strictly followed to prevent bearing overheating and
damage.
The users are responsible for the hydraulic installation (for
forced lubrication bearings) and oil feed for motor
bearings.

7.9.3.2 Bearing installation and operation

For information on components, assembly and
disassembly instructions and maintenance information
please check the specific bearing installation and
operation manual.

7.9.3.3 Water flow cooling

Sleeve bearings with water flow cooling have a coil inside
the reservoir through which water flows.
To ensure efficient bearing cooling, the flowing water must
be at ambient temperature or lower.
Water pressure must be 0.1 Bar and the flow must be 0.7
l/s. The pH must be neutral.

NOTE
There must not be any water leaks inside the
oil reservoir under any circumstances, since
it may contaminate the lubricant.

7.9.3.4 Oil change

Self-lubricating bearings
Bearing oil change must be carried out according to the
table below, always considering the bearing operating
temperature:

Below 75C = 20,000 hours
Between 75 and 80C = 16,000 hours
Between 80 and 85C = 12,000 hours
Between 85 and 90C = 8,000 hours
Between 90 and 95C = 6,000 hours
Between 95 and 100C = 4,000 hours

Bearings with (external) oil circulation
Bearing oil change must take place every 20,000
operating hours or whenever lubricant characteristics
change. Oil viscosity and pH must be checked frequently.

NOTE
Oil levels must be checked daily and must
remain up to the middle of the oil level sight
glass.

Bearings must be lubricated with the specified oil,
always considering specifications in their nameplates.
All threaded holes must be sealed with plugs and there
may not be any leaks in any of the connections.
Oil levels are reached when the lubricant fills up to about
half of the level sight glass. Using a larger volume of oil
does not damage the bearing, but it may cause leaks
through the shaft seals.

ATTENTION
The bearing useful life, as well as motor
security, is determined by the lubrication
measures taken. Therefore, it is important to
comply with the following recommendations:
The chosen lubricating oil must have the
adequate viscosity regarding the bearing
operating temperature. This must be
checked when the oil is replaced or during
routine maintenance.
Never use or mix hydraulic oil with bearing
lubricating oil.
Insufficient lubricant, due to failure to fill up
the reservoir or to monitor oil levels, may
damage the bearing shells.
The minimum recommended oil level is
reached when the lubricant can be seen in
the lower portion of the oil level sight
glass, when the motor is not running.

7.9.3.5 Sealing

During bearing maintenance, when re-regulating bearings,
both halves of the sealing taconite seal must be joined by
a garter spring.
This spring must be placed in the ring case so that the
locking pin recess is fitted to the upper half of the frame.
Inaccurate installation may destroy the seal.
Before assembling the seals, carefully clean the ring
contact surfaces and case, and re-coat seals with a non-
hardening sealant. Drain holes are disposed in the lower
half of the ring and must be kept clean and free. When
installing this half of the sealing ring, gently press it against
the lower part of the shaft.

7.9.3.6 Sleeve bearing operation

Operating motors with sliding bearings is similar to
operating motors equipped with rolling bearings.
The system start-up, as well as the first hours of
operation, must be closely monitored.

Before the start-up, verify:
If the oil used complies with all specifications;
Lubricant specifications;
Oil levels;
If the alarm and shutdown temperatures are set for the
bearing.

During the first system start-up, it is important to inspect
for vibrations or noises. If the bearing is not running
silently and smoothly, the motor must be immediately
shutdown and all appropriate correction measures must
be employed.
The motor must operate for several hours until the bearing
temperature stabilizes within the previously stated limits. If
the temperature rises above the recommended limits, the
motor must be shutdown and the bearings and sensors
must be inspected.
www.weg.net


M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical l 45
Once the bearing operating temperature is reached, check
if there are no oil leaks through plugs, gaskets or shaft
ends.

7.9.3.7 Sleeve bearing maintenance

Sleeve bearing maintenance involves:
Routinely checking oil levels and lubricant
characteristics;
Checking the bearing noise and vibration levels;
Monitoring the operating temperature and tightening
fixating and assembly screws;
Keeping the frame clean, free from oil or dust
accumulation, to facilitate the heat exchanging process
with the environment;
The end bearing is electrically insulated. The round
surfaces, in which the bearing shell is fitted into the
frame, are covered with an insulating material. Never
remove this cover;
The anti-rotation pin is also insulated, and all seals are
made of non-conductive material.
Temperature control devices in contact with the bearing
shell must also be insulated.

7.9.3.8 Backstop bearing (upper)

The upper backstop bearing function is to support the
weight of the motor and the axial thrust for which the latter
was designed. Its main components are stationary axial
shoes and rotating pivots (see Figure 7.10).
Pivots are loaded through axial shoes.

Figure 7.10: Upper backstop bearing

1- Lower flange
2- Shoe base ring
2.1- Axial segment
2.5- Axial shoe
3- Bearing frame
4- Coil (optional)
4.1- Cooling water connections
5- Stand pipe
6- Runner
7- Bearing shell
8- Bearing cover
8.2- Vertical guide plate (skirt)
10- Seal box
10.2- Seal fixing ring
10.3- Floating seal

Before disassembling the bearing:
Use a hydraulic jack to support the rotor at the end of
the shaft;
Completely drain the oil from the bearing;
Thoroughly clean the bearing external surface;
Remove the temperature sensors.

Disassembly
Use a hydraulic jack to support the rotor at the end of
the shaft;
Remove the bolts securing the bearing upper cover and
remove the cover;
Disassemble the bearing, following its manufacturer's
instructions manual.

Assembly
For bearing assembly, follow the disassembly procedure in
reverse order.

7.9.3.9 Guide bearing (lower)

The lower guide bearing function is to provide the radial
location of the motor shaft with no effort or limitation to
axial displacement.


Figure 7.11: Lower guide bearing

3- Bearing frame
4- Coil
4.1- Cooling water connections
5- Stand pipe
5.3- Support tube seal
6- Runner
7- Bearing shell
7.1- Thermoresistor (optional)
8- Cover
8.2- Radial segment
22- Double seal

Before disassembling the bearing:
Completely drain the oil in the bearing;
Thoroughly clean the bearing external surface;
Remove the temperature sensors;
Remove the grounding brush (if applicable);
Detach the motor and place it in a horizontal position.

Disassembly
Remove the bolts securing the cover of the lower
bearing and remove its cover;
Disassemble the bearing, following its manufacturer's
instruction manual.

Assembly
For bearing assembly, follow the disassembly procedure in
reverse order.
www.weg.net



46 I M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical

7.9.4 Bearing protection

7.9.4.1 Protection settings


ATTENTION
The following temperatures must be set in
the bearing protection system:
Alarm 110C Shutdown 120C
The alarm temperature must be set to 10C
above the working temperature, and must
never be higher than 110C.

7.9.4.2 Bearing temperature sensor
disassembly/assembly

Figure 7.12: Pt100 on the bearings

Disassembly instructions:
If the Pt100 must be removed for bearing maintenance,
follow the procedures below:
Carefully remove the Pt100, locking the locknut (3) and
unscrewing only the bulb fitting (4);
Parts (2) and (3) must not be disassembled.

Assembly instructions:
Before assembling the Pt100 in the bearing, check if it is
free of impact marks or any other damages which may
compromise a smooth operation.
Insert the Pt100 in the bearing;
Lock the locknut (3) with a key;
Screw the bulb (4), adjusting it so that the end of the
Pt100 touches the bearing outer surface.

NOTES
The Pt100 must be directly assembled
onto non-insulated bearings, not requiring
insulating adaptors (4).
The tightening torque for the Pt100 and
adaptor assembly must not exceed 10Nm.













































































Pt-100
Pt-100
Non-
Insulated
Bearing
Insulated
Bearing
Conduit
Conduit
www.weg.net


M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical l 47
8 MAINTENACE PLAN

The maintenance plan detailed in Table 8.1 is only referential, and the intervals between each maintenance intervention may
vary according to the motor location and operation conditions.

Table 8.1: Maintenance Plan

EQUIPMENT Weekly Monthly
3
Months
6
Months
Yearly
3
Years
observation
STATOR
Stator visual inspection . x
Cleaning control. x
Groove wedges inspection. x
Stator terminals control. x
Measure the winding insulation resistance. x
ROTOR
Cleaning control.
x

Visual inspection.
x

Shaft (wearing, incrustations) inspection.

x
BEARINGS
Noise, vibration, oil flow, leaking, and
temperature control.
x
Lubricant quality control. x
Inspection of bearing shells and shaft race.
(sliding bearing).
x
Lubricant change.
According to the period indicated
on the bearing nameplate.
AIR-WATER HEAT EXCHANGER
Radiator inspection x
Radiator cleaning x
Radiator sacrificial anodes (if any)
inspection
1

x
Sacrificial anodes are used in
radiators for use with seawater.
Radiator head gasket replacement. x
AIR-AIR HEAT EXCHANGER
Ventilation pipe cleaning. x
Ventilation inspection. x
AIR FILTER(S)
Inspection, cleaning and replacement, if
necessary.
x
PROTECTION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Operation test. x
Value recording. x
Disassembly and operation test. x
COUPLING
Alignment inspection. x
Fixation inspection. x
Anti-reversal ratchet inspection (if
applicable).
x
Check after the first week of
operation.
ENTIRE MOTOR
Noise and vibration inspection. x
Condensed water draining. x
Screw tightening. x
terminal box cleaning. x
Electrical and grounding connections
tightening.
x
1) In the event excessive oxidation of the sacrificial anode is ascertained, its inspection frequency must be increased in order to determine
the time of oxidation and to create a plan for a replacement schedule.

www.weg.net



48 I M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical
9 ABNORMALITIES, CAUSES AND SOLUTIONS

9.1 MOTORS

NOTE
The instructions in Table 9.1 merely present a basic list of abnormalities, causes and corrective measures. In
case of doubts, please contact WEG.

Table 9.1: Basic list of abnormalities, causes and corrective measures.


ABNORMALITY POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE MEASURE
At least two power cables are interrupted,
with no voltage.
Check the control panel, power supply
cables, terminals and brush seating.
Locked rotor. Unlock the rotor;
Motor does not start, coupled
or uncoupled.
Damaged bearing. Replace the bearing.
Load torque is too high during start-up.
Do not apply load to the driven machine
during start-up.
Power supply voltage is too low.
Measure the power supply voltage and
adjust the value correctly.
Large voltage drop in the power cables.
Check the installation dimensioning
(transformer, cable section, check
relays, circuit breakers, etc.).
Rotor with defective or interrupted bars. Check and fix the rotor winding.
The motor starts at no-load,
but fails when load is applied. It
starts very slowly and does not
reach the rated rotation.
One power cable was interrupted after the
start-up.
Check the power cables.
After applying a load, the stator
current varies with twice as
much as the build-up
frequency. The motor hums
during start-up
The rotor winding is interrupted.

Check and fix the rotor winding.

The motor starts at no-load, but
fails when load is applied. It
starts very slowly and does not
reach the rated rotation.
Load torque is too high during start-up.
Do not apply load to the driven machine
during start-up.
Very high no-load current. Power supply voltage is too high.
Measure the power supply and adjust
the value correctly.
Short circuit between turns.
Interruption of stator winding phases or
parallel wires.
Rewind.
Localized hot spots on the
stator winding.
Poor connection. Remake the connection.
Localized hot spots on the
rotor.
Rotor winding interruptions. Fix or replace the rotor windings.
Mechanical causes.
The noise normally reduces when the
motor speed decreases; see also:
"noisy operation when uncoupled".
Unusual noise during operation
with load.
Electrical causes.
The noise disappears when the motor is
shutdown. Contact WEG.
Defective transmission or driven machine
components.
Check the power transmission, coupling
and alignment.
Gear transmission defect. Align the drive.
Unaligned/unleveled base.
Realign/level the motor and the driven
machine.
Incorrect balancing of the driven machine
components.
Perform a new balancing process.
Defective coupling. Repair the coupling.
When coupled, the noise
appears. When uncoupled, the
noise disappears.
Wrong motor rotation direction. Invert the 2-phase connection.
www.weg.net


M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical l 49

ABNORMALITY POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE MEASURE
Insufficient cooling due to obstructed
air pipes.
Open and clean the air pipes.
Overloading
Measure the stator current and reduce
the load. Analyze the motor application.
High number of start-ups or very high
moment of inertia.
Reduce the number of start-ups.
Very high voltage with a subsequent
increase in iron losses .
Do not exceed the rated voltage by
110%, unless specifically stated on the
nameplate.
Very low voltage and very high current
Check the power supply voltage and the
motor voltage drop.
Interruption on a power cable or
winding phase.
Measure the current in all phases and
correct it, if necessary.
Rotor drags against the stator.
Check the air gap, operating conditions
(vibrations, etc.) and bearing conditions.
Operating conditions are not in
compliance with the data provided in
the nameplate.
Maintain the operating conditions
according to the nameplate or reduce
the load.
Unbalance in the power supply
voltage (burnt fuse, incorrect
command).
Check for voltage unbalancing or
operate with only two phases and
correct the issue.
Dirty windings.
Obstructed air ducts.
Clean.
Dirty air filters. Clean the filtering device.
The stator winding heats up when
operating under load.
Direction of rotation not compatible
with the fan being used.
Analyze the fan regarding the motor
direction of rotation.
Unbalance.
The noise continues during deceleration
after voltage is turned off;
Execute a new balancing process.
Interruption in one phase of the stator
winding.
Measure all connection cables currents.
Loose fixation screws. Tighten and lock the screws.
The balancing conditions of the rotor
get worse after the coupling is
mounted.
Balance the coupling.
Foundation resonance. Adjust the foundation.
Deformed motor frame Check the base flatness.
Bent shaft.
The shaft may have been bent;
Check rotor balancing and run-out.
Noisy operation when uncoupled.
Non-uniform air gap.
Check for shaft bending or bearing
wearing.


















www.weg.net



50 I M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical
9.2 BEARINGS

NOTE
The instructions in Table 9.2 merely present a basic list of issues related to bearings. In certain cases, a bearing
analysis from the manufacturer is required in order to ascertain the cause of the defect.

Table 9.2: Basic list of issues related to bearings

DEFECT POSSIBLE CAUSES DETERMINATION AND ELIMINATION
The motor rumbles during operation. Damaged bearings. Replace the bearings.
Moderate noises in the bearings, dull
points, formation of grooves on the
races.
Bearing mounted in a diagonal position.
Recover the shaft seating and replace the
bearing.
Clean and re-apply grease according to the
requirements. Bearing presents loud noises and
increased heating.
Cage corrosion, small chips in the
grease, formation of cracks in the races
due to the lack of grease, or any
inadequate clearance in the bearing. Replace the bearings.
Excessive grease.
Remove the grease drainage plug and run
the motor until the excess grease has been
removed.
Excessive axial or radial belt strain . Reduce the belt strain.
Sagged shaft/excessive vibration.
Correct the shaft and check the rotor
balancing. Check the cause of the vibration
and correct it.
Lack of grease. Add grease to the bearings.
Hardened grease causing the ball
bearings to lock up.
Replace the bearings.
Bearings heating up.
Foreign bodies in the grease. Wash and lubricate the bearings.
Dark stains on one side of the ball race. Excessive axial strain. Examine driving and coupling connections.
Clean and replace the bearing insulation.
Apply insulation, if applicable.
Dark lines close together or transversal
grooves in the races;
Punctiform markings in the case of ball
bearings.
Current flow through bearings.
Redirect the current to prevent it from
passing through the bearing.
External vibrations, especially when the
motor has not been decommissioned for
long periods of time.
Grooves in the races.
Dent in the division of cylindrical
elements.
Lack of maintenance during storage.
Occasionally rotate the rotor to another
position, especially on spare motors.


ATTENTION
The motors described in this manual are constantly being improved; therefore, the information provided herein is
subject to modification without prior notice.

www.weg.net


M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical l 51
10 WARRANTY

These products, when operated under the conditions stipulated by WEG in the operating manual for such
product, are warranted against defects in workmanship and materials for twelve (12) months from start-up date
or eighteen (18) months from manufacturer shipment date, whichever occurs first.
However, this warranty does not apply to any product which has been subject to misuse, misapplication,
neglect (including without limitation, inadequate maintenance, accident, improper installation, modification,
adjustment, repair or any other cases originated from inadequate applications).
The company will neither be responsible for any expenses incurred in installation, removal from service,
consequential expenses such as financial losses nor transportation costs as well as tickets and accommodation
expenses of a technician when this is requested by the customer.
The repair and/or replacement of parts or components, when effected by WEG within the Warranty period do
not give Warranty extension, unless otherwise expressed in writing by WEG.
This constitutes WEG's only warranty in connection with this sale and is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed
or implied, written or oral.
There are no implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose that apply to this sale.
No employee, agent, dealer, repair shop or other person is authorized to give any warranties on behalf of WEG
nor to assume for WEG any other liability in connection with any of its products.
In case this happens without WEG's authorization, Warranty is automatically cancelled.


LIABILITY

Except as specified in the foregoing paragraph entitled "Warranty Terms for Engineering Products", the
company shall have no obligation or liability whatsoever to the purchaser, including, without limitation, any
claims for consequential damages or labor costs, by reason of any breach of the express warranty described
therein.
The purchaser further hereby agrees to indemnify and hold the company harmless from any causes of action
(other than cost of replacing or repairing the defective product as specified in the foregoing paragraph entitled
"Warranty Terms for Engineering Products"), arising directly or indirectly from the acts, omissions or negligence
of the purchaser in connection with or arising out of the testing, use, operation, replacement or repair of any
product described in this quotation and sold or furnished by the company to the purchaser.















WEG Equipamentos Eltricos S.A.
International Division
Av. Prefeito Waldemar Grubba, 3000
89256-900 - Jaragu do Sul - SC - Brazil
Phone: 55 (47) 3276-4002
Fax: 55 (47) 3276-4060
www.weg.net


1013.03/0709

www.weg.net



52 I M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical
NOTES










































www.weg.net


M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical l 53











































www.weg.net



54 I M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical











































www.weg.net


M line three-phase induction motors Squirrel cage rotor Vertical l 55



































































WEG Equipamentos Eltricos S.A.
Internation Division
AV. Prefeito Waldemar Grubba, 3000
89256-900 - Jaragu do Sul - SC - Brasil
Phone: 55 (47) 3276-4002
Fax: 55(47) 3276-4060
www.weg.net

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi